microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 36(1-2) pp. 155-157 (2008) properties of polyamide 6 fibres modified by silicate nanoparticles i. vass , m. krištofič, j. ryba slovak university of technology, faculty of chemical and food technology, institute of polymer materials department of fibres and textile chemistry, radlinského 9, 812 37 bratislava, slovak republic e-mail: iveta.vassova@stuba.sk the first part of contribution is focused to the synthesis of ternary copolyamides containing layered silicate (i.e. bentonite 11958 or cloisite 15a). concentrates were prepared from the basic comonomer, ε-caprolactam and minor polar comonomers, nylon salt an 2 from adipic acid and 1-(2-aminoethyl)piperazine and nylon salt adeta from adipic acid and diethylenetriamine in the total amount of 10.7 and 21.4 wt.%. amount of layered silicates in the concentrates is always the same, 5 wt.%. reaction scheme of synthesis of copolyamide (ch2)5 nh co n n ch2 ch2 nh o n nh+ n hooc(ch2)4coo. +nh3(ch2)2nh(ch2)2nh2 + o hooc(ch2)4coo. + h [hn(ch2)2nh(ch2)2nhco(ch2)4co]n coo(ch2)4co [nh(ch2)5co]m oh + (2n-1) h2o nh3 ch2 ch2 the second part of contribution deals with the preparation of polyamide 6 (pa 6) fibres non-modified and modified by concentrates and determination of some properties (i.e. mechanical, sorptive, barrier and thermal properties) of modified fibres, too. keywords: polyamide 6, layered silicate, concentrates, properties introduction polyamide fibres have many useful properties, but some of them such as electrostatic and sorptive ones do not meet the requirements of customers. chemical and physical modifications are the basic methods for an improvement of these properties. chemical modification is application of comonomers at the preparation of copolyamides. addition of concentrates, i.e. copolyamides containing layered silicate into pa 6 is a physical modification of pa 6. introduction of the new comonomer, with some polar atoms or groups into the backbone of poly-εcaprolactam is the possibility to prepare copolyamides which can be used as modifiers for pa 6 as well. many polyamides and polyamide fibres containing the derivatives of piperazine or piperidine are characterized by higher sorption of water vapour than pa 6 [1-3]. binary copolyamides based on ε-caprolactam and a nylon salt of adipic acid and 1-(2-aminoethyl)piperazine or 1,4-bis-(3-aminopropyl)piperazine are crystalline copolymers with good compatibility with pa 6 [4]. pa 6 fibres modified with binary copolyamides have better electrostatic and sorptive properties [5]. concentrates such as binary or ternary copolyamides based on poly-ε-caprolactam containing polar comonomers from adipic acid + 1-(2-aminoethyl)piperazine (an 2), adipic acid + diethylenetriamine (adeta) and organoclay would be effective modifiers for pa 6. materials polyamide 6, pa 6, nylstar slovakia, slovak republic, ηrel = 2.642 in hcooh, ηrel = 1.68 in h2so4, 96%, 25 °c, at the concentration c = 0.5 g of polymer / 100 ml solution, tm = 227 °c ε-caprolactam, cl, nylstar slovakia, slovak republic nylon salt an 2, an2, sut, department of fibres and textile chemistry, slovak republic, it is prepared from adipic acid, a + 1-(2-aminoethyl)piperazine, n 2 nylon salt adeta, adeta, sut, department of fibres and textile chemistry, slovak republic, it is prepared from adipic acid, a + diethylenetriamine, deta layered silicate – organophilic montmorillonite, mmt: bentonite 11958, ben, aldrich, usa, it contains sodium and quartery ammonium ions between layers 156 cloisite 15a, clo, gonzales, usa, it is mmt modified with quartery ammonium salt, i.e. ditallowdimethylammonium salt of bentonite preparation of modifiers concentrates of ε-caprolactam, nylon salts an 2 and adeta and layered silicate were prepared by the poly (addition-condensation) reaction proceeding in melt in the n2 atmosphere. the powdered cl, an 2, adeta mixture with mmt was heated in the glass apparatus. during the first 10 minutes the temperature was raised so that the nylon salts melted and homogenized in the cl. later the polyreaction started – reaction water evaporated and condensed and the viscosity of the melt increased with time to the temperature of 270-280 °c at the end of the reaction time. the concentrates were poured into the cylindrical form onto the metallic plate and cut into granules. concentrates were designed by the symbols a, b and c according to different concentration of the nylon salts. their composition and main characteristics are: a – 73.6% kl + 10.7% adeta + 10.7% an 2 + 5.0% mmt b – 84.3% kl + 10.7% an 2 + 5.0% mmt c – 73.6% kl + 10.7% adeta + 10.7% an 2 + 5.0% clo 15a preparation of modified pa 6 fibres modifiers were extracted in hot water to remove lowmolecular compounds and dried. the blends of pa 6 containing 5, 10 and 20 wt.% of concentrate a, b and c were prepared in a single-screw ribbon extruder at the temperature of zones t1 = t2 = = t3 = 250 °c. the spinning of blends was performed on the experimental equipment at the temperature of zones t1 = 260 °c, t2-4 = 255 °c and t5 = 260 °c with lubricant. after spinning the fibres were drawn at the temperature 110 °c to the drawing ratio λ = 3 and 3.5. methods used for the evaluation of the fibres properties the mechanical properties, i.e. tensile strength of pa 6 fibres were measured by instron 3343. the hydrophilicity of fibres was evaluated gravimetrically at the temperature t8 = 21.7 °c and at the 65% relative humidity. the barrier properties, i.e. ultraviolet protection factor of fibres (λ = 3) were measured by spectrophotometer with deuterium lamp, libra s12. the thermal properties of these fibres (λ = 3) were measured by perkin-elmer dsc 7 equipment. the conditions of measurement were: heating 50 °c → 250 °c cooling 250 °c → 50 °c with heating and cooling rate 10 °c/min in n2 atmosphere. results and discussion amount of low molecular compounds of concentrates (table 1) are at the same level as for pa 6. relative viscosity and melting temperature of concentrates (table 1) decrease with amount of comonomers, but these are lower than in the case of pa 6. tensile strength of fibres (table 2) increases with drawing ratio, but it decreases with the amount of concentrates in fibres. modified fibres have smaller tenacity than pa 6 fibre. fibres modified by concentrate c have the best tensile strength in comparison with other modified fibres, particularly when the amount of concentrate in fibres is lower, i.e. 5 and 10 wt.% and at the drawing ratio 3.5. values of water vapour sorption (table 2) increases with amount of concentrates in fibres and it decreases in dependence on higher drawing ratio due to higher orientation in fibres. fibres modified by concentrates a and c have better sorptive properties than fibres modified by concentrate b, because they contain higher amount of polar, hydrophilic comonomers, which improve hydrophility of fibres, because they are able to fix molecules of water vapour. if upf value is higher, then less ultraviolet radiation is transmitted through material. upf of modified fibres (table 2) depends on type of used layered silicate (bentonite or cloisite 15a). upf is better in the case of fibres modified by concentrate c, which contains cloisite 15a. melting temperatures of modified pa 6 fibres (table 3) are lower in comparison with non-modified pa 6 fibre, but their crystallization temperatures (table 3) are similar. melting entalphies and enthalphies of crystallization of modified pa 6 fibres (table 3), mainly with lower amount of concentrates a, b and c, i.e. 5 and 10 wt.% are higher or practically the same as for non-modified pa 6 fibre. table 1: time of synthesis, t, amount of low molecular compounds, lmc, relative viscosity, ηrel and melting temperature, tm of pa 6 and concentrates conc t [min] lmc [wt.%] ηrel tm [°c] pa 6 ≈600 ≈12 1.68 227 a 340 10.1 1.42 187 b 360 9.6 1.48 198 c 360 15.1 1.39 189 157 table 2: tensile strength, σ, water vapour sorption, s and ultraviolet protection factor, upf of pa 6 fibres non-modified and modified with concentrates fibres σ [cn.dtex-1] s [%] upf λ 3 3,5 3 3,5 3 pa 6 4.04 4.38 4.96 4.87 10.5 5% a 3.46 4.15 5.18 5.15 10.5 10% a 3.45 3.87 5.39 5.21 8.5 20% a 2.81 3.38 5.84 5.44 9.9 5% b 3.71 4.32 5.13 4.84 10.9 10% b 3.39 4.24 5.17 5.13 9.4 20% b 3.23 3.77 5.42 5.19 9.6 5% c 3.64 4.49 5.34 5.06 10.9 10% c 3.39 4.43 5.51 5.23 12.4 20% c 2.98 3.93 5.82 5.54 11.7 table 3: thermal properties, i.e. melting and crystallization temperatures and entalphies of pa 6 fibres non-modified and modified with concentrates, λ = 3 heating cooling fibres tm1 [°c] σδhm1 [j/g] tc1 [°c] -δhc1 [j/g] pa 6 221 79.8 188 72.1 5% a 216 81.4 188 76.0 10% a 218 75.9 187 70.4 20% a 220 69.3 186 64.9 5% b 218 77.9 188 73.7 10% b 218 77.4 188 75.5 20% b 218 76.8 187 71.1 5% c 217 82.4 189 76.6 10% c 219 78.4 189 71.4 20% c 219 71.1 187 67.0 conclusions concentrates reduce a little bit the tensile strength of modified pa 6 fibres in comparison with non-modified ones because of lower orientation in these fibres. concentrates improve sorptive properties of modified pa 6 fibres due to their higher hydrophilicity. upf depends on the type of layered silicate used for modification of fibres, from which cloisite 15a proves to be more effective. melting temperatures of modified pa 6 fibres are lower in comparison with non-modified ones because of lower melting temperature of concentrates, but their crystallization temperatures are the same or similar. lower amount of concentrates in pa 6 fibres do not have a significant effect on thermal properties. acknowledgement support of the vega 1/4456/07 (grant fchpt 920) is appreciated. references 1. krištofič, m. et al.: modification of pa 6 fibers with alkaline copolyamides, chemical papers, vol. 54, no. 1 (2000), p. 53-58 2. jap. pat. 72 32755 3. kornmann, x.: synthesis and characterisation of thermoset-clay nanocomposites, division of polymer engineering, luleå university of technology, s – 971 87 luleå, sweden 4. zanetti et al.: macromol mater eng 1 (2000), p. 9 5. mark, f. et al.: concise encyclopedia of polymer science and engeenering, new york, chickester, brisbane, toronto, singapore, 1990 microsoft word contents.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 34. pp. 51-54 (2006) magnetic field analysis on electromagnetic water treatment device v. kozic1, j. krope2, l. c. lipus 3 and i. ticar4 1zdraviliško naselje 14, 9252 radenci, slovenia 2faculty of chemistry and chemical technology, 3faculty of mechanical engineering, 4faculty of electrical engineering and computer science, university of maribor, smetanova 17, 2000 maribor, slovenia a short review of magnetic water treatment devices is given. analysis of electromagnetic industrial units named em i – iv is presented. the distribution of magnetic flux density of the models was measured and analyzed by the computer program electromagnetic field analysis tools. results for em iv show that an improvement can be achieved by replacing a metallic tooth, used for placing the washer ring, with nonmagnetic material. keywords: magnetic water treatment, scale prevention, magnetism introduction scale deposits by natural waters often lead to numerous technical and economical problems in industrial plants and domestic equipment by blocking the water flow in pipes or limiting heat transfer in heat exchangers. traditional chemical methods for scale control are effective but significantly change the solution composition and are expensive. therefore, an interest for physical methods is rising. one of these methods is magnetic water treatment (mwt), where water flows through a magnetic field. in the literature, there is a number of reports about mwt being effective [1-4]. when the device is properly designed, hard scale is prevented by forming sludge or alternatively, linings with low mechanical strength, which can be easily removed. the mechanism how magnetic fields affect the crystallization of calcium carbonate, is still the matter of research. it is the most possible that treatment leads to the formation of calcium carbonate particles in the bulk of the scaling water, which cannot precipitate on the walls of distribution pipes and other equipment [5]. commercial mwt devices are available in various configurations from numerous manufacturers, some using electromagnets and others using single or arrays of permanent magnets with different orientations of the magnetic field [6]. the most effective arrangements are those with perpendicular or radial magnetic fields (fig. 1). furthermore, magnetic fields can be alternating (fig. 1/a, b) or homogeneous (fig. 1/c). alternating fields seem to be more effective [5,7]. some mwt units are electromagnets using electrical input with alternating current or direct current voltage. many interesting results of laboratory research were found when samples were exposed to static magnetic field [4,8], but better results are expected when water flows through the magnetic field [9,10]. for practical use, there is a general recommendation that water flows through the magnetic field with the velocity from 0.1 to 2 m/s and the magnetic flux density is more than 0.05 t. fig.1: some basic types of magnetic fields: (a) perpendicular (parallel arrangement of magnets) (b) radial (magnetic kernel in ferromagnetic tube) (c) homogeneous (horse-shoe magnets) in this article we describe electromagnetic units named em (shown in fig. 2 with basic data given in table 1). they have alternating current electrical input and are designed for different water flow rates (i-iv). 52 the housing is iron-casting electroplating with nickel. the inner plate is from steel. the electromagnetic winding is a solenoid with rectified alternating currents, which produce pulsating magnetic field. water enters in the center on the top of the device, overflows the inner plate in radial directions, passes the rubber ring down into the lower zone, flows to the center of the inner plate and leaves out of the device. bb1 a fig.2: electromagnetic device, model em (1 – housing, 2 – rubber ring, 3 – solenoid, 4 – inner plate) table 1: basic data for em electromagnetic devices dimensions (mm) type flow rate (l/min) power (w) a b b1 connection em i 10 – 25 40 168 54 40 no 20 (3/4) em ii 15 – 40 55 168 54 40 no 26 (1) em iii 25 – 60 75 220 76 51 no 32 (r 5/4) em iv 150 400 110 320 100 52 no 65 (r 2 1/2) measurements of the magnetic field in the device em i electromagnetic measurements and characteristic results of the model em i were made in the laboratories at faculty of electrical engineering and computer science and faculty of mechanical engineering, university of maribor. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 10 20 30 40 50 radius, r (mm) m ag ne tic fl ux d en si ty , b (m t) solenoid in the air solenoid in the housing fig.3: magnetic flux density of solenoid (a) in the air and (b) of the same solenoid in the housing with inner plate in em i device. radial distributions of the magnetic flux density b(r) are presented in fig. 3. the magnetic flux density was measured for solenoid (a) in the air and (b) with inner plate and housing together. because the value of b should be higher than 0.05 t for good efficiency of a magnetic device, em i model has good values of b from radius r1 = 30 mm to r2 = 45 mm. relative effective area ( ) ( )221 2 2 2 1 2 2 /1/ rrrrr −=− πππ is 56% of whole area of the inner plate. figure 4 shows the measurements for magnetization curve (magnetic flux density, b (t), versus magnetic field intensity, h (a/m)) of housing and inner plate for em i model. 0,00 0,25 0,50 0,75 1,00 1,25 1,50 1,75 2,00 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 magnetic field intensity, h (a/m) m ag ne tic fl ux d en si ty , b (t ) inner plate housing fig.4: magnetization curve of housing (grade 350) and inner plate (fe360b) for em i device. conditions of v and b for effective operating of mwt devices were checked. from measurement result of em i device (fig. 1), it can be seen that the zone of efficient magnetic field (b > 50 mt) is from r1 = 30 mm to r2 = 45 mm. water flux is for radial flow expressed with the relationship: qv = 2·π·h·v (1) 53 parameters are: r = radial distance on the inner plate h = thickness of the gap = 1 cm v = water flow velocity velocity v decreases with increasing of r, being the lowest at the edge of the inner plate. for fulfillment of the condition v > 0.1 m/s in whole area of the inner plate, the water flux should be 17 l/min (calculated by eq.1 for v = 0.1 m/s at the edge of the plate). numerical calculations of the magnetic field in the device em i the distribution of magnetic flux density was also analyzed numerically. the computer program electromagnetic field analysis tools (elefant2d, elefant3d) was used. it is developed by igte, tu graz with the purpose for solving two(2d) and three dimensional (3d) problems in electromagnetic fields by the finite element method. the program enables us to determine the distribution and the magnitude of static and time depending electromagnetic fields. it comprises: 2d and 3d input graphical processors for description of a device geometry, boundary conditions, materials and sources, the main program with different mathematical numerical calculation possibilities (scalar or vector potentials) and the postprocessor for numerical and 2d or 3d graphical presentation of device’s parameters. figure 5 presents 3d mesh for em model. fig.5: 3d – mesh of em model the numerical calculation was made for dimensions of the model em iv in 2d-axisisymmetric mesh. figure 6 presents the magnetic flux density distribution. it is obvious that ''a magnetic bridge'' occurs due to the metallic tooth used for placing the rubber ring. the magnetic field very weakly penetrates into the zone of water flow and the inner plate. for constructing an improved model, a good solution was replacing the metallic tooth with a nonmagnetic ring. results are presented in fig. 7. distribution of the magnetic flux density is now favorable. magnetic field in water zone is stronger and perpendicular to the water flow direction. both facts are important for the effectiveness of the device. the comparison of the magnetic flux density curve between the manufacturer’s and the improved model is presented in fig. 8. fig.6: the distribution of the magnetic flux density, bz, in the manufacturer’s model em fig.7: the distribution of the magnetic flux density, bz, in the improved model em fig.8: distribution of magnetic flux density for em model and for the improved model. results of the numerical analysis of the improved model em iv (fig. 8) show that the zone of efficient magnetic field (b > 50 mt) is from r1 = 60 mm to r2 = 105 mm at the edge of the inner plate. relative effective area is 67%. 54 conclusion we analyzed em magnetic devices, which have been used in industry for many years and show good results in scale prevention. laboratory measurements and numerical calculations with elefant computer program of magnetic field distribution in these devices are in good agreement. it was found that the metallic tooth considerably reduces the magnetic flux density in the water zone. therefore, we made a computer simulation with nonmagnetic material, which gave much better distribution of the magnetic field. references 1. donaldson j. d., grimes s.: lifting the scales from our pipes; new scient., 1988, 117, 43-46. 2. wang y., babchin a. j., cherneyi l. t., chow r. s., sawatzky r. p.: rapid onset of calcium carbonate crystallization under the influence of a magnetic field; water research, 1997,vol.31, no.2, 346-350. 3. parsons s. a., wang b. l., judd s. j., stephenson t.: magnetic treatment of calcium carbonate scale – effect of ph control; water research, 1997, vol.31, no.2, 339-342. 4. coey j. m. d., cass s.: magnetic water treatment; journal of magnetism and magnetic materials, 2000, 209, 71-74. 5. gabrielli c., lauhari r., maurin g., keddam m.: magnetic water treatment for scale prevention; water research, 2001, vol.35, no.13, 3249-3259. 6. gruber c. e., carda d. d.: performance analysis of permanent magnet type water treatment devices; wsa research report, water quality association, 1981. 7. oshitani j., uehara r., higashitani k.: magnetic effects on electrolyte solutions in pulse and alternating fields; journal of colloid and interface science, 1999, 209, 374-379. 8. higashitani k., kage a., katamura s., imai k., hatade s.: effects of magnetic field on the formation caco3 particles; journal of colloid and interface science, 1993, 156, 90-95. 9. busch k. w., busch m. a.: laboratory studies on magnetic water treatment and their relationship to a possible mechanism for scale reduction; desalination, 1997, 109, 131-148. 10. lipus l. c., krope j., crepinsek l.: dispersion destabilization in magnetic water treatment; journal of colloid and interface science, 2001, 235, 60-66. 11. kozic v., lipus l.c.: magnetic water treatment for less tenacious scale. journal of chemical information and computer science, 2003, vol. 43, no. 6, 1815-1819. microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 36(1-2) pp. 23-26 (2008) production of short chain fructooligosaccharides zs. csanádi , cs. sisak university of pannonia, research institute of chemical and process engineering h-8200, egyetem u. 10., veszprém, hungary e-mail: csanadi@mukki.richem.hu pectinex ultra sp-l, a commercial enzyme preparation with fructosyl-transferase activity and ability to produce short chain fructooligosaccharides, was immobilized onto anionic ionexchange resin by a combined method. during the work this solid-phase biocatalyst was used for the production of fructooligosaccharides from saccharose, where glucose was formed as inhibiting by-product. in the experiments the optimal biocatalyst/matrix ratio and the optimal immobilization conditions: concentration of cross-linking agent, immobilization time and optimal operational conditions: temperature and ph were determined. moreover an integrated reactor system was constructed for simultaneous fructooligosaccharides production synthesis and glucose elimination to enhance the product yield. keywords: fructosyl-transferase, glucose-oxidase introduction recently maintaining physical health and well-being has become more and more important worldwide, which requires careful nutrition including wholesome food products and food additives. the so-called functional foods contain useful components that have beneficial effects on health conditions [1]. typical representatives of functional foods are the fructooligosaccharides (fos). their significance have risen recently in human and animal nutrition, primarily because of their advantageous effects on the intestinal bacterial population and general health conditions in the body [2]. fos are not decomposed in the small intestine by the digestive enzymes so reach the colon where they are fermented by the microbial flora (e.g. bifidobacteria sp., lactobacillus sp.) to lactate and short chain fatty acids, like acetate, propionate, butyrate. consequently, fos stimulate the growth and vitality of these microbes and prevent spreading of the harmful pathogens. in addition, they have low sweetness intensity, their caloric value is low, approximately 8–9 kj g-1 and cause no caries. so they can be applied as alternative sweeteners and a part of diet [3, 4]. short chain fos are mainly composed of 1-kestose (gf2), nystose (gf3) and fructosyl-nystose (gf4), in which two, three and four fructose units are bound to one unit of glucose, respectively. they can be found in plants and vegetables, including onion, asparagus, rice, sugar beet, wheat, etc. but generally in low concentration. the industrial scale recovery from these plants is not economical since their low concentration, for this reason, fos are produced commercially via biosynthetic as well as hydrolytic methods using fructosyl-transferase (ftf) enzyme. the raw material of this reaction is sucrose and the product mixture contains unconverted sucrose besides gf2, gf3 and gf4 and glucose as a by-product [5]. the latter component is a strong competitive inhibitor of the synthesis [6]. elimination of the formed by-product component can result an increase in the product yield. for this purpose several methods can be applied: e.g. membrane separation [7-9], chromatographic separation, or enzymatic method like elimination by glucose oxidase. the partial hydrolysis of inulin is also used practically for fructooligosaccharide production. inulin recovered from jerusalem artichoke (helianthus tuberosus) and chicory (cichorium intybus) species is used currently as substrate of endoinulinases (ec 3.2.1.7) by the industry to produce gf2-gf4 fos [10]. the immobilization of the biocatalysts offers a lot of practical advantages, e.g. easy separation of enzyme and product, the opportunity to realize a continuous process, the enhancement of volumetric productivity of the reactor, etc [11]. therefore the objects of our work were as follows: to develop an immobilization procedure of a commercial enzyme solution having significant ftf activity, to examine and establish the optimal immobilization conditions, to test the operational possibilities during shake flask experiments, to study the production of fos with the immobilized biocatalyst in lab scale and to investigate the operation of an integrated system developed for simultaneous byproduct elimination. in this paper part of the results of our work are summarized. 24 materials and methods a commercial grade complex enzyme preparation originated the production of short chain fructooligosaccharides, originated from aspergillus aculeatus – pectinex ultra sp-l (novozymes, denmark) – containing fructosyl-transferase activity beside other enzyme activities (pectinase, cellulose, β-galactosidase) [12]. for the glucose elimination glucose oxidase (god) enzyme (fluka) with 215 u cm-3 and catalase (sigma) with 830 u cm-3 activities were used. short chain fructooligosaccharides as 1-kestose, nystose and fructosyl-nystose were obtained from wako pure chemical industries (japan) ltd. all other reagents were reagent grade. for the immobilization of biocatalysts an anionic ion exchange resin, amberlite ira 900 cl (rohm and haas, germany) was applied. it is a styrene-divinylbenzene copolymer matrix, with 650–720 μm mean particle diameter, 40–75 nm pore diameter and 25 m2 g-1 specific surface area. in the reaction catalyzed by ftf, the same molar quantity of glucose is formed as the total moles of the different fos molecules produced. that is why the activity of the enzyme was determined measuring glucose formed in the reaction. one unit of ftf activity was defined as the quantity of enzyme that liberated one μmol of glucose per minute [5]. the catalytic activity of pectinex ultra sp-l was determined on the basis of hang & woodams [12]. the applied reaction conditions were 2 m initial sucrose concentration, at 55 °c, ph 5.6 and 2 h incubation time. it has been found that pectinex ultra sp-l has 10.9 u cm-3 fructosyl-transferase activity. the catalytic activity of god-catalase enzyme product was determined regarding to the god activity of the biocatalyst. one unit of god activity was defined as the amount of enzyme that transformed 1 μmol of glucose per minute [1]. the glucose concentration was determined with odianisidine method [13] in the case of ftf-activity determination. when glucose oxidase activity was measured we used the o-toluidine method [14]. fructooligosaccharides were analysed by hplc under the following conditions: merck-hitachi l-6000a hplc apparatus, ri-71 refractive index detector, aminex hpx-42a column of 300×7.8 mm, 25 °c, distilled water eluent, 0.2 cm3 min-1 flow rate. results during our work a solid-phase biocatalyst (15.6 u g-1) for the production of fructooligosaccharides was developed. the exact method and process were presented earlier [15]. for the elimination of glucose a co-immobilized fine chemical grade glucose oxidase-catalase solid-phase biocatalyst was manufactured. hydrogen peroxide formed in the reaction is an inhibitor for the enzyme, so it should be removed from the reaction mixture. in our system catalase was applied for the decomposition of h2o2. the god activity of the prepared biocatalyst was 40.4 u g-1 and the catalase activity was 39.5 u g-1. an immobilization procedure was elaborated for these biocatalysts onto an anionic ion exchange resin, amberlite ira 900 cl, using a combination of adsorption and cross-linking by glutaraldehyde treatment. the immobilization parameters and operational conditions have been optimized for the biocatalysts (table 1). table 1: optimal immobilization conditions and operational parameters pectinex ultra sp-l godcatalase immobilization parameters cross-linking time (h) 15 60 concentration of glutaraldehyde (%) 0.25 0.5 operational parameters temperature (°c) 53 30 ph 5.6 5.1 in our studies shaken flask experiments were carried out for the production of fructooligosaccharides with soluble and immobilized pectinex ultra sp-l also. in the first case 3 cm3 soluble pectinex ultra sp-l was added to 30 cm3 sucrose solution (2 m, ph=5.6, 0.05 m acetate buffer). the reaction was conducted at 45°c and 150 rpm. results are summarized in fig. 1. 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 0 2 4 6 8 10 time (h) co nc en tra tio n (m g cm -3 ) gf4 gf3 gf2 gf g figure 1: production of fructooligosaccharides with soluble pectinex ultra sp-l during the applied 8 h reaction time equilibrium of the reaction was reached and ~54 % product yield was achieved. product yield was calculated as the amount of the formed fructooligosaccharides related to the amount of the initial substrate. in the second case 6 g immobilized pectinex ultra sp-l was added to 80 cm3 sucrose solution (2 m, ph = 5.6, 0.05 m acetate buffer). the reaction was conducted at 53 °c and 150 rpm. results are summarized in fig. 2. in this experiment the reached product yield was ~60 % under the applied conditions. 25 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 time (h) co nc en tra tio n (m g cm -3 ) fructosyl-nystose nystose kestose sucrose glucose figure 2: production of fructooligosaccharides with immobilized pectinex ultra sp-l based on the results of the shaken flask experiments an integrated reactor system was constructed for the integrated fructooligosaccharides production and glucose elimination. the scheme of it is shown in fig. 3. the reactor unit for fructooligosacharides production was tempered to 53 °c, the other was operated at 25 °c. in this system two reactor units were connected. one of them (i.) was filled with 10 g immobilized pectinex ultra sp-l, the other (ii.) was filled with 5 g coimmobilized glucose oxidase-catalase, and 130-130 cm3 sucrose solution (2 m, ph = 5.6, 0.05 m acetate buffer) was added. the substrate solutions were changed between the two reactor units in every second hour, so the reaction was followed in 10 cycles. we measured the remaining/formed glucose concentrations after each cycles (table 2). figure 3: the scheme of the integrated reactor system for the production of fructooligosaccharides table 2: glucose concentrations after several cycles in the integrated reactor system i. ii. reactor 1 reactor 2 reactor 1 reactor 2 cycles glucose concentration (mg cm-3) glucose concentration (mg cm-3) 1 20.33 19.23 2 22.41 0.14 23.62 0.54 5 24.32 1.89 22.61 2.12 10 35.33 2.33 41.74 3.66 as it can be seen from the data of the table in the first cycle the capacity of reactor 2 was high enough to eliminate glucose completely, but later (in the further cycles) some glucose appeared in the reactor, though its concentration was quite low. after the examined cycles the amount of the formed short chain fructooligosaccharides (table 3) was determined and – as it can be seen from the table – more than 74 % product yield was achieved. table 3: product composition and yield in integrated system i. ii. gf (mg cm-3) 67.00 75.23 gf2 (mg cm-3) 245.36 237.98 gf3 (mg cm-3) 181.23 169.47 gf4 (mg cm-3) 82.58 75.36 yield (%) 74.44 70.59 summary the production possibilities of fos were examined in shaken flask experiments with immobilized ftf and ~60 % product yield was reached. glucose was found as a strong inhibitor therefore an integrated reactor system was constructed for the simultaneous enzymatic production of short chain fos and elimination of glucose by-product by a coimmobilized glucose oxidase-catalase enzyme pair in order to reduce its inhibition. in this system ~74 % product yield was achieved. it can be seen that higher product yield could be reached by application of by-product elimination. acknowledgement the financial support of the hungarian national office for research and technology via the research and technology innovation fund (contract no omfb 01675/2002) is gratefully acknowledged. 26 references 1. blandino, a., macias, m., cantero, d.: process biochemistry 36, 601-606 (2001) 2. bornet, f. r. j., brouns, f., tashiro, y., duvillier, v.: digestive and liver disease 34, 5111-5120 (2002) 3. losada, m. a., olleros, t.: nutrition research 22, 71-84 (2002) 4. fooks, l., fuller, r., gibson, g. r.: international dairy journal 9, 53-61 (1999) 5. yun, j. w.: enzyme and microbial technology 19, 107-117 (1996) 6. sheu, d. c., lio, p. j., chen, s. t., lin, c. t., duan, k. j.: biotechnology letters 23, 1499-1503 (2001) 7. bélafi-bakó, k., gubicza, l.: biocatalysts and membranes, in integration of membrane processes into bioconversions, ed. by bélafi-bakó, k. et al., kluwer academic, london, 2000 pp. 131-140 8. mulder, m.: bacis principles of membrane technology, kluwer, dordrecht, 1996 9. bélafi-bakó, k.: simultaneous application of enzymes and membranes in the food industry, in food engineering research trends, ed. by columbus, f., nova science publishers, new york, 2007 10. kaur, n., gupta, a. k.: journal of biosciences 27, 703-714 (2002) 11. rosevear, a.: journal of chemical technology and biotechnology 34, 127-150 (1984) 12. hang, y. d., woodams, e. e.: lebensmittel wissenschaft und technologie 29, 578-580 (1996) 13. sigma:http://www.sigmaaldrich.com/sigma/bulleti n/gago20bul.pdf 14. cooper, g. r., mcdaniel, v.: clinical chemistry 6, 159-170 (1970) 15. sisak, c., csanadi, z., ronay, e., szajani, b.: enzyme and microbial technology 39, 1002-1007 (2006) microsoft word contents.doc hungarian journal of industry and chemistry veszprém vol. 40(1) pp. 57–64 (2012) computer aided modelling of hybrid mini van i. lakatos1 , v. nagy2, p. kőrös3, t. orbán4 1széchenyi istván university, department of automotive and railway engineering, 1 egyetem tér, 9026 győr, hungary e-mail: lakatos@sze.hu 2széchenyi istván university, research center of vehicle industry, 1 egyetem tér, 9026 győr, hungary 3széchenyi istván university, department of mechatronics and machine design, 1 egyetem tér, 9026 győr, hungary 4széchenyi istván university, department of automotive and railway engineering, 1 egyetem tér, 9026 győr, hungary the main advantage of hybrid vehicles and their electric drive systems that they reduce local pollutant emissions – especially in urban usage. the vehicle called e-van-09 was developed at széchenyi istván university which serves understanding and optimization potential of operational processes. keywords: avl cruise, model, validation, roller bench measurements, road tests introduction the e-van-09 vehicle is based on a 2007 vintage ford transit with mwb chassis. the diesel engine drives the front wheels, while the rear wheels are driven by two electric motors connected in series. the two drives are not in operation at the same time, so the vehicle is purely electric or diesel powered. this kind of propulsion system enables researchers to examine advantages and disadvantages of the different drives separately. electric drive system and all vehicle control components (power electronics for e-motors, battery management system, etc.) were developed at the széchenyi istván university. the synchronous machine is also an academic development, not available on the market. besides the drive system, the on-board communication system was supplemented, and it had to be connected to the original system to add more functionality. a speciality of the conversion is that the van was originally built with hydraulic power steering which had to be replaced by a electro-hydraulic part due to the electric mode. a completely new data bus had to be constructed connecting to the existing can-bus network to control the units of electric drive system (ford data bus, power steering, e-motor bus). the schematic structure of the vehicle parts is shown in figure 1. modelling tool a number of companies are engaged in developing vehicle dynamics simulation software, which are capable of modelling electric vehicles. these software packages are complex systems and can be nested, so the results can be used for their development directly. in addition to simulation results, these software give the possibility for establishment of hil (hardware in the loop) sub-systems that is ready for testing given components (prototype device or new process management) under controlled conditions. during the development, the so-called v model implementation steps are used. the model operates on the same vertical level. it may get to design and modification state again after implementation. in this way, the system can continue to improve until the final version is ready (figure 2). 58 figure 1: block diagram of e-van-09 figure 2: the development method proposed by avl 59 all vehicle simulation software were ranked in 2009 by a uk-based engineering company called ricardo. the common feature of these software packages is that they work together with other general-purpose simulation programs in their unique modular design (40% software are based on matlab/simulink and 90% are able to generate simulink functions). table 1: vehicle simulation software developers (s – matlab / simulinktm based; m – modelica based) (source: ricardo) avl cruise power train simulation software is used at our university which is ranked fourth overall in the ricardo report1. the ranking is based on the level of detail, mathematical background, data management, and user-friendly operation of the simulation modelling software. cruise developed by graz-based avl, austrian company is used by auto-makers like ford, gm, and volvo. besides simulation technology, avl is also involved in the development of power-trains and building test systems meeting the needs of the automotive industry. avl cruise software the simulation model is modular, which guarantees fast and flexible modelling. the modules are connected through physical properties and data links. this modelling method is advantageous, because some of the processes can be parallelized and every sub-calculation can be optimized. the modelling software enables us to reverse the direction of the simulation. in that way, velocity, acceleration values, and losses can be calculated backwards from the wheels to the motor. this process is fast, but gives inaccurate results because the electric motor can operate in a work point which is not realistic within the given time period. instead of that solution, the model chain is the reverse: the kinetic energy generated by the drive unit is reduced through mechanical connections (taking losses into account). this is the natural model of the physical system. for example, if an undersized engine or electric motor is given for the model, then the vehicle will not be able to reach or keep prescribed speed profile. 60 table 2: simulation software evaluation summary table made by ricardo (source: ricardo) the following calculation is valid for the simulation model: 1. between the modules of the vehicle model – where connection is interpreted between two modules – the following non-linear differential equation is applied: . (1) 2. this ordinary differential equation is converted into the following integral equation: (2) 3. the trapezoidal rule discretization leads to the following equation: . (3) 4. this non-linear system of equations is solved by the software in each cycle. the software performs the prior interpolation of parameters (efficiency, torque, losses, fields, etc.). the program is using local bilinear interpolation. building up the drive-train model of e-van cad drawings of drive-train were used in the modelling process and the technical documentation. during validation, the unknown parameters were determined by characteristic values (from technical literature) and measurements, which were performed. since the two drive modes (electric and diesel) are available separately, during the development of the model, we had to stick to the principle, which says the diesel engine does not operate together with the electric motors and vice versa. fortunately, the software provides the opportunity to handle drives separately as subsystems. this modelling method is practical because major physical parameters of the vehicles examined are the same, while the power-train may vary widely. just think of the same model in different passenger cars with different internal combustion engines. modularity of cruise model the two subsystems created in the modular structure of cruise is shown below: 61 figure 3: diesel drive mode system of e-van-09 set up in avl cruise colour codes of diesel drive modules: white: components existing in both subsystems (power-train subsystem) grey: components of diesel driven system (brake modules for different methods of control subsystems) light grey: main parameters of the vehicle and „cockpit” symbolizing the driver. the model of electric drive mode is the following: figure 4: the model of electric drive system of e-van-09 set up in avl cruise software the model of electric drive system of e-van-09 is set up in avl cruise software. colour codes of electric drive modules: white: components existing in both subsystems (power-train subsystem) grey: electric motors, energy source (high voltage battery cell pack), control units dark grey: inverter module light grey: main parameters of the vehicle and „cockpit” symbolizing the driver. 62 the accuracy of simulation depends on the determination of the critical parameters of two main components. the energy storage system (in this case the lithium-ion battery cell pack) is the subsystem which defines the usability of electric vehicles. the main obstacle to the spread of electric vehicles is the low energy density and efficiency of batteries – besides high price of technology. despite energy storage difficulties, the balance tips for systems with electrical equipment of high efficiency (internal combustion engines with 20–30% efficiency value compared to nearly 90% efficiency at electric machines in almost every work point). during setting up the model, we conducted battery tests2. not only capacity but also internal resistance has to be defined, because energy charging and discharging bring losses. this resistance value is only mω per cell, but for a full battery pack it can reach decimal or integer value. internal resistance indicators show significant advantage at lithium-ion batteries compared to nickelmetal hydride batteries. the battery internal resistance test values were higher than it was shown on the data sheets. on the other side larger capacities were measured. figure 5: thundersky 40 ah battery internal resistance measurement results made with current off method figure 6: thundersky 40 ah battery output voltage at 0,5 c discharge main characteristics of the battery cell pack: 128 pcs thundersky wb-lyp40aha battery cells in series (8 pcs battery blocks) nominal voltage: 3,2 v continuous load: 3 c (120 a) pulse load: 20 c (800 a) capacity: 40 ah operating temperature range: -40°c – 80°c pmsm module performance and efficiency data of the electric motor were provided by motorsolve software, which has given around 200 work points. figure 7: motorsolve simulation table 3: parameters of vehicle vehicle: gas tank volume (m3) 0.08 pressure difference engine/environment (mbar) 0 temperature difference engine/environment (k) 0 distance from hitch to front axle 4549 wheel base 3504 net weight 2690 gross weight 2925 frontal area (m2) 4.458 drag coefficient 0.42 tire inflation pressure front axle 4.3 tire inflation pressure rear axle 4.5 single ratio transmission (front axle): transmission ratio 4.23 inertia moment in / out 0.009/0.016 efficiency 0.97 single ratio transmission (rear axle): transmission ratio 4.27 inertia moment in / out 0.009/0.016 efficiency 0.97 differential (front axle): torque split factor 1 63 inertia moment in / out 0.02/0.02/0.02 differential (rear axle): torque split factor 1 inertia moment in / out 0.02/0.02/0.02 brake (front): brake piston surface (mm2) 3619 friction coefficient (0-1) 0.27 specific brake factor (disc = 1) 1 effective friction radius 150 efficiency 0.99 inertia moment 0.136 brake (rear): brake piston surface (mm2) 1810 friction coefficient (0–1) 0.27 specific brake factor (disc = 1) 1 effective friction radius 140 efficiency 0.99 inertia moment 0.072 wheel (front): inertia moment 1.137 friction coefficient of tire 0.95 wheel load correction coefficient 0.02 static rolling radius 330 dynamic rolling radius 350 wheel (rear): inertia moment 1.137 friction coefficient of tire 0.95 wheel load correction coefficient 0.02 static rolling radius 330 dynamic rolling radius 350 table 4: centre of gravity calculation cog (center of gravity) wheelbase [mm] 3504 front axle load [n] (fa) 15210 rear axle load [n] 13380 wheel radius [mm] 306 lifting height [mm] (hem) 324 front axle load after lifting [n] (fb) 15550 cog distance to front axle [mm] 1639.857293 cog distance to rear axle [mm] 1864.142707 cog height [mm] 229.2646558 cog distance to ground [mm] 535.2646558 net weight [n] 28590 front axle load (%) 0.532004197 rear axle load (%) 0.467995803 figure 8: centre of gravity of the vehicle validation tests the validation of the model we set up in avl cruise software required measurements performed on road tests and roller bench tests. the road tests were focusing on the examination of vehicle’s driving dynamics in order to achieve validation properties. road tests each operation data was logged during the road test on highway and city traffic performed through on-board can system with special data logger equipment. roller bench measurements the following measurement cycles were performed on the roller test bench: definition of drive-line inertia (reduced to roller bench axis) examination of steady (stationary) operating conditions. this cycle is normally used for consumption and emission measurement tests. acceleration engine-power measurement cycle. determination of maximum engine power is carried out with this cycle. during the roller bench measurements the following parameters were recorded: vehicle speed traction power performance (power) all traffic took place in can network. the most important parameters are: battery voltage electric motor voltage electric motor current throttle angle power output of electric drive-train was tested on roller bench by 25–40 km/h speed. motor reverse speed limit is set to 40 km/h, so it was not exceeded. the tests were carried out on the two engines connected mechanically in series. further validation procedures are planned to be done in a way that only one electric motor will be examined, which has power 64 traction. from this measurement, clarification of required parameters validation is expected. figure 9: performance losses measurement with free running test figure 10: full load power characteristic curve of e-van-09 performance-speed characteristic curve shows that electric motor’s maximum power is 40 kw. this power was measured at 27 km/h speed. at lower speeds power output was reduced. as figure 11 shows, more than 5 kn traction force is registered at this speed. the slope of the curve shows if speed is increasing traction force is drastically decreasing. this means that the vehicle would lose velocity on rising road sections – when operating under real life circumstances. unfortunately, these conditions also have safety risks. figure 11: full load traction power characteristic curve of e-van-09 figure 12: characteristic curves of cruise model and real drives summary the model construction and validation of e-van-09 is an important part of the project within the target of electric vehicle development. the models are used to facilitate the development process and highlight its trends or directions. validation process has not been finished yet (figure 12), but the measurements and parameters have already been identified, which ensure that the result and the process can be successfully carried out. acknowledgements „támop-4.2.2.a-11/1/konv-2012-0012: basic research for the development of hybrid and electric vehicles – the project is supported by the hungarian government and co-financed by the european social fund” references 1. j. fulem: icct evaluation of vehicle simulation tools summary report (2009) 2. h-g. schweiger, o. obeidi, o. komesker, a. raschke, m. schiemann, c. zehner, m. gehnen, m. keller, p. birke: comparison of several methods for determining the internal resistance of lithium ion cells (2010) microsoft word b_32_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 38(2). pp. 215-218 (2010) high-tech boat j. lénárt robert bosch department of mechatronics, university of miskolc, miskolc-egyetemváros, hungary e-mail: lenart.jozsef@uni-miskolc.hu as an apropos of a program held in leuven, belgium, has been suggested to build a watercraft that can be controlled from the riverbank. the show was a big belgian program, the celebration of the canonization of father damien. father damien was a roman catholic priest at the 19th century. he won recognition for his ministry to people with leprosy (also known as hansen's disease), who had been placed under a government-sanctioned medical quarantine on the island of molokai in the kingdom of hawaii. keywords: boat, embedded control, remote control, gps, linux, multithreaded control objectives, motivation as an apropos of a program held in leuven, belgium, has been suggested to build a watercraft that can be controlled from the riverbank, suitable to carry some spectacular decoration and has high-tech features like cameras, displays, etc. the wishlist was: the boat should be reliably controlled on a river, able to carry a 2*1 m sized decoration, controlled from a computer (or laptop, pda) from the riverbank through wireless. the controller interface (software) should display the picture of the boats onboard camera and switchable electric units (lights, leds, motors,etc) can be switched from the controller interface. the show was a big belgian program, the celebration of the canonization of father damien. father damien was a roman catholic priest at the 19th century. he won recognition for his ministry to people with leprosy (also known as hansen's disease), who had been placed under a government-sanctioned medical quarantine on the island of molokai in the kingdom of hawaii. the decorations of the 25 small boats shows moments of his life from tremelo through leuven to molokai. the location of the river show is the dijle river from leuven to tremelo (the birth town of father damien). remote controlling the boats down the river requires sophisticated control system. designing the structure and the electronics the first step was to design a reliable driving scheme. to achieve good manoeuvrability on river requires two independent motors. the rear mounted motor gives the throttle and break power, the crosswise mounted motor in the front of the boat gives the steering by switching he motor to rotate cw or ccw. we choose the yamaha m-12 electric boat motor because it has enough power to move the boat and operates from 12v dc supply that can be a high capacity battery, and easy to switch with relays. on full throttle these motors consumes 30a current, so we need large batteries and energy-efficient control method to reach two to three hours of operation. fig. 1 shows the 3d boat model i made. on the model i placed the two 100 ah batteries to test the weight balance of the body. figure 1: 3d model of the boat 216 figure 2: arrangement of the motors under the boat the design criteria of the electronic system was as follows: the controller should be absolutely reliable, it is unadmittable to leave the boat without control, to switch the high power of the motors requires robust, high power electronics, modular design, in case of failure needs the ability to change or repair only the failed module, easy to improve and more stable. each component does only one function and does that perfectly. the first step was the development of the switching electronics. this pcb is responsible for switching the motors (throttle with three speeds, break, steering) and the decoration’s lights, which are 24 pieces of 12 v dc output. a conventional pc or laptop has only few controllable output, so we need a suitable pcb for this role. after extensive research i’ve found the solution: the pca9555n ic made by philips semiconductor. this clever circuit communicates over i2c bus and has 16 i/o general purpose pins. each pin can be configured to act as input or output independently. the boatcontroller pcb has 32 outputs (2*4 for the motors and 24 for the decoration), so can be implemented with 2 pieces of pca9555n. because of the outputs of the ic are connected with devices outside the boat (the “outer world”), it is crucial to provide sufficient protection for the sensitive circuit against overvoltage and transients. this protection consists of an optocoupler and a small relay on each ouptut pin. this means full galvanical detachment between the low current, low voltage circuit and the high current, high voltage (12 v dc) devices. the leds on the decoration are switched by those small relays, but the motors are attached through additional large, 40 amp relays. fig. 3 shows the first version of this pcb. however the switch circuit is only a small piece of the whole system. the project needs an onboard computer that serves the user interface by a java servlet and a controller computer able to communicate with buch of devices, an audio amplifier, wireless network appliances, camera for the remote control function, dc/ac inverter to power the displays. fig. 4 shows the plan of the whole on-board system. figure 3: first version of the switch circuit the next step is the selection of the onboard computer. to do this, let’s summarize it’s tasks: serves the user interface (java servlet), handles the camera over usb or wlan, plays videos, presentations, shows the cameras picture on the displays mounted on the front and back of the boat. the controller computers tasks: control the switching electronics according to the commands given by the user interface, handling the gps receiver, determining the coordinates and speed of the boat. based on those task lists, the chosen device for the role of the onboard computer is the zotac ionitx-a-e miniitx, intel atom n330 dualcore cpu based mainboard with integrated video, audio and network (wireless and wired) interface. this satisfy the our needs and the power consumption on full load is under 40 w. the controller computer also has to be energy efficient and has to be able to communicate over rs-232, i2c and ethernet. for this role the verdex pro xl6p embedded com (computer on module, shown on fig. 5) made by the gumstix co. (california, usa) is an adequate choice. this is a small device (only 80*20mm) with lower than 2w power consumption, 600 mhz marvell pxa270 cpu, 128 mb of ram and runs linux operatng system. the verdex pro xl6p has usb, i2c, spi, gpio and ethernet interfaces. 217 figure 4: system plan figure 5: gumstix verdex pro xl6p com figure 6: software components and hierarchy on the boatcontroller 218 software development, implementation my primary task was the development of the software that runs on the controller computer hence i will explain this work hereafter. the scope of this software is to control the boat, handle the gps module, collect the informations (coordinates, speed) and switch the motors and the decorations lights according to the commands given by the user interface. i’ve decided to design a multithreaded software in which the functions are running in separate threads independently. in this way the separate functions will not block each other e.g. if the gps interpreter function can’t get any correct data other functions can work nevertheless they don’t have to wait for it. the separate threads are joined in the shared memory. this stores the informations from the ui and the gps module respectively. the most important part is the one that communicates with the switching board. this piece of software is responsible for setting the outputs according to the information stored int he shared memory. if this function fails the boat gets uncontrollable. the data link between the control computer and the switching board is i2c with 400 khz clock speed. the i2c is a simple communication protocol, consists of three wires: data (sda), clock (scl) and ground (gnd). each data packet contains a 7 bit i2c address, 1 r/w bit and 16 output status bits. the ‘set/get’ type commands from the user interface comes over ethernet. the process1 interprets this commands, in case of a ‘get’ command it returns the desired data from the shared memory. in case of a ‘set’ command writes the given data to the appropriate cell of the shared memory. the process3 sends commands to the switching circuit over i2c based on the changed shared memory cells. the function of the process2 is to handle the gps receiver connected to the serial port, interpret the datas and put them to the shared memory. testing, observations the first tests of the boat were made on a lake, there the functions and the control systems reliability were examined under unperturbed conditions. on this first tests we encountered with some strange behaviours. at the moments when the relays switched and the motors started the control circuit locked up in 3 cases from 10. we have determined that the heavy voltage drop and transients affects the communication on the i2c bus that freezes hence the boat gets out of control. after correcting this problem the system worked reliable and robust under tough circumstances on rivers and waits to accomplish the demonstration. << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /createjdffile false /description << /ara /bgr /chs /cht /cze /dan /deu /esp /eti /fra /gre /heb /hrv (za stvaranje adobe pdf dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. stvoreni pdf dokumenti mogu se otvoriti acrobat i adobe reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /hun /ita /jpn /kor /lth /lvi /nld (gebruik deze instellingen om adobe pdf-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. de gemaakte pdf-documenten kunnen worden geopend met acrobat en adobe reader 5.0 en hoger.) /nor /pol /ptb /rum /rus /sky /slv /suo /sve /tur /ukr /enu (use these settings to create adobe pdf documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. created pdf documents can be opened with acrobat and adobe reader 5.0 and later.) >> /namespace [ (adobe) (common) (1.0) ] /othernamespaces [ << /asreaderspreads false /cropimagestoframes true /errorcontrol /warnandcontinue /flattenerignorespreadoverrides false /includeguidesgrids false /includenonprinting false /includeslug false /namespace [ (adobe) (indesign) (4.0) ] /omitplacedbitmaps false /omitplacedeps false /omitplacedpdf false /simulateoverprint /legacy >> << /addbleedmarks false /addcolorbars false /addcropmarks false /addpageinfo false /addregmarks false /convertcolors /converttocmyk /destinationprofilename () /destinationprofileselector /documentcmyk /downsample16bitimages true /flattenerpreset << /presetselector /mediumresolution >> /formelements false /generatestructure false /includebookmarks false /includehyperlinks false /includeinteractive false /includelayers false /includeprofiles false /multimediahandling /useobjectsettings /namespace [ (adobe) (creativesuite) (2.0) ] /pdfxoutputintentprofileselector /documentcmyk /preserveediting true /untaggedcmykhandling /leaveuntagged /untaggedrgbhandling /usedocumentprofile /usedocumentbleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /hwresolution [2400 2400] /pagesize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice microsoft word contents.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 34. pp. 21-26 (2006) separation of organic compounds by gradient simulated moving bed chromatography m. nagy 1, , t. szánya 2, z. molnár 2, g. turza 2, g. gál 2, l. hanák 2, j. argyelán 2, a. aranyi 1, k. temesvári 1 and z. horváth 1 1gedeon richter ltd., h-1475 budapest 10. po box 27. hungary; e-mail: nagymm@richter.hu 2university of pannon, department of chemical engineering pob 158, veszprém, h-8201, hungary a promising solution for the separation of organic compounds in pharmaceutical industry is the gradient simulated moving bed chromatography (smb). the above mentioned process can be used for the production of high purity materials (isomers, optical isomers, biomolecules). we assumed isotherm, isochor equilibrium adsorption (competitive multicomponent langmuir-adsorption equilibrium) in the mathematical model and neglected the effects of axial dispersion. in our present work we extended the mathematical model with solvent adsorption-desorption processes (acetone-dichloromethane eluent, steroid compounds, silicagel). the mathematical model was solved by finite differences numerical mathematical method using pc. the gradient smb separations were carried out with a laboratory scale four column equipment in open loop system at 1:1:2:0 column configuration. the smb equipment (l=25 cm, i.d.=1 cm) was planned and constructed for separation of a steroid mixture using ymc s-50 silica gel as adsorbent (specific surface=798.63 m2 g-1). the effect of switching time change (5.5 min, 9 min, 11.5 min, 22.5 min) on component separation was examined. during our measurements the amount of acetone in dichloromethane was 55 % v/v in the fresh eluent and pure dichloromethane in the feed. the process variables of the gradient smb (product purity, yield, productivity, specific solvent consumption) are very favourable. our conclusion is that the measured and the calculated data agree well and we have produced more than 99.9 %m/m purity and 90 % yield , productivity 1300-3000 g steroid kg-1 adsorbent day at 0.1-0.3 m3 fresh eluent kg-1 steroid eluent consumption. keywords: preparative liquid chromatography, simulated moving bed chromatography, solvent gradient smb introduction the smb process was developed in the early 1960s by brougthon and gerhold [1] and has been used for many years in the petrochemical and sugar industries for large scale separation [2]. recently, the separation of enantiomers due to the demand for high purity products has become necessary [3]. the smb (fig. 2.) is a continuous unit operated in cyclic mode which reproduces the performance of the equivalent true moving bed (tmb) unit (fig. 1.). the smb is divided into four sections, each constituted of a counter current adsorption column which plays a specific role in the separation. let us consider a feed mixture consisting of more retained species (a) and a less retained one (b) dissolved in the eluent. the separation is obtained in the two central sections, where b is carried by the mobile phase to the raffinate outlet. the fresh eluent is fed to the bottom of the section i, so as to desorb a and regenerate the adsorbent solid, before it is recycled to section iv. on the other hand b is retained in section iv and the pure eluent is recycled to section i. in practice the movement of the solid is not feasible and the tmb is replaced by the smb configuration where the adsorption beds are fixed and the counter-current solid-liquid movement is simulated by periodical switching the inlet and outlet ports of the unit [4]. i. feed (a+b) extract (a) raffinate (b) iv. iii. ii. a ds or be nt r ec ir cu la tio n l iq ui d re ci rc ul at io n s (e-f+r) d=s+rec rec fresh eluent fig. 1.: true moving bed (tmb) adsorber – i, ii, iii, iv – zones; s – desorbent (solvent, eluent); rec – recirculated eluent; e – extract stream with the better adsorbed component a; f – feed stream with the components a and b; r – raffinate (liquid outlet) stream with the less adsorbed component b 22 i ii iii iv d=s+rec e (a) f (a+b) r (b) liquid phase adsorbent phase fig. 2.: simulated moving bed (smb) adsorber – i, ii, iii, iv – zones, respectively hplc columns use of gradient elution is recommended, if conditions must be changed during separation. the applied gradient can be the pressure, temperature or solution composition. according to the literature of solution composition changing gradient smb, where the solution composition is chosen, four scientific „schools” exist; the mpi magdeburg inst. dyn. komplex techn. system in germany [5,6,7], the kluyer laboratory for biotechnology at delft university of technology in the netherlands [8,9,10]. eth zürich, inst. verfahrenstechnik in switzerland [4, 11] and there are significant scientific results in france [12], too. we calculated the initial parameters with the method of morbidelli et al. [13]. after the authors in a two component system can be determined a the mii-miii area from the geometric data of the smb equipment, the volumetric velocities, the parameters of langmuir-type isotherms and the concentrations of the mixture to be separated. the actual operating conditions determine a point on the mii-miii diagram. the variable operating conditions are: fresh eluent, recirculated eluent, feed, extract and raffinate flow rates, switching time. mathematical models and joined computer programmes published in our earlier papers [14,15] have been developed and applied for the calculation of smb. experiments all necessary additional information for this project, like the adsorption equilibrium data, the number of theoretical plates (ntp) and height of equivalent theoretical plate (hetp), the frontal adsorption elution measurement was published earlier [16]. parameters of smb-lc measurements we applied an 1-1-2-0 column configuration in the smb system. this way the steroid b has “bigger space” along the length of the columns. in this case we did not use the raffinate pump, we adjusted the flow rate in segment iii so that the steroid b appeared in the lrout flow in the open-looped smb system. the function of segment i is the regeneration of the adsorbent and the production of the steroid a in the extract. as fresh eluent in the segment i we used 1.2:1 (v/v) acetone dichloromethane (gradient). the function of segment ii is the separation of steroid a and b and the extraction of the steroid a in this segment. the function of segment iii is to separate steroid a and b and to produce steroid b in the lrout flow. we fed the mixture of steroid a and b into the third segment, the steroids were soluted in pure dichloromethane because this improved the solution of the steroids and helped us to use gradient smb. each of the columns in the four-column smb equipment were previously equilibrated with pure dichloromethane at 293 k, we wanted to separate the dichloromethane mixture of 42 g dm-3 steroid b and 18 g dm-3 steroid a. the fresh eluent 1.2:1 v/v acetone-dichloromethane volumetric ratio was 4.25 cm3min-1. the feed flow rate of the steroid sample was 0.8 cm3 min-1. steroid a was extracted with 2.2 cm3 min-1 parameter, so the lrout flow was 2.85 cm3min-1 and the switching time was 22.5 min. process parameters were determined by morbidelli method (fig. 3. and table 1). fig. 3.: the measurement points placed in the morbidelli triangle at different switching times when we decreased the switching time to 11.25 min, we doubled the original flow rates. when we used 5.5 min for switching time, we doubled once again the flow rates. in case of 9 min as switching time, we used computer simulation to optimize the work point to get as close to the points of morbidelli triangle as it was possible (f= 1.8 cm3min-1, d= 14.4 cm3min-1, e=7.8 cm3min-1, lrout= 8.4 cm3min-1). 23 table 1: input data of the software smb-krom-n number of components k = 3 column inner diameter id.=1 cm column length l=25 cm number of columns n=4 free volume coefficient eps= 0.8018 cm3 liquid free volume cm-3 column bulk density roh= 0.4045 g silica gel cm-3 column langmuir constants (same as on page ) feed concentration liquid cmacetonemg -3f acetone 0=c liquid cmcomponentbmg -3f b 42=c liquid cmcomponentamg -3f a 18=c flow rates * optimized by simulation liquidcomponentaorbmgs a s b 30 −== cmcc simulation smb 8/41 smb 8/42 smb 8/46* smb 8/44 switching time(min) 22.5 11.25 9 5.5 f (cm3 min-1) 0.8 1.6 1.8 3.2 d (cm3 min-1) 4.25 8.5 14.4 17.0 e (cm3 min-1) 2.2 4.4 7.8 8.8 r (cm3 min-1) 0 0 0 0 fresh eluent liquid cmacetonemg. -3f acetone 6435=c number of theoretical plates ntp=200 / 25 cm column calculation time 585 min simulation data of 1:1:2:0 column configuration smb simulation was done by smb-krom-n software. the input data are summarized in table iii. the software takes into account the solvent adsorptiondesorption phenomena, too. fig. 4 shows the profile of a and b component along the length of columns and fig. 5 shows the acetone gradient along the length of columns, at quasistationary state in case of rg smb8/46 simulation. 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0 200 400 600 800 ntp c a , b c om po ne nt (g d m -3 ) b component a component fig. 4.: profile of a and b components at quasistationary state 24 fig. 5.: profile of acetone at quasi-stationary state fig. 6 and 7 shows the acetone concentration change in the raffinate and extract outlet versus simulation time in case of rg smb8/46 simulation. 200 250 300 350 400 450 711 720 729 simulation time (min) c on ce nt ra tio n a ce to ne (g d m -3 ) acetone raffinate fig. 6.: acetone concentration versus two period of simulation time in the raffinate outlet 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 711 720 729 simulation time (min) c on ce nt ra tio n a ce to ne (g d m -3 ) acetone extract fig. 7.: acetone concentration versus two period of simulation time in the extract outlet results measurement results of 1:1:2:0 column configuration smb compared to simulation on the fig. 8, 9, 10 and 11 those measurements are marked with grey colour where the desired results can be seen, with white colours the measurements which are out of our requirements. 0 20 40 60 80 100 prep hpl gsmb8/ (22.50 gsmb8/ (11.25 gsmb8/ (5.50 gsmb8/ (9.00 pu rit y "b "( % / raffinate > 99.9 % m/m b η b > 90 % raffinate < 99.9 % m/m b η b < 90 % fig. 8.: comparing the purity of steroid b in different measurements 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 prep. hplc gsmb8/41 (22.50 min) gsmb8/42 (11.25 min) gsmb8/44 (5.50 min) gsmb8/46 (9.00 min) yi el d "b "( % ) raffinate > 99.9 % m/m b ηb > 90 % raffinate < 99.9 % m/m b or ηb < 90 % fig. 9.: comparing the yield of steroid b in different measurements 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 prep. hplc gsmb8/41 (22.50 min) gsmb8/42 (11.25 min) gsmb8/44 (5.50 min) gsmb8/46 (9.00 min) p b (m g b /g si lic a ge l m in ) raffinate > 99.9 % m/m b ηb > 90 % raffinate < 99.9 % m/m b or ηb < 90 % fig. 10.: comparing the productivity of steroid b in different measurements 0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 prep. hplc gsmb8/41 (22.50 min) gsmb8/42 (11.25 min) gsmb8/44 (5.50 min) gsmb8/46 (9.00 min) sf b (d m 3 e lu en t g -1 b ) raffinate > 99.9 % m/m b ηb > 90 % raffinate < 99.9 % m/m b or ηb < 90 % fig. 11.: comparing the eluent consumption of steroid b in different measurements 25 the result of the experiments shows that the decrease of the switching time highly improves the productivity, especially at the optimized 9 min switching time experiment. in this case the eluent consumption is also properly low. to describe numerically the above gsmb 8/41 and gsmb 8/46 the productivity was increased from 0.95 mg steroid b g-1 adsorbent min-1 to 2.64 mg steroid b g-1 adsorbent min-1. the eluent consumption was changed from 0.12 cm3 eluent mg-1 steroid b to 0.18 cm3 eluent mg-1 steroid b. we achieved the best favourable result in the rg1040-gsmb 8/46 measurement at 9 min switching time. in this case the calculated values of measurement were compared to data given in table 2. we note that the lrout 1, 2 are given by halving the lrout liquid stream for 0-4,5 min and 4,5-9 min fractions. table 2: results of the rg 1040 gsmb 8/46 measurement compared to result of the simulation measurement simulation purity of raffinate (lrout) lrout1 96.96 %m/m b lrout2 > 99.9 %m/m b lrout 1 +lrout 2 > 99.9 %m/m b purity of extract (e) 88.89 %m/m a 93.5 %m/m a yield lrout1 6.46 %b lrout2 92.6 %b extract 68.1 %a lrout 1 +lrout 2 > 99.99 % 98.3 % productivity lrout 2 2.14 mingelsilicag bmg extract 0.54 mingelsilicag amg lrout 1 +lrout 2 2.16 mingelsilicag bmg extract 0.69 mingelsilicag amg eluent consumption lrout 2 0.134 bmg eluentfreshcm3 extract 0.403 amg eluentfreshcm3 lrout 1 +lrout 2 0.197 bmg eluentfreshcm3 extract 0.61 amg eluentfreshcm3 discussion our conclusion on the basis of laboratory gradient, 1:1:2:0 column configuration, open loop smb measurements is that varying the switching time of smb process results big changes in productivity. in our case we get the highest productivity at 9 min switching time. we significantly increased the operation results according to the preparative hplc measurement (table 3). table 3: results of the rg 1040 gsmb 8/46 measurement compared to preparative hplc measurement preparative hplc rg1040 smb8/46 measurement (9 min) purity of raffinate (lrout 2) >99.9 % m/m b >99.9 % m/m b yield (lrout 2) ~ 95 % b >92.6 % b productivity (lrout 2) 0.303 mingelsilicag bmg 2.14 mingelsilicag bmg eluent consumption (lrout 2) 0.354 bmg eluentfreshcm3 0.134 bmg eluentfreshcm3 26 we achieved 700% productivity increase and 50 % eluent consumption decrease beside more than 99.9 % m/m b purity and 90 % b yield. it could be seen, that the developed smb process was outstandingly economic, the value of the productivity was successfully increased to 3.082 kg b/ kg silica gel within a day, at 0.134 m3 fresh eluent/kg b steroid eluent consumption. symbols cacetone concentration of acetone, g dm-3 cb concentration of steroid b, g dm-3 ca concentration of steroid a, g dm-3 k number of components k’ capacity factor id column inner diameter, cm l column length, cm f flow rate of feed, cm3 min-1 d flow rate of fresh eluent, cm3 min-1 e flow rate of extract, cm3 min-1 r flow rate of raffinate, cm3 min-1 lrout outlet liquid at 1:1:2:0 column configuration at r=0 t switching time, min ε free volume coefficient, cm3 liquid free volume cm-3 column roh bulk density, g silica gel cm-3column ntp number of theoretical plates n number of columns references 1. broughton d. b., gerhold c. g. (1961) us pat. 2 985589 2. ruthven d. m., ching c. b., (1989) chem. eng. sci. 44 (5), 1011-1038 3. jupke a., epping a., schmidt-traub h., (2002) j. chromatogr. a, 944 93-117 4. giovanni o., mazzotti m., morbidelli m., denet f., hauck w., nicoud r., (2001) j. chromatogr. a, 919 1-12 5. antos d., seidel-morgenstern a., (2002) j. chromatogr., 944 77-91 6. antos d., seidel-morgenstern a., (2001) chem. eng. sci., 56 6667-6682 7. ziomek g., kaspereit m., jezowski j., seidelmorgenstern a., antos d., (2005) j. chromatogr a, 1070 111-124 8. jensen t., reijns t., billiet h., wielen l., (2000) j. chromatogr a, 873 149-162 9. houwing j., billiet h., wielen l., (2002) j. chromatogr a, 944 189-201 10. houwing j., hateren s., billiet h., wielen l., (2002) j. chromatogr a, 952 85-98 11. abel s., mazzotti m., morbidelli m. (2002), j. chromatogr a, 944 23-29 12. hauck w., ludemann-hombourger o., nicoud r. m., di giovanni o., mazzotti m., morbidelli m., prep 2001 14th international symposium exhibit & workshop on preparative/process chromatography, washington, dc. usa 13. migliorini c., mazzotti m., morbidelli m., (1998) j chromatogr. a, 827:2 161-173 14. szánya t., argyelán j., kováts s., hanák l., (2001) j chromatogr. a, 908 265-272 15. nagy m., molnár z., hanák l., argyelán j., szánya t., ravasz b., aranyi a., temesvári k., (2004) chromatographia, 60 s 181-187. 16. nagy m., molnár z., hanák l., argyelán j., szánya t., ravasz b., turza g., aranyi a., temesvári k., (2004) hungarian journal of industrial chemistry, 32 13-21 microsoft word szolcs_eloszo.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 32. pp. 65-71 (2004) separation by ion exchange and adsorption parametric pumping v. cycle efficiency for batch, thermal ion exchange parametric pumping l. hanák, t. szánya and p. szolcsányi department of chemical process engineering, university of veszprém, veszprém, hungary the theoretically best attainable separation can easily be determined in the function of the theoretical cycle number. in the reality, due to the non-equilibrium ion exchange, the mixing phenomena and the “run out” of characteristics, the performance of the actual process, especially in the production of high purity materials, a cycle efficiency value can be ordered to the parametric pumping processes. the authors investigated the relationships between the more important process and operation parameters and the cycle efficiency in aqueous media and in the presence of varion-ksm ion exchange resin, ca2+, k+ cations and cl– anions. introduction production of high purity materials accounts for the major production cost in fine chemical industries. there has been a growing demand for economical and energy-efficient separation processes. the increasing interest in this area is also reflected in the numerous research articles published in the field of ion exchange and adsorption separations [1-5]. among these processes parametric pumping is a technique which has been studied extensively [6-8]. the most important property of this process is the fact that it is a reagent-free separation process in which no regeneration chemicals are needed which may pollute the environment, and in which no regenerant can contaminate either product. emphasis is placed on the following areas: • development of adsorbents and ion exchange materials [3-4, 9-10]. • investigation of possible thermodynamic parameters [11-13]. • an improved theoretical understanding of the process [14-15]. • development of new process configurations [16-17]. • development of highly efficient processes [18]. in this paper experimental data were compared with the best attainable separation achieved by the application of theoretical cycles. cycle efficiency (ηi) was defined as the ratio of the theoretical and actual cycle numbers. it presents an interesting possibility in the evaluation of experimental results, especially in the production of high purity ionic compounds. experimental part an aqueous solution of calcium and potassium cations in the presence of chloride anion on a highly acidic cation exchanger (varion-ksm, nitrochemical works of balatonfűzfő, hungary) was selected as a model system. 66 the ion exchange isotherms were determined by simple batch equilibration of a known mass of resin with a given volume of solution of known concentration and ionic composition over 36 hours at temperatures 288k and 333k. the solution was then separated from the resin and the concentration of calcium and potassium in solution were measured. the ion exchanger phase concentration was calculated by mass balance. a preliminary summary of these data have been reported elsewhere [19]. the experimentally determined ion exchange isotherms and the ion exchange selectivity coefficient ( ca kt ) as a function of resin phase composition (yca) are shown in figs. 1-3. 0 20 40 60 80 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1yca++ tc a+ + / k + 288k 333k ca++-k+ -cl varion ksm co= 0.10 equ/dm3 0 20 40 60 80 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1yca++ tc a+ + / k + 288k 333k ca++-k+ -cl varion ksm co= 0.10 equ/dm3 figure 1. ion exchange equilibrium of ca2+ -k+ cations at temperatures of 288k and 333k, with a total cation content of 0.10 equ/dm3 knowledge of ion exchange isotherms at two temperatures is required numerically for the mathematical modelling of the process. in our case, the ion exchange selectivity coefficient ( ca kt ) as a function of resin phase composition (yca) was used for the definition of ion exchange equilibrium. the equilibrium data were fitted to a third degree polynome of the following form: dycybyat ca 2 ca 3 ca ca k +++= (1) a least square optimization of the equilibrium data gave the constants of eq.(1). these functions and constants were used in all calculations (table 1.). table 1. constants of the ion exchange selectivity coefficient at two temperatures c0=0.10equ/dm3 c0=0.50equ/dm3 c0=1.0equ/dm3 288k 333k 288k 333k 288k 333k a -38.17 26.55 -0.727 -14.9 5.485 5.99 b 99.12 7.25 12 33.28 -8.063 -8.748 c -100.4 -100.2 -22.89 -38.9 0.596 -0.936 d 40.65 70.03 12.15 21.2 2.186 4.02 the parametric pumping experiments were carried out in a laboratory scale, automatic apparatus, described in detail in the previous paper [20]. different size glass columns with jacket and reservoirs are included in the system for direct heat transfer experiments. 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1xca++ y c a+ + 288k 333k ca++-k+ -cl varion ksm co= 0.50 equ/dm3 0 5 10 15 20 25 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1yca++ tc a+ + / k + 288k 333k ca++-k+ -cl varion ksm co= 0.5 equ/dm3 figure 2. ion exchange equilibrium of ca2+ -k+ cations at temperatures of 288k and 333k, with a total cation content of 0.50 equ/dm3 the effect of the following more important operation and process parameters were investigated: • liquid flow rate (vo, from 0. 1 to 2. 3 m/s) • transfer of ion fraction during a half cycle(α’, from 0.026 to 1.0 (dimensionless)) • initial ion composition (xca,0, from 0.2 to 0.8) • length of ion exchanger column (l, from 0.5 to 1.5m) • total solution concentration (c0, from 0.1 to 1.0 equ/dm3). 67 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1xca++ y c a+ + 288k 333k ca++-k+ -cl varion ksm co= 1.0 equ/dm3 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1yca++ tc a+ + / k + 288k 333k ca++-k+ -cl varion ksm co= 1.0 equ/dm3 figure 3. ion exchange equilibrium of ca2+ -k+ cations at temperatures of 288k and 333k, with a total cation content of 1.0 equ/dm3 the following variables and operational conditions were fixed: • the temperatures (288k and 333k) in cold and hot half cycles • particle size of ion exchanger, dp = 0,5-0,7 mm • initial condition of the experiments, the ion exchanger column was always brought into equilibrium at the lower temperature (288k) with the solution to be separated • location of the cold reservoir and the hot reservoir, in our case, the hot reservoir was always connected to the upper part of the column • length of thermostating time is 15 minutes in case of a column diameter of 28 mm and, 8 minutes in case of a 10 mm column diameter • dead-volume of the equipment. according to the temperature dependence of the ion exchange equilibrium, the concentration of calcium ions decreased in the cooled reservoir (288k). in the other case the concentration of potassium ions decreased in the heated reservoir (333k). the total cationic concentration of the solution in the mentioned reservoirs was constant. a part of the experimental results and data was published in the previous paper [20]. table 2-4 summarizes the investigated parameters and results for selected experiments at three solution concentrations. publication of about 1000 determined reservoir concentration from 45 measuring series is not possible here, only the hot and cold reservoir concentrations of the 20th cycle are given. the comparison of the calculated and experimental results using relationships presented previously for a given parametric pumping operation, the theoretically best attainable separation can easily be determined in the function of the cycle number. knowing this, it presents an interesting possibility in the evaluation of experimental results as it is shown below. among the experimental data, the reservoir concentrations of the 20th cycle were taken as basic data. (the sensitivity of the used zeiss-aas1 atomic absorption spectrophotometer was table 2. conditions and results for selected batch experiments at 0.10equ/dm3 solution concentration, l=1.0m, db=28mm no. xca,0 ∆v,dm3 b,dm3/h c20 ,mequ/dm3 nt ηi p20 ,m/m% α' vo,mm/s ca2+ ca2+ ca2+ k+ k+ k+ k+ ca2+ 1 0.20 0.4 1.0 0.038 9.8 0.49 99.981 0.026 0.45 6.07 6.6 0.33 88.555 2 0.20 0.8 1.0 0.034 10.4 0.52 99.983 0.052 0.46 2.05 8.6 0.43 95.982 3 0.20 2 1.0 0.026 11.6 0.58 99.987 0.13 0.45 1.12 9.8 0.49 97.785 4 0.20 4 1.0 0.022 12.2 0.61 99.989 0.26 0.43 7.76 6.2 0.31 85.598 5 0.20 6 1 0.019 12.6 0.63 99.990 0.39 0.45 22.7 4.4 0.22 62.999 6 0.20 8 1 0.018 12.8 0.64 99.991 0.52 0.44 45.1 2.6 0.15 37.836 7 0.50 0.4 1.0 0.1 10.4 0.5 99.971 0.026 0.44 0.025 13.6 0.68 99.950 8 0.50 0.8 1 0.052 10.6 0.53 99.974 0.052 0.45 0.02 13.8 0.69 99.960 9 0.50 2 1 0.045 11.1 0.55 99.977 0.13 0.45 0.015 14.4 0.72 99.970 10 0.50 4 1 0.033 11.4 0.57 99.983 0.26 0.47 1.28 7.2 0.36 97.472 11 0.50 6 1 0.88 6.4 0.32 99.558 0.39 0.45 5.95 5 0.25 88.768 12 0.50 8 1 8.55 3.6 0.18 95.534 0.52 0.45 13.8 3 0.15 75.747 13 0.80 0.8 1 0.68 9 0.45 99.659 0.052 0.46 0.0033 14.4 0.72 99.993 14 0.80 2 1 13.4 5.4 0.27 92.819 0.13 0.45 0.0025 15.4 0.77 99.995 15 0.80 4 1 38 3.2 0.16 76.543 0.26 0.45 0.002 15.8 0.79 99.996 16 0.80 6 1 50.2 2.4 0.12 66.489 0.39 0.44 0.27 7.2 0.36 99.461 17 0.80 8 1 58 1.8 0.09 59.155 0.52 0.45 1.86 3.8 0.19 96.348 68 inadequate for the accurate determination of the low concentration of given component, after the 20th cycle). using the calculated data, the theoretical cycle number of the former reservoir concentrations was determined, and the cycle efficiency (ηi) was defined as the ratio of the theoretical and actual cycle numbers. it is shown in the function of process parameters for ca2+–k+ ion pairs, in the presence of cl– anions, and in the case of varion ksm cation exchanger resin. table 3. conditions and results for selected batch experiments at 0.50equ/dm3 solution concentration, l=1.53m, db=28mm, ∆v=800cm3, α’=0.17 no. xca,0 b,dm3/h c20 ,mequ/dm3 nt hi p20 ,m/m% vo,mm/s ca2+ ca2+ ca2+ k+ k+ k+ k+ ca2+ 1 0.20 0.2 0.014 15.6 0.78 99.999 0.09 0.92 9.2 0.46 99.908 2 0.20 0.4 0.018 15 0.75 99.998 0.18 0.88 9.4 0.47 99.912 3 0.20 0.7 0.02 14.8 0.74 99.998 0.32 14.9 5.6 0.28 98.487 4 0.20 1.1 0.025 14.4 0.72 99.997 0.51 20.7 4.2 0.21 97.886 5 0.20 1.6 0.032 13.2 0.66 99.997 0.71 23.2 3.6 0.18 97.625 6 0.20 2.8 0.74 7.6 0.38 99.926 1.24 25.1 3.2 0.16 97.425 7 0.50 0.4 0.11 13.6 0.68 99.989 0.18 0.07 12.2 0.61 99.993 8 0.50 0.7 0.24 12.2 0.61 99.976 0.31 0.11 11.2 0.56 99.989 9 0.50 1.1 0.56 8.6 0.43 99.944 0.50 0.83 8.2 0.41 99.917 10 0.50 1.6 0.76 6.4 0.32 99.924 0.71 2.1 7.6 0.38 99.790 11 0.50 2.8 0.9 4.8 0.24 99.910 1.24 6.8 4.8 0.24 99.315 12 0.80 0.4 4.2 9.6 0.48 99.578 0.18 0.004 16.6 0.83 99.999 13 0.80 0.7 14.9 8 0.4 98.487 0.31 0.005 16.2 0.81 99.999 14 0.80 1.1 38.7 5.4 0.27 95.974 0.48 0.01 15.5 0.77 99.999 15 0.80 1.6 44.2 4.8 0.24 95.376 0.71 0.025 13 0.65 99.997 16 0.8 2.8 51.5 4.2 0.21 94.570 1.22 0.23 8.2 0.41 99.977 in figure 4 is shown the effect of flow rate, in case of 0.5 equ/dm3 solution concentrations, if various initial ion compositions are used. the cycle efficiency was increasing with the decrease of flow rate but, the measure of growth and the values of cycle efficiencies varied widely. if the initial ion composition is low, then cycle efficiency generally increases for a given ion and the effect of flow rate is small. in figure 5 are shown the values of cycle efficiency as a function of the relative ion amount (α’) correspond to a half cycle, in case if various initial ion compositions and 0.1 equ/dm3 solution concentration. the curves reach maxima, indicating the lack of equilibrium. the place of the maxima shows the amount of relative ions (α’), which should be the load for the best separation. the role of the initial ion composition is clear: the maximum place of the given component is shifted to the larger loads, proportionally to the decrease of the initial ion composition. table 4. conditions and results for selected batch experiments at 1.0equ/dm3 solution concentration, l=1.50m, db=10mm, b=0.087dm3/h, v0=0.31mm/s no. xca,0 ∆v,dm3 c20 ,mequ/dm3 nt η i p20 ,m/m% α ' ca2+ ca2+ ca2+ k+ k+ k+ k+ ca2+ 1 0.20 0.1 0.035 16.1 0.80 99.998 0.17 6.01 10.6 0.53 99.699 2 0.20 0.1 0.01 18 0.9 99.999 0.34 10 9.6 0.48 99.497 3 0.20 0.2 0.01 18 0.9 99.999 0.68 426 3.4 0.17 72.935 4 0.20 0.3 0.01 18 0.9 99.999 1 552 2.4 0.12 61.878 5 0.50 0.1 0.65 13.8 0.7 99.967 0.17 3.96 9.4 0.47 99.802 6 0.50 0.1 0.13 16.4 0.82 99.993 0.34 0.17 15.6 0.78 99.991 7 0.50 0.2 0.18 15.8 0.79 99.991 0.68 0.08 16 0.8 99.996 8 0.50 0.3 76.80 5 0.25 96.007 1 131.00 3.2 0.16 92.991 9 0.80 0.1 2.72 13.2 0.66 99.864 0.17 0.65 11.6 0.58 99.967 10 0.80 0.1 1.12 15 0.75 99.944 0.34 0.01 17.2 0.86 99.999 11 0.80 0.2 354 3.6 0.18 78.493 0.68 0.006 18.2 0.91 99.999 12 0.80 0.3 500.3 2.4 0.12 66.640 1 0.61 11.8 0.59 99.969 in figure 6 are shown the effects of the above discussed components in case of 1 equ/dm3 solution concentration. the results are the same as above, besides the considerably greater loads. in figure 7 the effects of the total concentration of solutions are presented in the function of relative ion amounts, flown through during a half cycle. with the increase of solutions total concentration, markedly increases the cycle efficiency belonging to the maxima of the curves on one hand, while on the other hand the maximum cycle efficiencies appear always at higher loads of relative ion amounts. the equilibria related to ca2+–k+ ion pairs depends strongly on the total concentration of solutions (fig. 1-3.). increasing the concentration, the selectivity values decrease and the isotherms of the so called sigmoid shape form. figure 7 proves that the decrease of selectivity values improves the load of the column. due to the sigmoid type isotherm, at the concentration of 1 equ/dm3, the shape and the 69 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 vo, mm/s η c a+ + xca++,o=0.80 xca++,o=0.50 xca++,o=0.20 co=0.50 equ/dm3, l=1.0 m, db=28 mm, α'=0.17 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 vo, mm/s ηk + xca++,o=0.80 xca++,o=0.50 xca++,o=0.20 figure 4. the changes of cycle efficiencies in the function of the flow rate 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6α' η c a+ + xca++,o=0.80 xca++,o=0.50 xca++,o=0.20 co=0.10 equ/dm3, l=1.0 m, db=28mm, vo=0.45 mm/s 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6α' η k + xca++,o=0.80 xca++,o=0.50 xca++,o=0.20 figure 5. the changes of cycle efficiencies with α’ at different initial ion composition and at 0.1 equ/dm3 solution concentration 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2α' η c a+ + xca++,o=0.80 xca++,o=0.50 xca++,0=0.20 co=1.0 equ/dm3 vo=0.31 mm/s l=1.5 m, db=10 mm 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 α' η κ + xca++,o=0.80 xca++,o=0.50 xca++,o=0.20 figure 6. the changes of cycle efficiencies with α’ at different initial ion composition at 1 equ/dm3 solution concentration 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 α' η c a+ + co=0.10 equ/dm3 co=0.50 equ/dm3 co=1.0 equ/dm3 vo=0.31 mm/s, l=1.5 m, db=10 mm, xca++,o =0.80 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 α' η k + co=0.10 equ/dm3 co=0.50 equ/dm3 co=1.0 equ/dm3 figure 7. the changes of cycle efficiencies with different solution concentration 70 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0.5 1 1.5 l, m η c a+ + xca++,o=0.80 xca++,o=0.50 xca++,o=0.20 co=0.50 equ/dm3, vo=0.18 mm/s, db=28 mm, α'=0.13 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0.5 1 1.5 l, m η k + xca++,o=0.80 xca++,o=0.50 xca++,o=0.20 figure 8. the changes of cycle efficiency with the length of ion exchange column position of cycle efficiency curves of ca2+ and k+ are very similar, this is very advantageous, because the column can be operated with optimum load regarding both the ions. at last, in figure 8 are shown the change of cycle efficiencies as a function of column height, in case of 0.5 equ/dm3 initial concentration and different initial ion composition. the cycle efficiencies increase in different extent with the column height. in given circumstances, the number of equilibrium units formed in the column is proportional with the length of the ion exchanger charge, filled in the column. this basically determines the level of the component separation. summary the results of these calculations were used in the evaluation of results determined in the experiments with ca2+–k+ ion pair, the idea of cycle efficiency was defined. this is the ratio of the theoretical and practical cycle numbers belonging to a given reservoir concentration. with the help of the cycle efficiency, diagrams were constructed to elucidate the effect of some operation parameters on the component separation. with the selection of appropriate parameters and starting concentration in favourable composition range, the cycle efficiencies remain high, and the products purity reach the 99.99 or 99.999 m/m% values. symbols v0 superficial velocity of liquid phase xj ion ratio of component “j” in the liquid phase xj,0 initial ion ratio of component “j” in the liquid phase yj ion ratio of component “j” in resin phase c0 total cationic concentration of liquid phase c20,j reservoir concentration of component “j” after the 20th cycle l the length of ion exchange column nt theoretical cycle number p20,j product purity of component “j” after the 20th cycle i jt ion exchange selectivity coefficient of ion “i”, related to ion “j” ∆v volume flow through in half cycle α’ dimensionless ion proportion, the ratio of cation amount flowing through during half cycle and ion exchange capacity of the column ηi cycle efficiency related to component “i” 71 references 1. humphrey j.: chem. eng. prog.,1995, 91(10), 31-41 2. keller g.: chem. eng. prog.,1995, 91(10), 56-67 3. sheng p. z. and costa c. a. v.: ind. eng. chem.res.,1998, 37(12), 4808-4815 4. diaz m., rendueles m., fernandez a. and suarez c.: sep. sci. techn.,1998, 33(7), 1025-1042 5. agrawal a. and burns m. a.: aiche j.,1996, 42(1), 131-146 6. diez s, leitao a., ferreira l. m. and rodrigues a. e.:sep. purif. techn., 1998, 13, 25-35 7. simon g., hanák l., grevillot g., szánya t. and marton g.: j. chrom. b, 1995, 664, 17-31 8. simon g., hanák l., grevillot g., szánya t. and marton g.: chem. eng. sci., 997, 52, 467-480 9. ivanov v. a., timofeevskaja v. d., garlina o. t. and gorshkov v. i.: microporous and mesoporous materials, 2003, 65, 257-265 10. ivanov v. a., timofeevskaja v. d. and gorshkov v. i.: react. polym., 1992, 17(1), 101-107 11. ahmed z. m.: react. polym., 1987, 5(3), 227235 12. kiefer r. and höll w. h.: react. funct. polym., 2000, 45, 197-210 13. ferreira l. m. and rodrigues a. e.: adsorption, 1995, 1(3), 233-252 14. grevillot g., bailly m. and tondeur d.: int. chem. eng., 1982, 22, 440-455 15. ferreira l. m. and rodrigues a. e.: adsorption, 1995, 1(3), 213-231 16. nikolaev n. p., muraviev d. n. and muhammed m.: sep. sci. techn., 1997, 32(1-4), 849-866 17. sheng p. z. and costa c. a. v.: sep. sci. techn., 1997, 12(1), 81-95 18. wankat p. c.: large-scale adsorption and chromatography, crc press, boca raton, 1986 19. hanák l., szánya t. and szolcsányi p.: hung. j. ind. chem., 1988,16, 253-260. 20. szánya t., hanák l., mohilla r. and szolcsányi p.: hung. j. ind. chem., 1988, 16, 261-271. microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 37(2) pp. 165-167 (2009) new results on the field of “white biotechnology” a. nemeth , g. nagy, b. sevella budapest university of technology and econpomics, department of applied biotechnology and food science h–1111 budapest műegyetem rkp. 3., hungary e-mail: naron@f-labor.mkt.bme.hu “white biotechnology” term is used to describe the production of chemical compounds by enzymatic or microbial (biotechnological) methods. our research group focuses on the field of glycerol utilization and lactic acid production, and in this work we present a new kinetic model based on our laboratory lactic acid experiments, and used for planning continuous fermentation with high productivity. keywords: lactic acid, kinetic model, continuous fermentation introduction “white biotechnology” was defined by karl-erich jaeger [1] as an expression describing the biotechnological production of compounds with the help of enzymes and/or microorganisms. the work in our research group has been focusing on this field since many years, and the main topics became glycerol and lactic acid platforms. in this report we present the results of our developments on the field of fermentative lactic acid production. lactic acid (la) is a chiral carbon acid, known since more than a century, and used over several decades mostly for food industry. recently its application field was significantly expanded (pharmaceutical and polymer industry) as well as its production volume, thus it came again into the focus of researches. although it can be produced chemically as well as biologically, in the former case racemic mixture is formed, in the latter case – depending on the producer strain – optically pure (lor d-lactic acid) arises. most probably this is the reason, why it is mainly biologically produced via microbial fermentation. the fermentation ability of microorganism admit of biological production of lactic acid on glucose (glu) substrate resulting in either lactic acid alone as product (homofermentatives, using embden-meyerhof-parnas metabolic route) or lactic acid together with further products such as acetic acid, ethanol, co2 (heterofermentatives, pentose-phosphate route). there are also some strains producing solely lactic acid on glycose, or together with by-products on c5 sugars. they are usually called as facultative homofermentatives. while from the point of view of white biotechnology certainly homofermentatives are of most important, for the food industry heterofermentatives are also in the focus of interest. the reason is that in the former case the goal is to convert as much substrate into product as much is possible, while in the latter case, the given ratio of the various fermentation products serves as aroma and flavour compounds. the efficiency of lactic acid fermentation is usually given with volumetric productivity (g lactic acid/l broth/hour). in this term the published data are in a very wide range (1.5–35 g·l-1·h-1) [2] depending on the applied strain, fermentation technique, and media. however, the known industrial processes with batch operation resultin a productivity range of 2.5–3 g·l-1·h-1. we already presented [3-4] that our homofermentative microorganism belonging to lactobacilli genus makes a competitive lactic acid production possible. in this report we present a kinetic model built up on the basis of several batch lactic acid fermentations. this model was applied in simulation studies to plan continuous fermentation resulting in higher volumetric productivity. material and methods lactobacillus mkt878 was chosed on the basis of an earlier screening program run at our laboratory [3] and was deposited at national collection of agricultural and industrial microorganism with reference number ncaim-b02375. batch fermentation were carried out on the media optimized for this strains previously as follows: 120 g·l-1 glucose, 30 g·l-1 cornstep-liquor (hungrana, roquette), 6 g·l-1 yeast extract (ye), 0.5 g·l-1 mgso4·7h2o, 0.3 g·l-1 feso4·7h2o, 0.01 g·l-1 mnso4. fermentations were carried out in biostat q bench top fermenter (bbraun) at ph = 5.8 (controlling with 20% naoh and 25% h2so4), 37 °c and 700 rpm stirring 166 rate. 3 agar slants served as inoculums after suspension of cells in sterile water. the process was followed due sampling, and od600 was measured after 20x dilution to determine cell density (dry weight (g·l-1) = 0.5·od600). the filtered (through 0,2 μm pore size filter)) supernatant of the sample was analysed with waters breeze hplc system (0,5 ml·min-1 5 mm h2so4 as eluant on biorad aminex hpx87h column at 65 °c with ri detection at 40 °c) for glucose and lactic acid. since the rather rare sampling there were not enough measured data for kinetic evaluation, further dry weight, glucose and lactic acid data was calculated on the basis of base consumption (of ph control) which is proportional to the cell and product formation, and these data series were used for fitting the kinetic equations with berkeley madonna 8. software. for the calculation of dry weight, glucose and lactic acid the following factors were applied: odcalculated = 1.26·base consumption, dwcalculated = 0.5·odcalculated lacalculated=0.52·base consumption, glucalculated = glu0-(dwcalculated-lacalculated)·1.2 results in fig. 1 a tipical batch fermentation is shown with the measured and calculated data points, the latter was enabling the kinetic studies. 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 20 40 60 [g*l-1] fermentation time [h] 090219 la measured la calculated glucose measured glucose calculated od measured dw calculated base consumption figure 1: batch la fermetnation as basis of our fermentation model the monod equation was applied (eq. 1) completed with the product formation model of luedeking-piret (eq. 2). while the monod-model can calculate the changes in biomass concentration, l-p model is able to predict the changes in product concentration. the substrate consumption was calculated with the overall yield (yx/s) from the growth rate (eq. 3). the applied initial conditions were as follows: s0 = 105.3 g·l-1, x0 = 0.67 g·l-1 and p0 = 3.3 g·l-1. sk sx dt dx s + ⋅=⋅= max, μμμ (1) xbxa dt dp ⋅+⋅⋅= μ (2) dt dx ydt ds sx ⋅−= / 1 (3) it can be seen on fig. 1 biomass reaches its maximum (plateau) much earlier than the product concentration. the 1-3. equation system is not able to handle this situation, since through the overall yield the biomass is connected directly to the substrate. thus, when the culture reaches its plateau, the substrate has already zero value, although according to the measurements, there is a continuing product formation from substrate. to solve this problem, the model had to be reconstructed as follows: the growth-independent part of the product formation had to be converted into maintenance term (eq. 4) which appeared also in the substrate equation (eq. 5) xmxa dt dp ⋅+⋅⋅= μ (4) xm dt dx ydt ds sx ⋅−⋅−= / 1 (5) the value of the specific maintenance coefficient (‘m’) was determined from the slope of the substrate consumption, after the biomass reached its plateau. in the case of the presented fermentation (fig. 1) m = 0.222 h-1 was obtained. finally 3 variables had to be fitted to 3 data series, meanwhile 3 parameter had to be determined (yield, ks, μmax) for the flexibility of the model the duration of the lagphase and the time point of cell growth stop had to be determined either by experiments or simulations. the measured and simulated data of the presented (fig. 1) batch fermentation can be seen on fig. 2. 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 c on ce nt ra tio ns [ g* l1 ] fermentation time [h] calculated and simulated values 090219 s(model) gluc(calculated) p(model) la(calculated) x(model) dw(calculated) r2 average=0.998 figure 2: fitting model to calculated dataseries model fitting resulted in an adequate model with the following parameters: μmax = 0.134 h-1, ks = 0.268 g·l-1, yx/s = 0.143 g·g-1, tlag = 0.132 h, tstop = 20.22 h, a = yp/yx/s = 4.18. 167 although, the fitting results showed excellent agreement with the experimental data further fermentation was used for model verification (fig. 3). 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 0 20 40 60 80 100 co nc en tr at io ns [ g* l1 ] fermentation time [h] measured and simulated values 081030 s(model) gluc(measured) p(model) la(measured) x(model) dw(measured) r2 average=0.89 figure 3: model verification with further fementation, tlag = 26,5 h, tstop = 46 h since the correlation in this case was also appropriate after setting up the individual parameters (i.e. tlag and tstop), we used this model to predict the behaviour of a continuous system. figure 4: modelling continuous operation (1) cell growth stop (tstop) (2) feed start with sf = 80 g·l-1 substrate concentration the aim of our simulation was to reach high volumetric productivity beside high (industrially preparable, cost effective) product concentration. according to simulation results (fig. 4) beside d = 0.1 h-1 dilution rate 51.6 g·l la concentration can be reached, which resulted in jp = 5.2 g·l·h-1 volumetric productivity, that is nearly two fold of the original batch process’s value. since the presented product concentration is really high, before using the model in further simulation studies we want to try experimentally to verify the continuous operation. summary during the development of a fermentation technology of the more and more promisable and platform forming lactic acid we build up a kinetic model, which is able to describe the two steps of the fermentation: 1. cell growth, and 2. product formation as a “byproduct” of energy production of cells for maintenance. this model predict results beeing very closely to the measured data, thus we used it for examining the continuous operation of la fermentations. references 1. jaeger k. e.: current opinion in biotechnology, 15:269–271, (2004). 2. rojan p. j., k. madhavan nampoothiri, ashok pandey: applied microbiology and biotechnology, 74, 524–534 (2007), mini review. 3. hetényi k., németh á., sevella b.: fifth croatian professional and scientific conference on biotechnology with international participation 2007, stubicke toplice. 4. hetényi k., németh á., sevella b.: 35. műszaki kémiai napok 2007, veszprém, 164–167. << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /createjdffile false /description << /ara /bgr /chs /cht /cze /dan /deu /esp /eti /fra /gre /heb /hrv (za stvaranje adobe pdf dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. stvoreni pdf dokumenti mogu se otvoriti acrobat i adobe reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /hun /ita /jpn /kor /lth /lvi /nld (gebruik deze instellingen om adobe pdf-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. de gemaakte pdf-documenten kunnen worden geopend met acrobat en adobe reader 5.0 en hoger.) /nor /pol /ptb /rum /rus /sky /slv /suo /sve /tur /ukr /enu (use these settings to create adobe pdf documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. created pdf documents can be opened with acrobat and adobe reader 5.0 and later.) >> /namespace [ (adobe) (common) (1.0) ] /othernamespaces [ << /asreaderspreads false /cropimagestoframes true /errorcontrol /warnandcontinue /flattenerignorespreadoverrides false /includeguidesgrids false /includenonprinting false /includeslug false /namespace [ (adobe) (indesign) (4.0) ] /omitplacedbitmaps false /omitplacedeps false /omitplacedpdf false /simulateoverprint /legacy >> << /addbleedmarks false /addcolorbars false /addcropmarks false /addpageinfo false /addregmarks false /convertcolors /converttocmyk /destinationprofilename () /destinationprofileselector /documentcmyk /downsample16bitimages true /flattenerpreset << /presetselector /mediumresolution >> /formelements false /generatestructure false /includebookmarks false /includehyperlinks false /includeinteractive false /includelayers false /includeprofiles false /multimediahandling /useobjectsettings /namespace [ (adobe) (creativesuite) (2.0) ] /pdfxoutputintentprofileselector /documentcmyk /preserveediting true /untaggedcmykhandling /leaveuntagged /untaggedrgbhandling /usedocumentprofile /usedocumentbleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /hwresolution [2400 2400] /pagesize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 36(1-2) pp. 131-136 (2008) separation of the enantiomers of p-chiral cyclic phosphorus compounds v. ujj1 , t. szuhánszki1, j. schindler2, m. czugler3, e. fogassy1, gy. keglevich1 1budapest university of technology and economic, department of organic chemistry and technology h-1521 budapest, hungary e-mail: vujj@mail.bme.hu 2budapest university of technology and economics, research group of the hungarian academy of sciences at the department of organic chemistry and technology, h-1521 budapest, hungary 3hungarian academy of sciences, chemical research center, institute of structural chemistry h-1525 budapest, hungary the antipodes of 1-aryl-, 1-alkyland 1-alkoxy-3-methyl-3-phospholene 1-oxides 1a-h were separated in good yields and in high enantiomeric excesses (up to >99% ee) by resolution via formation of diastereomeric complexes with (–)-(4r,5r)-4,5-bis(diphenylhydroxymethyl)-2,2-dimethyldioxolane (–)-2 (taddol) or (–)-(2r,3r)-α,α,α’,α’-tetraphenyl1,4-dioxaspiro[4.5]decan-2,3-dimethanol (–)-3. the resolution process of 1 with (–)-3 was further examined in various mixture of solvents. stereostructure of the supramolecular formations and absolute configuration of the resulting 3-phospholene oxides (–)-1a, (+)-1e, (+)-1f were elucidated by single crystal x-ray crystallography.1-4 the method extended to the resolution of the 1-phenyl-3-methyl-3-phospholene 1-sulfide2 4, 6-diethylamino-dibenzo[c.e][5,6]oxaphosphorine 6-oxide 5, 1-[(1’r,2’s,5’r)-(–)-menthyl]-3-methyl-3-phospholene 1-oxide 6 and 3and 5-methyl-1-phenyl-4-chloro-1,2-dihydrophosphinine 1-oxide 7, suggesting that our novel procedure may be of general value. keywords: p-chiral, resolution, diastereomeric complex, phospholene oxide, introduction phosphine oxides form an important class of phosphorus compounds, since they are precursors of the corresponding phosphines which, in turn, may serve as ligands in transition metal complexes that can be applied in several highly efficient homogenous catalytic processes.5,6 resolution and asymmetric synthesis are the primary sources of p-chiral compounds. despite the large number of enantioselective syntheses elaborated for the preparation of a single enantiomer to achieve industrial and scientific goals, resolution has not lost its significance.7 there are several methods for chiral separation, based on induced crystallization,8 resolution by diastereomeric salt formation,9 diastereomeric complex formation,10 separation by crystallization,9 distillation,11 supercritical fluid extraction12 and membrane separation,13 resolution with mixtures of resolving agents,14 by formation of covalent diastereomers9 and kinetic resolution.15 the methods described in the literature on the resolution of p(iii) and p(v) phosphorus compounds are based on the formation of separable covalent diastereomers, diastereomeric salts, diastereomeric transition metal complexes and molecular complexes, as well as chemical and enzymatic kinetic resolution.5 direct acid-base resolutions of a carboxylic acid derivative of a phosphine sulfide,16 with (+)or (–)-1-phenylethylamine are known. the resolution of phosphonium salts can be accomplished by combining the racemate with the silver salt of a chiral acid.17 enantiomeric separation of p=o derivatives via inclusion complex formation with host compounds such as 2,2'-dihydroxy-1,1'binaphthalene18 was reported previously. although these methods proved to be useful in some special cases, they did not turn out to be general. several chiral transition metal complexes, such as pd, pt, ni and fe complexes were found to be useful in the separation of racemic phosphines.19 although, the resolution via transition metal complexes was found to be reasonably general and efficient, the cost of these reagents limited its usefulness. an efficient and simple resolution process of 1-substituted-3-methyl-3-phospholene 1-oxides 1a-h has been developed. our resolution method suggested seems to be of general value for enantiomer separation of p-heterocycles. these p-chiral compounds can be ligands in transition metal complexes. 132 experimental resolution of 1-phenyl-3-methyl-3-phospholene 1-oxide 1a with taddol (–)-2 in a mixture of ethyl acetate and hexane. representative procedure. to 0.48 g (2.49 mmol) of racemic 1-phenyl-3-methylphosphol-3-ene 1-oxide 1a and 0.58 g (1.245 mmol) of taddol (–)-2 in 1 ml of hot ethyl acetate was added 5 ml of hexane. after the addition, colourless crystals of the complex started to appear immediately. after standing at room temperature for 2 hours without stirring, the crystals were separated by filtration to give 0.59 g (72%) of complex ((–)-1a·(–)-2); enantiomeric purity determined by hplc (daicel chem. ind., chiralpack ad), 71% ee. the complex was further purified by two recrystallizations at room temperature from ethyl acetate–hexane (1 ml/5 ml) to afford complex (–)-1a·(–)-2 in 54% yield with 87% ee and in 43% yield with 97% ee, respectively. column chromatography (silica gel, chloroform) of the complex regenerated 96 mg (40%) of the enantiomerically pure (–)-(s)-1-phenyl-3methyl-3-phospholene 1-oxide (–)-1a; enantiomeric purity, 97% ee, [α]d 25 = –37.0 (c 1, chcl3).2 results and discussion resolution of racemic 3-phospholene 1-oxides 1 five-membered p-heterocycles, such as 1-substituted-3phospholene 1-oxides 1 are of synthetic importance, as they can be used as starting materials in the preparation of a variety of five-, six-, seven-, and eight-membered p-heterocycles including bridged derivatives. we assumed that the 1-substituted-3-methyl-3-phospholene 1-oxides 1, which have neither acidic nor basic functional groups, could be resolved via molecular complex formation.1 therefore racemic phospholene oxide 1a was attempted to be resolved via diastereomeric complex formation by adding half equivalent of tartaric acid, o,o’-dibenzoyltartaric acid, taddol20 2 or its derivative20 3, ephedrine, 2,2'-dihydroxy-1,1'-binaphthalene, menthol, phenylalanin, prolin and ascorbic acid. we found that only taddol 2 and its derivative 3 could form co-crystalls with the phospholene oxides 1a-h. the use of other chiral auxiliaries did not afford crystallizing distereomers. enantiomerically pure 1-substituted-3-methyl-3phospholene oxides 1a-h were prepared by molecular complex formation with chiral host (–)-2 or (–)-3 fig 1 and table 1. to a solution of racemic phospholene 1-oxide 1a-h and half equivalent of (–)-taddol 2 or its analogue (–)-3 in hot ethyl acetate was added hexane where upon a 1·(–)-2 or a 1·(–)-3 crystalline complex precipitated. complexes 1a-d·(–)-2 and 1a-d·(–)-3 were analyzed by chiral hplc (chiralpack ad), while species 1e-h· (–)-2 and 1e-h·(–)-3 by chiral gc (betadectm, after decomp.). the enantiomeric purities of 1a-h obtained were 10-96% ee table 1. recrystallization of these complexes from a mixture of ethyl acetate–hexane significantly improved the enantiomeric excesses of the complexes 1·(–)-2 and 1·(–)-3, up to >99% ee in most cases table 1. after flash column chromatography, 3-phospholene 1-oxides 1a-h were recovered quantitatively without the loss of chirality. in most cases, the 1:1 complexes of 1·(–)-2 or 1·(–)-3 were formed. in the instance of 1-propyl-3-phospholene oxide 1f and resolving agent (–)-3, a 1:2 complex of (+)-1f·(–)-3 was obtained as shown by the 1h nmr spectrum. for this, the resolution of 1f was achieved with the use of 1 equivalent of (–)-3. interestingly, in all cases but two, the resolving agents (–)-2 and (–)-3 preferred the complex formation with the same enantiomer of the given 3-phospholene oxides 1a-e, h. in case of 1f and 1g, (–)-2 and (–)-3 formed complexes with opposite antipodes. the separation of the covalent diastereomers of 1-[(1’r,2’s,5’r)-(–)-menthyl]-3-methyl-3-phospholene 1-oxide 6 has not been investigated. using resolving agent (–)-3 to the separation of covalent diastereomer was successful (90% de in 45% yield). to clarify the absolute configuration of (–)-1a, (+)-1e and (+)-1f, the supramolecular formations (–)-1a·(–)-2 acetone, (+)-1e·(–)-3 and (+)-1f·(–)-2 were subjected to single crystal x-ray analysis. the absolute configuration of the p atom in (–)-1a, (+)-1e and (+)-1f was found to be s,1 r2 and r,2 respectively.1-4 r = me r = me (2), (3) oo hooh ph phph php yo + 0.5 rac-1 (r,r)-2 or (r,r)-3 etoac/hexane oo hooh ph phph ph p yo p yo (r,r)-2·1 or (r,r)-3·1 1 + r r r r • ph 2-meph 4-meph 1-naph et pr eto 2-pro (1a) (1b) (1c) (1d) (1e) (1f) (1g) (1h) y = figure 1: resolution of 3-phospholene 1-oxides 1 with taddol derivatives (–)-2 and (–)-3 133 table 1: resolution of 1-aryl-, 1-alkyland 1-alkoxy-3-methyl-3-phospholene 1-oxides 1a-h with chiral host 2 and 3.2 complex forming agents 1.(–)-2 1.(–)-3 subst. eea (%) yield (%) sb [α]d c eea (%) yield (%) sb [α]d c 1a 97 (71) [s]d 44 0.43 >99 (53) [s] 29 0.29 – 37.0 1b 57 (31) [s] 49 0.28 >99 (48) [s]e 41 0.41 – 28.6 1c 69 (29) [s] 42 0.29 >99 (11) [s]e 30 0.30 – 39.1 1d 70 (25) 42 0.29 >99 (27) 55 0.55 – 40.9 1e 24 (10) [r] 36 0.09 58 (23) [r]d 45 0.26 + 8.7 1f 95 (68) [r]d 35 0.33 + 13.4 89 (29)f [s] 30 0.27 1g 44 (20) [s] 25 0.11 95 (58) [r]e 50 0.48 – 10.6 1h >99 (89) [r] 5 0.05 >99 (96) [r]e 37 0.37 – 15.6 athe enantiomeric purities were determined by chiral hplc (chiralpack ad) or chiral gc (betadectm) after two recrystallizations (and after crystallization). bresolving capability, also known as the fogassy parameter (s = yield*enantiomeric purity). cspecific rotation of the regenerated enantiomer (c 1, chcl3). dabsolute configuration was determined by x-ray analyses. eabsolute configuration was determined by cd spectroscopy. fone equivalent of 3 was used. single crystal x-ray analysis of (–)-1a·(–)-2 and (+)-1e·(–)-3 final structure models are shown in figs 2 and 3 with the basic h-bridges indicated.1,2 the resulting crystal structure models are well ordered and contain in all cases, with 1:1 stoichiometry, the associated forms of the resolving agents with either one of the phospholene target guest molecules as in 1a·2 and 1e·3. the crystal structure of (–)-1a·(–)-2 contains an acetone molecule, so, in this case, a ternary complex (–)-1a·(–)-2·acetone is formed fig. 2. thus acetone acts not only as a cosolvent but is also essential in sustaining a closely packed crystal made up of semi-rigid molecules (–)-1a and (–)-2.1 the resolving machinery is affected by the interplay of the anchoring and identical primary o–h···o hydrogen bridges to the guest p=o functions, as well as by a series of weaker c–h···o interactions. such weak stabilizing c–h···o interactions can be formed between the oxygen atom of one of the hydroxy groups of taddol (–)-2 and the c4 atom of the p-heterocycle, and the oxygen atom of one of the hydroxy groups of taddol (–)-2 and the c4’ carbon of the phenyl ring in the crystal structure of (–)-1a·(–)-2·acetone.3 other weak interactions, such as the one between the oxygen atom of the p=o function and the c2 carbon of the p-heterocycle, and another one between the oxygen atom of one of the hydroxy groups of taddol derivative (–)-3 and the suitable hydrogen atom of the p-species stabilise the crystal structure of (+)-1e·(–)-3 fig. 3. figure 2: x-ray structure of the 1:1:1 coordinatoclathrate inclusion of 1-phenyl-3-methyl-3-phospholene 1-oxide (–)-1a with taddol (–)-2 and acetone with the basic h-bridge interactions indicated by blue lines for (–)-1a·(–)-2·acetone.1 figure 3: x-ray structure of the 1:1 inclusion of 1-ethyl-3-methyl-3-phospholene 1-oxide (+)-1e with taddol derivative (–)-3 with the basic h-bridge interactions indicated by blue lines for (+)-1e·(–)-3.2 134 solvent dependence of the resolution although, the resolution of phospholene oxides 1 with (–)-2 and (–)-3 were accomplished in ethyl acetatehexane mixture, the single crystals could only be obtained from acetone-pentane mixture. the presence of acetone influences the formation of the crystal structures of the complexes. in the case of the complex (–)-1a·with (–)-2, the acetone was incorporated to the crystal structure and a ternary complex was grown. into the crystal structure of (+)1e·(–)-3 and (+)-1f·(–)-2 acetone was not incorporated. in the course of growing a single crystal of (–)-1b-d with (–)-3, the acetone displaces the phospholene oxides from the crystals completly, because acetone may be a more suitable h acceptor for the h bridges than the phospholene oxides. the presence of acetone effected significantly the structures of the single crystals, suggesting that the acetone could effect the efficiency of the resolution as well. the results of the resolution of phospholene oxides 1a-h with (–)-3 from a mixture of acetone-hexane is summarized in table 2. it can be seen that the efficiency of the resolutions was improved in all cases. table 2: resolution of 1-aryl-, 1-alkyland 1-alkoxy-3methyl-3-phospholene 1-oxides 1 with chiral host (–)-3 in acetone-hexane complex forming agents 1.(–)-3 subst. enantiomeric puritya (% ee) sb abs. config. 1a 97 0.81 [s] 1b 88 0.42 [s] 1c 27 0.25 [s] 1d 71 0.23 1e 55 0.42 [s] 1f 38 0.34 [s] 1g 93 0.67 [r] 1h >99 0.56 [r] athe enantiomeric purities were determined by chiral hplc (chiralpack ad) or chiral gc (betadectm) after crystallization. bresolving capability, also known as the fogassy parameter (s=yield*enantiomeric purity). in the next part of the work, resolution processes of 1a with (–)-3 were further tested in various other solvents or solvent mixtures, but no crystals were obtained. therefore, the resolution process of 1a was further examined in ethyl acetate-hexane mixture adding another solvent as an additive (2 eq., based on the racemate of 1a). the results are summarized in table 3. sakai and co-workers examined the effect of the solvent(s) on the resolution process via diastereomeric salt formation. they observed that the efficiency of the resolution via diastereomeric salt formation was dependent on the dielectric constant (ε) of the solvents used. they called this phenomenon dielectrically controlled resolution process (dcr).21,22 we found that the resolution of (–)-1a·with (–)-3 via diastereomeric complex formation took place with a good efficiency only when the additive used had a dielectric constant (ε) of lower than 40 fig. 4. table 3: resolution of 1-phenyl-3-methyl-3-phospholene 1-oxides 1a with chiral host (–)-3 in ethyl acetate-hexane in the presence of additive (–)-1a.(–)-3 additive 2 eq. dielectrically constant (ε) enantiomeric puritya (% ee) sb acetone 20.7 86 0.60 dmso 46.7 25 0.32 dmf 36.7 71 0.63 acetonitrile 37.5 63 0.49 acetic acid 6.2 75 0.47 water 78.5 12 0.11 mek 18.5 74 0.52 mibk 13.1 73 0.55 ethanol 24.6 78 0.57 athe enantiomeric purities were determined by chiral hplc (chiralpack ad) after crystallization. bresolving capability, also known as the fogassy parameter (s=yield*enantiomeric purity). figure 4: dependence of the resolution on the dielectric constant of the additive dutch resolution the efficiency of a resolution can be improved in the presence of a chiral or achiral, structurally similar derivative of the substrate or the resolving agent (e.g. dutch resolution).23,24 we found that the result of the resolution of 1-phenyl-3-methyl-3-phospholene oxide (1a) with chiral host (–)-3 was improved in the presence of impurities. the resolution of pure 1a with (–)-3 led to the corresponding complex (–)-1a·(–)-3 of 53% diastereomeric excess in 87% yield. we obtained the best results when we used crude 1a. in this case the diastereomeric excess of the complex (–)-1a·(–)-3 formed was 79% de in 71% yield. it was also interesting that the resolution 1-phenyl-3methyl-3-phospholene oxide 1a with 0.25 equiv. of (–)-2 and 0.25 equiv. of (–)-3 proved to be more efficient than with either 0.5 equiv. of (–)-2 or with 0.5 equiv. of (–)-3. diastereomeric excesses of the complexes (–)-1a· 135 (–)-2·(–)-3, (–)-1a·(–)-2 and (–)-1a·(–)-3, were 77%, 71% and 53%, respectively. the (–)-1a·(–)-2·(–)-3 complex contained 40% of (–)-2 and 60% of (–)-3 based on 1h nmr. the experiments for the separation of the enantiomers of 1-phenyl-3-methyl-3-phospholene sulfide 4 with (–)-3 were puzzling at first. the resolution of the pure racemic compound 4 with (–)-3 was not too efficient (24% de). when substrate 4 contained 4% of 1-phenyl3-methyl-2-phospholene sulfide, the enantiomeric purity of the complex (+)-4 [(–)-3]2 was quite similar (20% de). the efficiency of the resolution was, however, improved significantly by using the crude product of the synthesis of 4. in this case, the diastereomeric excess of the complex (+)-4 [(–)-3]2 formed was 65% after crystallization and >99% after recrystallization ([α]d 20= –65.2 (c 1, chcl3)). the 1h nmr spectrum suggested a 1:2 stochiometry of (+)-4 and (–)-3. the 1-phenyl-3-methyl-3-phospholene sulfide was regenerated by column chromatography ([α]d 20= +7.8 (c 1, chcl3)).2 resolution of other p-heterocycles our resolution method was tested on other p-heterocycles to prove that our novel procedure may be of general value for the resolution of p-chiral cyclic compounds. the resolution of 6-diethylamino-dibenzo[c.e][5,6]oxaphosphorine 6-oxide 5 with (–)-3 was not efficient (51% de). in the course of preparation of 3and 5-methyl-4chloro-1-phenyl-1,2-dihydrophosphinine 1-oxide 7, two double-bondisomers were obtained25 that could not be separated. therefore an 1:3 mixture of dihydrophosphinine oxides 7 was resolved with (–)-3. the ratio of the double-bondisomers remained the same after crystallization and recrystallization of the diastereomers. after the resolution, dihydrophosphinine-oxides 7a and 7b with (–)-3, the diastereomers were obtained with 90% ee and in 33% yield. p s ph me o p o net2 p o o me p o ph cl 4 5 6 7 r2r1 r1 r2 h me (a) me h (b) conclusion an efficient and simple resolution process of 1-substituted3-methyl-3-phospholene 1-oxides 1a-h was developed. in our resolution method of 1a-h were resolved with half equivalent of (–)-2 or (–)-3. we found that the efficiency of the resolution is highly dependent on the solvents or the additives. the method suggested seems to be of general value for enantiomer separation of pheterocycles. acknowledgement authors are grateful for the financial support from the hungarian scientific research fund (otka, grants nos. t075236, t067679). mc acknowledges the national science and technology office for an x-ray diffractometer purchase grant (mu-00338/2003). the authors are grateful to dr. tibor novák for the fruitful discussions. references 1. novák t., schindler j., ujj v., czugler m., fogassy e., keglevich gy.: tetrahedron: asymmetry 17 (2006) 2599-2602 2. novák t., ujj v., schindler j., czugler m.; kubinyi m., mayer zs. a., fogassy e., keglevich gy.: tetrahedron: asymmetry 18 (2007) 2965-2972 3. novák t., schindler j., ujj v., czugler m., fogassy e., keglevich gy.: phosphorus, sulfur, silicon 183 (2008) 543-546 4. fogassy e., keglevich gy., novak t., schindler j., ujj v.: hun. pat. (2007) p0700278 5. pietrusiewicz k. m., zabłocka m.: chem. rev. 93 (1994) 1375-1411 6. noyori r.: asymmetric catalysis in organic synthesis, john wiley & sons, new york (1994) 7. fogassy e., nógrádi m., palovics e., schindler j.: synthesis 10 (2005) 1555-1568 8. elekes f., kovári z., mravik a., böcskei zs., fogassy e.: tetrahedron: asymmetry 9 (1998) 2895-2900 9. fogassy e., nógrádi m., kozma d., egri g., pálovics e., kiss v.: org. biomol. chem. 4 (2006) 3011-3030 10. faigl f., kozma d.: in fundamentals and methods; toda f., ed.; kluwer academic: dordrecht, 2004. chapter 9 11. ács m., mravik a., fogassy e., böcskei z.: chirality 6 (1994) 314 12. simándi b., keszei s., fogassy e., sawinsky j.: j. org. chem. 62 (1997) 4390 13. hadik p., szabó l. p., nagy e.: desalination 148 (2002) 193. 14. vries t., wynberg h., van echten e., koek j., ten hoeve w., kellog r. m., broxterman q. b., minnaard a., kaptein b., van der sluis s., hulsfhof l. a., kooistra j.: angew. chem. int. ed. 17 (1998) 2349-2354 15. kelemen-horváth i., nemestóthy n., bélafibakó k., gubicza l.: chem. pap. 56 (2002) 52-56 16. davies w. c., mann f. g. j.: chem. soc. (1944) 276-283 136 17. kumli k. f., mcewen w. e., vander werf c. a.: j. am. chem. soc. 81 (1959) 248-249 18. toda f., mori k., stein z., goldberg i.: j. org. chem. 53 (1988) 308-312 19. otsuka s., nakamura a., kano t., tani k.: j. am. chem. soc. 93 (1971) 4301-4303 20. seebach d., beck a. k., heckel a.: angew. chem. int. ed., 40 (2001) 92-138 21. sakai k., sakurai r., hirayama n.: tetrahedron: asymmetry 17 (2006) 1812-1816 22. sakai k., sakurai r., yuzawa a., hirayama n.: tetrahedron: asymmetry 14 (2003) 3713-3718 23. kaptein b., elsberg h., grimbergen r. f. p., broxterman q. b., hulsfhof l. a., pouwer k. l., vries t.: tetrahedron: asymmetry 11 (2000) 1343-1351 24. schindler j., egressy m., bálint j., hell z., fogassy e.: chirality 17 (2005) 565-569 25. keglevich gy., androsits b., tőke l.: j. org. chem. 53 (1988) 4106 microsoft word b_05_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 38(2). pp. 95-98 (2010) relationship between input channel excitation time and profinet io refresh time i. ferenczi department of transportation science and infotechnology, university college of nyíregyháza nyíregyháza, sóstói út 31/b, hungary e-mail: ferenczi@inform.hu profinet io is the communication concept for implementing modular, distributed applications such as profibus dp, based on the industrial ethernet. distributed io and field devices are integrated into the ethernet communication by means of profinet io. the user data from the field device are transmitted cyclically in a real-time channel to the process image of an automation system. in this paper, i will present what relationship exists between bus refresh time and input channel excitation time in several specific situations. keywords: profinet io, cycle time, real-time, refresh time, plc, io device, io channel, delay time, communication introduction profinet io permits direct interfacing of distributed field devices on the ethernet. all devices used are connected in a uniform network structure, and therefore offer uniform communication throughout the entire production plant. the system consists of three main elements: 1. io-controller; it has control over a distributed process of one or more field devices. it receives process data and alarms and processes them in a user program. in automation installations, an io-controller is normally a programmable logic controller (plc). 2. io-device; a profinet io-device (max. 128 device) is a field device connected in a decentralized way belonging to the process. it periodically transmits process data to the io-controller, and the iocontroller transmits control data to the filed devices (fig. 1). 3. io-supervisor; might be an engineering station (pc or laptop) in an installation, which has temporary access to the field devices or controller during the commissioning process. io controller io device 1 io device 2 io device n ethernet io supervisor plc with user programm pc or laptop field devices figure 1: elements of profinet io with profinet io, the master-slave principle known from profibus dp has been converted into a providerconsumer modell. so far communication is concerned, all profinet devices have equal privileges on the ethernet. however, a type of privilige is assigned to each device during configuration, and this defines the type and manner of communication according to the provider-consumer modell [3]. profinet communication in a real-time communication based on tcp/ip protocol, real-time (rt class1,2) packets and isochronous realtime (irt or rt class3) packets of controls requiring synchronization, which follow strictly real-time procedures, are also present beside non-real time (nrt) packets. [1]. the rt packets are supplied with priority to prevent a collision, and the irt switch always provides an open line to the irt packets [2]. context management (cm) an io-device delivers input data from the automated process to the io-controller, and receives output data from controller in order to control the process (providerconsumer). an io-supervisor can also communicate simmultaneusly with an io-device. in order to permit data exchange to occur with all devices, an application and communication relation is necessary to exist. the task of context management is to manage the application and communication relations. 96 to establish a communication channel between provider and consumer is necessary to create a virtual logical channel for each channel of devices. this is the application relation (ar). the io-controller establishes an ar with each io-device. establishment is carried out instantly during system startup. several communication relations (cr) can be established within an ar (fig. 2). the following types of cr exist: ● record data cr for acyclic transmission of records, e.g. for configuration, parameterization, etc, ● io data cr for cyclic transmission of i/o data, ● alarm cr, for acyclic transmission of events. figure 2: communication relations the last two communicate through a real-time, and the first through a traditional ethernet channel. in this paper i deal only with the i/o data cr. the io data cr operation principle the task of the io data cr is to transmit i/o data between io-controller and io-devices, according to the provider-consumer concept. the following parameters are transmitted during the establishment: ● a list of i/o data objects to be transmitted as well as their structure, ● the parameters of the send interval (send clock time, scaling, phase etc), ● the transfer frequency. the number of io data crs to be established is defined in the device configuration, depending of the number of devices installed. two opposite io data crs are always established, thus permitting bidirectional data exchange between io-controller and io-device. the data are sent cyclically from the provider to the consumer according to configured transfer frequency. in the relation, explicit acknowledgements of transmitted data frames do not take place but the consumer generate an error when the data frame listed does not arrive during a three i/o bus cycle. the data frame contains a cycle counter element, which is incremented, when the data does not arrive during a bus cycle time [3]. the io data cr features 1. the send clock time is the interval at which cyclic data are sent within an io data cr. it is defined device-specifically as an integral multiple of the basic time unit of 31.25 μs. this time is usually defined during configuration by the user. send clock time = send clock factor · 31,25 μs the send clock factor is between 1 and 128. a value of 32 corresponds to a send clock time of 1 ms that for a basic rate can be considered in a not synchronized rt communication (fig. 3). figure 3: send clock time for rt data in fig. 3 rt is a cyclical, rta is an acyclical realtime, and nrt is a non-real-time data. 2. send interval (refresh time); since high-performance transmission of all data is usually not required, the communication transmission frequency may differ from the io device. however, the slowest station must not determine the complete data throughput. for this session, low performance data are transmitted with scaling based on the send clock time: send interval = send clock time · 2n where: 2n – scaling; n – scaling ratio. so, the refresh time is transmitted periodically that defines the send cycle. in this interval, the io-devices receive data from the controller, and transmit simultaneously the process data to the controller. this duplex communication is exemplified in fig. 4. figure 4: real-time cyclical data transmission each item of i/o data contain two attributes, the iops (io provider status) and iocs (io consumer status), which permit the io-controller and io-device to evaluate the quality of the transmitted value. 97 determining some critical time values in this paper i analyzed some critical situation when the input signal excites the input channel of io-device. the length of the time sequence between the starting moment of the channel excitation and the moment at which the reaction in the addressed output channel occurs can be very often decisive. furthermore, it can also be of interest how frequently the incoming signals take place, by which obvious reactions are still observable. what is the minimal excitation time period that can still be identified by the input? in order to answer these questions, the factors determining reaction time in the profinet system should be identified: user program cycle time (ct) input channel delay time (id) profinet io refresh time set (ut) it is clearly visible that out of the three factors only the refresh time can be modified under the criteria of real-time systems. the other two determinants are not possible to be decreased considerably. it is also equally relevant when the input excitation occurs relative to the cycle time and the refresh time. in effect, the reaction time has a lower and upper boundary value. the lowest boundary value (srt) denotes the, theoretically speaking, best possible situation where the response occurs within one cycle. srt = ct + id (1) in other words, the input excitation is initiated just in time to reach the end of the refresh interval and the update of the process image input (pii). similarly, the response reaches the end of the refresh interval during the update of the process image output (pio). the worst possible is the situation (lrt) in which the signal coming from the input of the io device just misses the current refresh time and also the moment at which the process image input of the cycle gets updated after the next refresh time. thus it will only be loaded and executed during the next cycle. the response then just misses the refresh interval during the update of the process image output of the next cycle; as a result, it will be only forwarded once the next cycle starts [5]. lrt = 2·ct + id + 4·ut (2) note: the situation described above can occur if the length of the refresh time sequence is nearly identical to the cycle time. if the refresh time is much longer than the cycle time, the response comes during the two refresh intervals even in the worst possible case. profinet io test system the profinet io system takes the form of a star topology: a 100 mb full duplex ethernet network with a scalance x005 switch. a s7-300 cpu315f-pn plc with a 16-16 digital i/o module constitutes the controller. the io device is an et-200s with an im151-3 pn io device controller. it has 4 modules for the input and output respectively, with 2 digital channels each. a notebook has been used as an io-supervisor. beside that, an s7300 cpu314-2dp plc is also part of the network, which connects to the network via a cp343-1 lean interface. the latter does not take part in the measurement; it simply assumes a separate application task (fig. 5). plc+cp343 ethernet interface ip: 192.168.1.1 io-supervisor s7-300 cpu314c-2dp s7-300 cpu315f-2pn et 200s im151-3pn io-device ip: 192.168.1.3 scalance x005 network switch io-controller ip: 192.168.1.2 pc cpu 314 cpu 315 cp 343 tcp/ip ethernet connection 100 mb full duplex profinet rt connection over ethernet segment length: 1m+3m ip: 192.168.1.10 figure 5: structure of test system measuring with an universal counter for the purpose of input excitation an impulse generator was used, which provided for 0.5 –1 khz 24 v impulses with 1–50% duty cycles. the edge coming to the input and appearing on the output will be joined together after the differentiation. the input and output is visualized with a dual channel oscilloscope, and the resulted signal was applied to the input of the universal counter (fig. 6). the advantage of this method is that a measurement of even 10 μs accuracy can be conducted. as a disadvantage, a supplementary circuit and a counter device are necessary. impuls generator differentiator and adder circuit countor oscilloscop profinet io in out figure 6: measuring circuits minimal excitation time at real-time communication system beside the definition of the reaction time we have to know the frequency of input signal applicable, respectively the signal span, mainly a minimal excitation time of input channel. this chapter is concerned with the finding the minimal excitation time that is still able to cause the input reaction. 98 this is largely determined by two factors: the input channel delay time and the refresh time. let us denote the sum of these as tin. we can state that: tin > ut + id (3) in other words, the channel excitation time should be longer than the sum of the refresh time and the channel delay time. that is, in case of a 16 ms refresh time and a 3 ms delay time, this value has to be higher than 19 ms. the impulses with 0.5 hz/1% duty cycle used during the test had a time duration of 20 ms [4]. thus ut up to a value of 16 ms was to function with safety. however, according to (3) at a 36 ms refresh time, the duty cycle has to be increased to 2%. the following table shows the maximum frequency of the square wave signal in the given refresh time if the channel delay time is 3 ms or 0.5 ms. table 1: results of the measurements tin [ms] fin [ms] ut [ms] id = 3 ms id = 0.5 ms id = 3 ms id = 0.5 ms 1 4 1.5 125 330 2 5 2.5 100 200 4 7 4.5 71 110 8 11 8.5 45 58 16 19 16.5 26 30 32 35 32.5 14 15 64 67 64.5 7 7 also, it follows from the table what refresh time and channel delay time is needed to be set in order for the system to function safely. for instance, if a 50 hz square wave signal has to be used on the input, then a refresh time of at least 8 ms with 0.5 ms delay time will be needed. however, if a channel delay time of only 3 ms can be used, it follows that the refresh time has to be set to 4 ms. figure 7: bad input channel excitation in the previous figure a case is shown, in which the excitation time takes a smaller value than that in (3). this can yet lead to an error because it may occur that the input signal can not cause a reaction (fig. 7). in the case shown, the output channel reaction time (tr) has no significance. besides it always take a value between srt and lrt but it does not depend on the input excitation time [4]. in the most critical case observed, in which the refresh time was 1 ms and the delay time was 0.5 ms (tin = 1.5 ms), it followed that the input channels still react to a 330 hz square wave signal. the measurements verified this assumption. errors were not encountered even after multiple tests of longer durations. further, the reaction times did not change considerably. it is not to say that the input won’t react above 330 hz but that cases may very well occur where input impulses remain without responses when an input excitation takes place in between two refresh times. conclusion from the results of the measurements described, practical conclusions can be drawn with respect to how the profinet io system should be configured according to critical time limits of real-time processes. in the case of non-synchronized processes, it is imperative to know what differences occur between given limits, with other words, what are the value extremes between which the criteria of a real-time system are met entirely. during the measurements that ethernet communication took place without disturbance. the log file of the io controller did not register a single collision or bad frame, albeit only a minimal profinet io configuration (controller, io device and io supervisor) were part of the network. references 1. r. pigan, m. metter: automating with profinet (2006) 2. profinet real-time communication by siemens ag (2007) 3. i. ferenczi: profinet real-time kommunikációs stratégiák (gép, 2009. dec.) 4. i. ferenczi: válaszidők vizsgálata egy profinet io rendszernél (factory automation 2010, proceedings, 105–111) 5. siemens simatic cpu 31x: specification manual, 06/2008, a5e00105475-08 << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /createjdffile false /description << /ara /bgr /chs /cht /cze /dan /deu /esp /eti /fra /gre /heb /hrv (za stvaranje adobe pdf dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. stvoreni pdf dokumenti mogu se otvoriti acrobat i adobe reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /hun /ita /jpn /kor /lth /lvi /nld (gebruik deze instellingen om adobe pdf-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. de gemaakte pdf-documenten kunnen worden geopend met acrobat en adobe reader 5.0 en hoger.) /nor /pol /ptb /rum /rus /sky /slv /suo /sve /tur /ukr /enu (use these settings to create adobe pdf documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. created pdf documents can be opened with acrobat and adobe reader 5.0 and later.) >> /namespace [ (adobe) (common) (1.0) ] /othernamespaces [ << /asreaderspreads false /cropimagestoframes true /errorcontrol /warnandcontinue /flattenerignorespreadoverrides false /includeguidesgrids false /includenonprinting false /includeslug false /namespace [ (adobe) (indesign) (4.0) ] /omitplacedbitmaps false /omitplacedeps false /omitplacedpdf false /simulateoverprint /legacy >> << /addbleedmarks false /addcolorbars false /addcropmarks false /addpageinfo false /addregmarks false /convertcolors /converttocmyk /destinationprofilename () /destinationprofileselector /documentcmyk /downsample16bitimages true /flattenerpreset << /presetselector /mediumresolution >> /formelements false /generatestructure false /includebookmarks false /includehyperlinks false /includeinteractive false /includelayers false /includeprofiles false /multimediahandling /useobjectsettings /namespace [ (adobe) (creativesuite) (2.0) ] /pdfxoutputintentprofileselector /documentcmyk /preserveediting true /untaggedcmykhandling /leaveuntagged /untaggedrgbhandling /usedocumentprofile /usedocumentbleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /hwresolution [2400 2400] /pagesize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice microsoft word contents.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 34. pp. 35-39 (2006) optimization problems of fermentor aeration-agitation system l. kozma1, l. nyeste2 and a. szentirmai3 1chartered engineer, former leader of the technical division of biogal pharmaceuticals, postal address: őrség u. 17., h-1112 budapest, hungary, e-mail: multiplan@axelero.hu 2professor of department of biochemical engineering, budapest university of technology, szt. gellért tér 4., h-1521 budapest, hungary 3professor of microbiology and biotechnology, university of debrecen, haraszt u. 21., h-4010 debrecen, hungary after four decades of almost exclusive application of rushton turbines a number of types of impellers were developed for the fermentation industry in the last 20 years which were proven to be more efficient despite their lower power requirements. the efficiency of an impeller is affected strongly by the degree of their hydromechanical properties corresponding with the specific characteristics and requirements of a certain fermentation process. evaluation in case of non-newtonian broths cannot be carried out with proper accuracy, and their optimization becomes difficult. an increase in yield even by a few percent can be of great importance in large-scale fermentation vessels. consequently, the optimization of agitation system is a very important factor but it is only partially provided by scale-up using pilot plant data and similarity criteria. this is the reason why we need newer methods for optimization of aerationagitation systems for large-scale fermentation vessels by agitators equipped with changeable flow modifying parts. keywords: power number, non-newtonian broth, rushton turbine, shear power, scale-up, flooding advantages and disadvantages of newer agitation systems the disadvantages of flat-blade rushton turbines – less axial circulation capability and large power requirement applied in penicillin fermentation for many years due to their excellent dispersion capability became more and more obvious with the increase in size of fermentation vessels. due to these disadvantages newer types of impellers and complex agitation systems were developed. turbines the efficiency of rushton turbines (fig. 1) was increased by the application of impellers with parabolic profile instead of flat-blades in scaba 6srgt system (fig. 2). their power number has decreased from 5,56,0 to 3,2. the number of higher energy peaks around the impeller endangering more sensitive microorganisms decreased and by increasing impeller’s diameter larger volumes could be blended with the same power requirements. the impellers’ sensitivity to “flooding” phenomenon and increased viscosity had decreased, but still they had lower circulation capability. in the event of applying more impellers compart-mentalization (inadequately blended areas) may occur. that is why in newer agitation systems these are used only at the lowest, dispersion level. (a. baker et al. 1) closed turbines have better circulation capability but these are rarely applied due to their little dispersion capability. propeller agitators propeller agitators have excellent axial circulation properties but weak dispersion capability. due to their little power number of 0,5-1,1 their diameter could be larger with the same power requirement and this facilitates full blending of viscous broths and filamentous microorganisms. first ekato has developed propeller type impellers with pitched blades called mig and intermig (fig. 3). recently streamlined propeller agitators with twisted surface have been applied at the upper levels of complex agitation systems. impellers with larger diameter ratios of 1:0,5-1:0,6 narrower blades such as lightnin 310 are applied for blending of lower viscosity broths. impellers with less diameter and diameter ratio of 1:0,45 and broader blades which have power number of 1,0-1,1 such as lightnin a 315 and prochem maxflo (fig. 4 and fig. 5) are applied for blending of higher viscosity broths. according to a.w. nienow propeller agitators provide better blending efficiency for both the lower and higher viscosity broths and better mass and heat transfer than rushton turbines. other advantages of these agitators are their power number and indulgence with sensitive microorganisms (a.e. nienow 2.) vacuum agitators vacuum agitators has low power requirement, good dispersion capability but lesser circulation properties. these types can be used for blending less air volumes. 36 they are used only in certain technological processes such as in flotation devices and in yeast production. newer complex agitation sysems merely the last few decades the researchers and manufacturers have realized that the efficiency if agitation systems can be increased by development of complex systems including more agitators of different types and properties which satisfy better the requirements of the particular levels. despite many published paper literature dealt not so much with the problems of agitation of large-scale fermentation vessels. perhaps on the symposium in firenze in 1993 data on the mass transfer problems due to differences between the levels of large-scale fermentation vessels were published for the first time. these differences are stemming partially from the position of levels and partially from their different functions i.e. could be local or functional differences. local differences are mainly caused by the pressure differences due to 8-12 m height of fermentors and this may affect bubble size and the density of foaming broths, etc. functional differences are because the function of the lowest agitator is efficiently disperse air input, the function of the middle agitator(s) is the best intensity circulation of the broth-air mixture and the function of the upper agitator is recirculation of the foaming broths on the surface with less further foam formation possible. in the nineties the increase in differences due to larger and larger-scale fermentation vessels had led to the development of complex agitation systems considering the differences between levels. 6srgt modified turbine agitator with good dispersion capability is generally used on the lowest level, and high efficiency propeller agitators e.g. lightnin, prochem are applied on the highest level. (k. myers, 3.) these complex systems have better energy dissipation, dispersion and circulation capabilities, they are more efficient and more sensitive to flooding than the older systems built from components of the same type and size. optimization problems of agitation systems sizing and development of large-scale agitation systems is still based mainly on data from and experiences with pilot plant fermentors, and relations developed through the theory of similarity and dimension analysis. lately industrial measurements have been used more and more often. the application of the results of experimental measurements during scale-up is limited very much by the significant differences in the hydrodynamic fields and flow patterns of large-scale fermentors mainly due to the following reasons: a) because of the nearness of the baffles and impellers the large velocity gradient between the flowing layers in the experimental device results in large shear velocity and shear power, while in large-scale devices the much less velocity gradient due to larger sizes results less values. b) unlike in the large-scale vessels no free turbulence facilitating mass transfer is evolved because of the less reynolds number value due to the less size of the experimental device. c) flow of high viscosity broths can slow down so much in the large-scale vessels that inadequately mixed areas are formed even when newer agitation systems are applied. no secondary dispersion can occur along the baffles which may mask the deficiencies of the impeller type itself in pilot plant fermentors. d) due to the high pressure of large-scale fermentation vessels bubble size affecting oxygen transfer is decreased, solubility of gases, the density of liquidgas mixture and coalescence of bubbles are increased. e) in large-scale vessels the agitation time and crosssectional air flow velocity are increased with the same specific air volume and v/v input. kipke’s example can be cited for demonstration of the increase in agitation time, namely if a given agitation time can be produced in a laboratory fermentor of 5 liters with p/v = 1 kw/m3 power/unit volume, in a large-scale fermentation vessel of 50 m3 the same agitation time can only be achieved with 5000 kw power! the differences in magnitude show the problems of scale-up and the limitations of the application of experimental results. the scales are changed considerably during scale-up even during entirely proportioned geometric scale-up. for example, if the size of a model is increased only by tenfold, its surface increases hundred-fold but its volume increases thousand-fold. that is why even the name of similarity criteria is false since their application provides merely partial similarity. due to the unequal change in size and value ratios, physical, geometric, kinetic and dynamic similarity criteria cannot be selected simultaneously. due to the lack of a generally valid procedure many scale-up processes had been developed. the most often is to rely on power requirement per volume (p/v), volumetric oxygen transfer coefficient (kla), gas-holdup and shear stress (viscosity/velocity gradient). the variation of chosen considerations may lead to great differences. that is why many researchers’ opinion is that results do not comply with the technical and economical requirements of biotechnology and can only be informative data for developers of sizing procedures. according to m. charles: “in practice, scale-up strategies tend to be »mixed bags« engendering art enpricism, conventional wisdom and (frequently) wishful thinking” (4). for the optimization of fermentation process i.e. for the achievement of largest possible yields even distribution of the dissolved oxygen (do), medium and ingredients added during fermentation and optimum 37 mass transfer conditions should be provided besides application of high productivity microorganisms and adequate mediums. adequate oxygen level can be achieved by both proper air volume input and its best possible dispersion i.e. the least oxygen bubbles and their most even distribution. to achieve this, adequate agitation power, air volume and an agitation system is necessary which is suitable for effective dispersion of air, for creation of intensive circulation and for even distribution of bubbles. the level of dissolved oxygen (do) can be measured during fermentation and can be adjusted by the regulation of power input and/or air volume – if there are adequate quantities. considering the sometimes high values e.g. in case of penicillin fermentation the efficiency of the process is a significant factor and it is affected by the structure of the agitation system besides the power input and adequate air volume. the problem is that however, we can calculate – at least approximately the diameter and power requirement of the agitators and the air volume by the available procedures and relations, these data provide very little information on optimum design similarly to the added nutrients oxygen transfer occurs on the interfaces of air bubbles and medium particles and through the walls of microorganisms’ cells. according to the double layer theory thinning of the laminar layers on the interfaces by creating turbulent liquid flow and shear stress due to this turbulence is necessary for the acceleration of mass transfer. it is well known that vortexes are arisen during real liquid flow due to their viscosity and because of the collision of these vortexes turbulence proportional to the velocity of flow occurs. shear stresses proportional to the velocity of flow occur between turbulent liquid layers which have important role in oxygen (do) and mass transfer: these stresses thin the laminar layers of transferring interfaces, micromix the components of broths, disperse oil particles and air bubbles facilitating and accelerating mass transfer processes, disintegrate clots and in some cases cause morphological changes in the structure of microorganisms as in the case of penicillin fermentation. the magnitude of hydrodynamic forces created by agitation can be seen from the fact that according to the calculations of van’t riet and smith the centrifugal acceleration behind the vortexes created by impellers can be seven-hundredfold of the gravity (5). shear powers may, however, damage microorganisms which are especially sensitive, contribute to the creation of stable liquefied foams which generally decrease oxygen transfer, and aeration of carbon-dioxide and other gases partially on direct way and partially due to antifoaming oils. microorganisms on the interface of vortexes can be disrupted while those in the centre of the vortex may abrade each other. consequently the intensity of agitation should remain within a narrow range for keeping damaging effect at a minimum level while maintaining maximum advantages and this is the purpose of optimization. the characteristics of fermentation processes may vary due to the differences in viscosity, foaming properties, density, etc. a typical feature is that while foaming generally decreases the oxygen transfer, in certain cases the increased persistence of bubble may raise the rate of oxygen transfer in liquefied foams, and antifoaming agents may decrease it. some microorganisms such as oxytetracycline producers do not need agitation, and their fermentation can be made in slim vessels without agitator which are much cheaper. air inflated into the broths dispersed, distributed and circulated in the medium of the fermentor by the agitation system proportionally to power input. due to this procedure the volume of the medium is increasing and oxygen will be dissolved in the medium depending on the intensity of agitation, characteristics of medium and surface gas velocity vs. the degree of oxygen transfer is depending on the viscosity of the medium the characteristics of air, medium and microorganism system, and coalescing properties of air bubbles. the entrapment of air and this way oxygen fusion can decrease greatly due to increased viscosity and bubble coalescence (van’t riet, smith 5., and buchholz et al. 6.) besides the mentioned air entrapment broths volume can also be increased by the often very intensive foam formation depending on broths characteristics. stable so called liquefied foams are formed on more viscous mediums such as in penicillin fermentation. contrary to the air entrapment mentioned above this foam formation is detrimental since it limits oxygen transfer partially directly and partially through antifoaming agents, however rarely the opposite situation may occur. consequently maintaining the air input and power within a narrow range based on continuous instrumental measurement of fermentation parameters is an important requirement for dissolving oxygen and nutrients and also their transfer to microorganisms with adequate rate. considering economical importance of mass transfer problems arising from increasing size of fermentor vessels more efficient complex agitation systems were developed with lower power requirement, better dispersion and including far better circulation levels. in their paper published in 1987 b.c. buckland et al. had revealed that application of lightnin and prochem propeller agitators providing better “top to bottom” blending of viscous broths is cost effective due to saving power input and/or by the application of these agitators the production can be increased because of the higher cell concentration due to better agitation (buckland et al. 7). papers on complex agitation systems have been published more often since the beginning of 1990s (chemineer, 8). during their developmental activities manufacturers besides the relations for calculation of main sizes and powers could mainly rely on experimental results which, however, provided merely informative results due to the above reasons. it should also be noticed that uniformization, development of systems which can be distributed widely and production of their own types and licensed products are the main interests of manufacturers. all these factors eventually lead to 38 negligence of specific requirements of fermentations. exerting themselves to protect their trade secrets, factories generally provide very little possibilities for carrying out profound studies fermentation process by the professionals of manufacturers. according to the above characteristics and requirements of fermentation processes may differ very much. it follows from the above written that besides applied technologies and materials the success of fermentation processes also depends upon whether the agitation system used during fermentation is adequate for the specific requirements of fermentation. consequently the characteristics, dispersion and circulation capabilities of agitation levels should be adjusted to the features and requirements of the fermentation which may, conversely, vary because of the differences between the experimental and industrial levels. in case of viscous liquids experimental levels do not provide data and indications of adequate accuracy for the adjustment. although the analysis of experimental data has been improved very much since v. charles through the application of computers, lesser changes may also be of significance due to the large volume of industrial fermentors and these changes cannot be designed with adequate accuracy. it follows from the above that there is no adequate procedure available for actual optimization of industrial agitation systems and for establishment how much an agitation system can be considered optimal for a certain fermentation procedure. the efficiency of an agitation system is depending on its structure and considering fermentation it is depending on how the agitation system’s levels use power input for dispersion and circulation and how adequate this is for the requirements of a given fermentation process. a solution for this problem may be if manufacturers provide special separated parts for the particular levels of the agitation system which could be fixed on the system by screw this was changing the characteristics of agitation. it would not be especially difficult to solve since power input is proportionally changed with the fifth degree of the diameter of the agitator and the characteristic of flows can be modified within a wide range merely with changing the shape and angle of blades of the impeller. the application of this idea requires some change in viewpoint according to the following: 1. it cannot be expected that a manufacturer will provide an “optimal” agitation system, but it is expected to provide an agitation system of which perfusion properties can be modified within a wide range with auxiliary parts. it would be, of course, the obligation of the manufacturer to provide detailed user manuals and information sheet for the expectable effects of these auxiliary parts and provide professional assistance for testing on demand. 2. the obligation of the user would be the actual optimization of the agitation system according to provided directives and thorough analysis of the effects of the auxiliary parts. inclusion of factory professionals in the selection of the most efficient system may solve the problems of scale-up sometime mentioned as dream by m. charles (4) and may assist the establishment really optimal agitation systems. biogal pharmaceuticals established for the production of antibiotics together with research centers has endeavored to develop its devices since the beginning. according to the knowledge learned in the international symposium in prague in 1964 where both european and us professionals attended, biogal pharmaceutical was the first pharmaceutical company applying two-turns driver engine which increased power utilization by 3040%. at the beginning of 1970s the company changed the systems with rushton agitators which had asymmetric structure, and 20% better power on the lowest level. this was due to the cognition of the fact that in the applied asymmetric systems the efficiency of the lower agitators compared to the upper ones was considerably decreased by the function of dispersion. since the beginning of seventies the company had started to apply a complex system including propeller agitators and rushton turbines and with this method narrow otc fermentors without agitators could successfully be adapted for penicillin fermentation. based on these experiences also considering the construction of biogal’s newer complex agitation systems it can be concluded that there are more possibilities for the increase of efficiency and optimization of agitation systems through the application of modifiable impellers recommended above. conclusions conditions of optimization of the aeration-agitation systems of large-scale fermentors in case of viscous broths: 1. providing flow modifying parts for the agitations system for variation of dispersion and circulation capabilities and adjustment for the requirements of a specific fermentation process. 2. evaluation of the results of variation by fermentation professionals and choosing optimum variation. considering these on a long term basis may lead to gain profound knowledge about specific requirements of fermentation processes and industrial optimization may become unnecessary in the future. nonation do dissolves oxygen p/v power/volume kla volumetric oxygen transfer coefficient vs gas velocity 39 references 1. bakker a., smith j. m., meyers k. j., chemineer, po box 1123, daytona, oh45401, reprinted from chemical engineering 2. nienow a. w.: 9th biotech symposium, crystal city, usa, 1992 pp. 196-196 3. meyers k., reeder m., bakker a., rigden m.: agitating for success, the chemical engineering 4. charles m.: trends in biotechnology, vol 3., no.6 180 5. van’t riet k., smith j. m., chemical eng. sci. 1975, 30. 1083 6. buchholz h., buchholz r., niebenschutz h., schügerl k.: eur. j. appl. microb. and biotechn. 6. 1978, 115. 7. buckland et al. bioengineering vol. 31. 70. 737742. i. 1988 8. chemineer, inc. reprinted for chemical engineer crammer road, west meadows, daby, de 21 6xt, england microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 36(1-2) pp. 1-4 (2008) ozonation of biologically refractory pollutants b. almasiová1 , j. derco2, a. kassai2 1slovak university of technology, faculty of chemical and food technology, institute of chemical and environmental engineering, radlinského 9, 812 37 bratislava 1, slovak republic e-mail: beata.almasiova@stuba.sk 2water research institute, nábrežie l. svobodu 5, 812 49 bratislava, slovak republic advanced oxidation processes (aops) are an effective emerging technology for removal and enhancement of biodegradability of biologically resistant and toxic pollutants of wastewater. one of these aops is ozonation carried out at higher ph values. ozone is a powerful oxidizing agent available for the treatment of industrial wastewaters. the ozonation reactions are accomplished into two pathways: direct ozone oxidation and indirect free hydroxyl radical oxidation. the industrialization of human society has grown also the risk of environmental problems caused by a diversity of anthropogenic chemicals and substances in wastewater from industry. wide group of these substances are able to enter into the organism and interrupt with their endocrine systems. they are resistant and bioactive, thus they are able to pass conventional treatment systems, wide-spread with surface and underground water and enter into organisms. we have studied removal of 2-mercaptobenzothiazole (mbt) contained in synthetic wastewater. this xenobiotic compound is used mainly in the manufacture of rubber additive chemicals but also has other uses, notably as a corrosion inhibitor in cooling water and in antifreeze for automobiles. it is known as a widespread, toxic and poorly biodegradable pollutant. biological treatment of the wastewaters of rubber chemicals production often seems to be problematic, most probably due to presence of mbt. in fact, mbt is used due to its fungicidal properties, or its antimicrobial effects. data concerning the biodegradation of mbt are inconclusive. some authors have suggested it is recalcitrant to biodegradation. mbt was not metabolised by microorganisms, which were non adapted to activated sludge to this pollutant. the feasibility of utilisation of ozonation process for reduction of concentration of mbt was investigated in laboratory scale equipment. the system was operated in batch mode. synthetic wastewater with mbt was added into ozonation reactor at the beginning of trials. continuous flow of oxygen 30 l h-1 was applied for generation of ozone. ozonation trials were carried out at different performance of ozone generator in the range from 30 to 90% of the power maximum. initial concentration of mbt in synthetic wastewater was about 50 mg l-1. significant decrease of mbt content was observed after four minutes of ozonation. correspondent efficiency values for cod and toc removal were 55 and 16%. higher removal rates were achieved in the sample with lower initial content of mbt. the highest removal rate values were observed during the first 10 minutes of the process for both cod as well as toc content. the first order reaction kinetics follows for cod removal. positive influence of power of ozone generator on cod removal resulted from the work. keywords: bubble ozonation column, degradation, 2-mercaptobenzothiazole, ozone, ozonation introduction the industrialization of human society has grown also the risk of environmental problems caused by a diversity of anthropogenic chemicals and substances in wastewater from industry. wide group of these substances are able to enter into the organism and interrupt with their endocrine systems. they are resistant and bioactive, thus they are able to pass conventional treatment systems, wide-spread with surface and underground water and enter into organisms. benzothiazoles and their derivatives are manufacture worldwide for a wide variety of applications. they are used, among other things, as slimicides in the paper and pulp industry, as fungicides, as herbicides or as antialgal agents. the main use is as vulcanization accelerators in rubber production, catalyzing the formation of sulfide linkages between unsaturated elastomeric polymers in order to obtain a flexible and elastic cross linked material [1]. 2-mercaptobenzothiazole (mbt) is the member of the benzothiazole group of heterocyclic aromatic compounds. it is a pale yellow, crystalline substance with an unpleasant odor and a bitter taste, with molecular weight 167.25 g mol-1 and specific density 1.42-1.52. it is easily soluble in ethyl acetone, acetone, dilute solution of sodium hydroxide and sodium carbonate and soluble in ethyl alcohol. it is not easily soluble in benzene. mbt can occur in two tautomeric forms. this xenobiotic compound is used mainly in the manufacture of rubber additive chemicals but also has other uses, notably as a corrosion inhibitor in cooling water and in antifreeze for automobiles. it is known as a widespread, toxic and poorly biodegradable pollutant. biological 2 treatment of the wastewaters of rubber chemicals production often seems to be problematic, most probably due to presence of mbt. in fact, mbt is used for its fungicidal properties, or its antimicrobial effects. data concerning of the biodegradation of mbt are inconclusive. some authors have suggested it is recalcitrant to biodegradation [2]. epidemiological investigations indicate that workers occupationally exposed to mbt have an increased risk of death from bladder cancer. genotoxicity investigations in bacterial and mammalian test systems provide some evidence indicating that mbt has the potential to induce mutations and chromosomal aberrations. toxicity studies in rats and mice chronically exposed to mbt identified increases in various tumors. mbt interfered with the nitrification processes and exhibited biocidal effects. mbt inhibit the degradation of easily degradable organics. mbt was not metabolised by microorganisms, which were non adapted to activated sludge to this pollutant. decrease of respiration activity of non adapted activated sludge was observed with the increase of mbt concentration. utilisation of ozone as possible process for mbt removal from wastewater was studied. advanced oxidation processes (aops) are an effective emerging technology for removal and enhancement of biodegradability of biologically resistant and toxic pollutants of wastewater. one of these aops is ozonation carried out at higher ph values. ozone (o3) is a powerful oxidizing agent available for the treatment of industrial wastewaters. o3 is an unstable gas produced by electric discharge in a gas phase (air or pure oxygen). it is strong disinfectant with high oxidation power, potentially toxic and explosive, requiring on-site generation and caution for use. the ozonation reactions are accomplished into two pathways: direct ozone oxidation and indirect free hydroxyl radical oxidation. the direct ozone oxidation reaction is highly selective but relatively slow by selectively attacking the unsaturated electron-rich bonds contained in specific functional groups, e.g., aromatics, olefins and amines. in comparison, the indirect reaction has a relatively low selectivity but a quick reaction rate by hydroxyl radicals, which are generated by decomposition of ozone molecule. the hydroxyl radicals can oxidize regular organic substrates, micro-organisms and nh3-nitrogen; the oxidation reaction lead to the formation of different but stronger radicals usually represented by the r symbol. the r radical can further react with ozone molecules to generate more hydroxyl radicals for further oxidation. however, the formation of free radicals from ozone is affected by either the solution ph or the presence of some scavenger chemicals in the water to be treated [3]. experiments and results degradation of mbt with ozone has been studied. the experiments were performed in bubble ozonation column. the ozonation equipment consists of two glass columns, 0.04 m diameter and 1.70 m height. the first column was filled with synthetic wastewater with mbt, the other one was filled with solution of potassium iodide. the role of the second column was to destroy residual ozone in the outlet of the first ozonation column. the effective volume of both columns was 1.0 litre. schematic diagram of experimental bubble ozonation apparatus is shown in fig. 1. the system was operated in batch mode. synthetic wastewater with mbt was added into ozonation reactor at the beginning of trials. continuous flow of oxygen 30 l h-1 was applied for generation of ozone. the lifetech ozone generator with the maximum ozone production 5 g h-1 and lifetech ozone uv detector were used. ozonation trials were carried out at different performance of ozone generator in the range from 30 to 90% of the power maximum. the content of mbt in sampling was measured by high performance liquid chromatography with reverse osmosis (rp-hplc). concentration of cod (chemical oxygen demand) was measured by semi micro method and toc (total organic carbon) by analyser schimadzu tocvcph/cpn [4]. figure 1: schematic diagram of experimental column apparatus 1 – ozonation column, 2 – destruction of residual o3, 3 – oxygen cylinder, 4 – ozone generator, 5 – mixture of o2 and o3, 6 – distribution of o3, 7 – sampling, 8 – residual gas outlet, 9 – moisture catcher, 10 – glass fibre filter, 11 – uv detector of o3 ozonation trials were carried out with synthetic wastewater containing mbt in lab-scale ozonation apparatus. initial concentration of mbt in synthetic water was about 50 mg l-1. fien et al. [5] shown, that mbt and its breakdown products had a high affinity towards ozone as indicated by the rates for partial oxidation and mineralization. benzothiazole (bt) was identified as the first ozonation product, reaching up to 60 mol% of the original mbt concentration, followed by low concentration of 2(3-h) benzothiazolone. fig. 2a illustrates the influence of ozonation on variation of 3 concentration cod, toc and mbt at the ozone generator power 90%. the specific ozone supply was in this case 0.97 go3 gcod -1. according to results shown at the table 1 the highest cod removal was observed during the first 10 minutes of ozonation. cod removal rate 5.9 mg l-1 min-1 was achieved at 90% of maximum ozone generator power. the initial ratio of cod/mbt was 2.2 (exp1, 2). comparing with the initial cod value the 66% conversion of cod was achieved after 10 min of ozonation (exp 2) and 98% was achieved after 1 h (exp1). the first order reaction kinetics follows for cod removal. good coincidence in cod and toc removal follows from the fig. 2a. table 1: concentration of cod, toc and mbt at w = 90% and qo2 = 30 l h-1, t = 60 min (exp1) t cod toc mbt [min] [mg l-1] [mg l-1] [mg l-1] 0 95.97 24.8 44.6 5 42.59 18.8 0.1 10 13.47 14.0 0.1 15 11.05 12.9 0.008 20 8.62 12.5 0.008 60 1.34 11.5 0.008 table 2: concentration of cod, toc and mbt at w = 90% and qo2 = 30 l h-1, t = 10 min (exp2) t cod toc mbt [min] [mg l-1] [mg l-1] [mg l-1] 0 89 20.2 40.7 2 55 18.9 1.71 4 40 16.9 0.086 6 30 14.3 0.008 8 30 12.1 0.008 10 30 10.8 0.008 table 3: concentration of cod, toc and mbt at w = 70% and qo2 = 30 l h-1, t = 50 min (exp3) t cod toc mbt [min] [mg l-1] [mg l-1] [mg l-1] 0 168 56.3 54.1 5 53.4 2.34 10 116 48.2 0.089 15 42.1 0.0189 20 33 36.7 0.008 30 29.6 0.008 50 23 25.5 0.008 the efficiency of removal of toc was 46% after 10 minutes (exp2) and 54% after 1 hour (exp1) of ozonation. removal (99%) of mbt from the sample was achieved by ozonation after 5 minutes (exp 1, 2). the presence of bt was identified. the amount of bt measured after 60 minutes of ozonation corresponded to 5% of initial mbt concentration in the synthetic wastewater. fig. 2b (table 3) shows the results of ozonation process carried out at 70% of power of ozone generator and the oxygen flow 30 l h-1. the specific ozone supply was 0.59 go3 gcod -1. the initial ratio of cod/mbt was 3.1. the efficiency of removal of cod and toc were 86% and 54% after 50 minutes (exp3) of ozonation. 95.7% of mbt was removed after 5 minutes of ozonation. the process efficiency was considerably influenced by duration of ozonation. the content of mbt in synthetic wastewater containing this pollutant decreased closely to zero after first 4 minutes of ozonation performed at 90% of the maximum power of ozone generator. similar decrease of mbt was achieved after 10 minutes of ozonation carried out at the 70% of the maximum power of ozone generator. ozonation of mbt w = 90%, qo 2 = 30 l.h-1 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 t [min] c o d , m b t [m g. l-1 ] 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 t o c [m g. l-1 ] chsk, exp 1 chsk, exp 2 mbt, exp 1 mbt, exp 2 toc, exp 1 toc, exp 2 ozonation of mbt w = 70%, qo 2 = 30 l.h-1 0 40 80 120 160 200 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 t [min] c o d , m b t [m g. l-1 ] 0 20 40 60 t o c [m g. l-1 ] cod, exp 3 mbt, exp 3 toc, exp 3 figure 2: cod, toc and mbt as a function of ozonation time at oxygen flow rate 30 l h-1 a) w = 90% b.) w = 70% 4 conclusion feasibility of ozone utilisation for mbt removal from wastewater was studied. significant decrease of mbt content was observed after four minutes of ozonation carried out at 90% of maximum ozone generator power. corresponded efficiency values for cod and toc removal were 55 and 16% respectively. the highest removal rate values were observed during the first 10 minutes of the process for both cod as well as toc content. related specific ozone supply was 0.97 go3 gcod -1. cod removal follows the first order reaction kinetics. the removal rate 5.2 mg l-1 min-1 was observed at ozonation trial carried out at 70% of maximum ozone generator power was maintained. positive influence of power of ozone generator on cod removal results from the work. the removal rate 5.9 mg l-1 min-1 was achieved at the 90% of maximum ozone generator power. in conclusion, mbt is readily transformed by ozonation. acknowledgements the authors wish to thank for the financial support from vega grant 1/0866/08. references 1. de wever h., verachtert h.: water research vol. 31, no. 11, (1997) 2673-2684 2. chudoba j., tuček f., zeis k.: acta hydrochim hydrobiol. (5), (1977) 495-498 3. chiang y. p., liang y. y., chang ch. n., chao a. c.: chemosphere 65, (2006) 2395-2400 4. horáková m.: všcht praha (2006) 335 5. fiehn o., wegener g., jochimsen j., jekel m.: water research 32 (4), (1998) 1075-1084 << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /createjdffile false /description << /ara /bgr /chs /cht /cze /dan /deu /esp /eti /fra /gre /heb /hrv (za stvaranje adobe pdf dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. stvoreni pdf dokumenti mogu se otvoriti acrobat i adobe reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /hun /ita /jpn /kor /lth /lvi /nld (gebruik deze instellingen om adobe pdf-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. de gemaakte pdf-documenten kunnen worden geopend met acrobat en adobe reader 5.0 en hoger.) /nor /pol /ptb /rum /rus /sky /slv /suo /sve /tur /ukr /enu (use these settings to create adobe pdf documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. created pdf documents can be opened with acrobat and adobe reader 5.0 and later.) >> /namespace [ (adobe) (common) (1.0) ] /othernamespaces [ << /asreaderspreads false /cropimagestoframes true /errorcontrol /warnandcontinue /flattenerignorespreadoverrides false /includeguidesgrids false /includenonprinting false /includeslug false /namespace [ (adobe) (indesign) (4.0) ] /omitplacedbitmaps false /omitplacedeps false /omitplacedpdf false /simulateoverprint /legacy >> << /addbleedmarks false /addcolorbars false /addcropmarks false /addpageinfo false /addregmarks false /convertcolors /converttocmyk /destinationprofilename () /destinationprofileselector /documentcmyk /downsample16bitimages true /flattenerpreset << /presetselector /mediumresolution >> /formelements false /generatestructure false /includebookmarks false /includehyperlinks false /includeinteractive false /includelayers false /includeprofiles false /multimediahandling /useobjectsettings /namespace [ (adobe) (creativesuite) (2.0) ] /pdfxoutputintentprofileselector /documentcmyk /preserveediting true /untaggedcmykhandling /leaveuntagged /untaggedrgbhandling /usedocumentprofile /usedocumentbleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /hwresolution [2400 2400] /pagesize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice microsoft word b_20_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 38(2). pp. 155-158 (2010) analysis of global and local environmental impacts of bus transport by lca methodologies b. simon1,2 , l. tamaska2, n. kováts1 1department of environmental engineering and chemical technologies university of pannonia, egyetem u. 10., hungary e-mail: simonbalint@gmail.com 2kmprojekt ltd., endrődi s. u. 42/c, hungary the mobility of the globalized world is supported by internal-combustion engines, which generally use fossil fuels. city people have to move daily from place a to b. for that reason cities have public transport systems, including local bus as an important element. as the bulk of the population is concentrated in the city, the atmospherical emissions of local buses have a considerable impact on human health. this study analyses these impacts using the methodology of lca and the database of the artemis project. the whole study includes the emissions models of pre-euro and euro 1-5 buses, cng, biodiesel and hydrogen buses, and the fuel production. furtermore seven scenarios for modeling traffic situations are included, too. for the impact assessment three cml2001 indicators are used. global warming potential (gwp) is for assessing the global impacts, carbon footprint; human toxicity potencial (htp) and photochemical ozone creation potential (pocp) are used for the estimation of impacts in urban environments. keywords: public transport, local bus, life cycle assessment, global warming potential, human toxicity potential, photochemical ozone creation potential introduction transportation of modern ages involves many types of vehicles, from bicycles to trains. the present study analyses the environmental impact of bus types used in hungarian cities, including the annual impact of the number and type of buses used in budapest. the number of cars in the year of 2006 was approx. 650 000 on the streets of budapest [1], simultaneously, the bkv (budapest public transport co.) had 1400 buses according to data of 2007. average daily 1.5 million passengers are transported by these buses, amounting to 42.3 % of the total daily passengers [2]. euro 0 and euro 1 motors form the biggest part of these buses (see table 2). 60% of the travels are managed by public transport and the rest by cars whose number is about one magnitude higher [3]. the fact that the fleet of buses is rather old, they have high environmental load and environmental emissions make it clear that modernizing of public transport and the bus fleet is a very important work. primary aim of this present study is to estimate environmental impacts of air emissions caused by bus transport and to serve as an important basis for a decision-making process being necessary for achieving changes. for such purpose, life cycle assessment (lca) was selected as the most appropriate methodology. several studies have been already published for estimating emissions and environmental impact, which results have been incorporated in this present study [4, 5, 6, 7, 8]. materials and methods the goal, and scope of the study should be determined by assessing the environmental impacts of public transport. in this case this is bus transportation and the production of the fuel. the study was carried out according to the iso 14044 standard [9]. the analysis provides information about the environmental impact of the different usage of different fuel types. the analysis takes the values of table 1 and 2 into account, which are derived from the artemis project database [6, 7]. the databases of fuel production and of the emissions of alternative motor driving have been gathered from international publications and doctoral theses [10-29]. table 1: emissions and fuel consumption of the bus types e5 e4 e3 hc 0.078 0.076 1.356 g/km fuel cons. 641.429 622.964 637.381 g/km co 0.652 0.645 6.934 g/km nox 9.459 13.717 27.644 g/km pmm 0.016 0.015 0.042 g/km co2 2020.504 1962.339 2007.748 g/km methane 0.001 0.001 0.027 g/km nmhc 0.076 0.075 1.328 g/km 156 table 2: emissions and fuel consumption of the bus types e2 e1 80ties hc 1.571 2.403 7.047 g/km fuel cons. 605.975 664.391 843.085 g/km co 6.939 7.092 16.703 g/km nox 22.898 21.031 31.743 g/km pmm 0.044 0.115 0.278 g/km co2 1908.823 2092.833 2655.721 g/km methane 0.031 0.048 0.141 g/km nmhc 1.539 2.355 6.906 g/km a scenario analysis is included in the study. these scenarios are modelling a yearly traffic situation (in km) according to table 3, first using the old buses and than they are displaced by the emission models of the seven buses of the alternative drives. table 3: the “present” scenario in vehicle kilometer (vkm) per year and number of pieces of buses vkm/y pieces e0 27 998 055 460 e1 34 826 840 577 e2 13 189 275 248 e3 11 120 090 151 total 87 134 260 1436 the indicators the results of emission models are investigated by the global warming potential (gwp), human toxicity potential (htp), and photochemical ozone creation potential (pocp) of cml 2001. these are impact oriented indicators, that is, the impact of emissions is given with a mass equivalent value of a reference compound. gwp puts the emphasis on the role played in the climate change, and represents the environmental impact in kg co2 equivalent. this indicator can be used during the estimation of the carbon foot print. its value equals to the impact posed by the same amount of co2. as its name indicates, it makes a global impact, and caused by emission to the air, which have life-time from some decades to several thousands of years. htp characterizes materials with human toxic potential. the impacts of such materials are normalized to dichloro-biphenyl equivalent (kg dcb equiv). it will be used as a local impact, caused by heavy metals, pm10, halide, dioxins emissions. as such, recipients are mainly those who live nearby to emitting facilities. for example, htp of a waste incinerator has negligible impact on those who live app. 100–200 kms from the facility. popc helps to determine the impact of materials, which have a big role in the formation of tropospheric ozone, wherewith help in the development of summer smog. the unit is the kg ethane equivalent. the head materials with pocp impact are the hydrocarbons (gas) and nox. [30] accordingly, due to the magnitude of the impact, in case of public transport mainly htp and pocp are emphasized, whilst considering the total emission, the gwp is a good component to characterizing of the whole system. results we show first the impacts of 1 vehicle kilometer, so differences between the bus types and fuel types addressed can be made clear. fig. 1 shows that by all bus types, except the hydrogen fuelled buses, the emissions of urban traffic cause the biggest global warming potential. the gwps of the use of diesel motors are on the same level, the highest co2 equivalent emission is posed by the buses from the 80’es. however, the average impact is around app. 2 kg co2equivalent. the gwp of fuel production changes in proportion to the fuel consumption. in case of biodiesel an app. 3 kg co2 equivalent minus appears, because the system boundaries cover the co2 assimilation of plants, too. naturally, this does not mean that biodiesel is the best choice, because the gwp does not provide information about the other environmental impacts, such as land use or eutrophication. figure 1: gwp of 1 vehicle kilometer the value of htp is mainly derived from fuel production, which is especially remarkable in case of the hydrogen. the high electricity demand of the hydrogen production makes these values so high. because the production of the electricity is the impact holder, the htp is not formed like a point source of pollution, but is dispersed between the power plants of hungary, similarly to the other environmental impacts. the black column shows the important htp impacts (inside the city). this decreases with the increase of euro norm, but is rather high in the case of biodiesel, as opposed to gwp, the htp of cng and diesel hybrid are similar. such impact of public transport is the lowest when hydrogen is used. hydrogen-shovel buses provide the highest environmental performance in this category, with the immission of max. 0.003 kg ethylene equivalent. 157 figure 2: htp of 1 vehicle kilometer favouring smog formation is a capacity being characteristic of old buses; the biodiesel and cng have better performance than the newer euro norm buses. though the pocp of diesel’s whole lice cycle is worse than that of the biodiesel and cng, the emissions of use are lower (for of urban traffic).the possibility of smog formation is the lowest in case of the hydrogen buses (see fig. 3). figure 3: pocp of 1 vehicle kilometer the scenarios different bus types and different fuel types have given different impact values, and it is not possible to determine the best bus or fuel type from environmental aspect. the next scenarios will simulate a real situation, where the composition of the bus fleet and the value of travelled kilometres are given in table 3. this is the “present” scenario. by the other scenarios the bus fleet of the “present” scenario will be displaced with the alternative bus types, like biodiesel, hybrid diesel, cng, or hydrogen bus (taking travelled kilometres as reference). the emission of ghg in case of fossil fuel buses comes mostly from the combustion of fuel. this is 20 000 ton co2-equivalent emission in the “present” scenario. this is decreased in case of the euro 5 and in case of the cng and hybrid is less than 20 000 and 10 000 tons, respectively. in the case of hydrogen buses the ghg emission amounts to almost 100% due to the hydrogen production, that causes, except the “fuel cell hydrogen” (h-fc), higher impact as the “present” scenario. the co2 assimilation ability of plants has a “negative impact” on the biodiesel production, whereby the overall ghg emission of biodiesel is negative, as such, this process rather captures than emits co2. figure 4: gwp of the scenarios the advantage of biodiesel considering gwp disappears when htp is discussed. cng has the best overall performance although this impact of the previous two bus types comes almost exclusively from the urban area. on the other hand, the hydrogen buses have higher impact, but this arises from the fuel production and accordingly these bus types have the smaller impact on the citizens. the euro 5 has the smaller impact in urban are, following the hydrogen buses. figure 5: htp of the scenarios all of the alternative buses perform better than the “present” scenario considering smog development. the euro 5 and h-fc have the smaller pocp in the urban area; these are followed by hydrogen ice and the other fossil fuel user bus types. figure 6: pocp of the scenarios 158 conclusion the environmental impacts of older buses are higher than those of the alternatives. however, this tendency does not apply to hydrogen buses, because hydrogen production poses significant environmental impact, and/or high energy consumption. the gwp of old buses is between 2–3 kg co2 equivalent per vehicle kilometres, the same impact of alternatives is less than 2 kg co2 equvalent. considering those impacts which are important in urban environments, the euro 4-5 have better environmental performance than the alternatives. it can be concluded, that in the traffic situation (scenarios) the biodiesel, diesel hybrid, the cng and the h-fc have the best gwp values. considering local impacts (important impacts in urban area, like htp and pocp) the euro 5 has better performance, but if the fuel production is also taken into account, the euro 5 occupies only the 4th and 6th positions out of the seven scenarios. as such, the euro 5 norm buses are highly capable for the urban public transport. with the improving of the environmental profile of the hydrogen production (e.g. use of renewable energy, find the high performance hydrogen storage), it can be the best adaptable bus type for the mass transport in densely populated areas, due to their almost negligible emission and environmental impact. references 1. k. mogyorósi et al.: a közép-magyarországi régió társadalmi atlasza, 2006, 40–41. 2. zs. balogh: budapesti közlekedési zártkörűen működő részvénytársaság 2007 éves jelentés. (2007) 3. e. beliczay, a. lukács: ajánlások budapestért. (2006) 4. m. chester, a. horvath: environmental lifecycle assessment of passenger transportation: a detailed methodology for energy, greenhouse gas and criteria pollutant inventories of automobiles, buses, light rail, heavy rail and air v.2. (2008) 5. m. keller, m. lebküchner et al.: diesel, gas-, oder trolleybus? (2006) 6. m. rexeis, s. hausberger et al.: assessment and reliability of transport emission models and inventory systems, heavy duty vehicle emissions; final report. (2005) 7. m. rexeis, s. hausberger et al.: heavy duty vehicle emissions (artemis). (2005) 8. m. wang: greet life-cycle analysis model development. (2008) 9. int. stand. org.: iso 14040:2006 environmental management – life cycle assessment – requirements and guidelines. (2006) 10. r. ahluwalia, x. wang et al.: fuel economy of hydrogen fuel cell vehicles, journal of power sources, 130, 2004, 192–201. 11. j. a. barclay: advances in cryogenic engineering/ cryofuels now and in the future, p. kittel (ed.), plenum press, 1995. 12. e. booth, j. booth et al.: economic evaluation of biodiesel production from oilseed rape grown in north and east scotland. (2005) 13. compair: cng refuelling solutions. (2009) 14. http://www.e-traction.com/fuel_cell.htm (2009, september). 15. fiba canning inc: gas transportation vehicles (broshure). (2005) 16. fiba canning inc.: gas transportation vehicles (broshure). (2005) 17. hennlich ipartech.: professzionális elektromos diesel üzemanyag-szivattyúk (www.hennlich.hu). (2009) 18. ikp stuttgart & pe-europe: gabi software, manual. (2003) 19. jp sauer & sohn: sauer compressors for gas compression. (2009) 20. http://www.global-hydrogen-bus-platform.com/# (2009, september) 21. man nutzfahrzeuge ag.: ecology and economy – the hybrid city bus. (2009) 22. http://www.nrel.gov/lci/ (2009, september) 23. m. pehnt: ganzheitliche bilanzierung von brennstoffzellen in der energieund verkehrstechnik. institut für technische thermodynamik deutsches zentrum für luftund raumfahrt; institut für energiewirtschaft und rationelle energieverwendung. (2002) 24. w. peschka: advances in cryogenic engineering/ hydrogen cryofuel in internal combustion engines, p. kittel (ed.), plenum press, 1993. 25. e. rebhan: energie handbuch, gewinnung, wandlung und nutzung von energie, springer berlin-heidelberg, 2002. 26. j. sheehan, v. camobreco et al.: life cycle inventory of biodiesel and petroleum diesel for use in an urban bus. (1998) 27. http://www.agraroldal.hu/repce-5_cikk.html (2009, september) 28. p. l. spath, m. k. mann: life cycle assessment of hydrogen production via natural gas steam reforming. (2001) 29. umweltbundesamt & ökoinstitut: processorientierte basisdaten für umweltmanagement-isntrumente. (2009) 30. m. goedkoop, a. m. siebel: lca methodology and practice. (2005) 31. b. j. guinée, m. gorrée et al.: life cycle assessment, an operational guide to the iso standards. (2001) << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /createjdffile false /description << /ara /bgr /chs /cht /cze /dan /deu /esp /eti /fra /gre /heb /hrv (za stvaranje adobe pdf dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. stvoreni pdf dokumenti mogu se otvoriti acrobat i adobe reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /hun /ita /jpn /kor /lth /lvi /nld (gebruik deze instellingen om adobe pdf-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. de gemaakte pdf-documenten kunnen worden geopend met acrobat en adobe reader 5.0 en hoger.) /nor /pol /ptb /rum /rus /sky /slv /suo /sve /tur /ukr /enu (use these settings to create adobe pdf documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. created pdf documents can be opened with acrobat and adobe reader 5.0 and later.) >> /namespace [ (adobe) (common) (1.0) ] /othernamespaces [ << /asreaderspreads false /cropimagestoframes true /errorcontrol /warnandcontinue /flattenerignorespreadoverrides false /includeguidesgrids false /includenonprinting false /includeslug false /namespace [ (adobe) (indesign) (4.0) ] /omitplacedbitmaps false /omitplacedeps false /omitplacedpdf false /simulateoverprint /legacy >> << /addbleedmarks false /addcolorbars false /addcropmarks false /addpageinfo false /addregmarks false /convertcolors /converttocmyk /destinationprofilename () /destinationprofileselector /documentcmyk /downsample16bitimages true /flattenerpreset << /presetselector /mediumresolution >> /formelements false /generatestructure false /includebookmarks false /includehyperlinks false /includeinteractive false /includelayers false /includeprofiles false /multimediahandling /useobjectsettings /namespace [ (adobe) (creativesuite) (2.0) ] /pdfxoutputintentprofileselector /documentcmyk /preserveediting true /untaggedcmykhandling /leaveuntagged /untaggedrgbhandling /usedocumentprofile /usedocumentbleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /hwresolution [2400 2400] /pagesize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 36(1-2) pp. 149-153 (2008) determination of safety operating regimes based on the analysis of characteristic equation of state-space model t. varga , g. horváth, j. abonyi university of pannonia, department of process engineering, h-8200 veszprém egyetem street 10., hungary e-mail: vargat@fmt.uni-pannon.hu determining safe regions of operation is important at the design, control and optimization of process systems. process alarms and safety systems should be designed based on such knowledge. in classical control systems these regions are represented as independent constraints on process variables. in case of a highly exothermic reaction takes place in any kind of reactor there is a high risk to develop reactor runaway if the produced heat can’t be removed. reactor runaway phenomena is a serious problem in many chemical industrial processes, hence the most of reactions are exothermic. reactor runaway means a sudden and considerable change in process variables such as reactor temperature. to detect and forecast the development of runaway a model based criteria is introduced in this manuscript. the criteria is based on indirect ljapunov’s stability analysis of a process model. the aim of this work is to compare methods for calculation of eigenvalues. eigenvalues of the jacobian matrix were calculated with a numerical method and there were also computed analytically. stability of two-phases fed-batch reactor with highly exothermic reactions are analyzed with the investigated stability analysis methods. analytical solution is more sensitive and of course it is more accurate than the numerical one still the algorithm based on the analytical solution is a lot more faster. keywords: operating regime, process model, simulation fed-batch reactor, stability analysis. introduction safe and at the same time optimal operation is always a key issue in the wide spectrum of chemical engineering problems. e.g. the design of optimal feeding trajectory of a fed-batch reactor where a highly exothermic reaction takes place. so to apply any kind of optimization methods some constraints on operating variables must be determined, i.e. the safe operating regimes must be characterized. in this paper the first step of this problem solution is investigated. it is introuced, how the safe operating regimes can be extracted from a process model. the most important phenomena from the safety of operation was investigated closely. it is called reactor runaway. it has contributed to industrial chemical accidents, most notably the 1984 explosion of a union carbide plant in bhopal, india that produced methyl isocyanate. thermal runaway is also a concern in hydrocracking, an oil refinery processes. reactor runaway means a sudden and considerable change in process variables. it is a serious problem in many chemical industrial technologies, like oxidation processes and polymerization technologies [1-3]. e.g. in case of a highly exothermic reaction thermal runaway occurs when reaction rate increases due to an increase in temperature. it causes a further increase in temperature and it further increases the reaction rate. the temperature increasing will be stoped only if all reactants are depleted and reaction rate is getting zero. detection of runaway has two main important aspects. on one hand runaway forecast has a safety aspect, since it is important for avoiding the damage of constructional material of reactor or in the worst case the reactor explosion. on the other hand it has a technology aspect, since the forecast of the runaway can be used for avoiding the development of hot spots in catalytic bed, which speeds up the ageing of catalyst [4; 5]. the avoid of runaway can be important in decreasing of the produced amount of byproducts, e.g. in synthesis of 2-octanone from 2-octanol [1; 6; 7]. a control system which is able to modify operating conditions of reactor in appropriate time decreases the costs and increases the safety of operation. the first step to develop such control system is the development of a reliable runaway criterion. most of runaway criteria found in literature can be classified as dataor model-based criteria [8-10]. to apply data-based criterion it is necessary to have some measured data. it means the use of a data-based criterion has some restrictions on the forecasting. other problem with data-based methods is found in measurement conditions, e.g. measurement noise can result in false forecast. model-based criteria require parameter sensitivity and/or stability analysis, so for the application of these kinds of criteria it is necessary to have exact process model with correct model parameters. in the design process of a reactor in which a reversible reaction takes place the first step must be the calculation of equilibrium temperature. reactor temperature can’t cross this line. after everything is 150 known about the equilibrium the calculation of optimal temperature profile or trajectory can be performed. it can be generated easily with differentiating of the rate of reaction with respect to reactor temperature. hence the most of reactions in chemical industry are exothermic the generated heat must be removed to keep the operation in stable and controllable operating regime. in our earlier studies ljapunov’s stability analysis method proved to be appropriate to detect reactor runaway [11; 12]. the applied stability analysis method based on the analysis of eigenvalues [13]. the aim of this article is the investigation of the relability of numerically calculated eigenvalues. to check the applicability of the choosen calculation method the results are compared with the analytically calculated eigenvalues. next to relability the calculation time is the second important property of the proposed tool since it can be a part of an operator support system (oss) [14-15]. after a short introduction about the analyzed chemical engineering problem and the possible detection technics the investigated case study is presented, than results obtained by applying the developed programs are compared and finally some conclusions are stated and some possible future steps are described. stability analysis in advanced model based techniques reactor runaway is detected through the stability analysis of the process model, e.g. by ljapunov’s indirect method [16]. the state space model of the process: ( ) ,xf d xd = τ where: x – state variable; τ – independent variable (e.g. time). generation of the jacobian-matrix of first principles model is the first step in application of ljapunov’s indirect method to investigate stability: ( ) , x xfj 0x ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ∂ ∂ = where j – jacobian matrix; x0 – investigated work point. it is followed by the examination of eigenvalues of the jacobian-matrix. ,0ij =λ− where λ – eigenvalues; i – unit matrix. in case all of eigenvalues are negative than the model is stable but if one of eigenvalues is over zero than model is unstable at the investigated operating point of reactor. to calculate the eigenvalues of the jacobian the determinant method can be applied. in case there are m correlations and n state variables the size of jacobian matrix is nxm. to apply determinant method it is necessary that the number of correlations is equal with the number of state variables so the jacobian matrix must be a square matrix. eigenvalues can be calculated from the following characteristic polinomial: ( ) , jj jj ijdet mmm1m m1111 λ− λ− =λ− k mom l ljapunov’s stability analysis is suitable in detection of the development of runaway and the algorithm based on this stability analysis can separate the cases whether the runaway occurs in the reactor or not [11; 12]. however, it is quite difficult to implement this criterion in an industrial environment. furthermore, it is applicable to detect when the runaway has been occurred, which is interesting from the analysis of historical process data point of view, but it is not usable for on-line process monitoring and control, where the operator is interested in the region of the safe operation and the last time instant when the runaway can be avoided by the control system. for the predictive analysis of the process not only a detailed (accurate) process model is needed, but also a process simulator that is able to estimate the trajectories of the process variables in case of normal and abnormal operations. this simulator should be also able to model the dynamical behavior control system, including its safety elements. this knowledge is extremely important since these elements of the control system define and sometimes ”widen” the region of safe operation. the most common method for calculating eigenvalues of a small jacobian matrix is the calculation of roots of characteristic polynomial. it can be performed with applying numerical root-finding algorithms or in case the order of characteristic polynomial is not higher than four the roots can be calculated analytically. next to root-finding the second common method is the power method or vector iteration method. in this paper the accuracy, reliabilty and the speed of the developed algorithms based on numerical and analytical root-finding are analyzed and compared in stability analysis of a complex system. case study to illustrate the applicability of numerically calculated ljapunov’s indirect stability analysis a well-stirred fedbatch reactor with jacket cooling was investigated, where 2-octanone is produced from 2-octanol in a highly exothermic oxidation reaction. 151 reactor model the main product, 2-octanone is produced in a twophases reaction system in a fed-batch reactor from 2octanol. the 2-octanol is continuously fed into the organic phase, which does not exist before the start of the feeding. hence, the organic phase is the dispersed and the aqueous nitric acid phase where all the reaction steps take place is the continuous phase. two phases are connected by the mass and heat transfer phenomena. based on castellan et al.’s work [17] which shows that the oxidation processes in room temperature mostly take place according to ionic mechanism, woezik and westerterp [6] determined a reaction scheme describing the way of oxidation of 2-octanol to 2-octanone in nitric acid, which is proved to be feasible. in the first step of this reaction mechanism the nitrosonium ion forms. this reaction has a very long induction time, which can be shortened by adding a small amount of an initiator like nano2 to generate the necessary nitrous acid faster. the nitrosonium ion forms only in the aqueous phase. it is followed by the oxidation of 2-octanol forming 2octanone and the further oxidation producing different carboxylic acids. this process can be considered as an advanced benchmark problem in the field of process engineering. in [1] the control of this process is analyzed. in [6] the safety issues related to the operation is discussed. a report how the simulator of this process can be used in process engineering education can be read in [7]. from the viewpoint of our paper it is the most relevant work where the hazard and operability analysis (hazop) of this process is developed and also based on the application of process simulator. mathematical model of the system was worked out by woezik and westerterp [6]. the introduced mechanistic model is based on a simplified form of the above introduced mechanism to predict the dynamic behavior of the reactor. the simplified reaction mechanism: xbp b2pba ⇒+ +⇒+ where a is 2-octanol, b is nitrosonium ion, p is 2octanone and x represents all the byproducts. in the next part just a brief introduction will be given about this model; a well detailed description can be found in [9-10]. the structure of the dynamic model can be found in fig. 1. in the interconnection of organic and aqueous phases are considered only the mass transfer process and the temperature of the mixed phases are the same. the reactor insight and the jacket are coupled by only the heat transfer through the reactor wall. the main and the side reaction takes place in aqueous phase so at first 2octanol have to get through there from the feeded organic phase. to intensificate the process a well-stirred reactor can be applied with as huge heat transfer area as it can be built in because of the highly exothermic reactions. reactor reactor insight jacket aqueous phase a p b x a p x mass transport reaction(s) heat transport liquid phase w organic phase n figure 1: structure of woezik and westerterp’s reactor model based on the assumed reaction mechanism the overal reaction rates are calculated with the following correlations: ( ) ( ) ,cck1r cck1r aq b org p2,eff org 2 aq b org a1,eff org 1 ⋅⋅⋅ε−= ⋅⋅⋅ε−= where εorg – void fraction of the organic phase in the reactor; keff,– effective reaction rate constant, since in both equations the concentration of reagents are considered in different phases; corg – concentration of component indexed in subscript in organic phase; caq – concentration of component indexed in subscript in aqueuos phase. the effective reaction rate constants are depend on the temperature of the reactor insight and the acidity of the aqueous phase which is based on the concentration of solved nitric acid: ,ekk 0,0hr ,eff,a hm tr e 0 ,eff,eff ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ⋅− ⋅ − −− − − ⋅= where k0 eff,– effective reaction rate constant; ea,eff,– activation energy; r – ideal gas constant; tr – temperature of reactor insight; h0 – hammett-acidity function. to describe the component mass trajectories during the operation the following component mass balances which are ordinary differential equations must be solved. the a component is continously feeding into the reactor during the first part of the operation so volume of reaction medium is increasing too: ( ) ,rvcb dt cvd 1 rin a in,r org a r ⋅−⋅= ⋅ where vr – volume of reaction medium; br,in – flow rate of reagent feed; ca in – concentration of a component in feed. 152 because only the a component is being fed into the reactor during the operation the term which is considered this is missing from the other component mass balances: ( ) ( )21 r aq b r rrv dt cvd −⋅= ⋅ ( ) ( )21 r org p r rrv dt cvd −⋅= ⋅ ( ) 2 r org x r rv dt cvd ⋅= ⋅ ( ) ( ) ,rrv dt cvd 21 r aq n r +⋅−= ⋅ where cn aq – concentration of n component (nitric acid) in aqueous phase. to simulate the effect of producing heat from reactions and the jacket cooling on the temperature of the reactor a heat balance must be solved: ( ) ,qqqq hc 1 dt dt rarcin,r rr r −−+⋅= where hcr – heat capacity of reaction medium; qr – heat produced by reactions; qr,in – heat produced by the feeding; qrc – heat flux from the reactor insight to the jacket; qra – heat flux from the reactor insight to ambient. finally to calculate the modifications in jacket temperature: ( ) ,qq hc 1 dt dt rcin,c c c +⋅= where tc – temperature of jacket; hcc – heat capacity of cooling medium; qc,in – heat produced by the feeding of jacket. 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 0 1 2 3 t [h] n a [kmol] n p [kmol] n x [kmol] n b [kmol] 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 16 17 18 19 t [h] n n [kmol] 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 260 270 280 t [h] tr [k] tc [k] 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 0 1 2 3 t [h] n a [kmol] n p [kmol] n x [kmol] n b [kmol] 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 16 18 20 t [h] n n [kmol] 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 260 270 280 t [h] tr [k] tc [k] a) normal reactor operation – analytically b) normal reactor operation – numerically 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 0 1 2 3 t [h] n a [kmol] n p [kmol] n x [kmol] n b [kmol] 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 14 16 18 t [h] n n [kmol] 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 300 350 400 t [h] tr [k] tc [k] 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 0 1 2 3 t [h] n a [kmol] n p [kmol] n x [kmol] n b [kmol] 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 14 16 18 20 t [h] n n [kmol] 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 300 350 400 t [h] tr [k] tc [k] c) reactor runaway occurs – analytically d) reactor runaway occurs – numerically figure 2: calculated trajectories of state variables 153 results and discussions the model was solved in matlab with a numerical solver based on runge-kutta method. to illustrate the complex dynamical behavior of process the following two experiments are performed. trajectories of statevariables in fig. 2a-b show the normal operation of the reactor when 2-octanone is the main product and the total quantity of byproducts is low. a small, only 3 k change in the inlet temperature of the jacket results the development of reactor runaway (see in fig. 2c-d). in this case byproducts are mainly generated during the operation while the conversion of 2-octanol is significantly decreased at the end of the operation. in fig. 2 grey areas represent the instability regimes of the process. these areas are determined by using ljapunov’s indirect stability analysis. it can be seen that in a small time interval the reactor becomes instable still in normal reactor operation (fig. 2a) applying analytic calculations. this is not thermal instability, which is a synonym of reactor runaway, but it can be originated from the autocatalytic reaction scheme. the main difference between analytically and numerically calculated eigenvalues is that while in the analytically calculation all the eigenvalues are arranged from the jacobian-matrix of the developed process model, in the numerically calculation only the jacobianmatrix is generated and eigenvalues are determined by using the solver of matlab. in fig. 2 on the left hand side can be found the result of analytical analysis while the numerical is shown on the right hand side. comparing results seen in fig. 2 it can be seen that the sensitivity of the analytical calculation is more higher than the numerical technic. it means that runaway detection based on stability analysis and calculating the eigenvalues of jacobian matrix detects the development of runaway sooner than using a numerical solver to calculate eigenvalues. other very important thing that the algorithm based on analytical solution is three times faster than the other algorithm. this difference in calculation times makes the analytical technic more applicable in on-line monitoring system or in an oss. conclusions and future work process operators usually have only temperature measurements to follow the operation and to check and keep the safe way of operation. therefore a tool based on process models and stability analysis can be very useful in checking the appropriate operation and helping their work. the paper investigates that numerical analysis of characteristic equation of a dynamic process model how reliable in detection of reactor runaway. analytical solution is not just more accurate but much more faster than the other numerical one. therefore the message of this work is that with a bit more use of mathematic a lot more reliable and applicable tool can be developed to forecast or simply to detect the development of reactor runaway. further research will focus on how the extracted knowledge can be transformed into a set of constrains on the process variables and how these constrains can be applied in batch-to-batch and in feeding trajectory optimization. acknowledgements the authors would like to acknowledge the financial support of the cooperative research centre (vikkk, project 2004-iii/2), the hungarian research found (otka 49534), the bolyai janos fellowship of the hungarian academy science, and the öveges fellowship. references 1. woezik b. a. a., westerterp k. r.: chemical engineering and processing 41 (2001) 59-77 2. albert j., luft g.: chemical engineering and processing 37 (1998) 55-59 3. kao c. s., hu k. h.: journal of loss prevention in the process industries 15 (2002) 213-222 4. henda r., machac a., nilsson b.: chemical engineering journal 143 (2008) 195-200 5. véchot l., bigot j. p., testa d., kazmierczak m., vicot p.: journal of loss prevention of process industries 21 (2008) 359-366 6. woezik b. a. a., westerterp k. r.: chemical engineering and processing 39 (2001) 521-537 7. eizenberg s., shacham m., brauner n.: journal of loss prevention in the process industries 19 (2006) 754-761 8. barkelew c. h.: chemical engineering progress symposium series 25 (1959) 37-46 9. adler j., enig j. w.: combustion and flame 8 (1964) 97-103 10. lacey a. a.: international journal of engineering science, 21 (1983) 501-515 11. varga t., abonyi j., szeifert f.: acta agraria kaposvariensis 10 (2006) 121-133 12. varga t., szeifert f., abonyi j.: acta agraria kaposvariensis 11 (2007) 175-186 13. sastry s.: nonlinear systems: analysis stability and control, springer (1999) 14. varde p. v., sankar s., verma a. k.: reliability engineering and system safety 60 (1998) 53-69 15. góes a. g. a, alvarenga m. a. b., melo p. f. f.: reliability engineering and system safety 87 (2005) 149-161 16. lyapunov a. m.: international journal of control 55 (1992) 531-773 17. castellan a., bart j. c. j., cavallaro s.: catalysis today 9 (1991) 255-283 microsoft word szolcs_eloszo.doc compounds a (l/g) b (l/g) a 5.859 0.029676 b 13.3 0.050386 hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 32. pp. 5-12 (2004) separation of a two-component steroid mixture by simulated moving bed chromatography k. temesvári1, a. aranyi1, s. balogh2, gy. bánkuti2 and b. csukás2 1gedeon richter ltd., budapest 10. p.o.b. 27. h-1475 hungary 2university of kaposvár, guba s. u. 40., h-7400 kaposvár, hungary e-mail: k.temesvari@richter.hu, csukas@mail.atk.u-kaposvar.hu a method, combining laboratory scale equilibrium and elution experiments, simplified model based heuristic rules, as well as sophisticated dynamic simulation, was applied to design the separation of a two-component steroid crude mixture in a given laboratory-scale simulated moving bed unit. the adsorption equilibrium isotherms of the pure components were determined by frontal analysis method. langmuir isotherm model was fitted to the measured isotherm data. with the knowledge of these a priori data, elution chromatograms of the pure components were measured for the identification of the hydrodynamic and kinetic parameters in the smb columns. the process simulation was made by the new method, based on the direct computer mapping of the generic, bi-layered net model. the first estimations of the smb parameters were derived by means of the morbidelli’s triangle theory. starting from a feasible solution, stepwise improvement of the smb process was carried out by the detailed dynamic simulation, according to a strategy, based on the role of the design parameters. simultaneously, laboratory-scale smb experiments were carried out. good agreement of the measured and calculated data was found. in the next step, the dynamic simulation has been applied for the improvement of the smb separation (production rate, solvent consumption, recovery). in comparison with simple elution chromatographic separation method, considerable improvement of specific capacity parameters was obtained. keywords: simulated moving bed, direct computer mapping, generic bi-layered net model, dynamic simulation, process design introduction in our recently published papers [1-2] a methodology, combining laboratory scale equilibrium and elution experiments, simplified model based and heuristic rules, as well as sophisticated dynamic simulation was introduced to design the separation of a two-component steroid crude mixture in a given laboratory-scale simulated moving bed unit. the adsorption equilibrium isotherms of the pure components were determined by frontal analysis method. [3-6] langmuir isotherm model was fitted to the measured isotherm data (see table 1). with the knowledge of langmuir constants, elution chromatograms of the pure components were measured for the identification of the hydrodynamic and kinetic parameters in the smb columns. the elution experiments were carried out table 1: parameters of langmuir adsorption isotherms of component a and b in one of the columns of the smb unit. two elution experiments were carried out for each compound. one of them was used for the identification and the other for the validation of the obtained parameters. for the identification we combined the dynamic simulator with a genetic algorithm [7] that changed the parameters to be identified within the prescribed 6 ranges, and evaluated the simulation with the integrated (summarized) quadratic difference of the calculated and the measured values. finally, the suggested solution was refined by a few manually evaluated simulation trials. the fixed hydrodynamic and kinetic parameters of the models were the following: number of compartments (n) = 200; mixing coefficient (w) = 0; kinetic constant for both components (k) = 0.2 1/s these hydrodynamic and kinetic parameters were used for all smb simulations. [1-2] the process simulation was made by the new method, based on the direct computer mapping of the generic, bi-layered net model. [8-10] table 2: parameters of the laboratory scale smb experiments process parameters smb-1 smb-2 smb-3 smb-4 smb-5 smb-7 smb-8 smb-9 smb-10 smb-11 column connection 2-2-2-2 2-2-2-2 2-2-2-2 2-2-2-2 2-2-2-2 2-6-6-2 2-6-6-2 3-4-7-2 3-4-7-2 3-5-8-0 feed (ml/s) 0.025 0.025 0.0125 0.025 0.025 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 conc. b (mg/ml) 1 1 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 12 conc. a (mg/ml) 4 4 24 36 36 36 36 36 36 48 eluent (ml/s) 0.1253 0.1217 0.1317 0.1567 0.1767 0.3633 0.37 0.2534 0.28 0.39 extract (ml/s) 0.1083 0.1083 0.1183 0.1484 0.1683 0.3233 0.35 0.2148 0.255 0.255 raffinate (ml/s) 0.042 0.0384 0.0259 0.0333 0.0334 0.09 0.07 0.0886 0.075 0.185 column switching time step (s) 1350 1350 1200 600 750 360 360 360 360 360 liquid recycle (ml/s) 0.0367 0.0367 0.037 0.06 0.055 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.11 to find a feasible parameter set for the first smb experiments, the morbidelli’s triangle theory [11-14] was applied and a few simulation experiments were made. the input/output interface of the generic bi-layered net model based dynamic simulator is described in an excel workbook, where, with the knowledge of the filled input data, a macro generates the nonlinear morbidelli diagram, and shows the point characterizing the proposed design to be tried. starting from a feasible solution, stepwise improvement of the smb process was carried out by the detailed dynamic simulation, according to a strategy, based on the role of the design parameters. simultaneously, some laboratory-scale smb experiments were carried out. good agreement of the measured and calculated data was found. it was shown, that the applied simulation model is suitable for prediction of smb processes. consequently in the following work, based on extensive computer simulations, we tried to improve the specific capacity parameters of the smb separation (higher production rate and recovery and less solvent consumption), while we allowed a limited amount of the less retained compound (a) in the extract. experimental chemicals the problem under investigation was the separation of a two-component non-isomer steroid crude mixture, produced by gedeon richter ltd. the goal was to produce pure raffinate (maximum 0.3% strongly retained compound is allowed) and optionally slightly contaminated extract (maximum 5% weakly retained compound is allowed) products. for the isotherm measurements and elution experiments the pure compounds with a purity of > 99% m/m were used. the pure compounds were produced by preparative elution chromatography. for the smb investigations model mixtures of pure compounds were prepared with a composition, similar to the real crude mixture. the less retained compound is steroid a with k’=3.082, while the more retained one is steroid b with k’=8.046, (α=2.61). ymc gel silica 6 nm s-50 µm was used as stationary phase, it was purchased from ymc, europe gmbh (schermbeck/weselerwald, germany). 7 the mobile phase was methylene-chlorideacetone 50:50% v/v. solvents were purchased from merck kgaa (darmstadt, germany). simulated moving bed experiments a laboratory-scale smb unit (knauer csep 9116) was used for the smb experiments. the number of columns in the four zones was changed between 8 and 16, respectively. in case of eightcolumn configuration two columns were in each zone. when sixteen columns were applied, different column configurations were used (2-6-6-2, 3-4-7-2). in one case a special open loop three-zone configuration was also examined (3-5-8-0 column configuration). the columns were packed by drypacking method, using vibration (column dimension was i.d.=10 mm l=250 mm). the uniformity of columns was tested by elution experiments, injecting pure a compounds on the columns and eluting it with the eluent. the parameters of the laboratory scale smb experiments are summarized in table 2. analytical method for measurement of smb samples the samples of smb experiments were examined by analytical hplc which consisted of a gradient pump (spectrasystem p2000), a controller (spectrasystem sn4000), a light scattering detector (polymer laboratories pl-els 2100), a thermostat (jet-stream plus) and an injection valve (rheodyne, 20 µl loop). the system was operated by windows nt/chromquest software. a normal phase hplc system was applied for measurements. the column was merck, lichrospher si 60, particle size 5 µm, i.d.=4mm l=250mm the eluent was acetone-methylene-chloridemethanol 40:50:10% v/v. the injected sample volume was 20 µl, the volumetric flow rate of eluent was 1 ml/min. the experiments were carried out at 25°c column temperature. the nebulization and evaporation temperature was 32°c and the volumetric flow rate of the nebulizer gas was 0.8 slm nitrogen. process design of simulated moving bed separation of the given compounds the simulated moving bed (smb) process is the up-to-date solution for the continuous, counter current preparative chromatography. the principle of the technique has been described in numerous publications [15-16]. the essence of the process is that instead of the impossible continuous transportation of the particulate solid phase, the packed columns are changed stepwise, cyclically. this cyclic change is solved either by switching of valves or by the real rotation of the columns, connected to special distributing valves (as it is shown in fig. 1). figure 1: the main parameters of the smb unit in the smb the strong (more retained, b) and weak (less retained, a) components of the feed (f) of concentration cf,b and cf,a are separated into two outlet flows. in the extract (e, ce,b, ce,a) the better adsorbing strong, while in the raffinate (r, cr,b, cr,a) the less adsorbing weak components are enriched, respectively. the process parameters to be controlled are the liquid recycle (l), the recycle of the packing (p), the flow rate of the fresh solvent (d) and the ratio e/(e+r) of the outlet flows. the process is characterized by the very slow transient of the fluctuating concentrations, converging toward the (optionally multiple and sometimes impossible) steady state. the simulation needs the solution of systems of nonlinear, coupled ipdae (integer partial differencial algebraic equations) under cyclically changing initial and boundary conditions. the conventional smb unit consists of four zones, containing a number of columns that can be changed. in our last paper [1] three eight-column configuration smb experiments were described. (2 columns were in each section of the smb unit.) it was shown that the applied simulation model is 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 e , b e , ae , c , c f , b f , af , c , c r , b r , ar , c , c e lu en t l iq u id rec y c le c yc lic c o lu m n sw itch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 e , b e , ae , c , c f , b f , af , c , c r , b r , ar , c , c e lu en t l iq u id rec y c le c yc lic c o lu m n sw itch d l p1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 e , b e , ae , c , c f , b f , af , c , c r , b r , ar , c , c e lu en t l iq u id rec y c le c yc lic c o lu m n sw itch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 e , b e , ae , c , c f , b f , af , c , c r , b r , ar , c , c e lu en t l iq u id rec y c le c yc lic c o lu m n sw itch d l p 8 suitable for prediction of smb processes. consequently in the following work, based on computer simulations, we tried to improve the specific capacity parameters of the smb separation (higher production rate and recovery and less solvent consumption) while we allowed a limited amount of the less retained compound (a) in the extract. in fig. 2 the eight-column (2-2-2-2) configuration experiments are compared with preparative elution chromatographic separation of the respective compounds. it can be seen, that applying only eight columns in the smb unit, considerable improvement of specific capacity parameters was obtained. it is worth mentioning that in case of eight columns (2-2-2-2 connection) the impurity level of the extract was a little bit higher than five percent, but there was no option to change the number of columns in the zones, freely. the other feasible 1-3-3-1 connection would not be appropriate for safe separation, because in the first and fourth zones two columns are required for cleaning the recycling streams. the next step was to increase the number of columns in the smb unit from eight columns to sixteen. the improvement of the specific capacity parameters and purity of both products were examined. it was apparent from computer simulations, that increasing the number of columns from 2-2-22 connection to 4-4-4-4 connection, i.e. the proportional scaling-up of the respective streams, did not improve the specific capacity parameters and the purity of products, either. consequently, we examined the effect of the different column configurations of the four-zone smb on the more effective separation of compounds. accordingly in the next smb experiment (smb-7) the column connection was 2-6-6-2. the feed flow rate was doubled, compared to the eight column configuration (2-2-2-2 connection) system. the recycling streams were proportionally increased. the eluent flow rate proportionally increased, but for the appropriate extract quality, the eluent excess was distributed among the two outlets. carrying out an smb experiment with the above described experimental conditions, the more retained compound b appeared in the raffinate after sixteen cycles (see figs. 3a-3d and table 3). 0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 prep. hplc smb-1 smb-2 smb-3 smb-4 smb-5 pr od . r at e p a (m g/ gm in ) 0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2 1,4 1,6 prep. hplc smb-1 smb-2 smb-3 smb-4 smb-5sp ec . s ol v. c on s. (m l/m g a ) 80 85 90 95 100 prep. hplc smb-1 smb-2 smb-3 smb-4 smb-5 r ec ov er y % 90 92 94 96 98 100 prep. hplc smb-1 smb-2 smb-3 smb-4 smb-5 pu rit y % figure 2: comparison of the eight-column smb experiments with the simple preparative elution data fig. 3d shows the long term simulation results in a logarithmic scale. it can be seen, that the contamination of the raffinate is the result of a very slow transient process which could be avoided by deep investigation of long term simulation data. contamination of the raffinate can be prevented by using more fresh eluent and higher extract/raffinate ratio. in the smb-8 experiment only the amount of fresh eluent and the extract/raffinate ratio were increased, compared to experiment smb-7. (see table 2.) in this way we were able to produce pure raffinate and only slightly contaminated extract, but the specific solvent consumption was a little bit higher, than in case of the best eight-column (smb-5) experiment. (see table 3.) 9 0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2 1,4 0 20000 40000 60000 80000 100000 120000 140000 160000 180000 200000 time (sec) c on ce nt ra tio n (g /l) calculated a calculated b measured a measured b 0 5 10 15 20 25 0 20000 40000 60000 80000 100000 120000 140000 160000 180000 200000 time (sec) c on ce nt ra tio n (g /l) calculated a calculated b measured a measured b table 3: specific capacity parameters of smb experiments smb experiments feed a:b (g/l) production rate pa [mg/(g min)] specific solvent consumption (ml/mg a) recovery (%) purity (%) isocratic, 8 columns, 4 zones, column connection: 2-2-2-2 smb-5 36:9 0.7891 0.2429 98.62 100 isocratic, 16 columns, 4 zones smb-7 2-6-6-2 36:9 0.8114 0.2376 100 97.46 smb-8 2-6-6-2 36:9 0.7920 0.2471 99.31 100 smb-10 3-4-7-2 36:9 0.8065 0.1907 99.25 100 gradient, 16 columns, 3 zones smb-11 3-5-8 48:12 1.0175 0.2015 99.86 100 therefore in the following the main goal was to decrease the specific solvent consumption by changing the column distribution in the four zones of the smb unit. based on computer simulations, this objective can be reached by changing the column connection for 3-4-7-2, while leaving the recycle and feed streams unchanged. (see table 2.) this asymmetrical column connection can be explained by the actual separation task, because the separation of the less retained compound a (which is present in a much higher amount than compound b) and the more retained compound b occured in the third and second zones. the first zone had an important role too, in which there were three columns, because the desorption of the more retained compound b accomplished here. as it can be seen from figs. 4a-4c and from table 3, using the above described experimental conditions the specific solvent consumption could be decreased. finally, we tried also a three-zone (open-loop) smb configuration, where there was no liquid recycle at all. in this case the steroid mixture was solved in pure methylene-chloride. in this way the solubility of the compounds could be considerable increased, that is why the specific capacity parameters of the smb 11 separation could be improved further (see figs 5a-5c and table 3). figure 3: measured and simulated data of the experiment smb-7 3a) average concentration of the raffinate figure 3: measured and simulated data of the experiment smb-7 3b) average concentration of the extract 10 0 5 10 15 20 25 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 columns c on ce nt ra tio n (g /l) a b 0 5 10 15 20 25 0 50000 100000 150000 200000 250000 time (sec) c on ce nt ra tio n (g /l) calculated a calculated b measured a measured b 0 0 ,2 0 ,4 0 ,6 0 ,8 1 1 ,2 1 ,4 1 ,6 1 ,8 2 0 50000 100000 150000 200000 250000 tim e (sec) co nc en tra tio n (g /l) calcula ted a calcula ted b m easured a m easured b 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 columns c on ce nt ra tio n (g /l) a b 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 0 20000 40000 60000 80000 100000 120000 140000 time (sec) c on ce nt ra tio n (g /l) calculated a calculated b measured a measured b 0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 0 20000 40000 60000 80000 100000 120000 140000 time (sec) c on ce nt ra tio n (g /l) calculated a calculated b measured a measured b 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 columns c on ce nt ra tio n (g /l) a b -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 0 50000 100000 150000 200000 time (sec) lg (c b g /l) b in raffinate figure 3: measured and simulated data of the experiment smb-7 3c) average concentration profiles in the liquid phase figure 3: measured and simulated data of the experiment smb-7 3d) illustration of the slow transient in logarithmic scale figure 4: measured and simulated data of the experiment smb-10 4a) average concentration of the raffinate figure 4: measured and simulated dataof the experiment smb-10 4b) average concentration of the extract figure 4: measured and simulated data of the experiment smb-10 4c) average concentration profiles in the liquid phase x figure 5. measured and simulated data of the experiment smb-11 5b) average concentration of the extract figure 5. measured and simulated data of the experiment smb-11 5b) average concentration of the extract figure 5. measured and simulated data of the experiment smb-11 5c) average concentration profiles in the liquid phase 11 conclusions 1. the application of the generic bi-layered net based direct computer mapping makes possible to develop an appropriate tool for the detailed dynamic simulation of the simulated moving bed process. the measured and calculated results agree with each other. 2. we have elaborated a methodology, combining – experimental determination of the langmuir isotherms for the individual components, – use of the competitive langmuir equation for the calculation of the driving force in the kinetic model, – simulation based identification of the kinetic and hydrodynamic parameters from elution chromatograms, – application of the morbidelli’s triangle theory to find feasible initial solutions, and – simulation based improvement and optimization of the smb process. the method has been proved to be applicable for the solution of the detailed process design of the smb separation. 3. based on the new design methodology, involving the generic bi-layered net model we solved an actual, industrial separation problem successfully. the specific capacity parameters of the smb separation (production rate, specific solvent consumption, recovery) considerably improved compared to simple preparative elution chromatographic separation of the given compounds. symbols a less retained compound b more retained compound ai, bi langmuir parameters n number of cell w mixing coefficient k kinetic constant k’ capacity factor slm standard litre per minute (gas flow rate) i.d. internal diameter v/v volumetric ratio m/m mass ratio f feed c concentration of the compounds r raffinate e extract l liquid recycle d fresh solvent p “recycle of the packing”, column switching time greek letter α selectivity indices i identifier of the components a less retained compound b more retained compound f feed r raffinate e extract references 1. temesvári k., aranyi a., csukás b. and balogh s.: chromatographia, 2004, (60), s189-s199 2. temesvári k., aranyi a., bánkuti gy., csukás b. and balogh s.: acta agraria kaposvariensis, 2004, (in press) 3. jacobson j., frenz j. and horváth cs.: j of chromatography, 1984, 316, 53-68 4. jacobson j. m., frenz j. h. and horváth cs.: ind. eng. chem. res., 1987, 26, 43-50 5. guiochon g., golshan shirazi s. and katti a. m.: fundamentals of preparative and nonlinear chromatography, academic press, london, pp. 49-135, 1994 6. gritti f., gotmar g., stanley j. b. and guiochon g.: j. of chromatography a, 2003, 988, 85-203 7. csukás b., and balogh s.: computers in industry, 1998, 36, 181-197 8. csukás b.: simulation by direct mapping of the structural models onto executable programs. aiche annual meeteng, 1998, paper #239/9 12 9. csukás b. and bánkuti gy.: direct computer mapping of process models. in: grossmann i.e. and mcdonald c. (eds): foundations of computer assisted process operations, a view to the future integration of r&d, manufacturing and the global supply chain, aiche informs, 2003, 577-581 10. csukás b. and bánkuti gy.: generic bilayered net model of conservational and informational processes. in: dagli, buczak, ghosh, embrechts and ersoy (eds) smart engineering system design: neural networks, fuzzy logic, evolutionary programming, data mining and complex systems, asme press, 2003, 769-774 11. juza m., mazzotti m. and morbidelli m.: tibtech, 2000, 18, 108-118 12. mazzotti m., storti g. and morbidelli m.: j. chromatogr a, 1997, 769, 3-24 13. gentilini a., migliorini c., mazzotti m. and morbidelli m.: j. chromatogr a, 1998, 805, 37-44 14. migliorini c., mazzotti m. and morbidelli m.: j. chromatogr a, 1998, 827, 161-173 15. nicoud r-m. and bailly m.: choice and optimization of operating mode in industrial chromatography. proceedings of “prep 92”, nancy (france), 6-8 april, isbn 2-90526718-6. 205-220, 1992 16. blehaut j. and nicoud r-m.: analusis magazine, 1998, 26 (7), 60-70 microsoft word b_59_herseczki_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 39(2) pp. 183-187 (2011) enhanced use of renewable resources: transesterification of glycerol, the byproduct of biodiesel production z. herseczki , g. marton, t. varga university of pannonia, institute of chemical and process engineering, 8200 veszprém egyetem u. 10., hungary e-mail: hzsanett@almos.uni-pannon.hu methyl esters of fatty acids (also known as biodiesel) made from transesterification of vegetable oils and animal fats with methanol, have shown a lot of promise as alternative diesel fuels. glycerol is the inevitable byproduct of transesterification process for which new uses need to be found. while there are existing markets for glycerol, a significant increase in availability of glycerol, resulting from the expanded use of vegetable oils and animal fats, would destabilize glycerol market. in this study synthesis of glycerol carbonate from glycerol and dimethyl carbonate was investigated. glycerol carbonate is a key multifunctional compound employed as solvent, additive, monomer and chemical intermediate. resulting glycerol carbonate was obtained in almost quantitative yield. according to measured data a well-elaborated mathematical model of the reactor was used for experiments can be adequate to assign parameters of kinetic equations of the assumed reaction mechanism. component mass balances were built into the reactor model and order of reactions was fixed. keywords: biodiesel, glycerol, glycerol carbonate introduction crude glycerol is a considerable by-product of biodiesel production. approximately 10% of the converted feedstock is released as crude glycerol. this product fraction comprises several impurities, e.g. residues of vegetable oil and esters, salts, different alkaline catalysts and water. however, the process is far from being environmentally friendly as the final mixture needs to be separated, neutralised and thoroughly washed, generating a great amount of waste in terms of salt residues. the catalyst cannot also be recycled. these several additional steps inevitably put the total overall biodiesel production costs up, reducing at the same time the quality of the glycerol obtained as by-product [1]. the lowest price that crude glycerol could fall to is equivalent to its energy content, i.e. incineration is the lowest value utilisation pathway. pure glycerol (pharma or kosher quality) is a high price commodity, because of the energy-intensive step that is required during the processing. hence it is viable only at a certain economic scale. typically, smes operate small scale biodiesel production plants and don’t purify small quantities of crude glycerol for economical reasons. glycerol holds the potential of being an extremely versatile building block within the biorefinery. although many uses have been developed for glycerol, most product markets are currently small and fragmented. however, development of a biodiesel market could have a huge impact on the availability and use of glycerol. since glycerol is a key coproduct of biodiesel manufacture, increasing use of biodiesel will lead to much greater glycerol availability and lower cost. at lower projected costs, there is a tremendous potential to develop a variety of new processes and product lines from glycerol, taking advantage of its unique structure and properties. as a renewable and cheap raw chemical, conversion processes of glycerol to useful materials have received increasing attentions, and recently several examples have been reported: acid-induced dehydration of glycerol to acrolein in supercritical water [2], glycerol oxidation to dihydroxyacetone and glyceric acid using carbonsupported gold catalysts [3], and 1,3-propanediol production by metabolic engineering approach [4]. glycerol carbonate is a stable and colorless liquid that offers useful applications as a novel component of gas separation membranes, a surfactant component, a new solvent for several types of materials or a nonvolatile solvent in the paint industry, a component in coatings, and a component of detergents and. also glycerol carbonate can be utilized as a source of new polymeric materials [5]. glycerol carbonate can be obtained according to various methods, using epoxy compounds as well as glycerol as raw materials. it was reported that glycerol carbonate can be formed in the reaction of epichlorohydrin with khco3 carried out at 80 °c in the presence of 18-crown ether [6]. nevertheless, more attractive methods are those utilizing glycerol as a renewable and cheap raw material. taking into consideration that biofuels for diesel engines are being introduced on the market in increasing amounts, 184 a large amount of glycerol will be available as a sideproduct of the vegetable oils methanolysis. a typical method of obtaining carbonate derivatives of glycerol is its transesterification with ethylene carbonate or dialkyl carbonate. in the reaction with ethylene carbonate carried out at 125 °c in the presence of sodium bicarbonate the product was formed in a yield of 81% [7]. recently, in the patent literature, a glycerol carbonate synthesis was reported in which urea was used as reaction partner of glycerol to give the product with a good selectivity (92%) [8]. promising methods of glycerol carbonate preparation comprise the reaction of glycerol with co2 or carbon monoxide and oxygen in the presence of cu(i) catalysts [9]. the reaction of glycerol with carbon dioxide was carried out in a scco2 medium in the presence of zeolite and ethylene carbonate as a co-source of carbonate groups [10]. nevertheless, according to all the above mentioned methods glycerol carbonate should be purified by distillation under reduced pressure at a relatively high temperature (125–150 °c). in our approach, the glycerol carbonate synthesis was carried out under mild conditions without any solvent, using glycerol and dimethyl carbonate as environmentally benign and renewable reagents. due to the almost quantitative reaction yield there is no need for product purification by distillation at high temperature and recovery of unreacted glycerol. materials and methods dimethyl carbonate, glycerol, glycerol carbonate and k2co3 were purchased from sigma-aldrich and used without further purification. apparatus and procedure as first step reactions were carried out in a 500 ml glass flask equipped with a mechanic stirrer, thermometer and liebig cooler. glycerol (92 g, 1 mol) and dimethyl carbonate (270 g, 3 mol) were mixed in the flask. when reactor temperature reached 60 °c, k2co3 (4.14 g, 0.03 mol) was added to the mixture as catalyst. dimethyl carbonate (dmc) was used in a molar excess (3:1) and methanol was removed continuously to shift the reaction equilibrium towards the product. methanol forms a minimum boiling azeotrop with dmc (table 1), so when methanol is removed, dmc leaves the flask, as well. table 1: composition of methanol-dmc azeotrope boiling point (c°) molecular weight binary azeotrope (70% methanol + 30% dmc) 63.2 methanol 64.6 32.04 dmc 89.8 90.01 reaction was carried out at 71–76 °c in presence of k2co3 as a catalyst for 5 h, and then unreacted dimethyl carbonate was distilled off at 40 °c under reduced pressure (4–6 kpa). reaction progress was monitored by collecting samples of reaction mixture. as next step reaction was carried out in a mettler toledo labmax automatic lab reactor (fig. 1). the transparent, double-walled glass reactor allows automatic performance of chemical syntheses in the temperature range -50 to 220 °c (tr). the pressure range varies from vacuum to ambient pressure. the working volume of the glass reactor is 0.6 liter. figure 1: mettler toledo labmax automatic lab reactor analysis samples of reaction products were analysed with a merck lachrom hplc equipped with an ultrahydrogel column (i.d. = 7.8 mm, l = 300 mm) and a merck lachrom ri detector. water was used as eluent. retention time of the components in minutes: glycerol – 10.97; unknown component – 12.58; glycerol carbonate – 16.31 and dmc – 19.27. result and discussion we have developed a convenient method for synthesis of glycerol carbonate from glycerol and dimethyl carbonate (fig. 2) using k2co3 as catalyst. resulting glycerol carbonate was obtained in almost quantitative yield. o o o oh oh oh oh o o oh o oh oo o + meoh meoh a b c d figure 2: synthesis of glycerol carbonate between two types of hydroxyl group in glycerol, two primary alcohols are presumably more reactive than 185 a secondary hydroxyl group. therefore, intermediate c might be formed at the first step, and subsequently formation of product d occurs through intramolecular conversion. this mechanism is supported by analytical spectrums. on the analytical spectrums it can be seen that there is an unknown peak at retention time 12.5812.59, which is probably intermediate c. samples were collected from reaction mixtures at 1, 3, 5, 7, 10, 30, 60, 120, 180, 240 and 300 minutes. unfortunately the first three samples were not representative because during this period there are two phases in the flask (glycerol and dimethyl carbonate) and solubilization starts when mixture contains enough amount of glycerol carbonate. fig. 3 contains composition of samples. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 50 100 150 200 250 time (min) c on ce nt ra tio n (w t% ) glycerol glycerol carbonate dmc figure 3: influence of time on reaction of glycerol and dimethyl carbonate reactor model when a reactor is designed the first step is to investigate the possible reactions take place in reactor, all the micro and macro processes (e.g. stirring) and operating conditions which have some influence on them. reactors are planned and used to make value added compounds, so the most important task to know how the cheap raw materials can be converted into a value added product. the conversion pathway can be demonstrated by reaction mechanism. unfortunately, reaction mechanism does not contain all necessary information which is needed to design a reactor because it gathers steps of conversion but does not give any information about the reaction rate. to run a reactor under optimal operation conditions or to find the optimal operating range it is inevitable to know the rate of individual reaction steps. many kind of correlation can be applied to describe the rate of a reaction with different number of unknown parameters. to calculate reaction rates the arrhenius equation (eq. 3) was used with two unknown parameters (pre-exponential factor and activation energy). the produced heat during the reactions is called reaction heat, which is over 0 if the reaction is endothermic while it is below zero if the reaction is exothermic. every reaction has reaction heat which differs from 0. hence, to characterize a reaction, next to the earlier mentioned two parameters, the reaction heat must be determined too. it can be performed with some calorimetric measures. determination of unknown parameters can be achieved by using well-carried out experiments to collect accurate analytical data, but nowadays different kind of modeling techniques can be applied to reduce the number of necessary experiments. according to measured data a well-elaborated mathematical model of the reactor was used for experiments can be adequate to assign parameters of kinetic equations of the assumed reaction mechanism. structure of the elaborated model of reactor is shown in fig. 4. ecba k k +⇔+ 1 2 , (1) edc k k +⇔ 3 4 , (2) where: a – gycerol b – dimethyl-carbonate c – intermediate d –gycerol-carbonate e – methanol ( ) { }4321 0 ;;;i treexpkk r i,a,ii = ⋅−⋅= , (3) as eq. 1-2. show both of the reactions in the assumed reaction mechanism are equilibrium reactions so next to the unknown parameters in kinetic equations it is necessary to have a correlation between the inside temperature of reactor and the equilibrium content. arrhenius-type temperature dependent was used to calculate the reaction equilibrium. to investigate the effect of the producing methanol on the performance of synthesis the methanol is considered in back reactions, so both of back reactions are second order. the first reaction (eq. 1) is second order since in the first step the glycerol and dimethyl-carbonate must be formed the intermediate which is decomposed into glycerol-carbonate and methanol. on this level of work based on the introduced reaction mechanism component mass balances were built into the reactor model and order of reactions was fixed. a heat transport couples the inside and the jacket of the reactor as it can be seen in fig. 4 and the heat conductivity phenomena in the reactor wall was not consider in this model. silica oil is circulated in the jacket through a thermostat to keep the temperature of the jacket at desired value so only the heat balance of the reactor inside was built into the model. at the next level in the model hierarchy there is the level of phases. since the reactions equilibrium is modified with the evaporation of products it is necessary to calculate the content of gas phase. the temperature of the liquid and gas phase is equal so only the mass transport couples these phases. at the bottom of the model structure can be found the level of components. the reactions are considered at this level. as it can be seen in fig. 4 the reactions takes place only in the liquid phase since the catalyst doesn’t evaporate. 186 figure 4: the structure of the reactor model to check the assumed reaction mechanism the component balances in the liquid phase were completed with component sources based on equations 1-2. the identification of missing model parameters was performed by comparing the analytically determined masses of components and the measured temperature trajectory of reactor inside with the calculated ones using the model. identification of model parameters some of the missing model parameters can be determined from the literature (e.g. all the necessary properties of components) but there is no information about parameters of kinetic and equilibrium expressions so parameter identification was performed based on the comparison of measured and calculated trajectories of state-variables. the square sum of the difference was calculated in every sample time. to find the global minima of this multi variable optimization problem an evolutionary algorithm (ea), the covariant matrix adaptation evolutionary strategy (cma-es) was applied. the ea is an optimization method which based on the natural selection and survival of the fittest as it works in the real world. eas consistently perform well approximating solutions to all types of problems because they do not make any assumption about the underlying fitness landscape, hence it makes eas applicable from different fields of engineering to social sciences [11]. learning the covariance matrix in the cma-es can improve the performance on ill-conditioned and/or nonseparable problems by orders of magnitude. the cmaes overcomes typical problems that are often associated with eas, e.g. the poor performance on badly scaled and/or highly non-separable objective functions [12, 13]. another application of cma-es in an engineering problem can be found in [14]. the result of the identification of missing model parameters is summarized in table 2 while measured and calculated trajectories can be compared in fig. 5. only seven samples were taken and analyzed. in the identification process the measured value of state variables were linearly interpolated between nearby samples to help searching algorithm with increasing the number of learning samples. table 2: identified reactor model parameters k01 [m-3·mol·s-1] k02 [s-1] ea1 [j·mol-1] ea2 [j·mol-1] 16.08 664.8 4.40e4 2.12e4 ak1 [ ] bk1 [ ] ak2 [ ] bk2 [ ] 5.122 1.00e4 3.328 5.75e4 ∆hreac,1 [j·mol-1] ∆hreac,2 [j·mol-1] αrj [w·m-2] cv [kg·s-1·bar-1] -4.97e4 -6.43e4 6.057e3 0.2546 as it can be seen in fig. 5 there are some differences between the measured and calculated trajectories after much of reagents transformed. to improve the accuracy of the worked out model more experiments with varying jacket temperature trajectory need to be performed in the reactor but results are promising. 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 0 20 40 60 80 100 time [s] m a [g ] 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 time [s] m b [g ] 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 0 50 100 150 time [s] m d [g ] 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 280 300 320 340 360 time [s] t r [k ] figure 5: calculated(thin) and the measured(thick) trajectories of state-variables summary synthesis of glycerol and dimethyl carbonate was investigated. a convenient method has been developed for synthesis of glycerol carbonate from glycerol and dimethyl carbonate using k2co3 as catalyst. resulting glycerol carbonate was obtained in almost quantitative yield. created reaction mechanism was supported by analytical spectrums. a well detailed dynamic model of the reactor where the experiments were performed has been worked out. the developed mathematical model of reactor can be applied to unfold reaction steps of other synthesis, but before a final conclusion can be drawn more experiments need to be done. due to the reactor model other synthesis can be performed and analyzed in the reactor system in future. 187 references 1. m. verziu, b. cojocaru, j. hu, r. richards, c. ciuculescu, p. filip, v. i. parvulescu: sunflower and rapeseed oil transesterification to biodiesel over different nanocrystalline mgo catalysts, green chem., 10, (2008), 373–381 2. l. ott, m. bicker, h. vogel: catalytic dehydration of glycerol in suband supercritical water: a new chemical process for acrolein production, green chem., 8, (2006), 214–220 3. s. demirel, k. lehnert, m. lucas, p. claus: use of renewables for the production of chemicals: glycerol oxidation over carbon supported gold catalysts, appl. catal. b-environ., 70, (2007), 637–643 4. m. gonzalez-pajuleo, i. meynial-salles, f. mendes, j. c. andrade, i. vasconcelos, p. soucaille: metabolic engineering of clostridium acetobutylicum for the industrial production of 1,3propanediol from glycerol, metab. eng., 7(5-6), (2005), 329–336 5. s. c. kim, y. h. kim, h. lee, d. y. yoon, b. k. song: lipase-catalyzed synthesis of glycerol carbonate from renewable glycerol and dimethyl carbonate through transesterification, journal of molecular catalysis b: enzymatic, 49, (2007), 75–78 6. g. rokicki, w. kuran: cyclic carbonates obtained by reactions of alkali metal carbonates with epihalohydrins, bull. chem. soc. jpn., 57(6), 1984, 1662–1666 7. j. b. bell, v. a. currier, j. d. malkemus: method for preparing glycerin carbonate, us pat. 2 915 529 (1959) 8. m. okutsu, t. kitsuki: process for the preparation of glycerol carbonate, us pat. 6 495 703 (2002) 9. j. h. teles, n. rieber, w. harder: preparation of glyceryl carbonate, us pat. 5 359 094 (1994) 10. c. vieville, j. w. yoo, s. pelet, z. mouloungui: synthesis of glycerol carbonate by direct carbonatation of glycerol in supercritical co2 in the presence of zeolites and ion exchange resins, catal. lett., 56(4), (1998), 245–247 11. a. e. eiben, j. e. smith: introduction to evoultionary computing (2nd printing), springer, (2007) 12. n. hansen: invariance, self-adaptation and correlated mutations in evolution strategies, in proceedings of the 6th international conference on parallel problem solving from nature, (2000), pp. 355–364 13. n. hansen: references to cma-es applications, www.bionik.tu-berlin.de/ user/niko/cmaapplications.pdf, (2005) 14. t. varga, f. szeifert, j. abonyi: evolutionary strategy for feeding trajectory optimization of fedbatch reactors, acta polytechnica hungarica, 4(4), (2007), 121–131 << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /createjdffile false /description << /ara /bgr /chs /cht /cze /dan /deu /esp /eti /fra /gre /heb /hrv (za stvaranje adobe pdf dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. stvoreni pdf dokumenti mogu se otvoriti acrobat i adobe reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /hun /ita /jpn /kor /lth /lvi /nld (gebruik deze instellingen om adobe pdf-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. de gemaakte pdf-documenten kunnen worden geopend met acrobat en adobe reader 5.0 en hoger.) /nor /pol /ptb /rum /rus /sky /slv /suo /sve /tur /ukr /enu (use these settings to create adobe pdf documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. created pdf documents can be opened with acrobat and adobe reader 5.0 and later.) >> /namespace [ (adobe) (common) (1.0) ] /othernamespaces [ << /asreaderspreads false /cropimagestoframes true /errorcontrol /warnandcontinue /flattenerignorespreadoverrides false /includeguidesgrids false /includenonprinting false /includeslug false /namespace [ (adobe) (indesign) (4.0) ] /omitplacedbitmaps false /omitplacedeps false /omitplacedpdf false /simulateoverprint /legacy >> << /addbleedmarks false /addcolorbars false /addcropmarks false /addpageinfo false /addregmarks false /convertcolors /converttocmyk /destinationprofilename () /destinationprofileselector /documentcmyk /downsample16bitimages true /flattenerpreset << /presetselector /mediumresolution >> /formelements false /generatestructure false /includebookmarks false /includehyperlinks false /includeinteractive false /includelayers false /includeprofiles false /multimediahandling /useobjectsettings /namespace [ (adobe) (creativesuite) (2.0) ] /pdfxoutputintentprofileselector /documentcmyk /preserveediting true /untaggedcmykhandling /leaveuntagged /untaggedrgbhandling /usedocumentprofile /usedocumentbleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /hwresolution [2400 2400] /pagesize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice microsoft word szolcs_eloszo.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 32. pp. 23-31 (2004) investigation of reverse phase smb-chromatographic bioseparations of amino acid aqueous solutions z. molnár1, m. nagy1, a. aranyi2, l. hanák1, t. szánya1 and j. argyelán1 1university of veszprém, department of chemical engineering, h-8201 veszprém, p.o.box 158, hungary; fax number: +36 88 421 905 e-mail: hmolnar78@freemail.hu 2gedeon richter pharmaceutical works, h-1475 budapest, p.o.box. 27, hungary the authors investigated amino acid aqueous solutions as model system for the purpose of studying reverse phase chromatographic bioseparation. desalting of dl-β-phenylalanine was studied on a small-laboratory scale simulated moving bed (smb) preparative liquid chromatograph (number of columns=6, column length=125mm, column i.d.=13mm). diaion hp20 polymeric adsorbent resin was used for the reverse phase chromatography. the feed (sample) of the smb equipment is 3.5g dl-β-phenylalanine/dm3 and 58.5g sodium-chloride/dm3 aqueous solution. with the three zones opened loop smb with 2-2-2 column configuration can amino acid product be achieved with less than 50ppm nacl in crystal form after evaporation. later a large laboratory scale (number of columns=4, column length=500mm, column id=50mm) automatized smb equipment was constructed. the applied model system for bioseparation contains glycine (1.5g/dm3), l-phenylalanine (3.3g/dm3) in water and sepabeads sp825 adsorbent. both l-phenylalanine and glycine were produced in more than 99.9% m/m purity and 99% yield at productivity 3.7-9.5mg/(g adsorbent h) in case of three zones open loop 2-1-1 column configuration. the smb experiments were simulated with the help of equilibrium cascade model. the measured and calculated data agreed well. keywords: simulated moving bed (smb), column liquid chromatography, polymeric adsorbent resin, amino acid aqueous solution introduction it is typical in biotechnology and pharmaceutical industry that water phase mixture for processing contains end-product or active ingredient in small concentration beside the contaminant or polluting components. simulated moving bed (smb) preparative chromatography can be advantageous among the end-product recovery methods for continuous processing of high purity products, or products being difficult to isolate. basically the smb chromatograph works similarly to the true moving bed (hereafter abbreviated as tmb). the tmb works in the following way by figure 1a: in a column the mobile phase moves upwards through the adsorbent that moves downwards simultaneously. the column is fitted with a feed inlet in the middle of the side-wall, a raffinate outlet on the upper part and an extract outlet on the lower part. choosing the appropriate adsorbent moving velocity value and suitable eluent, feed, extract and raffinate flow rates, a stationary state can be obtained in the column with constant concentration profiles. the more binding component occurs in the lower (i-ii) part of the column and the less binding one is located on the upper part (iii-iv) of the column. this way two pure components can be obtained simultaneously in the extract and in the raffinate. the chromatographic quality of tmb is difficult to realize technically, therefore an smb was employed in the preparative chromatography. smb liquid chromatograph (hereafterabbreviated smb-lc) (fig. 1b) is a multi-column system with two inputs and outputs (products), in 24 which liquid phase moves in counter-current of adsorbent phase. the counter-current stream is not real, but simulated, since the packed chromatographic stationary phase moves periodically after each switching time. the shorter the switching time and the more the number of columns are in the smb-lc, the better it converges to the tmb-lc. the smb technique is basically a two product preparative chromatographic operation. it is suitable for mixtures to be separated having two components or can be produced two product fractions. in case of continuous system the two input streams are the fresh eluent and feed, the two outputs are the extract and raffinate. above all in basic case regenerated eluent of re-circulating stream is added to the fresh eluent. similarly to the tmb the lower part (i-ii) of the column is rich in the more binding component and at the upper part (iii-iv) of the column contains the less binding component. the inlet and the outlet fluid flow streams divide the column system into four zones (fig.1.) i ii iii iv eluens f e r a rec d+d rec d rec d cm iv iii d+d rec f r e i ii d rec a; b; figure 1. the scheme of a) true moving bed (tmb) and b) simulated moving bed (smb). true moving bed (tmb) adsorber: i, ii, iii, iv – zones; d – desorbent (solvent, eluent); d rec – recirculated eluent; a rec – adsorbent recirculation; e – extract stream with the better adsorbed component a; f – feed stream with the components a and b; r – raffinate stream with the less adsorbed component b. simulated moving bed (smb) liquid chromatograph – i, ii, iii, iv – zones, respectively hplc columns; cm – direction of simulated moving of hplc columns. the inlet liquid stream of the first zone is the mixture of the fresh and recirculated eluent. the first column of the first zone has to be regenerated till the end of each switching time period to protect carrying strongly adsorbed components by adsorbent phase. the inlet liquid stream of the second zone is the mobile phase from the first zone minus the flow stream of the extract. this flow stream must be determined so that the less binding component could leave the first column of the second zone till the end of the switching period avoiding to get into the extract. the inlet liquid stream of the third zone is the mobile phase from the second zone plus the feed stream to be separated. the function of this zone is holding the more binding component in the adsorbent phase, since the less binding component is taken away as a raffinate at the end of the zone. four-zone smb is favourable when retarding the less binding component – regenerating the solvent. the regenerated solvent can be recycled and added to the fresh eluent. in case of recycled solvent the system is called closed loop smb. this version is more favourable compared to the open loop system from economic and environmental point of view. three-zone smb is preferred in systems with high selectivity factor, when the less binding component has low capacity factor flowing nearly together with the mobile phase [1,2]. according to the above facts the operational parameters of the process are the switching time, the flow rates of the mobile phase in each zones determined by the external flow rates (fresh and recycled eluent, extract, feed, raffinate). summing up the possibilities for amino acid preparative separation the following chromatographic methods were applied in practice: ion-exchange column liquid chromatography, ionexchange parametric pumping, size-exclusion chromatography, reverse phase adsorption chromatography. in case of reverse phase adsorption chromatography for separation of amino acids solved in water: the styrene-divynilbenzene copolymers with non-polar surface and the polymethacrylate resins with weakly polar surface can be used in the presence of electrolytes or polar solvent. in such systems the adsorption equilibrium depends on the temperature, the solvent strength, the ph [3,4] and on the electrolyte concentration of aqueous solution [2]. the design of industrial scale smb-lc process requires numerous preliminary experiments. at the selection of the packing we can reduce the number of the possible alternatives if we consider the chemical character of the adsorbents. the most frequently used technique is the determination of adsorption selectivity with an analytical hplc instrument with a given adsorbent by injection method. the adsorbent is giving the best selectivity to be examined further on within small-scale or large-scale laboratory circumstances. we examined the model samples by frontal adsorption-desorption 25 method on the small scale lab size column packed with polymer adsorbent. the advantage of this method is that frontal adsorption and desorption processes of the smb-lc can be investigated. after determining the equilibrium data of the selected systems and the column packing characteristics the initial operating parameters of the smb can be calculated. the initial operating parameters for a three zone open loop smb was calculated by the method of morbidelli et al. [5]. the first zone regeneration is appropriate when: )l(1 lt a d mk ia ε ε − − =< (1) the less binding component must be removed from the second zone till the end of the switching time. the function of the third zone is the retarding of the better-adsorbed component, namely this component must not break through the third zone: aiib k )l(1 lt a ed m99.9 >99.9 >99.9 >99.9 aa06, t=60°c 8.130 3.697 >99.9 >99.9 >99.9 >99.9 small lab smb preparative smb phenylalanine 95.58 93 89.072.302 phenylalanine 98.34 98.5 98.21 productivity [mg/gh] purity [%] yield [%] productivity [mg/gh] purity [%] yield [%] phenylalanine 0.667 1.645 beside the prescribed purity and yield in industrial production the productivity must be the highest, the solvent use the less and adsorbent utility is the best. the initial operating conditions were planned with the help of morbidelli’s equilibrium method (fig. 4.). the first parameters can be improved, while increasing the feed value or concentration. an obvious possibility is the increase of all flow rates (eluent, feed, extract, raffinate) proportionally and decrease the switching time. we used this method for desalting of dl-β-phenylalanine on the small-lab smb. there are kinetic limits of the flow rate increase (fig. 5.). other possibility is to improve the regeneration of the first zone for example by increasing temperature. with this method less fresh eluent is necessary, thus we can increase the feed flow rate and so the productivity improves. by the phenylalanine–glycine separation lower selectivity was measured at higher temperature. the initial steep of adsorption equilibrium isotherm decreased, therefore l-phenylalanine desorption went on easier. thus the switching time could be reduced from 45 min to 30 min, so feed stream was increased from 20.3 ml/min to max. 43.5 ml/min. conclusions we planned initial parameters with the help of morbidelli’s equilibrium method for smb separation in water of phenylalanine-glycine, respectively phenylalanine–sodium-chloride model systems on polymer adsorbents. we investigated two ways to improve the productivity. the increase of all flow streams and the decrease of period time in the desalting of dl-β-phenylalanine is limited by adsorption and desorption kinetics of the amino acid: the productivity was increased 3 times, but the yield decreased from 95.6% to 89% (smb 3, 4, 5 measurements). 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 0 12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5 75 87.5 measurement time [min] u v , c on du ct iv ity si gn al [m v ] (a) 0 5 10 15 20 25 0 12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5 75 87.5 measurement time [min] u v , c on du ct iv ity si gn al [m v ] (b) figure 5. measured concentration commensurable signals by smb5 experiment in a) raffinate and b) extract. markers: signal of phenylalanine (+) and signal of nacl (*). the phenylalanine–glycine smb-lc system temperature was risen from 20°c to 60°c (aa03, aa06 measurements), thus productivity was increased 1.8 times. rising temperature gives solution only for an optimal value because application of ventiles, cocks, fittings, etc. is limited by temperature. 31 symbols d – flow rate of eluent (cm3/min) e – flow rate of extract (cm3/min) f – flow rate of feed to be separated (cm3/min) t – period time or column switching time (min) a – cross-section of the smb-column (cm2) l – column length (cm) ε – overall porosity mi, mii, miii, miv – morbidelli’s parameters ka, kb – equilibrium distribution coefficient k’ – capacity factor vaminoacid, vnacl – inflection point of the breakthrough curve (cm3) qphe – phenylalanine concentration in stationary phase (mg/g) cphe – phenylalanine concentration in mobile phase (mg/cm3) cnacl – nacl concentration in mobile phase (mg/cm3) references 1. hashimoto k., yamada m. and shirai y.: j. of chem. eng. (1987), vol. 20 no. 4, 405-409 2. molnar z., nagy m., hanak l., szanya t. and argyelan j.: j. chromatogr. (2004), vol. 60, 75-80 3. grzegorczyk d. s. and carta g.: chem. eng. sci., 51 (1996) 807 4. grzegorczyk d. s. and carta g.: chem. eng. sci., 51 (1996) 819 5. migliorini c., mazzotti m. and morbidelli m.: j. chromatogr. a, 827 (1998) 161 6. guiochon g.: j. chrom. a. 965 (2002) 129161 7. heuer c., küstens e., plattner t. and seidel-morgenstern a.: j. chromatogr. a, 827 (1998) 175 8. szanya t., argyelan j., kovats s. and hanak l.: j. chromatogr. a, 908 (2001) 265 microsoft word content.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 40 (2) pp. 83–86 (2012) study on analysis of antibiotic compounds from enthomopathogenic bacteria by ft-ir d. vozik1, j. madarász2, z. csanádi1 , a. fodor3,4, k. dublecz4, k. bélafi-bakó1 1university of pannonia, faculty of engineering, research institute on bioengineering, membrane technology and energetics, 10 egyetem str., 8200 veszprém, hungary 2university of pannonia, faculty of engineering, department of organic chemistry, 10 egyetem str., 8200 veszprém, hungary 3university of pannonia, georgikon faculty, institute of plant protection, 16 deák f. str., 8360 keszthely, hungary 4university of pannonia, georgikon faculty, department of animal sciences, cepo group, 16 deák f. str., 8360 keszthely, hungary e-mail: csanadi@almos.uni-pannon.hu entomopathogenic bacteria produce antibiotic molecules effective against plant, animal and human plant pathogenic bacteria. they produce broad-spectrum antibiotics, which can be applied in several different fields where suppression of microbes is needed. these antibiotic molecules have different chemical structure such as peptides. analysis and identification of these molecules provide useful ways in the research and development of drugs and agrochemicals. keywords: entomopathogenic bacteria, antimicrobial activity, peptides, analysis introduction insect pathogenic or entomopathogenic nematodes (epn) and their symbiotic entomopathogenic bacteria (epb) can be used as microbial control agents against agricultural insect pests [1]. these nematodes of heterorhabditis and steinernema species are symbiotically associated with the members of the bacteria family enterobacteriaceae as photorhabdus and xenorhabdus species, respectively [2–3]. the epb have several special functions in this symbiotic relationship. one of them is the production ability of broad-spectrum antibiotics, which keep monoxenic conditions in insect cadavers in soil [4]. antibacterial resistance is increasing worldwide. the compounds produced by epn symbiotic bacteria have showed a wide range of bioactivities of medicinal and agricultural interest, such as antibiotic, antimycotic and insecticidal effects [5]. these antimicrobial peptides have been successfully applied in pharmaceutics, plant disease control and many other fields [6]. antimicrobial peptides have many beneficial characteristics, such as broad-spectrum antibiotic activity, thermal stability, and low molecular weight, and most significantly, compared with most antibiotics, they are not easy to lead to the development of resistance in the target [7]. these compounds were reported as showing in vitro activity against gram-positive bacteria, including for example the multi-drug resistant strain of staphylococcus aureus. they have diverse chemical structures including peptides as well [5]. analytical study of these molecules can be achieved in different ways. edman degradation, developed by pehr edman [8], is a method of sequencing amino acids in a peptide. in this method, the amino-terminal residue is labeled and cleaved from the peptide without disrupting the peptide bonds between other amino acid residues. a major drawback to this technique is that the peptides being sequenced in this manner cannot have more than 50 to 60 residues (and in practice, under 30). the peptide length is limited due to the cyclical derivatization not always going to completion. the infrared spectrum of a protein provides a wealth of information on structure and environment of the protein backbone and the amino acid side chains [9]. this makes infrared spectroscopy an extremely useful tool for the investigation of protein structure. the absorption of a side chain in a protein may deviate significantly from their absorption in solution or in crystal. the special environment provided by a protein is able to modulate the electron density and the polarity of bonds, thus changing the vibrational frequency and the absorption coefficient. therefore, the band positions given in reviews should be regarded only as guidelines for interpretation of spectra [10]. in this study, we aimed the isolation and analysis of some peptide-type antibiotic compounds from two epb strains. 84 material and methods antibacterial peptide-producing entomopathogenic bacteria were xenorhabdus budapestensis (ema) and xenorhabdus szentirmaii (emc). they were cultured in luria broth (lb and lba) liquid and solid media as previously described [11]. cell-free culture media (cfcm) were prepared as follows: aliquots of the stock culture were added separately into 900 ml sterile medium. the flasks were incubated in a shaker at 200 rpm and 30ºc for 24 h and centrifuged at 13 000 rpm (10 000 g for 30’). after centrifugation the supernatant was filtrated through express plus filter (0.22 µm) (merck millipore). purification of antimicrobial compounds: 1000 ml of cfcm was mixed with activated amberlite xad polymeric adsorbent in a 1:20 ratio and incubated for 24 h. the resin-cfcm mixture was filtered through millipore express plus filter of 0.22 µm pore-size and washed subsequently with 200 ml of distilled water, 200-200 ml of 25 v/v%, 50 v/v% and 80 v/v% methanol (meoh), removing all inactive compounds by this way. after this the resin was washed with 200 ml cc. meoh:hcl (99:1) and 200 ml i-propanol (iproh) to eluate biologically active compounds. these samples were evaporated by vacuum distillation and resulted samples with meoh and iproh, respectively. for the analysis of the purified antimicrobial compounds a thermo nicolet avatar ft-ir-330 ftir apparatus was used to determine ft-ir spectra and a hitachi u-2910 uv-vis spectrophotometer was used to form the uv spectra. solid samples were prepared for the ir: some quantity of samples were ground with purified kbr and this mixtures were pressed in a mechanical press to form a transparent pellet through which the beam of the spectrometer can pass. resolution: 2.000 cm-1, scans: 16. results and discussion the most precise method for the protein and peptide identification after their separation by high-performance liquid chromatography (hplc) is mass spectrometry [12]. however, this method is quite expensive. absorbance at low wavelength (<220 nm) detects peptide bonds and amino acid residues with detection limits between nanomoles and picomoles. peptides having aromatic residues (phenylalanine (phe), tyrosine (tyr), and trypthophan (trp)) can be detected at 254 or/and 280 nm. for this reason we made a uv spectra of the purified antibiotic activity compounds. results of these measurements are shown in table 1. table 1: uv absorbance (nm) of the antibiotic compounds ema emc iproh meoh iproh meoh 201 203 200 202 213 218 217 ir spectra were made with the above described method. results of these measurements are shown in figures 1–4. figure 1: antibiotic compounds purified with iproh from ema figure 2: antibiotic compounds purified with meoh from ema in the case of amino acids only two side chain moieties absorb in spectral regions that are free from overlapping absorption by other groups and thus allow the spectroscopists an unambiguous assignment without further experiments. these are the sh group of cysteine (2550–2600 cm-1) and the carbonyl group of protonated carboxyl groups (1710–1790 cm-1). these groups were obtained in none of the ir spectra. figure 3: antibiotic compounds purified with iproh form emc 85 all other side chain absorption overlap with the absorption of other side chains or of the polypeptide backbone and further experiments are needed to assign an absorption band to a specific side chain moiety. figure 4: antibiotic compounds purified with meoh from emc the ν(c=o) vibration of glutamine side chains near 1680 cm-1 is a relative strong infrared absorber, the bands are sensitive to h-bonding and the band position is lower the stronger the h-bond is (table 2, 3). the ν(c=o) vibration of the deprotonated carboxylate group of the glutamate shows two strong bands near 1400 and 1570 cm-1 for symmetric and antisymmetric stretching vibration, respectively (tab. 2, 3). the ν(cn) vibration of histidine is a useful band near 1100 cm-1 (tab. 2, 3). tyrosine is a relatively strong infrared absorber due to its polar character. the most intense bands originate from ν(cc), the ν(c-o) and the δ(coh) mode near 1517, at 1235–1270 and at 1169–1260 cm-1 (tab. 2, 3). table 2: the ir spectra of ema antibiotic compounds with different eluents band position in cm-1 assignment iproh meoh 1659 1654 glutamine (ν(co) in proteins 1659–1696 cm-1) 1634 1638 histidine (ν(c=c) in proteins 1617 cm-1) 1605 tyrosine (ν(cc) ring in proteins 1615 cm-1) 1548 1556 glutamine (νas(coo-) in proteins 1553–1575 cm-1) 1520 tyrosine (ν(cc) ring, δ(ch) in proteins 1516–1518 cm-1) 1446 lysine (δ(ch2) in proteins 1445 cm-1) 1409 1405 glutamine (νs(coo-) in proteins 1397–1424 cm-1) 1246 1234 tyrosine (δ(coh) in proteins 1228–1250 cm-1) 1108 1082 histidine (ν(cn), δ(ch) in proteins 1094–1114 cm-1) while the δas(ch3), the δ(ch2) and the δs(ch3) vibration near 1465, 1450 and 1375 cm-1 are relatively good group frequencies, the δ(ch) and γ(ch2) vibrations are often coupled to other modes (tab. 2, 3). the only tryptophan bands with considerable infrared intensity seem to be those at 1334 and 1455 cm-1 (tab. 2, 3). table 3: the ir spectra of emc antibiotic compounds with different eluents band position in cm-1 assignment iproh meoh 1653 glutamine (ν(co) in proteins 1659–1696 cm-1) 1640 histidine (ν(c=c) in proteins 1617 cm-1) 1548 1542 glutamine (νas(coo-) in proteins 1553–1575 cm-1) 1446 1452 tryptophane (ν(chb)a, ν(ccb)a, ν(cn) in proteins 1455 cm-1) / lysine (δ(ch2) in proteins 1445 cm-1) 1403 1406 glutamine (νs(coo-) in proteins 1397–1424 cm-1 1336 tryptophane (ν(ccp)a, ν(cn) in proteins 1334 cm-1)/ lysine (γ(ch2), γ(ch2) in proteins 1345 cm-1 1246 1245 tyrosine (δ(coh) in proteins 1228–1250 cm-1 1201 tryptophane (ν(cc) 1203 cm-1 1152 proline (γ(ch2), 1168 cm-1 1085 1084 histidine (ν(cn), δ(ch) in proteins 1094–1114 cm-1) “b” and “p” indicate vibrations of the benzene or pyrole moieties, respectively. acknowledgement this work was partly supported by cepo, the austrianhungarian cooperation project for poultry excellence centre, working within the frame of erfa between 2007–2013 and támop-4.2.2/b-10/1-2010-0025. references 1. g. c. smart: entomopathogenic nematodes for the biological control of insects, journal of nematology, 27 (1995), pp. 529–534 2. g. m. thomas, g. o. poinar: xenorhabdus gen. nov., a genus of entornopathogenic, nematophilic bacteria of the family enterobacteriaceae, international journal of systematic bacteriology, 29 (1979), pp. 352–360 86 3. n. e. boemare, r. j. akhurst, r. g. mourant: dna relatedness between xenorhabdus spp. (enterobacteriaceae), symbiotic bacteria of entomopathogenic nematodes, and a proposal to transfer xenorhabdus luminescens to a new genus, photorhabdus gen. nov.. international journal of systematic bacteriology, 43 (1993), pp. 249–255 4. r. j. akhurst: antibiotic activity of xenorhabdus species, bacteria symbiotically associated with insect pathogenic nematodes of the families heterorhabditidae and steinernematidae, journal of general microbiology, 128 (1982), pp. 3061–3065 5. j. m. webster, g. chen, k. hu, j. li: bacterial metabolites, in: entomopathogenic nematology, cabi publishing, usa (2002), pp. 99–115 6. y. j. gordon, e. g. romanowski, a. m. mcdermott: a review of antimicrobial peptides and their therapeutic potential as anti-infective drugs, current eye research, 30 (2005), pp. 505–515 7. y. xiao, f. meng, d. qiu, x. yang: two novel antimicrobial peptides purified from the symbiotic bacteria xenorhabdus budapestensis nmc-10, peptides, 35 (2012), pp. 253–260 8. p. edman, e. högfeldt, l. g. sillén, p. o. kinell: method for determination of the amino acid sequence in peptides, acta chemica scandinavica, 4 (1950), pp. 283–293 9. a. barth: the infrared absorption of amino acid side chains, progress in biophysics & molecular biology, 74 (2000), pp. 141–173 10. b. hernandez-ledesma, l. amigo, m. ramos, i. recio: application of high-performance liquid chromatography-tandem mass spectrometry to the identification of biologically active peptides produced by milk fermentation and simulated gastrointestinal digestion, journal of chromatography a., 1049 (2004), pp. 107–114 11. e. m. motitu: evaluating antibacterial potential of entomopathogenic bacterium strains on agriculturally important plant pathogenic bacteria. master thesis, university of pannonia, georgikon faculty, institute of plant protection, keszthely, hungary (2011) 12. t. herraiz: sample preparation and reversed phase-high performance liquid chromatography analysis of food-derived peptides, analytica chimica acta, 352 (1997), pp. 119–139 editorial editorial preface the editorial board of hjic dedicates this issue to the national scientific students’ associations (tudományos diákkör, in hungarian, abbreviated as tdk) that is a real hungaricum with a 62 years old tradition. this association includes all the universities and colleges of hungary, where scientific research of any kind is being conducted. the members of the association are the faculty members, scientific advisors, and their b.sc. or m.sc. students. participation in the work of tdk is completely voluntary. students spend some of their free time with a faculty mentor, choose a research topic, learn the basics of the field, do the measurements or the calculations under the supervision of the chosen teacher/researcher in addition to their regular academic duties. at the end, they write a dissertation based on their results. these dissertations are peer reviewed and then presented at yearly institutional tdkconferences, where the students receive suggestions from a panel of scientists and professors, receive a score for their written documents and oral presentations. based on these scores, they may win legitimacy to present their results at the national tdk-conference. tdk is a remarkable organization in hungary that was kept alive by people who do their work from pure enthusiasm for the love of their profession. it is not an exaggeration to say that the tdk-students form the elite of all the university students. they are the ones who proceed to m.sc. level, become phd students, and, at the end, ideally become colleagues of their former faculty advisors. during their work as part of tdk, students learn systematic problem-solving, formulating good questions, critical thinking, composing their thoughts into concise, wellformulated sentences, preparing meaningful figures, elaborating the literature of the field, and presenting their result in front of a scientific panel and an audience. even those students who do not continue their life in the academia tend to remember their time spend on tdk activities as useful and memorable. often, the skills acquired while being involved in a tdk project are not part of the regular education at a given university. tdk gives them something extra. this issue contains selected articles from students and their supervisors about their results presented at the tdk conferences during 2013-2014. with this issue, the editorial board wishes to honour the effort of all tdk students and their advisors for keeping this unique tradition alive with their devoted work. dezső boda and tibor dulai university of pannonia, veszprém, hungary guest editors microsoft word contents.doc hungarian journal of industry and chemistry veszprém vol. 40(1) pp. 45–52 (2012) production of gas oil components from waste fats p. baladincz1 , a. ludányi1, l. leveles2, j. hancsók1 1university of pannonia, department of mol hydrocarbon and coal processing 10 egyetem str., 8200 veszprém, hungary e-mail: baladinczp@almos.uni-pannon.hu 2mol nyrt., danube refinery, ds development, 2 olajmunkás str., 2440 százhalombatta, hungary the modern-minded man has discovered that it is necessary to substitute a part of the fossil-derived energy sources with renewable energy sources to cover the energy demand of mobility, which sustains and accelerates the human society and economy. nowadays, the transportation sector tries to achieve this through the development and utilisation of bio-derived motor fuels. in terms of diesel-engines the biodiesel has been utilized in great volumes already, which is made from triglycerides via esterification (fatty-acid-methyl-ester, fame). the fame or biodiesel, due to its molecular structure, has some unfavourable properties. therefore, it was necessary to develop a new generation of bio-derived motor fuel for diesel-engines. the most promising product of these efforts is the bio gas oil, which is a mixture of nand i-paraffins and obtained via hydroconversion of triglycerides. these compounds are the best components of conventional gas oils, too. nowadays, mainly different vegetable oils are used as triglyceride source, but for the hydroconversion any feedstock with high triglyceride content can be used (e.g. brown greases of sewage works, used cooking oils, animal fats, etc.). the waste feedstocks can be especially beneficial. hence, during the experimental work, our aim was to investigate the possibilities of the production of bio gas oil and bio gas oil containing gas oils on waste fat basis via the hydroconversion of waste rancid lard itself and as a 50% mixture with gas oils. we applied a como/al2o3 catalyst in sulphide and in nonsulphide state for our experiments. we studied the effects of the process parameters (temperature: 300–380°c, pressure: 40–80 bar, lhsv: 1.0–2.0 h-1, h2/feedstock ratio: 600 nm3/m3) on the quality and yield of the products. the obtained main product fraction at the process parameters (360–380°c, 60–80 bar, lhsv: 1.0 h-1, h2/feedstock rate: 600 nm3/m3) found to be favourable by us which were met the valid diesel gas oil standard en 590:2009 + a1:2010 without additivation, except for its cold flow properties. keywords: lard, hydrogenation, renewable, diesel gas oil, animal fat introduction the modern society and economy are increasingly dependent on mobility. mobility of people and products is usually realized using vehicles. their number is growing with each day and almost every one of them (>95%) operates with fossil derived fuels. at the same time, the limited amount and the unequal distribution of the available oil reserves is a source of international tensions, because most countries rely on import. besides, there are more and more vehicles, which means more and more intense environmental pollution. for this reason, in the whole world, research has been started for the development and utilization of cleaner and more available energy sources. among these alternative fuels, there are the renewable, agricultural-derived fuels from biomass and amongst them the bio-derived motor fuels (agro-motor fuels), which are the primary bio-derived motor fuels of the present and the near future. because of environmental considerations and its intense rely on import energy sources, the european union treats the research of agriculture derived, renewable energy sources with great attention and urges their utilization in greater volumes [1–4], besides attending to the agricultural production, too. in this context, the union literally declared the necessity of the production of bio motor fuels and their extensive utilization [1] and allows the blending of biocomponents (in the case of diesel gas oil this means maximum 7v/v biodiesel) to conventional fuels. in addition, the union treats the effort to expand the feedstock supplies of bio motor fuels with great importance too [2]. the actual objective of the european union is to raise the average share of the renewable energy sources to 20% until 2020. the average content of renewable fuels, particularly, must be raised to 10% in all automotive fuels in the european market until 2020 [1–4]. however, it has been proposed recently that the share of the motor fuels derived from feedstocks that can also be used in food processing could be maximum 5%. before the worldwide economic crisis, the tendency of the automotive fuel market in the european union (figure 1) showed a probable increase in the demand [5] for diesel fuels and this tendency will restore despite the feasible spread of hybrid vehicles. therefore, the research and development of the agriculture derived bio motor fuels are coming to the front. 46 figure 1: the tendency of the fuel market of the eu (before the economic crisis) the research and development of the agriculturederived bio motor fuels, therefore, is extremely important. bio-derived motor fuels of diesel-engines the primordial fuel of the diesel-engine was a vegetable oil (peanut oil), thus for the sake of satisfying the continuously increasing gas oil demand, vegetable oils and their different percentage mixtures with gas oil are attempted to be utilized [6]. the main components of the vegetable oils (and animal fats, etc.) are the triglycerides, which are esters of a polyvalent alcohol, the glycerine, and natural fatty acids (the carbon number of the chain is always paired and they contain unsaturated bonds in a different measure) with different carbon numbers (figure 2). c h 2 ch 2 ch 3c h 2 c h c h 94c ch 2 ch 2 ch 3c h 2 c h ch 76c c h 2 c h 2 c h 3ch 2 ch c h 85c o oc h 2 c h o oc h 2 o o figure 2: typical triglyceride molecule however, the differences between the physical and application properties of these compounds are not suitable to simply replace the conventional gas oils. therefore, it is necessary to convert them with different conversion pathways. these conversion pathways can be: thermal and catalytic pathway. in practice, the more important is the latter one. biodiesel nowadays, the agriculture derived bio motor fuel and bio blending component that are produced and utilized in the greatest volume is the fame (fatty-acid-methylester) or biodiesel. this is made by the catalytic esterification of vegetable oils and other fats [7–10]. however the technologies producing biodiesel and the product itself also have numerous disadvantages. cch2 ch2 ch2 ch2 ch2 ch2 ch2 ch ch ch2 ch ch ch2 ch2 ch2 ch2 ch3 o o ch3 figure 3: typical fame chemical structure and the reactive sites in the molecule the disadvantages are caused by the chemical structure, which can be seen in figure 3 [10, 15, 21]: high unsaturated content (causing bad thermal, oxidation, and thus storage stability), high water content (corrosion problems) sensitivity to hydrolysis (poor storage stability), methanol content (toxic), reactive oh-group (corrosion of coloured metals), low energy content that results in greater fuel consumption (~ 10–15%), unfavourable cold properties (cold-start and pulverizing, cfpp). high production costs compared to the applicational value, limited feedstock supplies, etc. bio gas oil the most suitable for the utilization in diesel engines and the most valuable compounds of the fossil derived gas oils are the normaland iso-paraffins with high cetane number and with good cold flow properties. therefore, intense research has started to produce products with a similar chemical structure on triglyceride base, which do not have the disadvantages of the already utilised biodiesel because of their different (more stable) chemical structure and thus they can be blended to conventional fuels with no limitations [11–24]. one of the alternatives to produce such a product rich in iso-paraffins on triglyceride base is the catalytic hydrogenation (fig. 1) and if necessary, their isomerisation [25–27]. figure 4: the reaction pathway of the bio gas oil production (r1, r2, r3: carbon chains with c11-c23 carbon number) 47 through the reaction pathway, in the first step the hydrogenating of the unsaturated bonds of the triglycerides takes place, then deoxygenating reaction occurs by three different pathways: decarboxylation, decarbonylation, and hydrodeoxygenation (reduction, hdo). as the next possible step in the process, isomerisation reactions can occur, of which measure depends on the applied catalyst and process parameters. cracking reactions may occur in the course of the whole process [11–24]. the product of the reaction is the so called bio gas oil, which is a mixture of nand i-paraffins in the gas oil boiling point range, made with specific catalytic hydrogenating process of raw materials with high triglyceride content (vegetable oils, animal fats, used frying oils, brown greases of sewage works etc.) [11, 13, 15, 21]. to produce bio gas oil and products containing it, there are different technological methods (figure 5). figure 5: possible technological solutions to produce bio gas oil it is possible to pre-treat the triglyceride containing feedstock in a pre-treater reactor and then hydrodeoxygenate it, in other words, convert it in a second hdo reactor as a stand-alone unit. the obtained product in this technology is rich in normal-paraffins, has very high cetane number (90–105), but besides it, the product needs to be isomerised after the separation to improve its poor cold flow properties (18–26°c) [14, 20–21, 25, 27]. the bio gas oil obtained with such a technology can be blended to deeply desulphurized gas oil stream and thus gas oil with bio component content can be made. beyond that, through blending the pre-treated triglyceride containing feedstock to a straight run gas oil stream and process this feedstock mixture in an existing (or slightly modified) desulphurization plant, bio-component containing gas oil can be obtained (fig. 2) [15–19, 24]. as we mentioned before, a wide range of publications deal with the examination of the conversion of triglycerides per se, or the so called co-processing. however, these articles deal mostly with the hydroconversion of vegetable oils (sunflower oil and rapeseed oil mostly). the bio gas oil – as we already mentioned – can be produced from animal fats and any kind of fats and oils beside vegetable oils, too. this is important, because the increasing degree of the cultivation of oilseeds takes the land from the cultivation of food and fodder, and thus it can have an influence on the food prices. however, as a by-product or waste of the food industry and the agricultural sector, streams rich in triglycerides (rendered fats from slaughterhouse by-products and animal carcasses) forms, which can be applied for the production of bio gas oil, and thus they do not affect the food prices. in this paper, we investigate the hydroconversion of rancid lard, which can adumbrate the possibility of the application of such animal derived feedstocks. experimental during the experimental work our aim was to investigate the possibilities of bio gas oil and bio gas oil containing gas oils on waste fat basis via the hydroconversion of waste rancid lard in itself and as a 50% mixture with gas oils. we investigated the application of a como/al2o3 catalyst in sulphide and in non-sulphide state. in the course of the experiments, we studied the effects of the process parameters on the quality and yield of the products and in addition the utilisation possibilities of the main product. experimental equipment the experiments were carried out in experimental equipment (tubular reactor of 100 cm3 active volume capacity) in continuous mode [15, 17, 19, 21]. 48 figure 6: experimental equipment (legend: 1, 6, 11, 13, 14, 18, 20, 22, 26, 30, 34, 36, 37, 38: throttle valves; 2, 8, 31, 39: controlling valves; 3, 7, 9, 15: manometers; 4: deoxygenizer; 5: gasdrier; 10, 28: gasfilter; 12: gasflow measurer; 16, 23: non-return valve; 17: holding burette; 19: feeder burette; 21: pump; 24: preheater; 25: reactor; 27, 29: chillers; 28: separator; 33: pressure register; 35: pressure controller; 40: gas-meter) applied feedstocks and catalyst as the base stock of the heterogeneous catalytic hydrogenating experiments we used lard (fatty acid composition is in table 1) of hungarian origin and a deep desulphurized gas oil stream (properties in table 2) – derived by mol plc. – obtained from russian crude. as feedstock we used pure lard, pure gas oil, and their mixtures of 50%. table 1: the typical fatty acid composition of the applied lard feedstock fatty acid lard c14:0 1.19 c16:0 21.35 c16:1 2.04 c18:0 11.54 c18:1 45.40 c18:2 12.50 c18:3 0.78 c20:1 1.06 c22:2 0.67 *cx:y, where x: carbon number of the fatty acid, y: number of the unsaturated bonds in the fatty acids. table 2: the heteroatom and aromatic content of the feedstocks properties gas oil lard boiling point range, °c 197.8–383.2 sulphur content, mg/kg 5 20 nitrogen content, mg/kg <1 61 aromatic content, % 22.5 polyaromatic content, % 2.4 0.0 we investigated the application of a como/al2o3 catalyst in sulphide and in non-sulphide state in the course of the experiments. in the first case, the catalyst had been sulphided “in-situ”, and the sulphur content of the feedstock was adjusted to 1000 mg/kg with the use of a sulphur containing chemical (dimethyl-disulphide, which is easily degradable in the investigated process conditions) to preserve the sulphide state of the catalyst. process parameters the process parameters were based on previous experimental results, considering both the physical and chemical properties of the feedstock. the series of the experiments were carried out at the following process parameters: temperature: 300–380°c, pressure: 40–80 bar, lhsv: 1.0–2.0 h-1, h2/feedstock ratio: 600 nm3/m3. analytical methods the properties of the feedstock and the products were specified according to the specifications of the valid en 590:2009 + a1:2010 diesel fuel standard, and with standardised calculation methods. the obtained liquid organic product’s composition was identified by high temperature gas chromatography [15, 25]. obtaining the main product fraction the fractionating of the product mixture was carried out as it can be seen in figure 7. in the course of the experiments, the product mixture was separated into gaseous and liquid phases in the separator unit of the 49 experimental equipment. after separating the water from the obtained liquid product mixture, we separated the light, c5-c9 hydrocarbon products by distillation up to 180°c from the organic liquid phase. the fraction above the boiling point of 180°c was separated to gas oil boiling point range main product (c10-c22 hydrocarbons up to the boiling point of 360°c) and to residual fraction by vacuum-distillation. figure 7: the method of the product fractionating all product yields are based on the amount of the feedstock. results and discussion the gaseous phase, besides hydrogen, contained carbonoxides formed during the deoxygenation, propane originating from the triglyceride molecule, hydrogen sulphide and ammonia formed in the course of heteroatom removal, and a very small amount of lighter hydrocarbons (c4-) originating from the hydrocracking reactions. with increasing the temperature, the yield of the gaseous product slightly increased because the cracking reactions came to the front and the deoxygenation, desulphurisation, and aromatic saturation reactions took place increasingly. the yield of the main product fractions increased with increasing temperature (figure 8–12) in the case of both sulphide and non-sulphide state catalyst, which refer to the increasing conversion of the feedstock triglyceride content. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 y ie ld o f t he m ai n pr od uc t f ra ct io n, % hőmérséklet, °c 50% lard, 40 bar 50% lard, 60 bar 50% lard, 80 bar 100% lard, 40 bar 100% lard, 60 bar 100% lard, 80 bar figure 8: yield of the main product fraction as a function of temperature and pressure (catalyst: non-sulphided como/al2o3; lhsv = 1.0 h-1; h2/feedstock ratio: 600 nm3/m3) 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 y ie ld o f t he m ai n pr od uc t f ra ct io n, % temperature, °c 50% lard, 40 bar 50% lard, 60 bar 50% lard, 80 bar 100% lard, 40 bar 100% lard, 60 bar 100% lard, 80 bar figure 9: yield of the main product fraction as a function of temperature and pressure (catalyst: sulphided como/al2o3; lhsv = 1.0 h-1; h2/feedstock ratio: 600 nm3/m3) as a function of the pressure (fig. 8, 9) – in the investigated parameter range – there were no clear trends; in the case of sulphided catalyst and pure lard feedstock, the higher pressure (80 bar) seemed to be favourable, but in the case of mixture feedstock, the lower pressure seemed to be favourable; in the case of non-sulphided catalyst and pure lard feedstock, the lower pressure (40 bar) seemed to be favourable, but in the case of mixture feedstock, the pressure of 60 bar seemed to be favourable. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 y ie ld o f t he m ai n pr od uc t f ra ct io n, % hőmérséklet, °c 50% lard, lhsv = 1.0 1/h 50% lard, lhsv = 1.5 1/h 50% lard, lhsv = 2.0 1/h 100% lard, lhsv = 1.0 1/h 100% lard, lhsv = 1.5 1/h 100% lard, lhsv = 2.0 1/h figure 10: yield of the main product fraction as a function of temperature and lhsv (catalyst: non-sulphided como/al2o3;p = 80 bar; h2/feedstock ratio: 600 nm3/m3) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 y ie ld o f t he m m ai n pr od uc t f ra ct io n, % hőmérséklet, °c 50% lard, lhsv = 1.0 1/h 100% lard, lhsv = 1.0 1/h 50% lard, lhsv = 1.5 1/h 100% lard, lhsv = 1.5 1/h 50% lard, lhsv = 2.0 1/h 100% lard, lhsv = 2.0 1/h figure 11: yield of the main product fraction as a function of temperature and lhsv (catalyst: non-sulphided como/al2o3;p = 80 bar; h2/feedstock ratio: 600 nm3/m3) 50 decreasing the liquid hourly space velocity favoured the triglyceride conversion to paraffins in the case of both feedstock and the state of the catalyst, so the yield of the main product fraction increased with decreasing the liquid hourly space velocity (fig. 10, 11). this was caused by the higher retention time of the reactants on the active sites. based on the yields of the main product fractions in the cases of both states of the catalyst (fig. 12), we determined that in the case of the sulphide state catalyst, the yield of the main product fraction was higher, but not even in this case was the conversion of the triglycerides full, because the yield of the residual fraction was still significant (figure 13). 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 y ie ld o f t he m ai n pr od uc t fr ac tio n, % temperature, °c 100% lard, sulphided como/al2o3 100% lard, non-sulphided como/al2o3 50% lard, sulphided como/al2o3 50% lard, non-sulphided como/al2o3 figure 12: yield of the main product fractions as a function of the temperature in the case of different feedstock and states of the catalyst (p: 80 bar; lhsv: 1.0 h-1; h2/feedstock ratio 600 nm3/m3) the decreasing of the yield of the residual fraction (fig. 13) with increasing the temperature also provides information about the increasing conversion of the triglyceride content of the feedstock, but at the strictest process parameters, the yield of the residual fraction was still significant. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 y ie ld o f t he r es id ua l f ra ct io n, % temperature, °c 100% lard, sulphided como/al2o3 100% lard, non-sulphided como/al2o3 50% lard, sulphided como/al2o3 50% lard, non-sulphided como/al2o3 figure 13: yield of the residual fractions as a function of the temperature in the case of different feedstocks and states of catalyst (p: 80 bar; lhsv: 1.0 h-1; h2/feedstock ratio 600 nm3/m3) figure 14 provides information about how the different deoxygenating reactions (mechanisms) take place and about the relationship between them. in the course of the deoxygenation of the natural – and so containing fatty acids with conjugated carbon numbers in their carbon chains – triglycerides, during the hydrodeoxygenation (hdo) reaction pathway paraffins with the same carbon numbers as the fatty acids form next to water. in the course of decarboxylationdecarbonylation (dco) reaction pathways, paraffins with one less carbon numbers as the fatty acids form next to carbon oxides. the hdo/dco ratio of the hydroconversion pathways, which is favourable for the yield of the main product fraction, was higher in the case of non-sulphided catalyst than in the case of the sulphided catalyst. 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 0,5 1,0 1,5 2,0 2,5 3,0 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 h d o /d c o r at io o n no nsu lp hi de d ca ta ly t h d o /d c o r at io n on s ul ph id ed c at al ys t temperature, °c sulphided como/al2o3 non-sulphided como/al2o3 figure 14: the change in the ratio of the different routes of oxygen removal as a function of the temperature (p: 80 bar; lhsv: 1.0 h-1; h2/feedstock ratio: 600 nm3/m3) the isoparaffin content of the main product fractions (high isoparaffin content is favourable for the good cold flow properties) was the highest in the case of the nonsulphided state como/al2o3 catalyst (figure 15), because of the high isomerisation activity of the non-sulphided como bimetallic system [25]. 0,00 0,05 0,10 0,15 0,20 0,25 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 r at io o f i -p ar af fin /n -p ar af fin temperature, °c sulphided como/al2o3 non-sulphided como/al2o3 figure 15: the change in the isoand normal-paraffin content of the products as a function of the temperature (p: 80 bar; lhsv: 1.0 h-1; h2/feedstock ratio: 600 nm3/m3) conclusion in this paper we shortly presented the necessity of the research and development of the bio-derived motorfuels, the already known bio-derived fuels of dieselengines, and the bio gas oil or bio gas oil containing gas oil producing technologies, respectively. during the experimental work, our aim was to investigate the 51 possibilities of bio gas oil and bio gas oil containing gas oils on waste fat basis via the hydroconversion of waste rancid lard in itself and as a 50% mixture with gas oils on a como/al2o3 catalyst in sulphide and in nonsulphide state. the experimental results adumbrate the industrial application of different animal derived (waste) fats, with which the feedstock supplies can be expanded, for the production of bio derived motor fuel components to expand the feedstock supplies. the properties of the feedstock and the products were specified according to the specifications of the valid en 590:2009 + a1:2010 diesel fuel standard, and with standardised calculation methods. in the case of mixture feedstock and sulphide state como/al2o3 catalyst, the yield of the main product fraction (81%) was higher than in the case of nonsulphided state como/al2o3 catalyst (72%) at the strictest process parameters. however, in both forms (i.e. sulphided and non-sulphided) of the applied catalyst, the yield of the unconverted residual fraction (boiling point >360°c) was significant. the cause of this was that the oxygen content of the lard is high, about 11%. besides this, it contains compounds (n-compounds) that strongly adsorb to the catalytically active sites, and thus decrease the possibilities of the deoxygenating reactions to take place. the hdo/dco ratio of the hydroconversion pathways which is favourable for the yield of the main product fraction was higher in the case of non-sulphided catalyst than in the case of the sulphided catalyst. the iso-paraffin content of the main product fractions (high iso-paraffin content is favourable for the good cold flow properties) was the highest in the case of non-sulphided state como/al2o3 catalyst, because of the high isomerisation activity of the non-sulphided como bimetallic system. the properties of the main product fractions obtained at these process parameter combinations meet the valid diesel gas oil standard en 590:2009 + a1:2010, except for their cold flow properties (cfpp). however, these products could be excellent diesel gas oil blending components because of their very low sulphur and nitrogen content, and decreased aromatic content, and because their high cetane number is ensured by the n-paraffins forming during the triglyceride conversion. the cold flow properties of the products can be improved by catalytic hydroisomerisation of the n-paraffins then with additives. thus, a high quality bio-motor fuel or bio-derived blending component containing diesel motor fuel can be obtained which meets the valid diesel gas oil standard. briefly, we determined that considering the yield of the main product fraction the sulphided state como/al2o3 catalyst is more preferable for the hydroconversion of lard. in the case of non-sulphided state catalyst, the main product fraction contained a higher amount of i-paraffins, which are beneficial from the point of view of cold flow properties. the experiments were carried out on a “once flow” reactor system. therefore, it may be a possibility for increasing the conversion to separate the residual fraction from the product and recycle it to the reactor. to corroborate, further experiments and tests should be carried out. acknowledgement this work was supported by the european union and co-financed by the european social fund in the frame of the támop-4.2.1/b-09/1/konv-2010-0003 and támop-4.2.2/b-10/1-2010-0025 projects. references 1. directive 2003/30/ec of the european parliament and of the council, official journal of the european union (2003) 31(13) pp. 188–192 2. commission of the european communities, com (2006) 848, brussels 3. directive 2009/28/ec of the european parliament and of the council, official journal of the european union (2009) 31(13) pp. 16–62 4. directive 2009/30/ec of the european parliament and of the council, official journal of the european union (2009) l140, pp. 88–113 5. m. dastillung: impact of marine fuels quality lagislation on eu refineries at the 2020 horizon, concawe report (2009) no. 03/09 6. b eder, f. eder: pflanzenöl als kraftstoff, autos und verbrennungsmotoren mit bioenergie, freiburg (2005) 7. z. varga, j. hancsók, f. kovács: production of environmentally friendly diesel fuels, hung. j. ind. chem. (2000) 2, pp. 48–52 8. j. m. marchetti, v. u. miguel, a. f. errazu: possible methods for biodiesel production, renewable and sustainable energy reviews, 11 (2007) pp. 1300–1311 9. j. hancsók, f. kovács, m. krár: növényolajzsírsav-metilészterek környezetbarát előállítása, olaj szappan kozmetika, 53(5) (2004) pp. 189–195 10. a. e. atabani, a. s. silitonga, i. a. badruddin, t. m. i. mahlia, h. h. masjuki, s. mekhilef: a comprehensive review on biodiesel as an alternative energy resource and its characteristics, renewable and sustainable energy reviews, 16 (2012) pp. 2070–2093 11. j. hancsók, m. krár, sz. magyar, l. boda, a. holló, d. kalló: microporous and mesoporous materials, 101 (2007) (1-2) pp. 148–152 12. j. mikulec, j. cvengros, l. joríková, m. banic, a. kleinová: second generation diesel fuel from renewable sources, journal of cleaner production 18(9) (2010) pp. 917–926 13. j. hancsók, m. krár, sz. magyar, l. boda, a. holló, d. kalló: studies in surface science and catalysis 170 b – from zeolites to porous mof materials (2007) 170, pp. 1605–1610 14. s. mcardle, s. girish, j. j. leahy, t. curtin: selective hydrogenation of sunflower oil over noble metal catalysts, journal of molecular catalysis a: chemical 351 (2011) pp. 179–187 52 15. m. krár, a. thernesz, cs. tóth, t. kasza, j. hancsók: investigation of catalytic conversion of vegetable oil/gas oil mixtures, in halász, i. (editor) silica and silicates in modern catalysis, transworld research network, india, kerala, pp. 435–455 16. corma, a., huber, g. w., o’connor, p., applied catalysis a: general 2007, 329, 120–129 17. cs. tóth, p. baladincz, s. kovács, j. hancsók: producing clean diesel fuel by co-hydrogenation of vegetable oil with gas oil, clean technologies and environmental policy (2011) 13(4) pp. 581–585 18. ch. templis, a. vonortas, i. sebos, n. papayannakos: vegetable oil effect on gasoil hds in their catalytic co-hydroprocessing, applied catalysis b: environmental 104 (2011) pp. 324–329 19. cs. tóth, p. baladincz, j. hancsók: production of biocomponent containing gas oil with the coprocessing of vegetable oil-gas oil mixture, topics in catalysis (2011) 54, pp. 1084–1093 20. m. toba, y. abe, h. kuramochi, m. osako, t. mochizuki, y. yoshimura: hydrodeoxygenation of waste vegetable oil over sulfide catalysts, catalysis today (2011) 164, pp. 533–537 21. j. hancsók, p. baladincz, t. kasza, s. kovács, cs. tóth, z. varga: „bio gas oil production fromwaste lard”, journal of biomedicine and biotechnology (2011) p. 9. 22. p. simacek, d. kubicka, g. sebor, m. pospísil: fuel properties of hydroprocessed rapeseed oil, fuel, 89 (2010) pp. 611–615 23. j. hancsók, t. kasza, s. kovács, p. solymosi, a. holló: production of bioparaffins by the catalytic hydrogenation of natural triglycerides, journal of cleaner production (2012) 34, pp. 76–81 24. p. simacek, d. kubicka: hydrocracking of petroleum vacuum distillate containing rapeseed oil: evaluation of diesel fuel, fuel 89 (2010) pp. 1508–1513 25. m. krár, t. kasza, s. kovács, d. kalló, j. hancsók: bio gas oils with improved low temperature properties, fuel processing technology (2011) 92(5) pp. 886–892 26. j. a. muñoz arroyo, g. g. martens, g. f. froment, g. b. marin, p. a. jacons, j. a. martens: hydrocracking and isomerization of n-paraffin mixtures and a hydrotreated gasoil on pt/zsm-22: confirmation of pore mouth and keylock catalysis in liquid phase, applied catalysis a: general, volume 192, issue 1, 4 february 2000, pp. 9–22 27. j. hancsók, s. kovács, gy. pölczmann, t. kasza: investigation the effect of oxygenic compounds on the isomerization of bioparaffins over pt/sapo-11, topics in catalysis (2011) 54, pp. 1094–1101 hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 33(1-2). pp. 97–104 (2005) model predictive control of continuous crystallizers n. moldoványi1 and b.g. lakatos2 1honeywell process solutions, h-1139 budapest petneházy u. 2-4 hungary, 2department of process engineering, university of veszprém, h-8201 veszprém, p.o. box 158, hungary the problem of model predictive control of continuous isothermal crystallizers, using a detailed moment equation model is analysed. the mean size of the crystalline product and the variance of crystal size are the controlled variables, while the manipulated variables are the input concentration of the solute and the flow-rate. the controllability and observability, as well as the coupling between the inputs and the outputs are analyzed by simulation using the linearised model. the crystallizer has proved to be a nonlinear multi-input multi-output system with strong coupling between the state variables. it is shown that the mean crystal size and the variance of can be controlled nearly separately by the residence time and the inlet solute concentration, respectively. by seeding, the controllability of the crystallizer increases significantly. the linear model predictive controller synthesized using the moment equation model appears to be an efficient controller for continuous crystallizers. keywords: model predictive control; continuous isothermal crystallizer, computer simulation introduction model predictive control (mpc) refers to a class of computer control algorithms that utilize an explicit process model to predict the future response of the plant. at each control interval an mpc algorithm attempts to optimize future plant behaviour by computing a sequence of future manipulated variable adjustments. the first input in the optimal sequence is then sent into the plant, and the entire calculation is repeated at subsequent control intervals [1]. originally developed to meet the specialized control needs of power plants and petroleum refineries, mpc technology can now be found in a wide variety of application areas including chemicals (honeywell has mpc at polypropylene units at tvk, hungary), food processing (honeywell is right now working on a dairy product unit at the uk), automotive and aerospace applications. the presented work is an opening to an another new application, the mpc control of continuous crystallizers. crystallization is a widely used cleaning, separation and grain producing technique in the chemical industry, particularly at the pharmaceutical works. from the point of view of controlling a crystallizer the main quality criteria are the properties of the produced crystals, first of all the size-distribution and the mean size. crystallization is a multi-variable system, with multi input and multi output (mimo) often with strong coupling. thus a good, up-to-date control is possible using a model-based mimo control system. there are only few examples in the literature for this [2-5]. since one can do nothing to change the size distribution of the crystals in the system once crystals have grown beyond a stable nucleus size. therefore a predictive type of control would be better than the corrective type. one of the main problems is that for a proper model-based control of the sizedistribution, because of the mentioned properties of the population balance equation, high-order control is required, which means serious difficulties. but the crystallizers are dissipative systems [6], so that a crystallizer as a dynamical system possesses finite dimensional global attractors [7] that create an adequate basis for the synthesis and usage of good quality, low-order model-based control systems. at the same time it means that for the synthesis of the model-based control system of crystallizers the moment equation model, generated from population balance equation governing the crystal size distribution can be used. chui and cristofides [8] applied this property to design a nonlinear siso controller. in this paper a model-based mimo control system of a continuous isothermal crystallizer is presented. for the synthesis of the control system a multi-variable statespace model is composed. linear controllability and observability analysis is presented, and the coupling of the inputs and the outputs are analysed. the efficiency of the developed model predictive controller is demonstrated by simulation. 98 concept of mpc in model predictive control, the control action is provided after solving – on-line at each sampling instant – an optimization problem, and the first element in the optimized control sequence is applied to the process (receding horizon control). the “moving horizon” concept of mpc is a key feature that distinguishes it from classical controllers, where a pre-computed control law is employed. the major factor of the success of predictive control is its applicability to problems where analytic control law is difficult, or even impossible to obtain. the methodology of all the controllers belonging to the mpc family is characterized by the following strategy, represented in fig.1 (y is the output, w is the setpoint and u is the input): futurepast control horizon prediction horizon u(.) w(.) y(.) k k+1k-1k-2 k+2 fig 1. mpc horizons prediction horizon (hp) represents the number of samples taken from the future over which mpc computes the predicted process variable profile and minimizes the predicted error. the control signals change only inside the control horizon, hc remaining constant afterwards 1,...,),1()( −=−+=+ pcc hhjhkujku (1) the basic steps: 1. as it is shown, in the mpc future outputs for a determined prediction horizon hp are predicted at each instant k using a prediction model. these predicted outputs phjkjky ,...1),(ˆ =+ (means the value at the instant k+j, calculated at instant k) depend on the known values up to instant k (past inputs and outputs) and the future control signals 1,...0),( −=+ phjkjku , which are those to be sent to the system and to be calculated. 2. the set of control signals is calculated by optimizing a cost function in order to keep the process as close as possible to the reference trajectory . this criterion usually takes the form of a quadratic function of the errors between the predicted output signal and the reference trajectory. the control effort is included in the objective function in most of the cases. an explicit solution can be obtained if the criterion is quadratic, the model is linear and there are no constraints, otherwise an iterative optimization method has to be used. phjjkw ,...1),( =+ 3. the control signal )( kku is sent to the process whilst the next control signals calculated are rejected, because at the next sampling instant y(k+1) is already known and step 1 is repeated with this new value and all the sequences are brought up to date. thus the )11( ++ kku is calculated (which in principle will be different to the )1( kku + because of the new information available) using a receding horizon concept. in order to implement this strategy, the basic structure shown is fig.2 is used. a model is used to predict the future plant outputs, based on past and current values and on the proposed optimal future control actions. these actions are calculated by the optimizer taking into account the cost function (where the future tracking error is considered) as well as the constraints. optimizer model past inputs and outputs future inputs cost function constraints future errors predicted outputs reference trajectory + fig.2: basic structure of mpc the process model plays, in consequence, a decisive role in the controller. the chosen model must be capable of capturing the process dynamics so as to precisely predict the future outputs as well as being simple to implement and to understand. as mpc is not a unique technique but a set of different methodologies, there are many types of models used in various formulations. honeywell uses mostly black-box models at the refineries, getting them by stepping the plant. the new tendency is using chemical engineering, so called “greybox” models. the presented case study clearly fills this requirement. the optimizer is another fundamental part of the strategy as it provides the control actions. if the cost function is quadratic, its minimum can be obtained as an explicit function (linear) of past inputs and outputs and the future reference trajectory. in the presence of inequality constraints the solution has to be obtained by more computationally taxing algorithms. the size of optimization problems depends on the number of variables and on the prediction horizon used and usually turn out to be relatively modest optimization problems which do not require sophisticated computer codes to be solved. however the amount of time needed for the constrained and robust cases can be various orders of magnitude higher than that needed for the unconstrained case and 99 the bandwidth of the process to which constrained mpc can be applied is considerably reduced. for a continuous-time model (the cost function is discrete), the mpc problem can be represented as [ ,)(),(min )( kukyj ku ψ= ] (2) [ ] thttttutxftx p∆+≤≤= *,*)(*),(*)(ˆ (3) (3) [ ] thttthtthtutu pcc ∆+≤≤∆−+∆−+= *)1(,)1(*)( [ ],)(),(),(0 kukykxφ= (5) )(0 kdu≥ (6) )(0 kdy≥ (7) where ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ + + ≡ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ + + ≡ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ −+ + ≡ )( )1( )( )( , )( )1( )( )(, )1( )1( )( )( khkx kkx kkx kx khky kky kky ky khku kku kku ku p pc m mm . here, )( kku is the input calculated from information available at time k, )(ku )( kky is the output calculated from information available at time k, hc is the control horizon and hp is the prediction horizon, while x denotes the state variable. constraint (3) corresponds to satisfaction of the continuous-time model equations over the prediction horizon, while (4) enforces the requirement that all inputs beyond the control horizon are held constant. algebraic equation (5) represents constraints for the model, and for the sake of completeness eqs (6) and (7) correspond to the constraints on the input and output variables, respectively. )(ky the process model is assumed to have the following discrete-time representation, (8) [ ),(),()1( kukxfkx =+ ] ] (9) [ ,)()( kxhky = where x is the n-dimensional vector of state variables, u is the m-dimensional vector of manipulated input variables, and y is the p-dimensional vector of controlled output variables. such a model can be obtained by discretizing a continuous-time, state-space model or by deriving a state-space realization of a discrete-time, inputoutput model. it is important to note that time delays can be handled by augmenting the state vector such that the resulting state-space model has no delays. the optimization problem for the prototypical mpc formulation is [9]: [ ] [ ,)(),(),( )(min 1 0 )1(),...1(),( ∑ − = −++ +∆++ ++= p c h j pkhkukkukku kjkukjkukjkyl khkyj φ ] (10) where )1()()( kjkukjkukjku −+−+=+∆ , φ and l are (possibly) (non)linear functions of their arguments. the optimization problem is solved to the constraints discussed below. the functions φ and l can be chosen to satisfy a wide variety of objectives, including minimization of overall process cost. however, economic optimization may be performed by a higher-level system which determines appropriate setpoints for the mpc controller. in this case it is meaningful to consider quadratic functions of the following form: [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] ),j(k)j(k )()ju(k)()ju(k )()jy(k)()jy(k kusku kukrkuk kykqkykl t s t s s t s +∆+∆+ −+−++ −+−+= (11) [ ] [ ])()h(k)()h(k pp kykyqkyky s t s −+−+=φ (12) where and are steady-state targets for u and y, respectively, and q, r, s are positive definite weighting matrices. the principal controller tuning parameters are hc, hp, q, r, s and the sampling period ∆t. )(kus )(kys the prediction outputs are obtained from the model (8-9). successive iterations of the model equations yield [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] [ ] [ ][ ] [ ] [ ],)1(),...1(),(),()( ,)1(),(),( ,)1(,)(),( ,)1(),1()2( ,)(),( ,)(),()1()1( 2 1 1 1 kjkukkukkukxgkjky kkukkukxg kkukkukkxfg kkukkxgkky kkukxg kkukkxfhkkxhkky j −++=+ +≡ +≡ ++=+ ≡ =+=+ m (13) where )()( kxkkx = is a vector of current state variables. if the control horizon (hc) is less than the prediction horizon (hp), the output predictions are generated by setting inputs beyond the control horizon equal to the last computed value: .,)1()( pcc hjhkhkukjku ≤≤−+=+ note that the prediction )( kjky + depends on the current stable variables, as well as on the calculated input sequence. therefore, mpc requires measurements or estimates of the state variables. solution of the mpc problems yields the input sequence { })1(),...,1(),( khkukkukku c −++ only the first input vector in the sequence is actually implemented: )()( kkuku = . then the prediction horizon is moved forward one time step, and the problem is resolved using new process measurements. this receding horizon formulation yields improved closed-loop performance in the presence of unmeasured disturbances and modelling errors. 100 case study: continuous crystallizer moment equation model the mathematical model of a continuous msmpr crystallizer consists of the population balance equation for crystals, of the balance equations for sol-vent and crystallizing substance, and of the equations describing the variation of the equilibrium saturation concentration. in the present analysis, the crystallizer is assumed to be isothermal, thus the equilibrium saturation concentration c* is constant during the course of the process. it is assumed that the following conditions are satisfied: (1) the volumetric feed and withdrawal rates of the crystallizer are constant and equal, thus the working volume is constant during the course of the operation; (2) the crystals can be characterized by a linear dimension l; (3) all new crystals are formed at a nominal size ln≅0 so that we assume ln=0; (4) crystal breakage and agglomeration are negligible; (5) no growth rate fluctuations occur; (6) the overall linear growth rate of crystals g is size-dependent and has the form of the power law expression of supersaturation ; (14) ( alcckg g g +−= 1*)( ) (7) the primary nucleation rate bp is described by the volmer model ⎟⎟ ⎟ ⎟ ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎜ ⎜ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ −= * ln exp 2 c c kkb e pp ε (15) the secondary nucleation rate bs is described by the power law relation (16) jb bb cckb 3*)( µ−= where µ3 is the third of the ordinary moments of the population density function n, which are defined as (17) ...3,2,1,0,),( 0 == ∫ ∞ mdltlnlm mµ with these assumptions the population balance equation governing the crystal size dynamics becomes: [ ] [ 0,0 ),(),(),(*),,(),( >> −=⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ + lt tlntlnq l tlnclcg t tlnv in∂ ∂ ∂ ∂ ] (18) subject to the following initial and boundary conditions: (19) 0),()0,( 0 ≥= llnln 0,*),,(),(*),,(lim 0 ≥== → tbpccbtlnclcg l νν (20) (21) 0,0),(lim ≥= ∞→ ttln l here, n(l,t)dl expresses the number of crystals having sizes in the range l to l+dl at time t in a unit volume of suspension. the mass balance of the crystallizing substance has the form [ ] [ cin c cqqc dt cdv ρεε ρεε )1()1( −+−= −+ ] (22) with the initial condition (23) 0)0( cc = where the voidage of suspension ε is related to n and l by (24) ∫ ∞ −=−= 0 3 3 ),(11 dltlnlkk vv µε finally, the mass balance of the solvent is written in the form ( ) svsvin sv cqqc dt cdv ε ε −= (25) with the initial condition . (26) 0)0( svsv cc = therefore, the state at time t≥0 of the continuous isothermal msmpr crystallizer is given by the triple [c(t),csv(t),n(t)], and its dynamics is described by the distributed parameter model formed by the mixed set of partial and ordinary differential eqs (18), (22) and (25), subject to the initial and boundary conditions (19-21) (23) and (26). the evolution in time of this system occurs in the state space r2×n that is the descartes product of the vector space r2 of concentrations and of the function space n of the population density functions. consideration of dynamical problems of crystallizers in this product space, however, seems to be quite complex and not constructive. in the present study, we concentrate on a reduced case, considering the problem in a finite dimensional state space model based on the moments of the population density function instead of the distributed parameter system (18)-(21). since the overall crystal growth rate (14) is a linear function of size l, the population balance eq. (18) can be converted into an infinite set of recursive ordinary differential equations for the moments of population density function: ( ) bpvbq dt dv in ,,00 0 =+−= νµµ µ ν (27) ( ) )(*)( 1min mm g gm m accvmkq dt dv µµµµ µ +−+−= − m=1,2,3 (28) which can be closed by eq.(22), describing the mass balance of the crystallizing substance, at the equation for the third order moment. then eq.(22) takes the form )(*))((31)( 32 µµρ εε acccvkkccq dt dcv g cgvin +−−−−= (29) while eq.(12) can be rewritten as )(*)(31)( 32 µµ εε accvckkccq dt dcv g svgvsvsvin sv +−−−= (30) 101 where csv stands for the concentration of solvent. here, because of the selective withdrawal, the voidage in the crystallizer and that in the outlet stream are not equal. therefore, the first four moment equations from the system (27-28) with eqs (29-30) provide a closed moment equations model of the crystallizer. dimensionless equations. scaling we introduce the following set of dimensionless variables svincsvinsvcsvincin cmmmt csycsyccsy ccsymsxts ==−= −==== ,*),( *),(,3,2,1,0,, µξ into eqs (27)-(30), where st, sc and sm, m=0,1,2,3, are scale factors defined as *}max{ 1: cc s in c − = , , ( g intgv ccskks 333 0 *}max{6: −= − ) ( ) g intgv ccskks 222 1 *}max{6: −= − ( )gintgv ccskks *}max{3: 1 2 −= − vks =:3 and max{cin} denotes the maximal value of inlet concentration, as well as the set of dimensionless parameters q vsts tt ==:τ , ( 1*}max{*)(: −−−= ccc inρα ) ( )gintg ccask *}max{: 1 −= −β ( ) g intgvpap ccskkkd 343 *}max{6: −= − ( ) bg intg j vbab ccskkkd +−− −= 3431 *}max{6: *}max{ **: cc ccs in c − ==γ then the dimensionless governing equations take the form: bpxx d dx in ,,000 =θ+ − = ν τξ ν (31) 3,2,1),( 1 min =++ − = − mxmxyxx d dx mm gmm β τξ (32) ( ) 3 32 3 1 )3()( 1 x xxyy x yy d dy g in − +− − − − = βα τξ (33) ( ) 3 32 3 1 )3( 1 x xxyy x yy d dy g svsvsvinsv − + + − − = β τξ (34) subject to the initial conditions 000 )0(,)0(,3,2,1,0,)0( svsvmm yyyymxx ==== where ( ) ⎟ ⎟ ⎟ ⎟ ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎜ ⎜ ⎜ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ + −−= γ γ θ y kxd e app 2 3 ln exp1 (36) and jb abb xyd 3=θ . (37) it follows from physical reasoning that the physically admissible solutions to eqs (31-34) should satisfy the constraints 110,0 ,0,0,0 minmax33 3 1 022 3 2 01100 <−=<≤≤≤ ≤≤≤≤≤≤ εxxxax xaxxxyy m mmin (38) where x0m denotes the maximal value of the zero order moment, while ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ − = ρ ε *1 min cv vsv (39) where vsv is the volume of solvent in the crystallizer. the parameters, which in the case of primary and secondary nucleation form the vectors of real numbers pp=(τ,α,g,β,dap,ke,γ) and pb=(τ,α,g,β,dab,b,j), respectively, are also bounded: 0,0,0,0 0,0,,0,0,0 min ≥≥≥≥ ≥≥≥≥≥≥ γ ββατ jbk ddg e abap (40) as a consequence, the state of crystallizer (31)-(34) is represented by the vector of variables (x0,x1,x2,x3,y, ysv), and its time evolution occurs in the feasible region of solutions (38) of the six-dimensional state space r6. the behaviour of crystallizer in the neighbourhood of a stationary state may be deduced by examining the eigenvalues of the jacobian matrix of eqs (36-38) at this state which becomes ( ) ( ) ( ) ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ − + − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − )1( 1 )1( )( 1 3 1 00 0 1 )(3 1 )( 00 01300 00120 0001 0001 3 3 333 55 33 33 22 11 1514 s s ss svssvin s g ssvs s g ssvs s s g ss s g ss s insg s g s s insg s g s s insg s g s ss x x xy yyg x yy x yy j x yy x yy y xxgyy y xxgyy y xxgyy jj τ β αβα ττ β ττ β ττ β τ νν (41) where in the case of primary nucleation ( )s sin ps x xx j 3 00 14 1− − = τ and ( ) ( ) ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ + + − = γ γ γτ s s inse ps yy xxkj 3 00 15 ln 2 (42) ( )[ ] ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ − −−− +− − = )( )(1 1 1 3 55 ss sssin s s yy ygyyy x j ατ α τ while for secondary nucleation s s ss x x jj 3 0 14 = and s s ss y sj 0 15 = x (43) in order to formulate the state-space model, we define ( ) ( )6543213210 ,,,,,,,,,, uuuuuuwyxxxx ininininin ==u (44) where τττ ω ==== v qtq vsssvqsw . (45) now: 102 bpxxw d dx in ,,000 =θ+ ω − = ν ξ ν (46) )( 1 min mm gmm xmxyxxw d dx β ωξ ++ − = − m=1,2,3 (47) ( ) 3 32 3 1 )3()( 1 x xxyy x yyw d dy g in − +− − −ω − = βα ξ (48) ( ) 3 32 3 1 )3( 1 x xxyy x yyw d dy g svsvsvinsv − + − −ω − = β ξ (49) subject to the initial conditions 000 )0(,)0(,3,2,1,0,)0( svsvmm yyyymxx ==== (50) i.e. bpxuu d dx ,,01 6 0 =θ+ ω − = ν ξ ν (51) )( 16 mm gmmm xmxyxuu d dx β ωξ ++ − = − , m=1,2,3 (52) ( ) 3 32 3 5 6 1 )3()( 1 x xxyy x yuu d dy g − +− − −ω − = βα ξ (53) ( ) 3 32 3 5 6 1 )3( 1 )( x xxyy x yuyu d dy g svsvsvinsv − + − −ω − = β ξ (54) where ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ −=⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ −= ρ ρ ρ ρ 5usysy csv in csvsvin (55) to summarize as a control engineering problem: vector of state-variables is x=(x0,x1,x2,x3,,y,ysv), its changes represented by a nonlinear state space model (51)-(55); the input vector of is u=(x0in,x1in,x2in,x3in,yin,w) and the output is defined as y=x. analysis of the model stability and bifurcation in linear dynamics, one seeks the fundamental solutions from which one can build all other solutions. in nonlinear dynamics, the main questions are: what is the qualitative behaviour of the system? which and how many non-wandering sets (i.e. a fixed point, a limit cycle, a quasi-periodic or chaotic orbit) occur? which of them are stable? how does the number of nonwandering sets change while changing a parameter of the system (called control parameter)? the appearance and disappearance of a non-wandering set is called a bifurcation. change of stability and bifurcation always coincide. the number of attractors in a nonlinear dynamical system can change when a system parameter is changed. this change is called bifurcation. it is accompanied by a change of the stability of an attractor. in a bifurcation point, at least one eigenvalue (λ) of the jacobian matrix gets a zero real part. there are three generic types of socalled co-dimension-one bifurcations (the term codimension counts the number of control parameters for which fine tuning is necessary to get such a bifurcation). back to the crystallizer, changing the value of ke, the parameter of primary nucleation rate and observing the supersaturation, hopf bifurcation occurs as it shown in fig.3. 0,45 0,4 ymin ymax 0,35 0,3 fig. 3: bifurcation diagram ke-ys of the crystallizer for further studies of controlling the crystallizer an operating point has been chosen from the region of stable steady states exhibiting only damped oscillations, that is at ke=0.01. controllability and observability there are two basic problems we need to consider. the first one is the coupling between the input and the state: can any state be controlled by the input? this is a controllability problem. another is the relationship between the state and the output: can all the information about the state be observed from the output? this is an observability problem. for the controllability and observability test a linearized model (at the operating point) of the nonlinear system was used. xcy buaxx t= +=& (56) where the state transition matrix (a) is the jacobi matrix of the system, the input matrix (b) can also be derived from the model and the output matrix (ct) is a diagonal matrix. for a mimo system the necessary and sufficient conditions for the system to have completely controllability is nrank =⎥⎦ ⎤ ⎢⎣ ⎡ − babaabb 1n2 l (57) for the general system the necessary and sufficient condition of a linear system for complete observability is nrank t nttt =⎥⎦ ⎤ ⎢⎣ ⎡ − cacacac 12 )()( l (58) the results of the calculation is that the linearized system is completely controllable and observable at a certain operating point. 0 0,0 0,1 0,15 0,2 0,25 bifurcation point ys damped oscillations 0,001 0,01 0,1 limit-cycle oscillations 1ke 103 relative –gain array )1()1( ))(ˆ)(())(ˆ)(( ),,,,( 1 21 2 1 −+−++ +−++−+ = ∑ ∑ = = jkjk jkjkjkjk hhhj c p p h j t t h hj cpp ∆ur∆u ywqyw qr (61) the relative-gain array provides exactly a methodology, whereby we select pairs of input and output variables in order to minimize the amount of iteration among the resulting loops. it was first proposed by bristol and today is a very popular tool for the selection of control loops. where denotes the predicted process outputs, and are the minimum and the maximum prediction horizons, is the control horizon, q and r are positive definite weighting matrices. )(ˆ jk +y 1ph 2ph ch in our crystallization system the control variables can be the mean size of crystals, the variance of the crystal size (σ2) and the productivity, i.e. the total volume of the crystals: 33 2 0 1 0 2 2 0 1 1 ,, x x x x x x x =⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ −== υυυ (59) the manipulated variables are the input concentration of the solute and the flow-rate: . (60) wuyu in ==== 6251 , ϑϑ an optimization algorithm will be applied to compute a sequence of future control signals that minimizes the cost function. for unconstrained control based on linear process model(s) and quadratic cost function the control sequence can be analytically calculated. after tuning the , the and 3=ch 11 =ph 52 =ph . by seeding, the controllability of the crystallizer increase, the overshoots and the oscillation are smaller. the results of the controlling study have shown that the linear mpc is an adaptable and feasible controller as it illustrated by fig.4. here, the first two rows are the outputs (solid lines) with the corresponding setpoints (dashed lines), while the third and fourth rows present the time variations of the inputs of the crystallizer. note that since the volume of the crystal suspension was kept constant the mean residence time was varied by changing the volumetric feed. for the crystallizer we have two outputs and two inputs, there are three possible pairs of control variables, so three different relative-gain arrays can be formed and computed (the value 0 and 1 are rounded.): ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ∆ ∆ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ − − =⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ∆ ∆ 2 1 2 1 21.12821.127 21.12721.128 ϑ ϑ υ υ , ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ∆ ∆ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ =⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ∆ ∆ 2 1 3 1 10 01 ϑ ϑ υ υ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ∆ ∆ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ =⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ∆ ∆ 2 1 3 2 10 01 ϑ ϑ υ υ the results show that controlling the mean size and the variance together would be very difficult. however, by putting crystal grains to the input (seeding), the control of the variance also becomes possible. the new different relative-gain array: fig.4. performance of the mpc of the continuous isothermal msmpr crystallizer ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ∆ ∆ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ − − =⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ∆ ∆ 2 1 2 1 24.124.0 24.024.1 ϑ ϑ υ υ in this case, the mean-size and the variance can be nearly separately controlled. for the further experiments these two outputs will be selected. the system is very sensible to the quality and the quantity of the seeding. it is assumed to be fixed to a suitable operating point. results of simulations the cost function is chosen to satisfy a wide variety of objectives, including minimization of overall process costs. however, economic optimization may be performed by a higher-level system which determinates the appropriate setpoints for the controller. in this case cost function is formulated reflecting the reference tracking error and the control action. the general expression of such an objective function is 104 next steps references 1. qin s. j. and badgwell t.a control engineering practice, 2003, 11, 733-764 the presented model is going to be developed in unisim, the simulation software of honeywell, to make possible to connect it to the profit controller. the mpc of honeywell. the final step is to control a real continuous crystallizer at a plant. 2. myerson a.s. et al. proc. 10th symposium. industrial crystallization. academia, praha, 1987 3. jager, j., et al. powder technology, 1992, 69, 11 4. miller, s.m. and rawlings, j.b., aiche journal, 1994, 40, 1312 conclusions 5. rohani, s. et al. computers and chemical engineering, 1999, 23, 279. 6. lakatos, b.g. and sapundzhiev, ts.j., bulgarian chemical communications, 1997, 29, 28 the moment equation model of a continuous isothermal msmpr crystallizer was presented and the model was analyzed. better control of the variance of the crystal size was possible by introducing some seeding into the crystallizer. by seeding, the controllability of the crystallizer increase, the overshoots and the oscillation are smaller. the results of the controlling study have shown that the linear mpc is an adaptable and feasible controller for continuous crystallizers. 7. temam, r., infinite-dimensional dynamical systems in mechanics and physics. springer-verlag, new york, 1988 8. chiu, t. and christofides, p.d., aiche journal, 1999, 45, 1279 9. meadows, e.s. and rawlings, j.b, model predictive control, englewoods cliffs. nj: prenticehall, 1997 nonlinear process control, chapter 5. (233-310). microsoft word 2012_dr_bodor_endre_hjic.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 39(3) pp. 419-425 (2011) asymmetric lactic acid esterification with biocatalysts in ionic liquid g. németh , k. bélafi-bakó, n. nemestóthy, l. gubicza university of pannonia, research institute on bioengineering, membrane technology and energetics veszprém, egyetem u. 10. h-8200, hungary e-mail: nemethg@almos.uni-pannon.hu biodegradability and environmentally friendly technologies recently came into prominence; this is the reason why we assayed to develop a new “green” technology for l-lactic-acid (lla) production. racemic lactic acid (rla) mixture produced by chemical industry is difficult to handle. the product of esterification with low carbon chain alcohols has higher volatility than lactic acid (la) itself, therefore it can be more effectively separated. our reactions were carried out with biocatalysts (enzymes) — some of them prefer reactions with l-enantiomer — result in enantioselective esterification. after lla ester production the hydrolysis leads to separated lla, which is the starting material of a biodegradable plastic. our aim was to achieve enantioselectivity in phosphonium-type ionic liquid solvents by the optimization of several parameters, such as temperature, substrate molar ratio, amount of il, water content. reasonable results were achieved with three types (candida antarctica, candida rugosa, amano ps-im) of lipases. the use of enzymes and ionic liquids can make the technology “greener”, where an ingredient of a biodegradable plastic can be produced. the toxic heavy metals or hazardous acids can be replaced by biocatalyst (enzymes). these intermediates are re-usable, and they work at lower temperature, than conventional catalysts, thus the operational costs can be reduced. ionic liquids — compared with conventional organic solvents — have insignificant vapour pressure, they are non-flammable and re-usable after a purification process, furthermore they can be tailor made for a certain application. it is not negligible that the structure affects the environmental features like biodegradability or toxicity. the high lactic acid dissolving capacity is the reason why phosphonium-type ionic liquids were used. there are research teams, apply them for lactic acid extraction from fermentation broth. keywords: lactic acid, enzyme, ionic liquid, enantioselectivity, esterification introduction according to sustainable development environment needs to be protected beyond industrial production. this is the reason why non pollutant, biodegradable materials spread widely nowadays. polylactides (pla) and some of their derivatives are thermoplastic, biodegradable and biocompatible polymers with mechanical properties similar to the plastics which are commonly used, like polystyrene or polyethylene terephtalate. that is the reason why they were extensively studied in the last 20 years [1]. economic studies show that pla is an economically feasible material to use as a packaging polymer [2, 3]. second generation pla application could be seen mainly in the area of fresh products where pla is being used as a food packaging polymer for short shelf life products, such as fruit and vegetables [4]. currently, pla is used in compostable yard bags to encourage recycling and composting efforts. in addition, new applications such as fibres [5-8], textiles, foamed articles and paper coatings [4] can be pursued. lactic acid (2-hydroxypropionic acid) is the simplest hydroxyl-carbonyl acid. it has an asymmetric carbon atom and exists in two optically active configurations; the l(-) and d(+) isomers. the chemical synthesis route can be used to produce large scale quantities of rla [9]. the l(-) and d(+) isomers can be produced in bacterial systems. mammalian systems produce only the l(-) isomer which is easily assimilated. the majority of lactic acid is made by bacterial fermentation of carbohydrates. the fermentation processes can be classified according to the type of bacteria used [3]. poly(l-lactic acid) (plla) can be degraded by natural environments. the crystallinity of plla depends on the optical purity of the l-lactate units in the polymer, hence the higher the optical purity of the l-lactate units, the higher is its crystallinity. the production of highly crystalline plla requires the optical purity of l-lactic acid (lla). optical pure lla can be produced by a particular microorganism in a selected medium [10]. lee [11] observed that the biodegradable polymer produced from lla does not have proper mechanical properties; it is hard and breakable. polymerized dla has the same disadvantages. since there is no industrial technology for producing dla, németh and co-workers [12] started to develop a fermentation technology. lactobacillus coryniformis bacterium was applied for 420 the production of dla. the experiments led to high yield at low glucose content, but the bacteria are need to be developed further. synthesis of plla with a wide range of molecular weight using toxic inorganic catalysts or inducers has been reported [13]. the use of enzyme biocatalysts is advantageous in catalysis because they proceed in mild reaction conditions without metal or toxic organic contaminations [14]. matsumura et al. [15] observed first the bulk polymerization of lla with low plla yields using lipase from burkholderia cepacia. recently, some authors have claimed that it is possible to synthesize plla in bulk [16] and in ionic liquids using the readily available immobilized lipase b from candida antarctica (calb) in its commercial form novozym 435 [17, 18, 19]. although, there are some studies about using enzymes for asymmetric reactions, for example enantioselective esterification of (±)-menthol [20], hydrolysis of (d,l)-phenylglycine methyl ester [21], esterification of racemic ibuprofen [22] and 2-substitued-propanoic acid [23], ohara et al. was the only ones who [10, 24] investigated the optical resolution of lactic acid using enzymes. in the latest report [25] the optical resolution of butyl land d-lactate (bulla, budla) using an immobilized lipase was investigated. bulla and budla mixtures were used in the presence of novozym 435 lipase. at 80 °c the oligomerization of budla was induced enantioselectively, whereas bulla was not involved in the reaction. ionic liquids, which are liquids at ambient or far below ambient temperature, have been extensively used in the past decades as potential green alternatives for toxic, hazardous, flammable and highly volatile organic solvents. indeed, their many attractive physicochemical properties, including negligible vapour pressure, excellent chemical and thermal stability and high ionic conductivity make ils great candidates for replacing volatile organic compounds [26]. biodegradability depends on the ions of the il, the ligands and bonds in the cation and the selected anion [27]. all these interesting combinations of properties open the road to a wide range of applications, including organic and inorganic synthesis, catalysis, separation and enzymatic reactions. studies on enzymatic reactions in ils over the last 10 years have revealed not only that ils are environmentally friendly alternatives but that enzymes in these solvents exhibit excellent substrate, regioand enantioselectivity [26]. compared to polar organic solvents ils surprisingly do not inactivate enzymes [28, 29]. this feature extends enzyme-catalyzed reactions to a solvent polarity range that was previously inaccessible. the ability to use solvents with greater polarity increases the solubility of polar substrates, such as glucose, maltose or ascorbic acid [28], leading to faster reactions and changes in selectivity. for example, in the calb-catalyzed acylation of ascorbic acid with oleic acid in an ionic liquid the conversion was higher (83%) than the typical result in organic solvents (50%) [28]. the yield was higher in the case of some ionic liquids (80%) than in hexane (14%) during the esterification of la with ethanol [30]. there are some reports about using phosphoniumtype ils. extraction of la has been studied by marták et al. [31]. the phosphonium il with the 2,4,4-trimethylpentylphosphinic anion (called cyphos 104) is a new effective extractant of la with a considerably higher value of the distribution coefficient compared to liquid extractants. mainly the synergetic effect of the anion is responsible for the increased distribution coefficient of la in cyphos 104. separation of la is quite difficult due to its low volatility; hence distillation, liquid extraction, esterification, salt processes, electrodialysis, thermal methods and ion exchange can be used for obtain lactic acid from fermentation broth [32]. major et al. [30] studied esterification of la and used phosphonium-type ionic liquids for the first time in the process. the two substrates to produce ethyl-lactate (el) were lactic acid and ethanol and the applied biocatalyst was calb. the reactions were carried out in a shaking incubator (150 1/min) at 40 °c for 24 h. the enzymatic el synthesis was carried out in two different organic solvents (hexane and toluene) and in seven ils. the best yields were observed in cyphos 104 and cyphos 202 without catalysing the reaction themselves. five ils (cyphos 163, cyphos 166, cyphos 106, cyphos 102, and cyphos 110) showed high catalytic activity without enzyme loading. the substrates and products were completely miscible with the applied solvents, except for hexane and cyphos 110 resulting in the lowest ester yields of 14% and 36%. water content has a particular role in ester synthesis from organic acids and short alkyl alcohols in nonconventional media. esterification is an equilibrium reaction, hence the maximal yield can be influenced with the initial water content [30] or the control of the water content during the reaction by using zeolite [33] or pervaporation [34]. to reach high ester yield either one of the substrates (usually alcohol) should be used in excess or the product should be removed. applying la as substrate a new role of water content emerges, since in lower amount of water, la undergoes self esterification producing its open chain dimmer, lactoyllactic acid and other oligomers [35]. therefore the commercially available 90% la solution contains a significant amount of dimmer la beside the monomeric form. furthermore, dimerization/decomposition of la has to be considered as a side reaction in the reaction mixture beside ethyl lactate synthesis [30]. since la is a chiral molecule after esterification two molecules with the same consistence but different formation generates from industrial rla mixture. the ratio of the enantiomers strongly depends on the activity of the applied enzyme. enantioselectivity of enzymes is influenced by substrates and reaction conditions (water activity, temperature, ph, solvent, additives, etc.). in some experiments additional co-solvent increased activity, stability and enantioselectivity of the enzyme [36]. enantioselectivity is calculated by the following equation of enantiomeric excess: 421 %100.. × + − = sr sr ee , (1) where: ee enantiomeric excess r and s the ratios or values of the enantiomers our aim in this work was to achieve enantioselective lactic acid esterification in il as a solvent and to use biocatalysts to achieve enantioselectivity. with asymmetric esterification of rla it can be separated into the two enantiomers and after a cleaning procedure biodegradable pla can be polymerized. furthermore, the enzyme and the il can be recycled. lactic acid and ethanol are environmentally friendly materials, as well as enzymes and ils. with the application of these materials a novel green technology can be developed. four reasonable parameters (temperature, alcohol excess, added il, initial water content) were chosen to investigate their effects on enantioselectivity and yield. first the alcohol excess vs. temperature, then alcohol excess vs. il, and finally alcohol excess vs. initial water content were investigated. in each case the two other parameters were constant. materials and methods enzymes and chemicals enzymes: immobilized candida antarctica lipase b (novozym 435, triacilglycerol hidrolase, e. c. 3.1.1.3.) was a gift of novo nordisk (basvaerd, denmark). lipase from candida rugosa (liophylised, e. c. 3.1.1.3.) was from sigma-aldrich (buchs, switzerland) and amano lipase ps-im immobilised on diatomaceous earth from sigma-aldrich (st. louis, usa). solvents: trihexyl-tetradecyl-phosphonium-bis (2,4,4trimethyl-pentyl)-phosphinate (cyphos 104), sigmaaldrich, (germany), tributyl-tetradecylphsphoniumdodecylbenzenesulphonate (cyphos 201), iolitec gmbh, (germany). reagents: (d,l)-lactic acid (90%), reanal (hungary), absolute ethanol (>99%), merck (germany) were applied. reaction and analysis the reactions were carried out in 10 ml vials with ika ks 4000i shaking incubator at 150 min-1 in 24 hours. every mixture contained rla, ethanol and il. after preparing the mixture the initial water content was checked and set with karl-fischer method. 0.5 µl samples were analysed by hp 5890 gas chromatograph, fid, lipodex-e column (cyclodextrin) 30 m x 0.25 mm, head pressure 90 kpa at 90 °c constant temperature, injector 150 °c, detector 250 °c. fiberglass and high surface adsorbent material were inserted to the injector inlet to protect the column from contamination by the il. results and discussion selection of the reaction medium the reaction medium was selected so that it neither reduces nor enhances catalytic activity of the enzymes. therefore catalytic activities of two ils were investigated. previous report [30] shows that cyphos 104 and cyphos 202 were suitable solvents for lactic acid esterification with high ester yield. cyphos 202 is no more available from the producer. that is why cyphos 201 was applied, which is quite similar to cyphos 202, but its catalytic activity had to be determined. unfortunately, the catalytic activity of cyphos 201 was too high and the conversion was close to 100%. in the case of cyphos 104 the conversions without enzyme were low (<5%). these results were the start points for further investigations, hence the chosen solvent was cyphos 104. investigation of the enantioselectivity of enzymes in cyphos 104 ionic liquid the aim of the further experiments was to determine the optimal parameter combination to achieve the highest enantioselectivity and yield in the presence of enzymes. since alcohol:monomer la molar ratio, initial water content, temperature and the amount of il are the main parameters, which affect the activity of enzyme an experimental plan was composed with 13 measure points (table 1). first alcohol excess and il amount was combined to 5 measure points, the other parameters were constant. then the alcohol excess and temperature was combined, and in the end the alcohol excess and water content. the values of the parameters were: alcohol : monomer la molar ratio = 3 : 1 (14 mmol), 7 : 1 (6 mmol) and 11 : 1 (4 mmol) (calculated for 2 ml / 46 mmol of ethanol); initial water content: 8 w/w%, 12 w/w% and 16 w/w%; temperature: 30 °c, 50 °c and 70 °c; amount of added il: 0.5 g, 0.75 g and 1 g. table 1: experimental plan sample t (°c) alcohol molar excess initial water content (w/w%) added il (g) 1 50 3 8 0.5 2 50 3 8 1 3 50 7 8 0.75 4 50 11 8 0.5 5 50 11 8 1 6 70 3 8 1 7 70 11 8 1 8 30 3 8 1 9 30 11 8 1 10 50 7 8 1 11 50 3 16 1 12 50 11 16 1 13 50 7 12 1 422 using amano lipase ps-im as biocatalyst no enantioselectivity was observed, therefore the data are not published. fig. 1 and fig. 2 represent the values of enantioselectivity in the presence of the two further enzymes after the first and 24 hours reaction time, respectively. 0 10 20 30 40 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 sample en an tio m er ic e xc es s (% ) candida rugosa candida antarctica lipase b figure 1: values of enantioselectivity of the experimental design in the presence of candida rugosa and candida antarctica lipase b after 1 hour higher enantiomeric excess (e.e.) values were observed after 1 h reaction time than at the end of the reaction. there were parameter combinations where both enzymes showed reasonable selectivity almost as high as 40%. with time these high values began to reduce depending on the parameters. after 24 hours the selectivity values of candida rugosa catalysed measure points reduced almost to 0%, but at three points: 4, 5 and 9 the calb catalysed reactions kept their higher e.e. values of 14.74%, 18.95% and 22.09%, respectively. 0 5 10 15 20 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 sample en an tio m er ic e xc es s (% ) candida rugosa candida antarctica lipase b figure 2: values of enantioselectivity of the experimental design in the presence of candida rugosa and candida antarctica lipase b after the 24 hours determination of the optimal parameters for highest yield and enantioselectivity beyond selectivity a high ester yield is a requirement to obtain high amount of lla, as well. since the calb was the suitable enzyme among the three investigated ones, fig. 3 shows conversion calculated for monomer la and the e.e. values for the studied 13 points. two of the earlier mentioned three best parameter combinations for enantioselectivity showed also high conversion rate. conversion of 57% and 55% was measured for the points 5 and 9. 0 20 40 60 80 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 sample en an tio m er ic e xc es s (% ) co nv er si on (% ) conversion enantioselectivity figure 3: enantioselectivity and conversion of calb after 24 h to obtain more information about the optimal parameters for the required results the experiments were widened with some more points. one of the parameters was changed and the values of other parameters remained constant. the fundamental parameters were 50 °c, 11 : 1 alcohol : la molar ratio, 8 w/w% initial water content and 1 g il. the effects of the variables, which generally correlate with the selectivity and conversion, are represented from fig. 4 to fig. 7. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 20 40 60 80 temperature (°c) en an tio m er ic e xc es s (% ) co nv er si on (% ) conversion enantioselectivity figure 4: effect of temperature on the enantioselectivity and conversion (11 : 1, 8 w/w% initial water content, 1 g il) 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 5 10 15 20 alcohol excess en an tio m er ic e xc es s (% ) co nv er si on (% ) conversion enantioselectivity figure 5: effect of alcohol excess on the enantioselectivity and conversion (50 °c, 8 w/w% initial water content, 1 g il) 423 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 5 10 15 20 initial water content (m/m %) en an tio m er ic e xc es s (% ) co nv er si on (% ) conversion enantioselectivity figure 6: effect of initial water content on the enantioselectivity and conversion (50 °c, 11 : 1, 1 g il) lower temperature values and initial water content, higher alcohol excess and amount of il were favourable. taking these results into account the optimal reaction parameters could be determined: temperature of 30 °c, 11 : 1 alcohol : la molar ratio, 8 w/w% initial water content and 1 g of il. the reason why enantiomeric excess decreases during the reaction is the calb catalyses the esterification faster with lla than with dla and during the reaction the amount of del gets closer to lel. to confirm our theory, pure lla was applied for a parallel reaction with the above mentioned optimal parameters (30 °c, 11 : 1, 8 w/w% initial water content, 1 g il). the initial reaction rates of the two reactions are 7.63·10-2 mmol product/hour and 5.92·10-2 mmol product/hour. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 mass of added il (g) en an tio se le ct iv ity (% ) co nv er si on (% ) conversion enantioselectivity figure 7: effect of added il on the enantioselectivity and conversion (50 °c, 11 : 1, 8 w/w% initial water content) increasing the enantioselectivity of calb ohara et al. [25] accomplished the lactic acid recycling after the selective polymerization. after the separation of not polymerized lla it was reused and cleaned from pla. applying this method the produced ester was separated from other chemicals, hydrolysed and then the obtained lactic acid was recycled in our laboratory. the ratios of lla and dla in the further mixtures were set as they were observed after a 24 hours reaction. the reaction conditions were the same when the yield and the enantioselectivity were the highest: 50 °c, 11 : 1 alcohol : monomer la molar ratio, 8 w/w% initial water content and 1 g of ionic liquid. the reactions were carried out with the same amount of initial la (4 mmol) and with the e.e. values the previous reaction showed after 24 hours. the results can be seen in fig. 8 and fig. 9. the first sample was prepared with rla. after 24 hours enantiomeric excess of sample 1 reduced from 35% to 22%. the 2nd sample was prepared with the e.e. of 22% (3.3 mmol rla and 0.9 mmol lla). the initial e.e. of the 3rd sample was 51% (1.9 mmol rla and 2.1 mmol lla) and after one hour it was 73% and during the reaction it decreased to 65%. the last sample contained 1.4 mmol rla and 2.7 mmol lla, the selectivities were at the first hour and 24 hours 80% and 75%, respectively. in case of the yields the studied tendency could be observed, namely the more lla the mixture contained the faster the reaction was. 0,00 20,00 40,00 60,00 80,00 100,00 1 2 3 4 sample en an tio m er ic e xc es s (% ) 1 h 3h 5 h 24 h figure 8: enantiomeric excess values of each sample after recycling the la 0,00 20,00 40,00 60,00 80,00 100,00 1 2 3 4 sample co nv er si on (% ) 1 h 3h 5 h 24 h figure 9: conversion values of each sample after recycling the la conclusion esterification of racemic lactic acid was investigated using three types of biocatalysts. first a suitable solvent, cyphos 104 il was selected so that it neither catalyses the reaction itself nor reduces the activity of the enzyme. then investigation of three types of enzymes was the next step, where calb showed the highest enantioselectivity and yield by certain conditions. optimal reaction parameters were determined; which were temperature (30 °c), alcohol : monomer la molar 424 ratio (11 : 1), initial water content (8 w/w%) and the added ionic liquid to the mixture (1 g). finally, further investigations were carried out to increase selectivity by la reusing. in these experiments la was recycled to the start of the reaction three times. with this method e.e. value for the first hour increased from 35% to almost 80%. nomenclature pla: poly-lactic acid plla: poly-l-lactic acid la: lactic acid rla: racemic lactic acid lla: (l)-lactic acid dla: (d)-lactic acid lel: (l)-ethyl-lactate del: (d)-ethyl-lactate bulla: butyl-(l)-lactate budla: butyl-(d)-lactate calb: candida antarctica lipase b il: ionic liquid e.e.: enantiomeric excess acknowledgement this work was supported by the research programs “livable environment and healthier people – bioinnovation and green technology research at the university of pannonia támop-4.2.2-08/1/2008-0018” and 4.2.2/b-10/1-2010-0025. these projects are supported by the european union and co-financed by the european social fund. references 1. r. e. drumright, p. r. gruber, d. e. henton: polylactic acid technology, adv matera, 12 (2000) 1841–1846 2. r. datta, s. p. tsai, p. bonsignorea, s. h. moona, j. r. frank: technological and economic potential of poly(lactic acid) and lactic acid derivatives, microbiol rev 16 (1995) 221 3. d. j. garlotta: a literature review of poly(lactic acid), j polym environ, 9 (2001) 63–84 4. r. auras, b. harte, s. melke: an overview of polylactides as packaging materials, macromol biosci, 4 (2004) 835–864 5. k. e. perepelkin: chemistry and technology of chemical fibers. ploy(lactide) fibers: fabrication, properties, use, prostects, a review, fibre chem+, 34 (2002) 85–100 6. w. hoogsten, a. r. postema, a. j. pennings, g. t. brinke, p. zugenmair: crystal structure, conformation, and morphology of solution-spun poly(l-lactide) fibers, macromolecules, 23 (1990) 634 7. h. tsuji, y. ikada, s. h. hyon, y. kimura, t. kitao: stereocomplex formation between enantiomeric poly(lactic acid). viii. complex fibers spun from mixed solution of poly (d-lactic acid) and poly (l-lactic acid) j appl polym sci, 51 (1994) 337 8. j. cicero, j. r. dorgan: physical properties and fiber morphology of poly(lactic acid) obtained from continuous two-step melt spinning, j polym environ, 9(1) (2001) 1–10 9. h. r. kricheldorf, i. kreiser-saunders, c. jurgens, d. wolter: polylactides-synthesis, characterization and medical application, macromol symp, 103 (1996) 85 10. h. ohara, t. yoshida: a higher optical purity of l-lactic acid produced in streptococcus faecalis, appl microbiol biot, 40 (1993) 258–260 11. c. lee: production of d-lactic acid by bacterial fermentation of rice, fiber polym, 8 (2007) 571–578 12. á. németh, á. kiss, b. sevella: kísérletek d-tejsav fermentációs előállítására (experiments for d-lactic acid production with fermentation, műszaki kémiai napok (technical chemistry days) veszprém, 2011, proceedings, (2011) 202–205 13. o. dechy-cabaret, b. martin-vaca, d.bourissou: controlled ring-opening polymerization of lactide and glycolide, chem rev, 104 (2004) 6147–6176 14. k. a. distel, g. zhu, p. wang: biocatalysis using an organicsoluble enzyme for the preparation of poly(lactic acid) in organic solvents, bioresource technology, 96 (2005) 617–623 15. s. matsumura, k. mabuchi, k. toshima: lipasecatalyzed polymerization of lactide, macromol rapid comm, 18 (1997) 477–482 16. m. fujioka, n. hosoda, s. nishiyama, h. noguchi, a. shoji, d. s. kumar, k. katsuraya, s. ishii, y. yoshida: one-pot enzymatic synthesis of poly(l, l)-lactide by immobilized lipase catalyst, sen-i gakkaishi, 62 (2006) 63–65 17. j. t. gorke, o. krzystof, a. louwagie, r. j. kazlauskas, f. srienc: enzymatic synthesis of poly(hydroxyalkanoates) in ionic liquids, j biotechnol, 132 (2007) 306–313 18. m. yoshizawa-fujita, c. h. saito, y. takeoka, m. rikukawa: lipase catalyzed polymerization of l-lactide in ionic liquids, polym advan technol, 19 (2008) 1396–1400 19. s. chanfreau, m. mena, j. r. porras-domínguez, m. ramírez-gilly, m. gimeno, p. roquero, a. tecante, e. bárzana: enzymatic synthesis of poly-l-lactide and poly-l-lactide-co-glycolide in an ionic liquid, bioproc biosyst eng, 33 (2010) 629–638 425 20. d. zhang, s. bai, m. ren, y. sun: optimization of lipase-catalyzed enantioselective esterification of (±)-menthol in ionic liquid, food chem, 109 (2008) 72–80 21. w. lou, m. zong, y. liu, j. wang: efficient enantioselective hydrolysis of d,l-phenylglycine methyl ester catalyzed by immobilized candida antarctica lipase b in ionic liquid containing systems, j biotechnol, 125 (2006) 64–74 22. y. ikeda, y. kurokawa: enantioselective esterification of racemic ibuprofen in isooctane by immobilized lipase on cellulose acetate-titanium iso-propoxide gel fiber, j biosci bioeng, 93 (2002) 98–100 23. o. ulbert, t. fráter, k. bélafi-bakó, l. gubicza: enhanced enantioselectivity of candida rugosa lipase in ionic liquids as compared to organic solvents, j mol catal b-enzym, 31 (2004) 39–45 24. h. ohara, a. onogi, m. yamamoto, s. kobayashi: lipase-catalyzed oligomerization and hydrolysis of alkyl lactates: direct evidence in the catalysis mechanism that enantioselection is governed by a deacylation step, biomacromolecules, 11 (2010) 2008–2015 25. h. ohara, m. yamamoto, a. onogi, k. hirao, s. kobayashi: optical resolution of n-butyl dand l-lactates using immobilized lipase catalyst, j biosci bioeng, 111 (2011) 19–21 26. m. moniruzzaman, k. nakashima, n. kamiya, m. goto: recent advances of enzymatic reactions in ionic liquids, biochem eng j, 48 (2010) 295–314 27. a. romero, a. santos , j. tojo, a. rodríguez: toxicity and biodegradability of imidazolium ionic liquids, j hazard mater, 151 (2008) 268–273 28. s. park, r. j. kazlauskas: toxicity and biodegradability of imidazolium ionic liquids, j org chem, 66 (2001) 8395–8401 29. j. t. chin, s. l. wheeler, a. m. klibanov: on protein solubility in organic solvents, biotechnol bioeng, 44 (1994) 140–145 30. b. major, g. németh, k. bélafi-bakó, l. gubicza: unique role of water content in enzymatic synthesis of ethyl lactate using ionic liquid as solvent, chem pap, 64 (2010) 261–264 31. j. marták, s. schlosser: extraction of lactic acid by phosphonium ionic liquids, sep purif technol, 57 (2007) 483–494 32. d. e. henton, p. gruber, j. lunt, j. randall: polylactic acid technology in: natural fibers, biopolymers, and biocomposites, edited by amar k. mohanty, manjusri misra and lawrence t. drzal, crc press 2005 33. l. gubicza, k. bélafi-bakó, e. fehér, t. fráter: waste-free process for continuous flow enzymatic esterification in ionic liquid medium, green chem, 10 (2008) 1284–1287 34. e. fehér, b. major, k. bélafi-bakó, l. gubicza: semi-continuous enzymatic production and membrane assisted separation of isoamyl acetate in alcohol – ionic liquid biphasic system, desalination, 241 (2009) 8–13 35. d. t. vu, a. k. kolah, n. s. asthana, l. peereboom, c. t. lira, d. j. miller: oligomer distribution in concentrated lactic acid solutions, fluid phase equilibr, 236 (2005) 125–135 36. v. gotor: asymmetric organic synthesis with enzymes, wiley-vch verlag gmbh & co. kgaa, weinheim (2008) << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /createjdffile false /description << /ara /bgr /chs /cht /cze /dan /deu /esp /eti /fra /gre /heb /hrv (za stvaranje adobe pdf dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. stvoreni pdf dokumenti mogu se otvoriti acrobat i adobe reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /hun /ita /jpn /kor /lth /lvi /nld (gebruik deze instellingen om adobe pdf-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. de gemaakte pdf-documenten kunnen worden geopend met acrobat en adobe reader 5.0 en hoger.) /nor /pol /ptb /rum /rus /sky /slv /suo /sve /tur /ukr /enu (use these settings to create adobe pdf documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. created pdf documents can be opened with acrobat and adobe reader 5.0 and later.) >> /namespace [ (adobe) (common) (1.0) ] /othernamespaces [ << /asreaderspreads false /cropimagestoframes true /errorcontrol /warnandcontinue /flattenerignorespreadoverrides false /includeguidesgrids false /includenonprinting false /includeslug false /namespace [ (adobe) (indesign) (4.0) ] /omitplacedbitmaps false /omitplacedeps false /omitplacedpdf false /simulateoverprint /legacy >> << /addbleedmarks false /addcolorbars false /addcropmarks false /addpageinfo false /addregmarks false /convertcolors /converttocmyk /destinationprofilename () /destinationprofileselector /documentcmyk /downsample16bitimages true /flattenerpreset << /presetselector /mediumresolution >> /formelements false /generatestructure false /includebookmarks false /includehyperlinks false /includeinteractive false /includelayers false /includeprofiles false /multimediahandling /useobjectsettings /namespace [ (adobe) (creativesuite) (2.0) ] /pdfxoutputintentprofileselector /documentcmyk /preserveediting true /untaggedcmykhandling /leaveuntagged /untaggedrgbhandling /usedocumentprofile /usedocumentbleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /hwresolution [2400 2400] /pagesize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice microsoft word contents.doc hungarian journal of industry and chemistry veszprém vol. 40(1) pp. 33–38 (2012) synthesis, physico-chemical properties, and spectroscopic characterization of phenolic modified castor oil based polyol a.vazid1 , v. urvashi1 , k. jyotsna2 , s. a. alhadi faroun3, i. mohd3 1chaudhary devi lal university, department of chemistry, polymers and advanced materials research lab sirsa-125 055, haryana, india e-mail: kanikavashist2007@gmail.com 2chitkara university, department of applied sciences, rajpura, chandigarh 160014, india e-mail: jyotsna.kaushal@chitkara.edu.in 3jamia millia islamia university, department of mechanical engineering, new delhi, india physico-chemical properties and optical characterization of synthesized polyol explores the possibility to understand the mechanism and controlling the reaction parameters in a suitable manner during the production of polyurethane products. castor (ricinus communis) is generally grown for its oil yielding seeds, which contains ricinoleic acid and only the oil with hydroxyl group in molecular structure due to this castor oil can be exploited as modified polyol. in the present study, castor oil has been modified with blending phenolic resin and reacted with diethanolamine (dea) and diethyleneglycol (deg) to synthesize the polyol. various physico-chemical properties of synthesized polyol such as acid value, oh value, and moisture content have been measured. uv-vis, ftir and nmr spectroscopic studies of the synthesized castor oil based polyol are carried out. optical properties such as absorption coefficient (α), extinction coefficient (k) and optical band gap (eg) of polyols were determined. ftir studies show the information of changes in the functional group with changing concentration of diethanolamine (dea), diethyleneglycol (deg), and phenolic resin (ph. resin). infrared spectroscopy (ir) is used to understand the characterization worth with suitable standards in view of chemical and structural characterization of synthesized polyol. key words: phenolic resin, physico-chemical properties of polyol, optical properties and spectroscopic studies introduction studies based on experimental and spectroscopic characterization of polymeric materials may provide the information for versatile engineering applications. although many research works have been directed to petrochemicals based polyurethanes (pus), just a few studies have been reported on agro based products with formation and their spectroscopic characterization. polyurethanes are rapidly developing products especially in coating industry. thus, the important area of present day research in the surface protective coatings is to explore the potential utility of renewable and non conventional raw materials for preparation of resins. the most common among these materials are starch, cellulose, and various oils such as castor oil, soyabean oil etc. phenolic resins are one of the most important thermosetting polymers because of their good temperature and electrical resistance properties [1]. the traditional phenolic resins have various advantages [2] such as heat resistance, good electronic properties, and flame retardance. phenolic (resole) resins are used as cross-linkers for adjusting flexibility and improving surface contact in various types of coatings [3]. resole type phenolic resins have the capability to cure either by use of a curing agent or by heating only [4]. although the importance of phenolic resins has dwindled, they still have significant uses. their importance is likely to remain considerable because the used raw materials can be obtained at a reasonable cost. the individual development of phenolic resins is still continuing despite their long history [1]. in many industrial applications, amino resins are used as thermosetting polymers. despite possessing many attractive features, the acceptance of many engineering areas especially in the coating industry as paint binders is obstructed by some of its inherent qualities such as brittleness and poor water resistance (osemmeahon and barminas, 2006a; conner, 1996; 1990). the importance of synthesizing polymers containing moieties capable of participating in polymerization reactions continue to increase in today’s coating industry [5]. alkyd resins are complex network polyesters widely used in the paint and coatings industries [6]. polyols are alkyd resins with a specified high hydroxyl content that can react with compounds containing epoxy, isocyanate groups to produce hybrid coatings with superior performance [7]. a literature survey reveals that mostly petrochemicals-based polyurethanes have covered the polymer industries, which are costly raw materials as compared to vegetable oil based pus. 34 in the present investigation, attempt has been made to synthesizepolyols for polyurethane system by using castor oil, diethanolamine (dea) and diethyleneglycol (deg); modified oil based polyol with phenolic resin. physicochemical properties such as acid value, oh value, moisture content; and also spectroscopic techniques such as uv-vis, ftir and nmr have been used for the characterization of prepared phenolic modified polyol. experimental raw materials castor oil and phenolic resin supplied by shivathene ltd. parwanoo (hp) were used. diethanolamine and diethyleneglycol obtained from (qualigens fine chemicals, mumbai) were used. acetone (sisco research laboratory, ar grade) and koh solution were prepared for analysis (himedia laboratories pvt. ltd. mumbai). synthesis of modified polyol the reaction for the preparation of modified polyol from castor oil was carried out in a three-necked round bottom flask (equipped with nitrogen inlet, thermometer, stirrer, and reflux condenser). three sets of polyols were synthesized with repeated sets of conditions. in the first set, castor oil was taken into the three necked flask after heating it with added phenolic resin at varying concentrations keeping the quantity of castor oil constant. in the second and third set, castor oil and phenolic resin concentration were kept constant in all the three prepared polyol samples with varying concentrations of diethylene glycol and diethanolamine as shown in table 1. the mechanism of esterification was carried out via controlling the temperature of reaction. dehydration occurred from 150–2000c. the progress of condensation reactions were confirmed by checking hydroxyl and acid values. the time required to complete the reaction was 6 h, after this it was cooled and taken to the sample bottles. further, resulted synthesized polyols are characterized by measuring physico-chemical properties such as acid value, oh value, and moisture content. optical properties and spectroscopic studies of synthesized polyol samples were also carried out by using various spectroscopic techniques such as uv-vis, ftir, and nmr. proposed possible structures for all the three kinds of polyols as confirmed by ftir are given below in figure 1–3 respectively. *c. o. = castor oil, *ph. resin = phenolic resin, *deg = diethyleneglycol, *dea = diethanolamine table 1: physico-chemical properties of synthesized phenolic modified polyol (phmp). polyol samples acid value (mg koh/g) oh value (mg koh/g) moisture content (% moisture) 1. c.o. + ph. resin a. 180 + 15 g b. 180 + 10 g c. 180 + 7 g 2. c. o.+ ph. resin + deg a. 180 + 10 g b. 180 + 7 g c. 180 + 5 g 3. c.o. + ph. resin + dea a.180 + 10 g b.180 + 5 g c.180 + 3 g 66.37 ± 10 58.11 ± 10 41.44 ± 10 50.12 ± 10 41.41 ± 10 28.40 ± 10 28.05 ± 10 30.80 ± 10 36.46 ± 10 201.02 ± 10 195.93 ± 10 172.19 ± 10 218.90 ± 10 181.78 ± 10 179.94 ± 10 186.93 ± 10 221.80 ± 10 252.88 ± 10 0.05 0.06 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.017 0.074 0.132 results and discussion optical characterization in the present study, castor oil and phenolic resin modified polyol have been prepared. physico-chemical properties such as acid value, oh value, moisture content, optical and structural modifications using various spectroscopic techniques of the prepared polyol have been taken into consideration. physico-chemical properties of modified polyol shown in table 1 and uv-visnir (schimatzu spectrophotometer uv 1601) are used for the optical characterization of prepared modified polyol samples. the optical properties such as absorption coefficient (α), extinction coefficient (k), and energy band gap (eg) have been studied for all the castor oil based polyol samples. the relationship between optical band gap (eg), absorption coefficient (α), and the energy (hv) were estimated using the tauc relation [8]: (αhv) α (hv eg)n. (1) table 2: optical properties of phenolic modified polyol (phmp). where n = 1, 2, 3 for indirect transitions polyol samples band gap (eg) abs. coefficient (α) ext. coefficient (k) 1. c. o. + ph. resin a. 180 + 15 g b. 180 + 10 g c. 180 + 7 g 2.655 2.594 2.227 3.913 4 3.039 100.84 102.45 94.278 35 polyol samples band gap (eg) abs. coefficient (α) ext. coefficient (k) 2. c. o.+ ph. resin + deg a. 180 + 10 g b. 180 + 7 g c. 180 + 5 g 3. c.o. + ph. resin + dea a. 180 + 7 g b. 180 + 5 g c. 180 + 3 g 2.921 2.732 2.556 2.542 2.682 2.862 0.88 0.575 0.628 0.871 1.315 4 19.6 12.532 13.687 19.399 30.962 98 it has been observed by using the uv-visible spectra that all the polyol samples show indirect transitions. band gap for the indirect transitions has been determined by plotting (αhv) vs. hv as shown in figure 4. by plotting the graph it has been observed that the polyols prepared using phenolic resin show decrease in band gap with decreasing concentration. similar trend has been observed with diethyleneglycol (deg) modified polyols. interestingly, in the case of diethanolamine (dea) modified polyol increase in the band gap with decreasing concentration of dea has been observed. the extinction coefficient (k) and absorption coefficient (α) which are determined by using equation given below k = αλ/4π (2) show almost similar trend as shown for the energy band gaps. optical parameters such as band gap, absorption coefficient (α) and extinction coefficient (k) have been given in table 2 respectively. similar to that of band gap, extinction coefficient (k) and absorption coefficient (α) show decreasing trend with decreasing concentration in both the phenolic resin made polyol and deg modified polyol, while in case of dea modified polyol increase in extinction coefficient (k) and absorption coefficient (α) with decreasing concentration has been observed. oh o ch3 ch3 ch2 oh x ch2 hooc ch3 ch3 o o c ch3 h3c ch2 oh x ch2 ch3 ch3 o oh oh castor oil phenolic resin + phenolic resin modified polyol (phmp) -h2o figure 1: proposed possible structure of phenolic resin modified polyol (phmp) oh o ch3 ch3 ch2 ho x ch2 hooc ch3 ch3 o o c ch3 ch3 ch2 oh x ch2 ch3 ch3 o oh oh castor oil phenolic resin + diethyleneglycol modified polyol (phmp+deg) -h2o ho ch2ch2och2ch2oh + ch2ch2och2ch2 o diethyleneglycol figure 2: proposed possible structure of deg modified polyol (phmp + deg) oh o castor oil phenolic resin diethanolamine ch2ch2oh hn ch2ch2oh ch3 ch3 ch2 oh x ch2 hooc ch3 ch3 o ch2ch2oh n ch2ch2o ch3 ch3 ch2 oh x ch2 c ch3 ch3 o diethanolamine modified polyol (phmp+dea) oh oh -h2o + + figure 3: proposed possible structure of dea modified polyol (phmp + dea) ftir study absorption bands that are characteristic of organic molecular vibrations are seen throughout the spectrum of the sample, many occurring within relatively narrow wavenumber ranges that are associated with particular molecular groupings [9]. ftir spectra of the synthesized polyols were obtained using a perkin elmer 2000 spectrophotometer to see the effect of phenolic resin with deg and dea. the spectra show a broad peak at 3433 cm-1 indicating the hydroxyl group of polyols. at 2928 cm-1 and 2856 cm-1 peaks have been obtained for all the c-h stretching of ch2 group present in the compound. the peak at 1741 cm-1 gives strong evidence for ester formation. 1460 cm-1 shows peak for ch2 bending vibrations within the compound. at 1160 cm-1 peak obtained shows symmetric stretching of c-o-c group present in the compound. peak at 3007 cm-1 is due to c-h stretching vibration of aromatic ring. while the peak at 726 cm-1 is due to aromatic ring. in all the samples of synthesized polyol almost similar pattern has been observed as shown in figure 4–6 respectively. 36 figure 4: ftir spectra of phmp figure 5: ftir spectra of phmp + deg figure 6: ftir spectra of phmp + dea figure 7.: nmr spectra of phmp with highest concentration of phenolic resin figure 8: nmr spectra of phmp + deg with highest concentration of deg figure 9: nmr spectra of phmp + dea with highest concentration of dea nmr study nmr spectra of synthesized polyol and its characterization have been done using (bruker spectrospin dpx-300). 1h-nmr spectroscopy gives indirect information about the carbon skeleton of an organic molecule because most of carbon atoms have atleast one attached hydrogen. after analyzing the synthesized polyols the chemical shift (δ) shown within the range of 0.88–2.3 ppm indicates long aliphatic protons present in castor oil. peak at 3.6 ppm indicates for ch2oh. chemical shift at 4.2 ppm for acetate protons is shown in fig. 4–6 respectively. peak at 5.2 ppm is for c=ch and chemical shift of 7.2 ppm indicates phenolic protons. on interpreting the prepared polyol samples using nmr spectra obtained, it has been observed that as the amount of phenolic resin increases intensity of peak of aromatic protons increases. this has been observed in similar fashion in both the cases of phenolic resin and diethyleneglycol (deg) modified polyols. while in dithanolamine (dea) (i.e. 3% w/w) modified polyol this minimum amount of dea favours the enhancement of phenolic protons as the amount of dea increases from 3 to 5 and 10% w/w the intensity of absorption signal decreases. 37 conclusively, it has been shown by prepared polyol samples that optimum amount of resin and deg favours the polyol formation in first two cases of dithyleneglycol modified polyol and phenolic modified polyol. while minimum amount of dea favours the polyol formation in the third case of diethanolamine modified polyol. it has also been observed in nmr spectra that the aromatic peak at 7.2 ppm of aromatic protons of phenolic resin in fig. 7 is showing significant change by retarding the peak intensity which appeared in deg and dea modified polyols fig. 8, 9. the nmr spectra of the synthesi-zed polyol have been given in the fig. 7–9 respectively. conclusions in the present study modification of castor oil based polyol has been carried out by blending castor oil with phenolic resin, diethyleneglycol (deg) and diethanolamine (dea). they were then investigated for physicochemical properties and spectroscopic studies. on interpreting the physico-chemical properties such as acid value, hydroxyl value and moisture content it has been observed that acid value and hydroxyl value show almost similar trend. in case of phenolic modified polyol (phmp) and diethyleneglycol modified polyol (phmp + deg) acid value as well as the hydroxyl value (oh value) goes on decreasing with decreasing concentration of resin and deg. while diethanolamine modified polyol is showing contrary results to as those of resin and deg modified polyols i.e. with decreasing concentration of dea (diethanolamine) acid and oh value are increasing. moisture content in all the three cases of phmp, phmp + deg and phmp + dea are increasing with decrease in concentration of blending moieties. by studying uv-vis spectra’s of the modified polyol samples energy band gap, extinction coefficient and absorption coefficient, energy band gap of all the polyols show indirect kind of transitions. for confirming the results of band gaps all the samples were taken twice and then also almost similar band gap has been observed. in case of phenolic and deg modified polyols, band gap shows decreasing trend with decreasing concentration of phenolic resin and deg whereas, in case of diethanolamine modified polyol (phmp + dea) increase in band gap with decreasing concentration of dea has also been observed. extinction and absorption coefficient show similar trends as that of energy band gap in all the three synthesized polyols. ftir spectra of prepared polyol samples do not show any significant changes in the prepared polyol with changing concentrations of blending moieties. on studying the nmr spectra of polyol samples informative results have been obtained. in the first two cases of phenolic resin modified and deg modified polyols optimum amount of resin and deg favours the formation of polyols showing increase in the peak of aromatic protons of phenolic resin with increasing concentration while minimum amount of dea favours the formation of polyols, showing increase in the resonance intensity with decreasing concentration of diethanolamine (dea). references 1. s. attajariyakul, s. vanichseni: development of a kinetic model for resole type phenolic resin formation, thammasat int. j. sc. tech, (6) (2001) 3, pp. 13–18 2. a. m. motawie, e. m. sadek: adhesives and coatings based on poly(vinyl acetal)s, journal of applied polymer science, (70) (1998) pp. 1769– 1777 3. s. a. osemeahon, j. t. barminas: development of amino resin for paint formulation: copolymerization of methylol urea with polyester, african journal of biotechnology, (6) (2007) 12, pp. 1432–1440 4. a. spyros: quantitative determination of distribution of free hydroxyl and carboxylic groups in unstaturated polyester and alkyd resins by 31pnmr spectroscopy, journal of applied polymer science, (83) (2002) pp. 1635–1642 5. t. p. sharma, d. patidar, n. s. saxena, k. sharma: measurement of structural and optical band gaps of cd1-xznxs(x = 4 and 6) nanomaterials, indian j pure & appl physics, (44) (2006) pp. 125–128 6. v. ali, z. haque neelkamal, m. zulfeq-uar, m. husain: preparation and characterization of polyether based polyurethane dolomite composite, journal of applied polymer science, (103) (2006) pp. 2337–2342 7. h. s. park, j. p. wu, h. k. kim: synthesis and physical properties of two component polyurethane coatings using bromine-containing aromatic modified polyesters, journal of ind. & eng. chemistry, (3) (1997) 4, pp. 282–287 8. j. v. patel, s. d. desai, v. k. sinha: bioacrylic polyols for two pack polyurethane coating, journal of scientific & industrial research, (63) (2004) pp. 259–264 9. m. a. espinosa, m. galia, v. ca’diz: novel phosphorilated flame-retardant thermosets: epoxy benzoxazine-novolac systems, polymer, (45) (2004) pp. 6103–6109 10. a. m. motwie, m. m. badr, m. s. amer, h. y. moustafa, i. m. ali: some coating studies on phenolic epoxy/poly(vinyl acetal) resins, journal of applied sciences research, (4) (2008) 9, pp. 1043– 1051 11. v. isabelle, l. tighzert: biodegradable polymers, materials, (2) (2009) 2, pp. 307–344 12. s. n. suresh, y. jin, k. xiaohua: production of polyols from canola oil and their chemical identification and physical properties, j amer oil chem soc, (84) (2007) pp. 173–179 38 13. j. z. lin, y. t. jin, z. tong, z. y.yun: preparation of phenolic resin/silver nanocomposites via in situ reduction, chinese chemical letters, (14) (2003) 4, pp. 426–428 14. y. zhongren, e. james, b. gary: preparation and characterization of naoh activated carbons from phenolic resin, j. mater. chem., (16) (2006) pp. 1456–1461 15. c. l. chiang, ma m. chen-chi: synthesis, characterization, thermal properties and flame retardance of novel phenolic resin/silica nanocomposites, polymer degradation and stability, (83) (2004) pp. 207–214 16. linda, f. lorenz, w. christiansen alfred: interactions of phenolic resin alkalinity, moisture content and cure behavior, ind. eng. chem. res., (34) (1995) pp. 4520–4523 17. z. fahmina, s. eram, m. s. ashraf, a. sharif: studies on poly(styrene-co-maleic anhydride)modified polyesteramide based anticorrosive coatings synthesized from a sustainable resource, journal of applied polymer science, (92) (2004) 4, pp. 2538–2544 18. j. b. calvin: chemistry and physics of foam formation vol. i, (eds) plastic foam, john wiley and sons inc., new york, (1969) 19. j. h. saunders, k. c. frisch: polyurethane chemistry and technology, part ii, interscience publishers, new york, (1964) 20. j. h. saunders, k. c. frisch: polyurethane chemistry and technology, part i, interscience publishers inc., new york, (1962) microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 36(1-2) pp. 95-99 (2008) galacturonic acid recovery from pectin rich agro-wastes by electrodialysis with bipolar memranes e. molnár , n. nemestóthy, k. bélafi-bakó 1university of pannonia, research institute of chemical and process engineering egyetem u. 10., 8200 veszprém, hungary e-mail: emolnar@mukki.richem.hu pectin rich agro wastes can be utilised for manufacture of galacturonic acid. pectin is a complex polysaccharide found in the primary cell walls and intercellular regions of higher plants. backbone of pectin molecules is composed of galacturonic acid as a monomer. galacturonic acid and derivates are valuable raw materials in food and cosmetic industries as acidic agents and for production of vitamin c. in this work the aim was to produce galacturonic acid from citrus pectin and sugar beet pulp. the hydrolysate of pectin contains mainly carbohydrates (oligoand monosaccharides) and galacturonic acid. electrodialysis with bipolar membranes (edbm) represents an efficient technology to separate charged compounds from a solution. to remove galacturonic acid, edbm seems a suitable process, because galacturonic acid is present as a charged compound in the solution. to obtain galacturonic acid from hydrolysate of pectin laboratory experiments were performed, similar to the system applied by novalic et al. for recovery of other organic acids. an ed stack containing anion and cation selective and bipolar membranes was applied to obtain ga from hydrolysate. keywords: agro wastes, galacturonic acid, electrodialysis, bipolar membrane introduction pectin rich agro-wastes are available to manufacture galacturonic acid (ga). pectin is a complex polysaccharide found in the primary cell walls of higher plants. function of pectin is formation of bond in cells and between cell wall substances. the strength and structure of plants texture are determined also by this polysaccharide. the main component of pectin is backbone of α-1,4-linked galacturonic acid residues. galacturonic acid and derivates can be utilised in food industry (as acidic agents), chemical industry (as washing powder agent and nonionic or anionic biodegradable surfactants) and pharmaceutic of industry (for production of vitamin c) [1]. sugar beet pulp, apple pomace and other wastes (e.g. press cakes) from fruit juice industry are pectin rich raw materials. to obtain galacturonic acid, pectin is extracted from raw resources then its enzymatic hydrolysis results in galacturonic acid in diluted aqueous solution. in this work the plan was to produce galacturonic acid from citrus pectin and sugar beet pulp. for this purpose firstly pectin was extracted with hot water from sugar beet pulp then enzymatic hydrolysis was carried out using pectinex 100l enzyme preparation. the hydrolysate contains mainly carbohydrates (oligoand monosaccharides) and galacturonic acid. to recover galacturonic acid, electrodialysis with bipolar membranes (edbm) [2-4] seems to be a suitable process, because only galacturonic acid is present as a charged compound in the solution. electrodialysis with bipolar membranes (edbm) is an electromembrane process to separate ions and produce acids and basis. under electrical potential difference, charged compounds move in the direction of the oppositely charged electrode. anion(a) and cationselective (c) membranes let counter-ions cross and exclude co-ions. the function of bipolar membrane (bm) is to generate protons and hydroxyl ions which are removed from interphase of the membrane to outside phases. base is formed by hydroxyl ions and cations, acid is formed by protons and anions. uncharged components of salt solution are retained by bipolar membrane. to obtain galacturonic acid from hydrolysate electrodialysis with bipolar membranes was used [5]. galacturonic acid was separated and concentrated by edbm. the principle of our edbm shows fig. 1. when an electric field is applied, galacturonate ions migrate towards the anode. galacturonate ions leave the diluate solution and move through anion-selective membrane into acid compartment where galacturonic acid are formed by galacturonate ions and protons. sodium ions pass through cation-selective membranes and naoh is formed by generated hydroxyl and sodium ions. uncharged saccharide components are retained in the diluted solution. 96 anode + caustic solution (h2o) caustic solution (naoh) diluted solution (salt solution) cathode acid solution (h2o) acid solution (ga) diluted solution ohohohoh-h+ h+ h+ h+ na+ na+ na+ na+ gagagagana+ ac c a a ac c cbm bm bm bm anode + caustic solution (h2o) caustic solution (naoh) diluted solution (salt solution) cathode acid solution (h2o) acid solution (ga) diluted solution ohohohoh-h+ h+ h+ h+ na+ na+ na+ na+ gagagagana+ ac c a a ac c cbm bm bm bm figure 1: the principle of recovery galacturonic acid materials and methods the experimental set-up was purchased from fumatech (ft-ed-4-100-10 module). the electrodes were made of stainless steel. fumasep fkb, fumasep fab and fumasep fbm membranes, which are commercially available from fumatech gmbh (germany), were used. characteristics of membranes are shown table 1. the set-up composed of 10 anion-, 11 cation and 10 bipolar membranes. the effective membrane area was 0.31 m2. galacturonic acid applied as a standard and for model solution was purchased from sigma-aldrich, while sodium sulphate (electrolyte solution) from spectrum (hungary). firstly experiments were carried out with sodiumgalacturonate model solution, then secondly hydrolysate of sugar beet pulp was used to investigate removal of galacturonate. hydrolysis of pectin solution obtained from sugar beet pulp and citrus pectin was carried out by pectinase enzymes (pectinex 100l enzyme preparation) in a shaking incubator. the operation conditions were: 500 μl enzyme/ dm3 solution, 40 °c and 120 rpm. degradation of pectin was followed by acid titration (0.5 m naoh) and hplc, using perkin-elmer lc200 hplc. in order to recover ga, pretreatment of hydrolysate could be needed, because the membrane fouling is one of the main limiting factor of the process. large molecules can be removed by ultrafiltration or centrifugation. concentration of galacturonic acid in acid and diluted solutions was measured by colorimetrically with the dinitrosalicylic acid test (dna) method [6].in the acid solution, ph was followed by wtw microprocessor ph-meter. the data of conductivity in diluted, acid and base solutions, the electric current and voltage between electrodes was collected by data acquisition device (national instruments usb-6008/6009). the data were recorded by the program labview. table 1: main characteristics of membranes membrane characteristic fumasep fkb cation-exchange membrane peek-reinforced selectivity >98% electric resistance <4 ω*cm2 stability acid and caustic stable thickness 0,08–0,10 mm specific conductance >2 ms/cm ion exchange capacity 0,9–1,0 meq/g swelling 15% fumasep fab anion-exchange membrane peek reinforced selectivity >0,96% electric resistance <1 ω*cm2 stability 0–13 ph thickness 0,10–0,13 mm specific conductance >6 ms/cm ion exchange capacity >1,3 meq/g swelling 20% fumasep fbm bipolar membrane peek reinforced electric resistance <3 ω*cm2 thickness 0,2–0,25 mm thermal stability max 60 °c efficiency of water splitting >98% experiments were carried out at room temperature. 97 diluted, acid, caustic and electrode solution were circulated by peristaltic pumps. the flow rate of diluted, acid and caustic solution was 51 dm3/h, 44 dm3/h and 46 dm3/h. results voltagecurrent curves the voltage vs. current curves (u-i) were measured across the 31 compartment cell under different concentrations of na2so4 in electrode solution. the concentration of electrode solutions was 0.05/ 0.1/ 0.5/ 1 mol na2so4/dm3-solution. the results are plotted in fig. 2. three regions are observed on the experimental u-i curves: at low value of voltage, the increase of potential voltage does not cause electric current increase, because the electric field turns to generate protons and hydroxide ions by bipolar membrane. in second region, rise of voltage causes rising current, nearly linear relationship exist between applied voltage and electric current. at high voltage, the resistance increases drastically when a certain current is reached. the amount of protons and hydroxyl ions produced at the transition region becomes a limiting factor. during experiments the current should not exceed this certain value (limiting current) otherwise membranes will be destroyed. the limiting value of electric current increases with increasing concentration of electrode solution. although at high concentration of electrolyte, lower limiting current was measured because of evolved concentration polarization. by the grounds of experiments electrode solution of concentration 0.1 mol na2so4/dm3 was chosen, because the curve did not show limiting current in the voltage range studied. 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 voltage (v) el ec tri c cu rr en t ( a ) 0.05 m na-sulphate 0.1 m na-sulphate 0.5 m na-sulphate 1 m na-sulphate figure 2: potential drop as a function of electric current comparison of measurements at constant voltage with model solution the experiments with model solutions were carried out with constant voltage namely at 12 v, 24 v and 36 v. the diluate concentration was initially 20 g nagalacturonate/dm3. the volume of circulated diluted, acid and caustic solution was 0.4 dm3, 0.4 dm3 and 0.45 dm3. the driving force for the transport of ions is the electrical potential difference. increasing voltage obviously enhances the ion transport through the membrane. the current in the stack as a function of time are plotted in fig. 2. due to ohm's law, at he beginning of experiments higher electric current was measured at higher constant voltage. as ions were transported from diluate solution, the concentration of ions and conductivity in diluate solution decreases, the resistance of diluate increases therefore electric current drops. 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 0 50 100 150 time (min) el ec tri c cu rr en t ( a) 12 v 24v 36v figure 3: electric current in the edbm cell due to the transport of galacturonate ions and protons, galacturonic acid is formed in acid solution. the concentration of galacturonic acid (fig. 4) tends to a limiting value, independently of the value of voltage, as a function of time. 0 5 10 15 20 0 50 100 150 time (min) co nc en tra tio n (g g a/ l) 12v 24v 36v figure 4: concentration of galacturonic acid in acid compartment in acid solution the ph value rapidly decreases at beginning then it slightly increases (fig. 5). the ph drop depends generated protons and formed galacturonic 98 acid. protons are transported faster from interphase than galacturonate ions from diluate solution. at the beginning protons cause rapid ph drop. increase of ph shows galacturonic acid formation in acid solution. at lower applied voltage, ph has lower value because the transport of galacturonate ions is slower. 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 0 50 100 150 time (min) ph 12 v 24 v 36 v figure 5: ph vs. time in acid solution 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 0 50 100 150 time (min) co nd uc tiv ity (µ s ) 12v 24v 36v figure 6/a: conductivity of the diluate solution as a function of time 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 0 50 100 150 time (min) co nd uc tiv ity (µ s ) 12v 24v 36v figure 6/b: conductivity of the acid solution as a function of time conductivity of diluate solution (fig. 6/a) decreases as a function of time due to the carried galacturonate and sodium ions. at the beginning conductivity in acid solution (fig. 6/b) increases rapidly at higher value of voltage (36 v). this increase is caused by protons, after 7.5 minutes the produced galacturonic acid decreases the conductivity. at lower value of voltage the water dissociation is slower, that causes less conductivity increase. our results shows measurements can be efficiently performed at voltage of 36 v. experiment with citrus pectin hydrolysate edbm with citrus pectin was carried out at 36v. the volume of citrus pectin hydrolisate was 2.95 dm3, the concentration of hydrolysate was 35.4 g nagalacturonate/dm3. the volume of acid and caustic solution was 1 dm3. results were agreement with results of model solutions. the concentration of ga in acid and diluate solution are shown in fig. 7. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 time (min) co nc en tr at io n (g g a/ l) acid solution diluate solution figure 7: concentration of galacturonic acid in the acid and the diluate solution in an electrodialysis process not all of the current flowing through the stack can be utilized. average current efficiency [7] for galacturonic acid can be calculated as ni cqfδ =η where q is volume flux of acid solution, f is the faraday constant, δc is the concentration difference between acid solution in the feed of the entrance and that in the exit, n is the number of the cell units, and i is the average current. the change of current efficiency shows fig. 8 in the course of experiment with citrus pectin hydrolisate. as shown in fig. 8, the average current efficiency decreases with time therefore restricts the possibility of obtaining higher concentration of ga in acid solution. 99 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 time (min) cu rr en t e ffi ci en cy figure 8: the change of current efficiency as a function of time recovery of galacturonic acid from acid solution the saccharide composition (determined by hplc) of hydrolysate is 76% galacturonic acid, 3% partly hydrolysed pectin, 2.4% pectin, 8.2% glucose and 10.4% other monosaccharide, while acid solution is composed of 97.97% galacturonic acid and 2.03% partly hydrolysed pectin. to obtain galacturonic acid from the acid solution it was crystallised with methanol, then water and methanol were eliminated by vacuum filtration and vacuum drying. conclusion bipolar membrane electrodialysis can be applied for separation galacturonic acid. crystallised galacturonic acid has purity of 98%. references 1. kertesz z. i.: the pectic substances (1951), interscience publishers, new york 2. mulder m. h. v.: basic principles of membrane technology (1996), kluwer, dordrecht 3. hodúr c.: élelmezési ipar, 44 (1990) 270-272 (in hungarian) 4. gyura j., seres z., vatai gy., bekassy-molnar e.: desalination, 148 (2002) 49-56 5. novalic s., kongbangkerd t., kulbe k. d.: journal of membrane science, 166 (2000) 99-104 6. miller g. l.: analytical chemistry, 31 (1959) 426-428 7. strathmann h.: ion-exchange membrane separation (2004), elsevier, amsterdam hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 33(1-2). pp. 31-42. (2005) high performance catalytic tubular membrane reactors owing to forced convective flow operation frerich j. keil*, uta flügge hamburg university of technology, chemical reaction engineering, eissendorfer str. 38, d-21073 hamburg, germany various tubular membranes were operated as catalyst supports whereby a radial convective flux of reactants through the pores was generated. a remarkable feature of convective flux through catalytic membranes is the very low catalyst loading necessary for a high conversion. additionally, this mode of operation allows a control of contact time of the reactants with the catalyst which can improve the reaction selectivity. the influence of catalyst preparation methods was investigated. very high conversions of h2o2 decomposition could be obtained for production plant waste water over a long period of time. a reactor model was used for simulations of the experiments. keywords: membrane reactor, forced convective flow, short-contact-time reactor, hydrogen peroxide decomposition *contact information: e-mail: keil@tu-harburg.de introduction membrane reactors combine reaction and separation in a single unit operation. in most cases the membrane removes one or more of the reaction or product species. the yield of reactions, which are limited by thermodynamic equilibrium, can be increased beyond their equilibrium values by removing the products. the membrane can act as a catalyst either being catalytic by itself or by being impregnated with a catalyst. in some cases packed or fluidized beds of catalysts exist inside or outside the membranes. membrane reactors are in use in biotechnology at a low temperature level. the first high-temperature catalytic membrane reactors in operation employed metallic palladium (or pd alloy) membranes. palladium membranes were the first to be used in catalytic membrane reactor applications because of their specific h2 permselectivity. micro-porous ceramic membranes can at best separate the various gases according to the knudsen diffusion law. their permeabilities are inversely proportional to the square root of molecular weights. zeolite or carbon membranes and some membranes manufactured by specialized techniques (e.g. cvd procedures) have molecular sieving properties. reviews on membrane reactors were presented by hsieh [1,2], zaspalis and burggraaf [3], saracco and specchia [4], zaman and chakma [5], dalmon [6] and coronas and santamaria [7]. models are reviewed by tsotsis et al. [8]. a comprehensive review of catalytic reactors was presented by marcano and tsotsis [9]. contrary to the previously mentioned mode of operation, in the present paper various tubular porous membranes will be employed as a catalyst support whereby radial forced convective flux of reactants through the pores is generated. in fact, it is a radial flow reactor with narrow pores. one can imagine this reactor as a radial flow reactor filled with catalytic pellets whereby the pellets were crushed such that the interstitial volume is reduced to narrow pores. the pore size distribution has to be optimized according to suitable criteria. the molecular sieve effect of the membrane is not used. owing to the forced convective flux, which is far higher than a diffusive flux, a very good contact between reactants and catalyst particles can be achieved which causes a high conversion even for very low catalyst loadings. this reactor concept was introduced in a thesis by flügge [10]. the concept of forced-flow membrane reactors with catalyst located inside the membrane pores was reported only in very few papers [11-14]. by varying the inlet pressure one can control the convective flux, and as a consequence the contact time of the reactants with the catalyst, which in turn allows one to control the reaction selectivity to a certain extent. this reactor can also be considered as a short-contact-time reactor. as an example the h2o2 decomposition at palladium catalyst on different membranes was chosen. the h2o2 content of waste water from h2o2 plants is quite high mailto:keil@tu-harburg.de 32 and has to be degraded. furthermore, this reaction should serve as an example for the testing of membrane catalysts under convective flow which, later on, should be used for the synthesis of high-grade chemicals. of course, h2o2 could be decomposed by suitable enzymes too. the objectives of the present paper are: various tubular membranes under radial flux were tested for the h2o2 decomposition reaction. the influence of the catalyst preparation methods was investigated (impregnation immobilization of the catalyst, reduction). the kinetics of the h2o2 decomposition was determined. table 1 properties of the membranes employed type of membrane pore radii [µm] inner diameter [mm] outer diameter [mm] pore volume [ml/g] isoelectric points (ph) 1) α-alumina 3.0 6 10 0.1038 7.4 2) α-alumina 0.2 6 10 0.112 7.9 3) carbon 0.14 6 10 0.215 5.75 4) carbon fiber min. 0.1 6 9 0.169 5.5 5) polyethylene 1.0 5 9 0.353 6) polypropylene 0.2 5.5 9 2.914 extensive investigations of different membranes in a pilot plant over a longer period of time should reveal the suitability of catalytic membranes under radial convective flux conditions. a two-dimensional model of the catalytic membrane was developed which represents the experimental results to a high degree of accuracy. the membranes were tested under real conditions by using production plant waste water. experimental membranes and catalyst five different membrane materials were employed: αalumina (from company porocer), carbon (carbosep m14 from techsep (rhone-poulenc)), carbon fiber (cfcc from deutsche carbone (le carbone loraine)), polyethylene and polypropylene (both from microdyn). the pore radii distributions, zero points of charge as a function of the ph-values, and the pore volumes were determined. mercury porosimetry was employed for the determination of the pore radii. the method suggested by brunelle [15] and jiratova [16] was used, modified according to a paper by ludwig and hönicke [17] for the determination of the isolectric points. the pore volumes were found by soaking the materials with ethanol. the data obtained are presented in table 1. tubular membranes were employed. the α-alumina membranes were temperature resistant up to 1000°c and pressure resistant up to 40 bar. the 0.2 µm membrane was fixed on a support which had a maximum of the pore radii distribution at 3 µm. the carbon membrane (carbosep m14 from the company techsep (rhone poulenc)) consisted of a carbon support and a zro2tio2 separation layer at the inner side of the tube. the membrane was temperature resistant up to 350°c and pressure resistant up to 15 bar. the carbon fiber membrane was a asymmetric carbon-carbon fiber tube with a thin separation layer of carbon. the maximum operation temperature was 165°c and the maximum pressure 40 bar. the spectrum of pore radii was rather broad with a minimum at 0.1 µm. the maximum operation temperature of the polyethylene and polypropylene membranes was 60°c, and the maximum operating pressures were 1.5 and 3.0 bar, respectively. palladium was employed as a catalyst for decomposition of hydrogen peroxide. the active component should be distributed evenly over the membrane cross section. for this purpose the membranes were impregnated over 1 hour with a solution of h2pdcl4 (0.5 wt-% pd). the membrane was put into such an amount of h2pdcl4 solution that the liquid filled the pore volume exactly. the membrane was dried for about 12 hours at room temperature. drying at high temperatures leads to a redistribution of the palladium to the outer surfaces of the membrane. a chemical immobilization of the palladium was done after the impregnation with h2pdcl4 by adding naoh (ph = 13.6) over 45 to 60 min. the following reaction occurs: (1) −−−− +→+ 4clpd(oh)4ohpdcl 2 4 2 4 owing to this treatment the palladium is immobilized. alternatively, naco3 (17 wt-%, ph = 11.7) was used or the dried pellets were additionally treated at 600°c. a liquid phase reduction was done at room temperature by means of nabh4: nabh4 + 2h2o → nabo2 + 4h2 (2) 2pd(oh )4 2 2 --------------------------------------------------------- 2− + 4h → 2pd + 8h o (3) 2pd(oh) + nabh−2 4 4 → nabo2 + 2pd + 6h2o (4) some palladium nuclei should be present for the reduction at room temperature. the reduction solution was set to a ph-value of 12 with naoh in order to precipitate the palladium. this measure prevents a migration of the palladium to the outer surface of the 33 membrane. alternatively, the reduction was done with hydrogen diluted with nitrogen over 3 hrs at 350°c: pd(oh) +2h−2 4 2 → pd + 4h2o (5) the preparation methods described above led to an evenly distributed palladium inside the membranes as was found by experimental checking. for the carbon membranes x-ray fluorescence was used for these investigations. kinetics of h2o2 decomposition mckee [18] investigated the disproportionation of diluted aquous h2o2 solutions with the aid of metal 0 -0,5 -1 -1,5 -2 -2,5 -3 -3,5 1/t[1/k] 0,00305 0,0031 0,00315 0,0032 0,00325 0,0033 0,00335 integralmethod differentialmethod ln ( ( )) k t yint = 6019,4x + 16,807− ydiff = 6439,4x + 18,643− fig. 1 arrhenius-plot for al2o3 powder of the viii group of elements. it was found that the activity of palladium was higher than of gold. furthermore, a strong dependence of the rate of reaction of the ph-value was detected (with a maximum at ph = 10 – 11). the kinetics was of first order and followed a postulated mechanism like this: ohohh oohohho ohohoohho ohhoohho ohhooh hhooh 2 222 22222 2222 22 222 →+ +→+ ++→+ +→+ +→ +→ •• •• •• •• •• •• (6) 2222 oo2ho2h +→ gossner et al. [19] investigated the kinetics of h2o2 decomposition with a silver catalyst for an h2o2 concentration of less than 5 mol/l. the authors observed that the reaction was first order for a h2o2 concentration below 0.3 mol/l and of second order for a concentration in the range of 0.3 – 1.2 mol/l. gossner and bischof [20,21] published also results on the dependence of the ph value of h2o2 at silver and gold catalysts. they found that the reaction rate for a silver catalyst was independent of the ph value for ph < 8 and increased with the ph value above ph = 8. at a gold catalyst the reaction rate increased with increasing ph value over the entire range of the ph scale. the reaction order for a gold catalyst was two over the whole range of h2o2 concentrations. eley and macmahon [22] investigated the decomposition of highly concentrated h2o2 solutions at wires of palladium, gold and their alloys. a significant higher activity of gold compared to palladium was detected. the authors found first order reactions. kreja [23] investigated the decomposition of h2o2 at platinum catalysts over a wide rage of h2o2 concentration (0.005 – 0.2 mol h2o2/cm3) and different specific catalyst surfaces. again a first order reaction was detected at lower and a second order reaction at higher h2o2 concentrations. the transition of the reaction order depends on the specific catalyst surface. schekhobalova [24,25] measured the kinetics of h2o2 decomposition at palladium and palladium/platinum alloys on alumina and silica supports. the alloys were more active than the pure metals. the reaction order was found to be about 0.7. the supports had no influence on the reaction rate. in order to determine the reaction kinetic expressions for each experiment two liters of a 5 wt-% h2o2 solution were filled into a continuously stirred retort and heated to a preset temperature. the ph-value was set to 7. before the experiment started the exact initial h2o2 concentration had been measured by titration with potassium permanganate. an exactly determined amount of catalyst powder (pd on membrane support) of about 2 g was filled into the retort. after certain periods of time samples of 5 ml of the reaction mixture were taken, and immediately separated from the catalyst powder by filtering in order to prevent the solution from further reaction. the present amount of h2o2 was again determined by kmno4 titration. these measurements were repeated at different temperatures in the range from 20 to 50°c. an arrhenius plot for an al2o3 membrane is presented in fig. 1. the experimental data were evaluated by means of the integral and differential method. both approaches gave nearly the same results. in table 2 some results are presented. as can be observed the reaction order with respect to the h2o2 concentration is equal to one for the present initial concentration. the activation energies are in the order of magnitude as found by schekhobalova [25] (about 50 (kj/mol)). the present authors found a transition from kinetics of first order to second order at a h2o2 concentration of about 65 g h2o2/l. h2o2 decomposition measurements for the h2o2 decomposition measurements an experimental set-up as given in fig. 2 was employed. the liquid is pumped from a storage tank via a filter through the membrane. two different pumps were used, a centrifugal pump (company hartmann) with 2800 revolutions/min with a volume flux of 13 l/min and a membrane pump (prominent g5) with a maximum volume flux of 9.54 l/min at a maximum counter pressure of 13 bar. the set-up can be either operated at a constant pressure or at a constant volume flux. the membranes (length 246 mm) were fixed into a tubular module by means of two o-ring seals (see fig. 1b). the seals separate the permeate volume from the retentate and feed. at both ends of the membrane module swagelok fittings were screwed on. for the experiments the membrane pump was used. the filter had a pore 34 diameter of 0.45 µm. valve v1 was closed such that the flux passed radially through the membrane. the fluxes and the h2o2 content were measured every 15 minutes. the loading of the membranes with palladium had nearly no influence on the fluxes compared to the original membranes. the results of the measurements will be discussed in a subsequent section. table 2 kinetic data type of membrane pore radii [µm] activation energy [kj/mol] reaction rate [g/(l ⋅ min)] 1) α-alumina1) 3.0 68.08 6.12 ⋅ 1010exp(-68.08/(8.314 ⋅ t)) ⋅ 22ohc 2) α-alumina2) 0.2 50.05 1.99 ⋅ 107exp(-50.05/(8.314 ⋅ t)) ⋅ 22ohc 3) carbon3) 0.14 50.05 1.99 ⋅ 107exp(-50.05/(8.314 ⋅ t)) ⋅ 22ohc 4) carbon4) 0.14 51.61 1.34 ⋅ 106exp(-51.67/(8.314 ⋅ t)) ⋅ 22ohc 1) 0.3 wt-% pd load 3) 0.3 wt-% pd load 2) 0.3 wt-% pd load 4) 0.06 wt-% pd load all the samples were treated with naoh and reduced with nabh4 reactant p1 p p pmembrane module productfilter p p2 a) feed swagelok-system membrane permeate retentate o-ring seal b) v1 v2 fig. 2a flowsheet of the test bench 2b tubular module of the membrane reactor modeling the model the membrane reactor consists of three regions: inside the tubular membrane, the membrane, and the annulus between the membrane and the shell (see fig. 3). for the membrane a two-dimensional model was introduced and for the other two regions a one-dimensional dispersion model was employed. these two regions are radially perfectly mixed. for the membrane a twodimensional dispersion model was introduced (see fig. 4). the fluid can be assumed as being incompressible such that there are no convective fluxes in axial direction inside the membrane. now we derive a general mass balance for the inner and shell region (see fig. 5). for a certain component we have the material balance (see notation section): ∑ = ⋅⋅++−= ∂ ∂ rn j jinoutin dvεrνsnn t n 1 &&& (7) for the axial terms a taylor expansion, truncated after the first term, gives: dx x n xndxxnn x out ∂ ∂ +=+= & &&& )()( (8) the sum of the inand outgoing fluxes therefore is: dx x nnn outin ∂ ∂ −=− & && (9) in axial direction one finds convection and dispersion: x cdaxcaxuxn rr ∂ ∂ −= )()()(& (10) the derivative with respect to the length coordinate x gives: ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ∂ ∂ − ∂ ∂ + ∂ ∂ = ∂ ∂ 2 2)()()()()( x cd x xuxc x xcxua x xn r & (11) 35 radial mass transfer occurs owing to a mass transfer through the boundary layer and radial convection: in inp in in out outp out p m n m mrinm m n m outr n l lll auc aucccβas ∑ ∑∑ = + == + −−= , , 1 ,, 1 , 1 )(& (12) outside inside membrane ndiff ndispi ndispo n mt out n mt in nconv. nconv. ar3 ar1 ar2 x fig. 3 fluxes inside the reactor r r + dr dx nr n drr + fig. 4 two-dimensional dispersion model of the membrane the material balance around the element in fig. 5 then leads to: ∑∑ ∑∑ == + == ++ −−+ +⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ∂ ∂ − ∂ ∂ + ∂ ∂ = ∂ ∂ r in inp in inin out outp out out p n j jm n m mrm m n m mr n l lll r dvεrνauc aucccβa dx x xcd x xuc x xcxua t cdvε 11 , 1 , 1 2 2 , , )( )()()()( (13) division by ε ⋅ dv = εardx gives the general expression for the material balance: ∑∑ ∑∑ == + == + ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ + ⋅ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ −−+ +⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ∂ ∂ − ∂ ∂ + ∂ ∂ = ∂ ∂ r in inp in inin out outp out out p n j jm n m mrm m n m mr n l lll r rνauc aucccβa aε x xcd x xuxc x xcxu εt c 11 , 1 , 1 2 2 , , )(1 )()()()()(1 ar dx nab szu nzu a fig. 5 material balance around an element this general expression can be applied to the inner region and the annulus, which results in: [ ]innerinnerrinner innermembrinnerinner r inner inner inner inner inner inner inner auc ccβa a x c d x u c x c u t c inner , ) 2 2 (1 − −⋅+ +⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ∂ ∂ − − ∂ ∂ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ + ∂ ∂ = ∂ ∂ − (15) [ ]outerouterrmembr outermembrouterouter r outer outer outer outer outer outer outer auc ccβa a x c d x u c x c u t c outer ⋅⋅+ −⋅+ +⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ∂ ∂ − − ∂ ∂ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ + ∂ ∂ = ∂ ∂ + , ) 2 2 (1 (16) for the membrane itself one has to introduce a twodimensional model. a material balance of a component is calculated over an arbitrary volume element dv (see fig. 4). dvεrνn nnn nn t n idiffradout diffradindiffaxoutdiffaxin convradoutconvradin ⋅+− −+−+ +−= ∂ ∂ ,, ,,,,,, ,,,, & &&& && (17) a taylor series expansion of the axial material flux, truncated after the first term, gives the following result: dx z n xndxxn ax axax ∂ ∂ +=+ & && )()( (18) 36 the reasonable assumption of no pressure gradients in axial direction results in a diffusive transport in axial direction only: x cdan rdiffax ∂ ∂ −=,& (19) thus the following result is obtained: rdrπ x cd x cda x n r ax 2 2 2 2 2 ∂ ∂ −= ∂ ∂ −= ∂ ∂ & (20) for the diffusive transport in radial direction one obtaines an analogous expression: dr r n rndrrn diffrad diffraddiffrad ⋅ ∂ ∂ +=+ , ,, )()( & && (21) the radial area depends on the position. therefore, the following expression for the radial diffusive flux is obtained: r cdxπdr r crdar diffrad ∂ ∂ −= ∂ ∂ −= 2)(, (22) partial derivation with respect to the radius results in: ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ∂ ∂ + ∂ ∂ ⋅−= ∂ ∂ r c r crdxπd r rn diffrad 2 2, 2 )(& (23) there is also a radial convective flux. therefore, the following relations are obtained: )()()( )()( )( )( )( )()()(,, rcrrarru rarc ra rra rru rarcrun iirad i irad radconvrad ⋅=⋅== = = ⋅== =⋅⋅=& (24) again we obtain for the taylor expansion: dr r xndrrn convradn convradconvrad ⋅ ∂ ∂ +=+ ,)()( ,, & && (25) partial derivation gives: r crrarru r n iiconvrad convrad ∂ ∂ =⋅== ∂ ∂ )()(, ,& (26) therefore, the material balance gets the form dvνεr r cdxdr x crπd rdxdrπ x cd dxdr r cπrrru t cdvε iirad +⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ∂ ∂ + ∂ ∂ + + ∂ ∂ + + ∂ ∂ =−= ∂ ∂ ⋅⋅ 2 2 2 2 2 2 2)( (27) with (28) rdrdxπdv 2= and recasting one obtains: rν x c ε d r c ε d rε rrru t c iirad + ∂ ∂ + ∂ ∂ +⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ⋅= −= ∂ ∂ 2 2 2 2)( (29) for the stationary case eq. (29) is an elliptical partial differential equation. in case the axial terms are dropped the equation turns to a parabolic pde. initially, a constant value for the concentration inside the inner ring of the membrane tube is assumed. the value is equal to the inlet concentration. inside the membrane and outside the tube (permeate side) initially the concentration is set to zero. this situation is the case during start-up. the tube inlet (x = 0) at the inner ring of the tube the concentration equals the inlet concentration all the time cin(x = 0) = co. furthermore, it is assumed that there is no concentration gradient at the inner and outer side of the membrane: 0 00 = ∂ ∂ = = ∂ ∂ = ∂ ∂ = ∂ ∂ = === lx out x out lx membr x membr x c x c x c x c (30) that means there is no diffusive and dispersive flux into the membrane. additionally, the concentration gradient at the inlet is set to zero. this boundary condition is quite well fulfilled. the model equations were solved by using the nag-library [26] routines d02nvf, d02nuf, d01ndf, and d02nxf. the integrator d01ndf is a general purpose routine for integrating the initial value problem for a stiff system of differential equations. it is designed specifically for the case where the jacobian is a sparse matrix. the program calls the sparse matrix linear algebra setup tourine d02nuf, and the backward differentiation formula (bdf) integrator routine d02nvf. d02nxf is a sparse linear algebra diagnostic routine. model parameters some model parameters have to be calculated. the diffusion coefficients of the pure components in water are calculated according to wilke and chang [27]: ( ) ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ⋅⋅= − s cm104.7 2 5.0 5.0 8 ab bo ab vη tmφ d (31) for the association factor ϕ a value for water of 2.6 was taken. the molar volume va at the normal boiling point was calculated by means of a formula suggested by gunn and yamada [28]: )1(~ ~ γ−= ωv ν ν o r sc (32) whereby )0967.00292(~ ω p rtν c sc −= (33) (34) 43 2 11422.102512.2 51941.133953.033593.0 rr rr o r tt ttv ⋅+⋅− −⋅+−= for (0 ≤ tr ≤ 0.8). (35) 2 5.0 )1(91534.0)1(50879.0 )1lg()1(3.10.1 rr rr o r tt ttv −−−− −−−+= 37 for (0.8 < tr < 1). (36) 204842.009045.029607.0 rr tt ⋅−−=γ for (0.2 ≤ tr ≤ 1.0). table 3 data employed for the diffusivities of h2o2 and o2 tc [k] to [k] pc [bar] ω ( )mol m5 310~ −scν o rv γ [ ]mol m2~ν [ ]( )s m9oh, 2 2 10−ad h2o2 730.2 423.35 209.9 0.331 3.018 0.3811 0.2273 10.63 2.88 o2 154.6 90.2 50.4 0.025 4.309 0.3820 0.2268 16.37 2.8 ur uann uin x mo mperm mperm inside annulus membrane lr fig. 6 fluxes inside the membrane module lee-kessler formula [29] 6 6 1 1 43577.0ln4721.13 169347.0ln28862.1 6875.152518.15 09648.692714.5ln θθ θθ θ θp ω c +− −+ −− ++−− = − − (37) θ = tb/tc the values employed for h2o2 and o2 are given in table 3. the axial velocities in the membrane region, the radial velocities in the inner region, and the annulus are neglected. the fluxes are calculated as follows (see fig. 6). the permeate mass flow may be expressed by means of the ratio permm& (39) )(/)( tmtmχ operm &&= therefore, the total permeate flux, which passes through the membrane from the inlet up to the length x, is given by: (40) rorpermpx lxχtmlxtmtxm /)(/)(),( &&& == for the mass flux inside the tube one obtains: (41) )/1)((),( roin lxχtmtxm −= && assumed that the fluid has a constant density, and the tubular cross section is constant along the tube, the fluid velocity inside the tube is given by: (42) )/1)((),( roin lxχtutxu −= in the annulus is a permeate outlet at the position x = xout. therefore, we find for the mass fluxes in the annulus: out out out permrperm rperm ann xx xx xx tmlxtm lxtm txm > = < ⎪⎩ ⎪ ⎨ ⎧ − = )()( 0 )( ),( && & & (43) the fluid velocities in the annulus are given by: out out out ro ro ann xx xx xx lxθχtu lxθχtu txu > = < ⎪⎩ ⎪ ⎨ ⎧ −⋅ = )1()( 0 )( ),( (44) surface membraneouter surface membraneinner =θ (45) for the partial derivatives one obtains: ro in lχtu x tu /)( )( −= ∂ ∂ (46) ro ann lθχtu x tu /)( )( −= ∂ ∂ (47) for the velocity of the radial flow inside the membrane one obtains: )4()(),( 2 rior dldtuχtdu ⋅⋅= (48) the inlet velocity of the fluid is given by: uo(t) = v(t)/a (49) for the axial dispersion coefficient was calculated according to taylor and aris [30,31]: m mdisp d dudd 192 22 += (50) for the inner tube and the annulus the values of ddisp = 4.835 ⋅ 10-3 [m2/s] and ddisp = 2.15 ⋅ 10-4 [m2/s] were used, respectively. the mass transfer coefficient, β, was calculated according to: β = sh ⋅ d/d (51) whereby the sherwood number is given for the laminar region re < 5 ⋅ 105 by: 2 13 1 (re)332.0 cssh = (52) and the turbulent region by (53) 43.08.0re0296.0 scsh ⋅= 38 with the schmidt number sc = η/(ρd) (54) and the reynolds number re = (udρ)/η (55) the input data given in table 4 were used for all calculations. a porosity of 0.2779 was used for the al2o3 membrane, and of 0.1405 for the carbon membrane. table 4 input data for the calculation reactor length [m] 0.246 inner diameter of the membrane [m] 0.006 outer diameter of the membrane [m] 0.010 position of permeate outlet [m] 0.206 ratio of permeate flow to inlet flow [-] 1 density of the fluid [kg/m3] 1000 dynamic viscosity of the fluid [pas] 0.001002 diffusion resistance factor of the solid membrane [-] 11 diffusion coefficient in water [m2/s] h2o o2 2.88 ⋅ 10-9 2.80 ⋅ 10-9 inlet concentration [mol/l] h2o o2 0.15588 0.0 ratio of the inner cross section to the annulus cross section [-] 0.81818 diameter of the outer tube [m] 0.012 results and discussion conversions, fluxes and pressures were measured for the various membranes. an example of the results for the alumina membrane (see no. 1 in table 1; with 0.3 wt-% pd, immobilization of pd with naoh and reduction with h2) are given in fig. 7a/b. after 400 minutes the conversion is constant 98%, the pressure0.9 bar and the flux 16 l/h. for pore diameter of 0.2 µm (no. 2 in table 1) the conversion dropped c on ve rs io n % time [min] time [min] 100 95 90 85 800 200 400 600 800 1000 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 200 400 600 800 1000 pr es su re [b ar ] pressure flux fl ux [l /h ] 20 16 12 8 4 0 a) b) fig. 7 a) conversion and b) pressure as a function of time (alumina membrane) c on ve rs io n % pr es su re [b ar ] 100 80 60 40 20 0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 10 8 6 4 2 0 pressure flux fl ux [l /h ] 20 16 12 8 4 0 a) b) fig. 8 a) conversion and b) pressure as a function of time (carbon membrane) after 900 minutes from 100% to 34% and the flux dropped owing to pore clogging. a reduction of membrane no. 1 in table 1 with nabh4 instead of h2 (0.3 wt-% pd, immobilization with naoh) gave a constant conversion of 65%, no pore clogging was observed. if the palladium content of this membrane was reduced from 0.3 wt-% to 0.06 wt-% the conversion was constantly 58% after 1500 min. if the 39 immobilization of palladium was done with soda the conversion dropped continuiously down to 27%. the carbon membrane (no. 3 in table 1, 0.3 wt-% pd, immobilization with naoh, reduction with nabh4) showed a constant conversion of 70% at a flux of 5.5 l/h and a pressure of 7 bar (see fig 8a/b). a reduction of the palladium content to 0.06 wt-% resulted in a decrease of the conversion to 8% at a flux of 6 l/h. a reduction by means of hydrogen (0.3 wt-% pd) decreased the conversion from 70% to 42%. the carbon fiber membranes (no. 4 in table 1) showed in all cases very low conversions (max. 3%). the polyethylen membrane (no. 5 in table 1, 0.3 wt% pd, immobilization with naoh, reduction with nabh4) gave a constant conversion of 20% at a flux of 14 l/h at a pressure of 4 bar. a reduction of the palladium content to 0.15 wt-% resulted in a decrease of the conversion to 5%. the polypropylen membrane (no. 6 in table 1; 0.3 wt-% pd, immobilization with naoh, reduction with nabh4) revealed a conversion of only 15% at a flux of 7.5 l/h at a pressure of 4.5bar. therefore, the polymer membranes gave rather low conversions. in all cases the 0.2 µm membranes showed a lower conversion compared to the 3 µm membranes, and clogged after a short time. as expected, a higher palladium content led to a higher yield. furthermore, 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ph a ct iv ity [m gh o /g h ] 2 2 k at fig. 9 activity of the catalyst as a function of the ph value the membranes with a load of 0.06 wt-% pd deactivated over the first 200 minutes. the two methods of immobilization of palladium (naoh, naco3) showed no difference in case of the 3 µm alumina membranes, but for 0.2 µm alumina membranes an immobilization by means of naoh resulted in a higher conversion. the reduction with hydrogen was advantageous for the 3 µm alumina membrane compared to nabh4; for the 0.2 µm alumina membrane it was just the opposite. for the other membranes a higher palladium content gave also a higher conversion. the immobilization with naoh and reduction with nabh4 led for the carbon membrane to a twice as high conversion as an immobilization at 600°c followed by a reduction with h2. of considerable importance on the activity of the catalyst is the ph-value. in the range of a ph value of 5 – 11 the activity of the catalyst increased by a factor of about nine (see fig. 9) for the 3 µm alumina membrane (0.06 wt-% pd). for all other membranes also a nearly linear increase of the catalyst activity could be observed with increasing ph value. the reason for this behaviour may be explained by a mechanism in the alkaline ph region via a perhydroxylion, namely: (56) o2hohoh 0.5oo oohho hoho ohhoohoh 23 2(ads) (ads)(ads)2 (ads)2(aq)2 32222 ⇔+ ⇔ +⇔ ⇔ +⇔+ −+ −− −− −− ------------------------------------- 2222 0.5oohoh +⇔ furthermore, an oxide layer on the catalyst surface may be formed which reacts with perhydroxylions: (57) −− −− −+ +⇔+ ++⇔+ ⇔ ohmohom oohmhomo hohoh 2 22 222 0 41 82 123 164 205 246 0 6 8 1 19 1 70 22 1 6,00 5,00 4,00 3,00 2,00 1,00 0,00h o r es id ua l c on te nt [g /l] 2 2 length [mm] start time [s] end fig. 10 h2o2 content inside the membrane as a function of time and length inside outside length [mm] h o c on ve rs io n [% ] 2 2 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 radius 246,00 205,00 164,00 123,00 82,00 41,00 0,00 fig. 11 h2o2 conversion as a function of length and radius increasing the temperature leads to an increased decomposition rate, as expected from the kinetic 40 expression. a variation of the h2o2 inlet concentration between 0.25 [g/l] and 70 [g/l] had nearly no influence on the conversion of h2o2. this was tested for membrane number one in table 1, for which the immobilization was done with naco3 and reduction with h2. in the inlet concentration range between 0.25 [g/l] and 40 [g/l] the conversion dropped slightly from 100% to 90%; between 40 [g/l] and 70 [g/l] the conversion increased again to 100%. this may be explained by the change of the reaction order from one to two at higher concentrations. as expected, an increased volume flux, and therefore a shorter contact time, leads to a lower conversion. based on the kinetics and the model discussed in the previous sections several simulations were executed. examples are presented in figs. 10/11/12. in fig. 10 the residual content of h2o2 as a function of time and length inside the tube is presented for membrane no. 2 in table 1, where the immobilization was done with naoh and the reduction with nabh4. after about 17 [s] a stationary profile is achieved. stationary profiles of conversion as a function of the membrane radius and length are given in figs. 11/12. in fig. 11 the same membrane as in fig. 10 was calculated. in fig. 12 a carbon membrane (see no. 3 in table 1) with a pd load of 0.06 wt-% was employed. 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 01 3 5 7 9 246,00 205,00 164,00 123,00 82,00 41,00 0,00 inside outside length [mm] h o c on ve rs io n ln [% ] 2 2 radius fig. 12 h2o2 conversion as a function of length and radius 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 temperature [°c] c on ve rs io n [% ] calculated measured fig. 13 comparison of measured and calculated conversions the immobilization was done by heating to 600°c, and the reduction was executed with h2. in figs. 13/14 measured and calculated conversions are compared for various temperatures. as can be seen from the figures, the coincidence is quite good. in order to test the membranes under real conditions waste water from a plant in bernburg (solvay intox) was investigated. for this purpose the filter was removed from the pilot plant in order to investigate clogging effects. two alumina membranes were employed (3 µm, 0.2 µm). for both cases a palladium load of 0.3 wt-% was used. the membranes were reduced with nabh4, the immobilization of palladium was executed by means of naoh. for the 3 µm membrane a h2o2 conversion of 100% could be achieved at a flux of 2.3 l/h at a feed pressure of 1 bar and a flux of 6 l/h at 2 bar. in this case the conversion reduced to 96%. for the 0.2 µm membrane the conversion was 100% at a pressure of 1 bar and a flux of 2.5 l/h. typical results are presented in table 5. at a pressure of 1 [bar] nearly all h2o2 was decomposed and no pore blocking was observed. conclusions the radial convective flow is a promising alternative for catalytic reactions. owing to the possibility of varying the pressure one can, at least to a certain extent, control the yield and selectivity of reactions. this approach may be also useful for gas/solid reactions. 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 temperature [°c] co nv er si on [% ] measured calculated fig. 14 comparison of measured and calculated conversions table 3 waste water (solvay interox, bernburg) outlet after catalytic membrane* colour yellow, opaque clear ph 7 7 h2o2 [mg/l] 691 0 – 15 cod [mg/l] 943 866 tc [mg/l] 526 494 * 3 µm alumina membranes 0.3 wt-% pd, immobilization with naoh, reduction with nabh4. 41 symbols a area per unit of length [m] a area [m2] ar cross sectional area [m2] c concentration [mole/m3] d diameter [m] d dispersion or diffusion coefficient [m2/s] dm molecular diffusion coefficient [m2/s] i inner lr length of membrane [m] m& mass flow [kg/s] m mole weight [g/mole] n mole number [mole] n& mole flux [mol/s] axn& axial mole flux [mol/s] np number of components [-] nr number of chemical reactions [-] p pressure [pa] r radius [m] r rate of reaction [mol/cm3 ⋅s] re reynolds number [-] s& total radial flux between phases [mol/s] sc schmidt number [-] sh sherwood number [-] t time [s] t temperature [k] tr reduced temperature [-] u flow velocity [m/s] u average flow velocity [m/s] v volume [m3] va molar volume of diluted a at normal boiling point [cm3/mole] x length coordinate [m] β mass transfer coefficient [m/s] χ flow ratio [-] ε void fraction [-] γ coefficient [-] (see eq. 36) η dynamic viscosity [kg/(s ⋅ m)] ϕ association factor [-] v stoichiometric coefficient [-] ν~ molar volume νj stoichiometric factor [-] θ reduced boiling temperature [-] (see eq. 37), ratio of inner to outer membrane surface [-] (see eq. 45) ρ density [kg/m3] ω acentric factor [-] subscripts ann annulus ax axial c critical diff diffusive disp dispersion in into inner inner side of membrane membr membrane o inlet out out of outer outer side of membrane perm permeate r radial, reduced rad radial references 1. hsieh h.: catal. rev.-sci. eng. 1991, 33, 1 2. hsieh h., in: membrane science and technology series, vol. 3, elsevier, amsterdam, 1996 3. zaspalis v.t. and burggraaf a.j., in: r.r. bhare (ed.), inorganic membranes. synthesis, characteristics and applications, van nostrand reinhold, new york, 1991 4. saracco g. and specchia v.: catal. rev.-sci. eng. 1994, 36, 305 5. zaman j. and chakma a.: j. membr. sci. 1994, 92, 1 6. dalmon j.a., in: g. ertl, h. knötzinger, j. weitkamp (eds.), handbook of heterogeneous catalysis, vol. 3, wiley-vch, weinheim, 1997. 7. coronas j. and santamaria j.: catal. today, 1999, 51, 377 8. tsotsis t.t., minet r.g., champaigne a.m. and liu p.k.t., in: e.r. becker and c. pereira (eds.), computer-aided design of catalysts, marcel dekker, new york, 1993, p. 471. 9. marcano j.g.s. and tsotsis t.t.: catalytic membranes and membrane reactors, wiley-vch, weinheim, 2002 10. flügge u.: entwicklung und einsatz katalytischer membranen am beispiel der modellreaktion des wasserstoffperoxidabbaus. experimentelle und theoretische untersuchungen. dissertation, technische universität hamburg-harburg, 1998 11. ziegler s., theis j. and fritsch d.: j. membr. sci. 2001, 187, 71 12. vincenta m.j. and gonzaleza r.d.: aiche j. 2002, 48, 1257 13. kobayashi m., togawa j., kanno t., horinchi j. and tada k.: j. chem. technol. biotechnol., 2003, 78, 303 14. fritsch d., randjelovic i. and keil f.: catal. today, 2004, 98, 295 15. brunelle j.: pure and appl. chem., 1978, 50, 1211 16. jiratova k.: appl. catal., 1978, 1, 165. 17. ludwig s. and hönicke d.: chem.-ing.-tech., 1992, 64, 639. 18. mckee d.w.: j. catal., 1969, 14, 355 19. gossner k., heidrich h. and körner d.: z. f. phys. chem. n.f. 1969, 67, 220 20. gossner k. and bischof h.: z. f. phys. chem. n.f. 1972, 78, 277 21. gossner k. and bischof h.: z. f. phys. chem. n.f. 1972, 79, 28 22. eley d.d. and macmahon d.m.: j. coll. interface sci., 1972, 38, 322 23. kreja l.: z. f. phys. chem. n.f., 1984, 140, 247 24. schekhobalova v.i.: vestn. mosk. univ., ser. 2: khim., 1986, 27, 97 42 25. schekhobalova v.i. and voronova l.v.: vestn. mosk. univ., ser. 2: khim., 1989, 30, 63 26. numerical algebra group fortran library, mark 19, nag gmbh, garching 27. poling b.e., prausnitz j.m., and o’connell j.p.: the properties of liquids and gases, mcgraw hill, new york, 2001, chapter 11.21 28. vdi-wärmeatlas, vdi-verlag gmbh, düsseldorf, 1994 29. lee b.i., kessler m.g.: aiche j., 1975, 21, 510 30. taylor, g.: proc. royal soc. a, 1953, 219, 186 31. aris r.: proc. royal soc. a, 1956, 235, 67 microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 37(2) pp. 101-106 (2009) fuel production from triglycerides containing gas oils cs. tóth , p. baladincz, j. hancsók university of pannonia, institute of chemical and process engineering, department of hydrocarbon and coal processing h-8201 veszprém, p.o.box.: 158, hungary e-mail: tothcs@almos.uni-pannon.hu lately the development and the use of energy sources which are of bio-origin are required. the engine fuels have special importance. based on their origin they can be conventional, alternative or conventional + alternative. biofuels which can be produced from biomass, thus from a renewable energy source, are alternative fuels. the objective of our research work was to investigate the production of diesel fuel with excellent quality and/or of diesel fuel blending component by heterogeneous catalytic conversion of gas oil fraction containing 75% sunflower oil. furthermore, our aim was to determine the advantageous process parameters (temperature, pressure, liquid hourly space velocity, hydrogen/hydrocarbon ratio) during application of the selected nimo/al2o3 catalyst. based on the results obtained we determined that the main properties of these products were significantly better compared to the feed as diesel fuel components. the products which were made under desired combination of process parameters (t = 350–380 °c; p = 80 bar; lhsv = 1,0–1,5 h-1; h2/feed ratio: 600 nm3/m3) had lower than 10 mg/kg sulphur and nitrogen content, and the cetane numbers were significantly higher than it is specified in the msz en 590:2009 standard (minimum 51). keywords: vegetable oil, gas oil, mixtures, sunflower oil, biogasoil, heterogenous catalytic hydrogenation introduction for modern society, it is very important to maintain mobility, of which energy need is covered mostly with fossil derived energy sources. the depletion of crude oil stocks, the dependence of crude oil and import energy sources, and the need to reduce the environmental pollution necessitates the development and application of alternative energy sources. the energy sources include the paramount importance engine-fuels which, according to its origin, may be conventional, alternative, or conventional & alternative (fig. 1) [1-4]. bio-engine-fuels that belong to alternative enginefuels are produced from a renewable energy source as e.g. biomass. widely used alternative engine-fuels come into view, for example the derivatives of vegetable-oils (out of them esters) and furthermore nowadays products made with catalytic hydrogenation. the carbon-dioxide originating during the application of these fuels does not burden the environment, because it builds in again through the photosynthesis of the plants. as a result of the lower emission, the use of biofuels burdens the environment less than the use of fossil derived fuels [1-4]. in the directives and valid standards, the european union supports and orders more application of bioderived energy sources, among them bio engine-fuels. figure 1: classification of motor fuels the diesel fuel standard valid since 2000 (msz en 590:2000, then msz en 590:2004 and msz en 590:2009) permits the use of bio-derived blending components, but it specifies the composition (fatty-acid-methyl-esters) and sets limits to blended quantity (msz en 590:2009: maximum 7 v/v%). the european union confirmed and extended directive 2003/30/ec multiple times and fixed the ratio of bio engine-fuels in 10% till 2020 [5-8]. in hungary, the development and application of bioderived engine-fuels and blending components – among them mainly vegetable-oils and its derivatives – is very important, too. the engine-fuel consumption in the european union swings to diesel-fuel and according to the prognosis, more increase is probable in the rate of diesel-fuel and gasoline [9]. the engine-fuel market in 102 hungary exfoliates such as the european, but in our country, the usage of gasoline still increases, although more slightly than the use of diesel-fuel (figure 2) [10]. 0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 year q ua nt ity o f f ue ls , 1 06 t gasoline diesel fuel figure 2: the change in the use of gasoline and diesel fuels in hungary therefore increasing the quantity and improving the quality of the bio-derived diesel-fuel blending components has great importance. in hungary, for this purpose nowadays the biodiesel (fatty-acid-methyl-ester), in the immediate future the bio gas oil (from the heterogeneous catalytic hydrogenation of triglycerides containing mainly normaland isoparaffins having a similar boiling point range as the traditional gas oil; the denomination and the notion was introduced at institute of chemical and process engineering, department of hydrocarbon and coal processing, university of pannonia at first [11-12]) and someday the synthetic bio gas oil (mainly a mixture of normaland isoparaffins from biomass based synthesis gas) will be available. the technologies produce biodiesels and the produced biodiesels also have a lot of problems and disadvantages (high unsaturated content causing bad thermal, oxidation, and thus storage stability; high water content causing corrosion problems; sensitivity to hydrolysis causing poor storage stability; unfavourable cold properties; low energy content; methanol) which damage the profit of the utilization and production [13-14]. to overcome these problems and to attain better quality, the alternative is the chemical conversion of triglyceride based feeds, mainly hydrocarbons rich in paraffins, which products can be utilized in dieselengines mixed with diesel gas oil or directly. from the available sources of triglyceride containing materials the most advantageously used are the oils made from oil-bearing vegetables. the heterogenous catalytic conversion of vegetable oil – gas oil mixtures can occur in two major ways. in the first way, shown in figure 3, the vegetable oil is pre-treated in a reactor first then it is deoxygenated in the hdo reactor. the product rich in n-paraffins, has a very high cetane number, but poor cold flow properties – is mixed with desulphurized gas oil stream after separation. in the second way, the vegetable oil is mixed in a gas oil stream in the refinery after pre-treatment. after it, the mixture is converted in a conventional (or slightly modified) desulphurization plant [15-17]. with further isomerisation or dewaxing, gas oil product can gain high cetane number and good cold flow properties. with these methods it is also possible to use the product as a blending component for quality boosting in gas oil streams with poor quality (low cetane number, high aromatic-, sulphurand nitrogen content). figure 3: options of the catalytic conversion of the vegetable oil-gas oil mixtures. (hdo: hydrodeoxygenation; hds: hydrodesulphurization) in the case of these methods, the pre-treatment of the vegetable oils is necessary, which step should be brought to effect by the building of a continuous, pre-treatment catalyst containing reactor. in the pre-treatment reactor the metal(ca, k, mg), the phosphorusand the solid impurities contents of the vegetable oil are removed [15-17]. for the time being, many leading corporations and departments of research examine the realization of these methods, respectively tailoring them for the regional capabilities [18-26]. the aim of the experimental work was the investigation of preparing high-quality products by the catalytic hydrogenation of mixtures of vegetable oil and crude gas oil distillate, which is useful in pure form as diesel fuel or as gas oil blending component as well. within this, our goal was to specify the favourable operation parameters (temperature, pressure, lhsv, hydrogen/feedstock volume ratio) on a commercial nimo/al2o3 catalyst. experimental work this paper presents experimental results obtained via the investigation of heterogeneous catalytic transformation of gas oil distillate containing sunflower oil in 75%, on nimo/al2o3 catalyst. beside this, our goal was to determine the favourable operation parameters (temperature, pressure, lhsv, hydrogen/feedstock volume ratio) applying a commercial nimo/al2o3 catalyst. during the experimental work, the influence of the process parameters on the yield of the organic and gas products, and on the yield and main physicalchemical properties and application impact of the gas oil boiling point range fraction of the product was studied. the combinations of process parameters were selected on the basis of the results of our pre-experiments, taking into account the physical and chemical properties of gas oil distillate and the sunflower oil. 103 experimental equipment the experiments were carried out in experimental equipment (figure 4) which contains all the main devices of a heterogeneous catalytic hydrogenation plant. this process equipment has a tubular reactor of 100 cm3 active volume capacity [27]. the experimental work was carried out in continuous mode in a single reactor array catalytic system. figure 4: simplified scheme of the test apparatus (1 reactor; 2 pre-heater; 3 oxygen converter; 4, 5 gas dryer; 6,10 gas filter; 7 gas flow meter; 8 gas flow meter; 9 demister; 11 compressor; 12, 13 burettes for liquid feed; 14 pump; 15, 18 cooler; 16 separator; 17 level meter; 19 closing valve; 20 control valve; 21 back valve; 22 manometer) feedstocks the feedstock of the heterogeneous catalytic experiment was gas oil-vegetable oil mixture with 75% vegetable oil content of properly pre-treated sunflower oil originating from a supplier in hungary. important properties of these mixtures are summarized in table 1. the catalyst was nimo/al2o3, which was chosen on the basis of other experiments previously performed by the department of hydrocarbon and coal processing at the university of pannonia. analytical and calculation methods the properties of the feedstocks and the products were specified as the specifications of the msz en 590:2009 standard, relevant for diesel-fuels and with standardised calculation methods. the ensued cetane numbers were specified with iqt apparatus according to standard astm d6890-03a. process parameters the experiments were carried out – on the basis of other experiments previously performed – on combinations of the following process parameters, t = 300–360 °c, p = 80 bar, lhsv: 1,0–3,0 h-1, h2/feedstock volume ratio: 600 nm3/m3. table 1: main properties of the feeds properties gas oil gas oilvegetable oil mixture density (15.6 °c), g/cm3 0,8513 0,8451 kinematic viscosity, (40 °c), mm2/s 5,36 24,73 iodine number, g i2/100 g 0,5 90 sulphur content, mg/kg 10370 2594 nitrogen content, mg/kg 228 58 flash point, °c 79 79 cold filter plugging point, °c 2 15 aromatic content, % 37,6 9,4 cetane number 49 43 104 results and discussion by the heterogeneous catalytic conversion of the gas oil containing vegetable oil, the product was separated to three main fractions as gas fraction, water fraction and organic fraction. in the gas phase, products besides the hydrogen are not used in the reactions, there is a high amount of gases formed through the hydrogenation reaction routes, such as carbon-oxides, propane arises from the triglyceride and lighter hydrocarbons originate from the cracking reactions (figure 5). the yield of the gas fraction significantly increases with the temperature, which is at first caused by the conversion of the vegetable oil, then at higher temperatures (>340 °c) boosts so that the hydrocracking reactions become conspicuous. 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 temperature, °c y ie ld o f g as p ha se , % 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0lhsv, h-1 figure 5: the change of the yield of gas phase as a function of temperature the yield of the liquid organic product (c6+ fraction) decreased with increasing temperature and pressure as well as with decreasing lhsv (figure 6). this was caused by the higher conversion of vegetable oil – while water, co2, co and lighter products formed, decreasing the yield of the liquid product – and also the hydrocracking of the hydrocarbons. 78 80 82 84 86 88 90 92 94 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 temperature, °c y ie ld o f o rg an ic li qu id p ha se , % 11 1 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 lhsv, h-1 figure 6: the change of the yield of organic products (c6+) as a function of temperature. one of the main goals of the experiment was to convert the triglyceride molecule to a product which is in the gas oil boiling point range. for that very reason, it is important to know how the quantity of the products in boiling point range 180–360 °c – which was obtained via distillation –changed with the process parameters. the yield of the gas oil boiling point range product changes as the maximum-curve of the temperature (figure 7). till 320–330 °c the yield increased with the rate of the conversion, which can be seen well on the decrease of the residual fraction (figure 8), and with the further increase of the temperature the yield significantly decreases because of the hydrocracking reactions. with increasing lhsv, the yield of the main product increased because of the foreshortening of the contact time. 85 86 87 88 89 90 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 temperature, °c y ie ld o f m ai n pr od uc t, %1 11 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 lhsv, h-1 figure 7: the change of the yield of the gas oil boiling point range product as a function of temperature (p = 80 bar) while specifying the main product, the change in the sulphur and aromatic content was compared to the experiments with the gas oil used for the blending of the feedstock. 0 5 10 15 20 25 300 320 340 360 temperature, °c y ie ld o f r es id ua l p ha se , % 11 1 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0lhsv, h-1 figure 8: the change of the yield of residue as a function of temperature. on the basis of the results, we determined that the desulphurization efficiency increased with increasing the temperature (figure 9), namely the sulphur content of the main product decreased. at the most severe process parameters (t = 360 °c, lshv = 1,0 h-1) a product, eligible for the valid diesel gas oil standard (msz en 590:2009) (<10 mg/kg) was produced. as it can be seen in the figure, the sulphur content of the gas 105 oil decreased more than in the case of the products made from mixtures, because the parallel reactions via the hydrogenation – saturation of double bonds, deoxygenation, dearomatization – the desulphurization confining as these reactions take place on the same catalytic places. 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 temperature, °c h d s, % 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 h d a , % 0% 75%vegetable oil content, % figure 9: the changes in desulphurisation(hds)and dearomatization(hda) efficiency as a function of temperature (p = 80 bar, lshv = 1,0 h-1) dearomatization efficiency changes as the maximum-curve in the case of both feedstocks. this is because with the increasing of the temperature, above 350 °c – the thermodynamic inhibition made by the exothermic reactions – the dearomatization is confined. one of the important attributes of diesel-fuels is the cold filter plugging point, which as we determined, decreases with the increasing temperature (figure 10), because on account of the hydrocracking reaction, more lighter hydrocarbon products formed and their cfpp is more favourable. via isomerisation and/or with additives, a product can be made of which cfpp satisfies the valid dieselfuel standards (summer grade: +5 °c, winter grade: -20 °c). -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 temperature, °c c fp p, °c 0% 75% vegetable oil content, % figure 10: the changes in cfpp value of the main fraction as a function of temperature. one of the most important quality properties for the gas oil boiling point range products is its cetane number. the cetane number of these products improves 24-29 points in the case of the preferential process parameters, which is significantly higher than the valid standards minimum specification, 51. summary and conclusion it was found that during the catalytic conversion, the properties of the products (first of all, the cetane number) were improved significantly comparing that to the properties of the feedstock. applying the desired combinations of process parameters (t = 350–380 °c; p = 80 bar; lhsv = 1,0–1,5 h-1; h2/feedstock ratio: 600 nm3/m3), the sulphur content of the products were less than 10 mg/kg and their cetane number were significantly higher than that in the valid diesel gas oil standards (msz en 590:2009). increase of the cetane number is caused by the high n-paraffin content of the products, which is produced mainly in the catalytic conversion of the vegetable oil portion of the feedstock. products were made which, with further isomerization and/or addition, meet the property values of the diesel gas oil standard in every respect. references 1. hancsók j., baladincz j.: issue of műszaki kémiai napok’04, (2004), 1–16. 2. hancsók j., krár m., holló a., thernesz a.: magyar kémikusok lapja, (2006) 61(8), 260–264. 3. magyar j., hancsók j., krár m., pölczmann gy.: magyar kémikusok lapja, (2006) 61(9-10), 309–314. 4. magyar sz., molnár zs., juhász k., hancsók j.: magyar kémikusok lapja, (2006) 61(11), 361–366. 5. official journal of the european union, 142, (2003), 42–46 6. commission of the european communities, com(2006) 34 final, (2006) 7. commission of the european communities, com(2006) 845 final, (2007) 8. commission of the european communities, com(2006) 848 final, (2006) 9. dastillung m.: concawe report, (2009) no. 03/09 10. hungarian customs and finance guard; excise statistic, http://vam.gov.hu/loadbinarycontent.do?b inaryid=15223 11. hancsók j., krár m., magyar sz., boda l., holló a., kalló d.: microporous and mesoporous materials, (2007) 101(1-2), 148–152. 12. hancsók j., krár m., magyar sz., boda l., holló a., kalló d.: studies in surface science and catalysis 170 b, (2007) 170, 1605–1610. 13. krár m., hancsόk j.: proceedings of 7th international colloquium fuels, mineral oil based and alternative fuels, (2009) stuttgart/ostfildern, germany, 507–514. 14. bozbas k.: renewable & sustainable energy reviews, (2008) 12, 542–552. 106 15. hancsók j., kovács f., krár m.: 5th international symposium on “materials made from renewable resources”, (2005) germany, erfurt 112. proceedings p-17 16. hancsók j., krár m., kasza t., tóth cs.: 5th international conference on environmental catalysis, (2008) belfast, proceedings 427. 17. krár m., magyar sz., thernesz a., holló a. boda l., hancsók j.: 15th european biomass conference & exhibition. biomass for energy, industry and climate protection, (2007) germany, berlin, proceedings 1988–1992. 18. leiveld b.: catalysts courier, (2006) 65, 8–9. 19. costa p. r.: ptq biofuels, (2007), 32–33. 20. melis s., mayo s., leliveld b.: biofuels technology, (2009) 1, 43–47. 21. corma a., huber g. w.: angewandte chemie international edition, (2007) 46, 7184–7201. 22. huber g. w., o’connor p., corma a.: applied catalysis a: general 329, (2007), 120–129. 23. bezergianni s., kalogianni a., vasalos i. a.: bioresource technology, (2009) 100, 3036–3042. 24. walandziewski j., stolarski m., łużny r., klimek b.: fuel processing technology, (2009) 90, 686–691. 25. kubičková i., snåre m., eränen k., mäkiarvela p., murzin d. y.: catalysis today, (2005) 106, 197–200. 26. mäki-arvela p., kubičková i., snåre m., eränen k., murzin d. y.: energy and fuel, (2007) 21(1), 30 –41. 27. hancsók j., magyar sz., szoboszlai zs., kalló d.: fuel processing technology, (2007) 88(4), 393– 399. microsoft word 1_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 37(1). pp. 37-49 (2009) dynamic model and control of heat exchanger networks for district heating l. dobos 1, j. jäschke2, j. abonyi1, s. skogestad2 1university of pannonia, department of process engineering, egyetem str. 10 veszprém, 8200, hungary e-mail: dobosl@fmt.uni-pannon.hu 2norwegian university of science and technology, department of chemical engineering, no-7491 ,trondheim, norway the various governmental policies aimed at reducing the dependence on fossil fuels for space heating and the reduction in its associated emission of greenhouse gases such as co2 demands innovative measures. district heating systems using residual industrial waste heats could provide such an efficient method for house and space heating. in such systems, heat is produced and/or thermally upgraded in a central plant and then distributed to the final consumers through a pipeline network. in this work two main objectives will be considered: the first is to create a dynamic model which can represent the main characteristics of a district heating network and the second one is to design a non-linear model predictive controller (nlmpc) to satisfy the heat demands of the consumers in the heat exchanger network. as the model predictive controller is based on minimizing an objective function, it is totally perfect to find the way to reduce the superfluous energy consumption and make the best of using the freely applicable industrial waste heats. beside this environmental aspect, reducing the invested energy consumption can reduce the operational costs. keywords: district heating network, modeling, non-linear model predictive control, mpc introduction it has become natural for people today to have a network for the distribution of the electricity. however the picture is much different when it comes to heating. the majority of the buildings in western europe are heated with individual boilers that are fed either with natural gas or with oil. only in some cases, e.g. with waste incineration, a district heating network (dhn) is implemented to distribute the heat. district heating networks are for distributing heat generated in a centralized location for residential and commercial heating requirements. the heat can be obtained from cogeneration plants or waste incineration plants although to satisfy the periodically increased heat demand socalled heat-only/peak load boiler stations are also used. these stations can be suppliers of residential and commercial consumers for space heating and for hot tap water and if necessary it can provide heat for industrial consumers for a certain level. however, because of the numerous advantages of district heating systems, it would be beneficial to implement them in other areas too, since the main advantages of district heating systems are [12]: 1. fewer sources of emission in densely populated areas. 2. fewer individual boilers, thus increased the usable space in the buildings. 3. professional and on-going operating and maintenance of the centralized heating technology. since energy becomes a more and more competitive market nowadays, thus optimization of the energy production and distribution becomes an important task for energy companies. the district heating facility can provide higher economic and environmental efficiency compared to local boilers. this the reason why the importance of these networks are increasing, and the countries, which use local heat suppliers, such as the nordic countries, are switching to district heating networks instead. district heating networks exist in several variations: in the district heating network reported in [1] includes several consumers are located in different areas, but there is no energy storage and just one production unit. in [13], a storage tank is added to the network. in [6], a storage tank is also considered, but there is no thermal energy supply network. so the variety of the district heating networks are numerous. the operation of a district heating network is subject to operational constraints, e.g. assure the minimum inlet temperature of consumers this way satisfying their heat demand. the aim of the control strategies therefore is to meet these restrictions and at the same time to minimize the operational costs of the heat supplier. model predictive control methods an interesting alternative to conventional control structures since the formulation of the objective function and constraints takes both aspect into consideration. operating a district heating network implies to assign values to integer variables (status of production units, 38 status of pumps…) and to continuous variables (amounts of energy to produce). as a result, the optimization of the production and energy supply planning appears to be a huge, mixed integer and non linear optimization issue. consequently, most studies use a simplified model, leaving aside some of the district heating network aspects. simplifying the model may allow the use of one of the classical optimization methods listed in [11], but the solution can be strongly suboptimal when applied to the whole district heating network. our goal is to model a district heating network presented latter and at the same time we use the model in a model predictive controller to satisfy the heat demand of the consumers of the network. the work is organized as follows: in the modeling section the topology of the applied district heating network will be introduced and the applied model equations will be defined. in the control section first the general non-linear model predictive controllers will be described, then defining the purposes, introducing the applied mpcs and examining the control results. modeling section the models of a district heating network found in the literature are either a physical description of the heat and mass transfer in the network [8] or they are based on a statistical description of the transfer function from the supply point to the critical point considered. a statistical modeling approach is presented [10] where an ensemble of armax (auto-regressive moving average with exogenous input) models with different fixed time delays is set up, and depending on some estimated current time the models are switched. in [5] the grey-box approach for modeling combines physical knowledge with data-based (statistical) modeling; physical knowledge provides the main structure and statistical modeling provides details on structure and the actual coefficients/ estimates. the model in this work is developed with using the method of [7] so applying the physical description of the heat and mass transfer in the network. local models of the components of the network are established and then connected together. topology the topology showing fig. 1 was chosen to represent the main characteristics of a district heating network. the network contains two heat production units, three consumers, two pumps and a valve. the production unit, called producer 1, is the base load boiler, which may be considered a waste incineration plant. the other production unit, called producer 2, is the peak load boiler station, which has to satisfy the increased heat demand in the network, especially in case of the consumer 3. hx1 and hx2 heat exchangers are for transfer the produced heat from the primary circles to the secondary circle that is practically for distributing the heat for the consumers. figure 1: the topology of the examined district heating network during the modeling procedure the following simplifications and assumptions were made to avoid the excessive complexity of modeled network, while preserving important characteristics: ● since the system containes only pressurized water thermodynamical and material properties like heat capacities and densities are assumed constant. average values for the respective temperature intervals are used. ● isothermal flow is assumed through the pumps and valve. this is done due to the low pressure differences in the system. ● the pressure profile of the system changes much faster than the temperature profile, so it was modeled using steady-state equations, while the heat exchangers are modeled with dynamical assumption. the following model equations were applied to describe the network: valves the valve is modeled using the following equation: 2 2vpp inout ⋅ ⋅−= ρξ (1) where: pout – outlet pressure of the valve pin – outlet pressure of the valve ρ – density of water v – velocity of the fluid ξ means the valve coefficient that is calculated by the expression below: 100/(%)ngvalveopeni )dtotalopene(ξξ = (2) 39 as it was mentioned previously, there is no difference in value of the inlet and outlet temperature. pumps by neglecting any temperature rise in the water during travel through the pumps, they can be described using the bernoulli equation. the elevation difference is set to zero, and the pipe diameter was assumed equal before and after the pump, thus the following expression characterizes the pump: m ppp inout ηρ ⋅⋅ += (3) where p means the pump duty, η means the efficiency of the pump, m means the mass flow. mixers the mixing unit is modeled using the following expressions, under the assumption of instant and homogeneous mixing: ∑ = = n i iout mm 1 (4) out n i ii out m tm t ∑ = ⋅ = 1 (5) in modeling the mixers’ pressure, we assume: pin, i = pout (6) where: t – temperature p – inlet and outlet pressure. pipes in modeling the district heating networks taking the effects of pipelines into consideration is an important factor. the heat loss in the pipes can not be neglected, and the dead time between the ends of the pipe has to be accounted for. assuming one-dimensional flow, this leads to the partial equation: 0)),((2 ),()(),( 02 2 =− ⋅⋅ ⋅ + ⋅⋅ + ttxt rc tx x t r tmtx t t p ρ μ ∂ ∂ ρπ∂ ∂ (7) where: cp – specific heat capacity of the fuid r – the radius of the pipe μ – heat transfer coefficient on the wall t0 – the ambient temperature. this equation has the following solution: ⎟ ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ − ⋅⋅ ⋅ − ⋅−−+= ))((2 000 0 )))((()( ttt rc inout petttttttt ρ μ (8) the varying time delay t – t0(t) is defined by: ld r mt t = ⋅⋅∫ τ ρπ τ 0 2 )( (9) l is the length of the pipe (m). as the thermal losses on pipes are assumed very low. thus the eq. 8 is approximated by the following expression: ⎟ ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ − ⋅⋅ ⋅ −⋅−= ⎟ ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ − ⋅⋅ ⋅ −⋅−−+= ))((21))(( ))((21)))((()( 00 0000 ttt rc tttt ttt rc tttttttt p in p inout ρ μ ρ μ (10) in eq. 10 constant time delay is assumed regarded to the high computation demand of calculating varying time delay. this approach yields a simple non-linear dynamic system, which can be quickly solved. the mechanical losses in pipes are modeled by: d lvp 2 2⋅ ⋅= ρξδ (11) δp – pressure drop of the pipe d – diameter of the pipe. heat exchangers in order model the proper dynamic behavior of the heat exchangers an approach using a cell model with ordinary differential equations is chosen [4]. this means that the heat exchanger is divided into perfectly and instantly mixed tanks. each cell featuring a hot side, a wall side, and a cold side element (fig. 2). the idea is that this approach will approximate the logarithmic mean temperature difference of the heat exchanger as the number of cells increases, while showing a realistic time delay behavior. in our model five cells were used on the hot side and five cells on the cold side. it is assumed that all cells are identical, and that no back-mixing occurres. in addition we assume that the mixing is instantaneous. figure 2: cell model of the heat exchanger 40 the following equations are applied to a cell: hot side: ))()(())()1(( )( ititauititcv dt itcdv chhhph hph −⋅⋅−−−⋅⋅⋅ = ⋅⋅⋅ • ρ ρ (12) cold side: ))()(())()1(( )( ititauititcv dt itcdv chhcpc cpc −⋅⋅+−+⋅⋅⋅ = ⋅⋅⋅ • ρ ρ (13) to avoid excessive complexity of the model the resistance of the wall is included to the heat transfer coefficient (u). the pressure drop of a heat exchanger is usually made up of the following parts: ● pressure drop of the inlet nozzle. ● pressure drop caused by the friction in the shell and in the tubes. ● pressure drop of the outlet nozzle. to model these areas separately it would be necessary to use complex equations. to reduce the number of the expressions (and because we do not have a real dhs we can fit the model to) the pressure drop of a heat exchanger is approximated with the model equation of a valve. this way it was possible to model the pressure drop as the function of the flow rate and at the same time keep the model simple. heat production units the approach for modeling the heat production units are similar to the model of the heat exchangers, however in this case just the cold side was divided into cells, following the scheme below: figure 3: cell model of the production unit the following equation is for representing the model of a cell on the cold side: n qititcv dt itcdv ccpc cpc +−−⋅⋅⋅= ⋅⋅⋅ • ))()1(( )( ρ ρ (14) where: q – invested heat n – the number of the cells. this simplification is introduced because in the aspect of the heating network it is not important how the heat was produced, just the quantity of the invested heat is significant. the previously introduced network was implemented in simulink. an other model of this network is implemented in matlab with the simplification of neglecting the time delay of the pipelines (in eq. 8). this was done to compare the performance of the two models in the mpc controller. control section model based control concepts the development of modern model based control concepts can be traced back to the early 1960s, to the linear quadratic regulator (lqr), which is designed to operate linear dynamic system. however, even though the concept of minimizing an objective function is very simple, the complexity of the controlled systems require advanced algorithms to solve the problem. at the early stage of model predictive controllers there were no sufficient computation facilities to realize complex optimization algorithms, so linear control algorithms were preferred [3, 9]. one example is dynamic matrix controller (dmc), because of the analytical solution to the objective function. with growing computation power more complex methods could be applied to solve nonlinear complex optimization problems in short time, and this way the non-linear model predictive algorithms could be born. model predictive controllers– theoretical basis mpc is a model based control algorithm where models are used to predict the behavior of dependent variables (i.e. outputs) of a dynamical system with respect to changes in the process independent variables (i.e. inputs). in chemical processes, independent variables are often setpoints of regulatory controllers that govern valve movement (e.g. valve positioners with or without flow, temperature or pressure controller cascades), while dependent variables might be constraints in the process (e.g. product purity, equipment safe operating limits), however it is not neccessary (e.g. in some cases temperature is measured but it is not a constraint). the mpc uses the models and current plant measurements to calculate future moves in the independent variables that will result in operation that minimizes the cost function and that satisfies all independent and dependent variable constraints. with the help of the fig. 4 the essence of the model predictive control is easily understandable. we formulate the objective function: min δu(k+ j ) (w(k + j) − y(k + j))2 + λ δu2 (k + j −1) j=1 hc ∑ j= h p1 h p 2 ∑ (15) where ∆u(k) denotes the change of the control signal, the hp1 and hp2 parameters are the minimum and maximum cost horizons and hc is the control horizon, which does not necessarily have to coincide with the maximum horizon. λ is a weighting factor, it is a 41 sequence that considers future behaviors, usually constant values or exponential sequences are used. w is the set point signal following the notation of fig. 4. figure 4: the essence of model predictive control generally predictive control uses the receding horizon principle. this means that after the computation of the optimal control sequence, only the first control action will be implemented, subsequently the horizon is shifted one sample and the optimization is restarted with new information about the measurements. in the presence of unmeasured disturbances and modeling errors the mpc controller can exhibit steadystate offset. one way of avoiding this is to design a disturbance estimator which gives the controller implicit integral action. the simplest method for incorporating integral action is to shift the setpoints with the disturbance estimates as depicted in fig. 5, where the corrected setpoints w′(k) = w(k) – d(k) are modified based on differences between the output of the system and its estimated value d(k) = y(k) – y′(k). figure 5: the imc (internal model control) scheme the scheme shown in fig. 5 is often referred as internal model control (imc) strategy. this disturbance model assumes that plant/model mismatch is attributable to a step disturbance in the output and that the disturbance remains constant over the prediction horizon. while these assumptions rarely hold in practice, the disturbance model does eliminate offset for asymptotically constant setpoints under most conditions. in practice all processes are subject to constraints. the actuators have a limited field of action as well as determined slew rate, as in the case of valves. constructive reasons, safety or environmental ones or even sensor slopes themselves, can cause limits in the process variables such as levels in tanks, flows in piping of maximum temperatures and pressures. all of this leads to the introduction of constraints in the mpc problem. usually, input constraints like umin ≤ u(k + j) ≤ umax, j = 1, ..., hc (16) ∆umin ≤ ∆u(k + j) ≤ ∆umax, j = 1, ..., hc (17) are hard constraints in the sense that they must be satisfied. coversely, output constraints can be often viewed as soft constraints because their violation may be necessary to obtain a feasible optimization problem: ymin ≤ y(k + j) ≤ ymax, j = j1, ..., hp (18) where j1 represents the lower limit for output constraint enforcement. because of the sequential solving method, some constraints can be implemented while solving the optimization problem. these constraints are for taking into consideration for example actual physical states of actuators or valves. these constraints can be defined as input constraints, represented by eq. 16-17. in this study the input constraint were introduced in the following form: u(k+j–1) – ∆u ≤ u(k+j) ≤ u(k+j–1) + ∆u, j = 1, ..., hc (19) using the fact that the value of ∆u is maximized. non-linear model based predictive controller non-linear model-based predictive control (nlmpc) algorithms should be applied in situations where the controlled process is inherently nonlinear, or where large changes in the operating conditions can be anticipated during routine operation, such as in batch processes, or during the start-up and shut-down of continuous processes. the advantages of non-linear predictive control include the following. ● manipulated and state variable constraints are explicitly handled. ● nonminimum-phase processes are easily handled. (if the prediction horizon is chosen adequately) ● knowledge of future setpoint changes is included that is useful for scheduled, coordinated operational changes. the main problem in nlmpc is that a non-linear often (non-convex) optimization problem must be solved at each sampling period in real-time. this hampers the application to fast processes where computationally expensive optimization techniques cannot be used, due to the short sampling time. several methods can be used to solve such constrained non-linear optimization problems. the most widely studied algorithms are described on [2]. using the sequential quadratic programming (sqp) method it is possible to minimize the value of the objective function, in each sampling period, varying the parameterized control signal values (u=[u(i)…u(i+hc)]) on the control horizon. hence the solution of the optimization problem is a control signal trajectory. the first element of the control signal trajectory is realized 42 in the next time sequent and the other elements are neglected. this is called recending horizon strategy. figure 6: the scheme of the non-linear model predictive controller model predictive control of a district heating network energy producer are compelled to reduce their rate of polluting emissions beside fulfilling consumers power demands with the lowest global costs. thus, technical, economical and environmental constraints have to be simultaneously dealt with. the optimization problem stated from this multifield area can hardly be solved as it is a non-linear programming problem, consists of numerous variables. the optimal control of district heating networks, for which propagation delays can not be neglected and mechanical and thermal losses have non-linear expressions, picks up all these harsh difficulties. managing a district heating network implies to assign values to integer variables (status of production units, status of pumps…) and to continuous variables (amounts of energy to produce). as a result, the optimization of the production and energy supply planning appears to be a huge, mixed and non linear optimization issue. however solving a non-linear mixed-integer optimization problem might have the ability to provide a control signal that may provide better performance than solving a non-linear optimization problem. in this work a non-linear sqp method with soft constraints will be introduced to avoid the complexity of mixed-integer non-linear programming. to take the different weights of the control variables into consideration the objective function is augmented with the absolute value of the control variables: ∑ ∑ ∑ = = =+ ++ +−+++−+ 2 2 1 1 2 1 22 )( )( )1())()((min p p p c h j h hj h jjku jku jkujkyjkw α λβ δ δ (20) it can also be important to define weights (β) for the error, the set points and manipulated variables, because the main task – keeping the manipulated variable equal to the set point – can be easily assured. this version of the objective function will be applied in this study. differences between the models with and without time delay in the case of the depicted (fig. 1) district heating network the possible control variables are: ● invested heat in production unit 1 ● invested heat in production unit 2 ● pump duty of p1 ● pump duty of p2 ● valve opening. since the pump p1 is chosen to compensate the pressure drop of the heat exchangers and pipelines, the p1 pump does not take part in satisfying the heat demand of consumers, so it is controlled by a local regulator. the split ratio between consumer 2 and consumer 3 can be adjusted using two control variables: valve opening and the pump duty of the p2 pump (as the pressure increase on the pump is the function of the pump duty (eq 3)). these control variables determine the flow in the two directions and thus the transferred heat to the consumers. comparing the model with and without time delay a main difference can be seen in the dynamics of the models. it is caused by the absent time delay. fig. 7 shows the difference between the two models (full line means the model without time delay, dot line means the model with time delay). naturally both simulations were run with the same inputs. in the initial moment there is no temperature profile in the network so the first 15 minutes show the temperature startup of the district heating network. after 15 minutes there is a step in the heat from producer 1. after the network is in steady state, there is a new step in the heat from the producer 2. in the 50th minute there is a step in the pump duty of pump 2 the last change in the inputs is changing the value of the valve opening in 63rd minute. these changes can be seen on the fig. 8. figure 7: transferred heat in model ‘a’ and ‘b’ model to the same input 43 figure 8: the input parameters of the district heating network related to fig. 7 from the fig. 7 it can be stated that the model without time delay can provide almost the same steady state than the model with time delay. the main difference is in the dynamical behavior. simulation scenarios the main goal is to satisfy the heat demand of the consumers. in this study the heat demand of the consumers is assumed to be known. it us to be tracked as the set points of the district heating network. to test the performance of the dhn the following set point trajectories were chosen: the set point changes are at the same time: at around 33rd minute and 60th minute. in order: ● consumer 1 (lower line) has 25000 kw – 60000 kw – 30000 kw heat demand ● consumer 2 (middle line) has 21000 kw – 55000 kw – 27000 kw heat demand ● consumer 3 (upper line) has 28000 kw – 55000 kw – 32000 kw. the main goal is to minimize the transition time as possible and at the same time fulfill the heat requirements of the consumers (follow the previously presented set point trajectory) considering to minimize of the use of the production unit 2 and the pump duty of p2 pump. this goal can be reached with minimizing the objective function presented in eq. 20. optimization model a contains time delays in the pipes: so the model and the process are identical. in this case it is not necessary to use the imc scheme, because there is no mismatch, and because there are no unmeasured disturbances. model b has no, so the plant-model mismatch seen in fig. 7 is expected to deteriorate control performance. because of this model mismatch simulation experiments will be carried out to test the performance of the mpc with imc scheme and without imc scheme. since the steady states of the two models should be equal the mpc was expected to reach the set point trajectories in both cases, but the dynamical behavior can not be predictable without simulations. simulation results control performance of mpc with a and b model the ise (integral square of error) criteria was chosen to compare the control performance of the two controllers (a and b model).additionally plots are used to compare quality of control. the set points are the same in all cases. the tuning parameters of model predicitve controllers are the lenght of the prediction and control horizon and the value of α, β and λ parameters (eq 20). to be able to compare the scenarios in both cases the same tuning parameters were chosen (prediction horizon: 4, control horizon: 1, sample time: 45 sec). the computation demand of the nlmpc controller is very high, since the sqp algorithm obtains gradient information via finite differences and the differential-algebraic model equations have to be solved for each perturbation. this solving method is very time-consuming and this is the reason why the tuning parameters of the nlmpc controller have not been optimized. control results using the ‘a’ model ‘a’ model means that the applied model during the optimization is the same as the model used as the operation process. thus there is no model mismatch is expected so there is no need to apply the imc scheme. the constraints are formulated like eq 19. the applied constraint can have serious effects on the computed control signal as seen the fig. 9 and fig. 10. analyzing the first transition: to assure a lower flow rate in direction of consumer 3 it was necessary to set the higher pressure drop of that section. to reach this goal infinite variations of valve opening-pump duty value pairs exist. by applying proper weight in objective function the biggest valve opening – the lowest pump duty pair can be applied. in the steady state of the system this condition is obviously determined. in the unconstrained case pump duty is decreased quickly to increase the pressure drop in the direction of flow, but at the same time the valve opening is set as high as possible – 100%. in the constrained case the controller handles the changes of these manipulated variables differently since it is not permitted to change them arbitrary. the increasing of that direction is handled by closing the valve and at the same time reduce the pump duty. closing the valve is a necessary action since the change of the pump duty is constrained. 44 figure 9: comparing the control performance of the unconstrained (dashdot line) and constrained (dot line) mpc figure 10: the manipulated variables regarding to the previous figure full line – constrained, dashed line – unconstrained mpc the quick and accurate control actions are not surprising since the most precise model was applied during the optimization, but at the same time this accuracy has enormous computational demand: simulation needs almost 8–10 hours to be finished. in the further cases only constrained mpcs will be described using the assumption that in unconstrained cases they would provide similar control action as it was recently shown. control results using the ‘b’ model using the ‘b’ model implies that the applied model in the optimization is not the same as the model used in as an operation process. for this scenario 3 different cases will be introduced: ● case 1: mpc without imc scheme ● case 2: mpc with imc scheme ● case 3: mpc, combination of the previous cases. case 1 – mpc without imc scheme here the control algorithm does not have any information about the model mismatch. the control performance mainly depends on the difference of the time delay. in the previous case this did not cause a problem since the model was identical, but in this case this requirement is not fulfilled. the control performance can be illustrated by fig. 11. as the fig. 11 shows, the existing model mismatch causes steady state offset, mainly detectable after the first transient. however this mpc has the advantage of avoiding any overshoot. the steady state offset – if it is converted to temperature difference – means 2–3 °c difference. since the same objective function was used in the optimization section in all cases – the same penalty weights were applied for the change of inputs – the control variable trajectories kept all the characteristics that were introduced in the case of using constrained mpc using ‘a’ model. the computational time was reduced to the half of the previous simulation, the simulation needs almost 3–4 hours to be accomplished. figure 11: the control performance of the model predictive controller in case 1, ‘b’ model without imc scheme 45 figure 12: the computed control signal corresponding to fig. 11 figure 13: the control performance of the model predictive controller in case 2 figure 14: the computed control signal regarded to the control scenario depicted on fig. 13 figure 15: the modified set point signal (by imc scheme) (full line) and the output of the network (dashed line) case 2 – mpc with imc scheme in order to eliminate steady state offset imc scheme is applied. after running a simulation using imc scheme, the following control result can be observed: in contrast to case 1 and simulation using ‘a’ model in this case some overshoot and oscillation occurres. a reason for this could be that the set point signal is modified with the error of the model and the plant fig. 15 shows the modified set point signal, which is the input of the optimization section and used in computing the minimum of the objective function. the oscillations are mainly caused by the absent time delay in the model and it is the most obvious during transitions. after the oscillations have died away at steady state there is no offset. case 3 – combination on case 1 and case 2 in this case an attempt will be made to combine the advantages of case 1 and case 2, avoiding overshoot and eliminating the steady state offset. to reach this goal the following strategy is applied: since the imc structure modifies the set point signals significantly during transitions, it is not advantageous to apply this scheme during the transitions. at the same time it is very useful to apply the imc scheme to eliminate the steady state offset. so in this case a trigger is implemented in the controller to switch on the imc scheme. the trigger is formulated with the following expression: 46 k n imeime ≤ −− 2))1()(( (21) where: me – the model error vector in ith and (i-1)th sample time n – length of the model error vector k – constant. so if the change of the model error is smaller than a previously determined constant, it means that the manipulated variable is relatively close to the steady state. if this condition is fulfilled the imc scheme is switched on and eliminate the steady state offset. by applying this method the following control result can be yielded: as the figures shows, this method can extract the advantage of imc – no steady state offset and at the same time exclude the disadvantage of imc – oscillations in the set point signal. figure 16: the control performance of the model predictive controller in case 3 figure 17: the computed control signal regarded to the control scenario depicted on fig. 16 performance evaluation of the different mpc systems in this section we compare the different mpc using a the integral of square error (ise), and graphical plots. additionally the control performance is examined in the point of view of settling time and the existence of overshoot during the control scenarios. furthermore we will explain the occurring differences. general comparison in this short section the controllers will be compared in some general aspects: ● performance index ● settling time and overshoot. performance index the integral square error (ise) is a measure of the control performance. it is obtained by integrating the square difference of set point signal and controlled variable over the time interval of the simulation. as the values of the controlled variables only known at sample times, the ise can be approximated with the following expression: ∑ = −= n i ii ywise 1 2)( (22) where wi means the value of the set point in ith moment, yi is the output of the system, n is the number of time steps. the constrained ‘a’ model provides the best performance in terms of ise. this is not surprising, since the controller uses the most accurate model to predict the reaction of the plant to a certain input. in cases that use ‘b’ model the controllers have worse performance because of plant – model mismatch. case 1 and case 3 has equal ise value, despite the combination of imc/noimc scheme. it is found that introducing switching strategy benefits only for consumer 2. settling time and overshoot next we consider the settling time and overshoot. in tables 2 and 3 the performance of the control scenarios is summarized. table 1 contains the ise value of the previously presented simulations. 47 table 1: comparing the performance of the applied mpcs by ise value ise (*109) consumer 1 consumer 2 consumer 3 mean % case 'a' model 1.7 1.45 1.6 1.58 100% case 1 2.54 2.31 2.72 2.52 159% case 2 2.52 2.12 3.14 2.59 164% case 3 2.56 2.27 2.74 2.52 159% table 2: comparing the applied mpcs by the existing of overshoot overshoot startup transient 1 transient 2 case 'a' model no yes no case 1 no no no case 2 yes yes yes case 3 no no no table 3: comparing the applied mpcs by settling time settling time (min) startup transient 1 transient 2 case 'a' model 7 7 9 case 1 11 12 13 case 2 25 28 24 case 3 15 15 13 analysis of the performance of the ‘b’ model the main advantage of applying this model – reduced computational time. next we highlight some important characteristics. because of the plant – model mismatch and the lack of imc scheme the mpc in case 1 can not reach the set point signal as it can be seen on fig. 12. to eliminate this phenomenon the imc scheme was applied. fig. 18 shows the result (for transient 1). as mentioned before, the overshoot of imc-mpc has been caused by the significant model error in the transients. taking model error into consideration is not a negligible fact since the performance of the model predictive control is a function of the model parameters, and model parameters can be the function of the time (eg. fouling in the heat exchangers can change the heat transfer coefficient). comparing the case a model and case 3 fig. 19 shows the difference of these two controllers. figure 18: graphical comparison of control performance of case 1 and case 2 controller figure 19: graphical comparison of control performance of case ‘a’ model and case 2 controller 48 figure 20: control variables of case ‘a’ model and case 3 the main difference is the settling time. the case 3 controller reaches the set point slower than the controller which uses the ‘a’ model. this happens because ‘a’ model and ‘b’ model have different dynamics (‘b’ model has no time delay). thus the ‘b’ model can reach the set point signals faster by the effect of the same input signal than ‘a’ model. that is why the ‘b’ model considers the transient finished sooner than it is realized by the operating process (‘a’ model). in steady state both models responsed with almost the same output (for the same input). to reach the set point signal without steady state offset the imc scheme switches on and eliminates the offset. summary in the previous sections detailed and general comparisons of the applied controllers was given. the case ‘a’ model was able to provide the highest accuracy that was confirmed by the lowest ise value and settling time. the most significant disadvantage of case ‘a’ model was the enormous computational demand that was reduced by using the ‘b’ model in the optimization. in case 1 it was observed, that a less accurate model was also useful for control purposes, however the performance was not as good as in case a, since there was a steady state offset and the settling time was higher than in case a. the case 1 controller had the drawback of the lack of the feedback of the difference of the model and plant. this feedback was realized in case 2 by introducing imc scheme. it had the advantage of eliminating the steady state offset of case 1, but unfortunately it accentuated the model mismatch in the dynamics. in case 3 the beneficial characteristics – eliminating the steady state offset caused by the model mismatch and avoiding the overshoot – of case 1 and case 2 were combined. this kind of solution could provide the most attractive performance. it can be difficult to predict the behavior the controller and the controlled system, compared to the case ‘a’ model. finally it can be stated that it is beneficial to use a model which is as accurate as possible but at the same time it is important to consider the fact that the computation demand is increasing with the increasing model accuracy. in case of plant – model mismatch the use of imc scheme can be useful since it can handle the mismatch and the effect of unmeasured disturbances at the same time. outlook and future work while designing the non-linear mpc framework it was very important to keep it modular, so changes are easy to implement. in this field the two most important characteristics of the control algorithms are: ● to have the opportunity to implement the control algorithm in the control system in a short time ● the ability of the control algorithm to provide a feasible control signal in a shorter time interval than the sampling time. for applying a non-linear model predictive algorithm it is very important to require that the optimization algorithm can find the (global) minimum of the objective function or at least a feasible solution in an certain time interval. considering that numerical optimization in each sequence can be very time consuming it is necessary to implement the methods which can reduce the computational demand of the optimization process. some possible approaches for this are: ● model reduction, which yield less states in the model ● applying the gradient of the objective function during the optimization. when it can be realized, these kind of control algorithms can be used widespread in the industrial practice as a real time optimization algorithm, regarding that the mpc algorithms can be applied in the advanced control level. ackowledgement jános abonyi is grateful for the support of the bolyai research fellowship of the hungarian academy of sciences. the financial support of the támop-4.2.208/1/2008-0018 project is gratefully acknowledged. references 1. benonysson a., bøhm b., ravn h. f.: (1995) operational optimization in a district heating system. energy conversion and management vol 36 (5) (1995), 297-314. 2. henson m. a.: (1998) nonlinear model predictive control: current status and future directions. computers and chemical engineering, 23, 187-202 49 3. marchetty j. l., mellchamp d. a., seborg d. e.: (1983) predictive control based on discrete convolution models, ind. eng. chem. res. dev., 22 488-495 4. mathisen k. w., morari m., skogestad s.: (1993) dynamic models for heat exchangers and heat exchanger networks, european symposium on computer aided process engineering 3 graz, austria 5. nielsen a. h., madsen h.: (2006) modelling the heat consumption in district heating systems using a grey-box approach energy and buildings 38 (2006) 63-71 6. ravn h. f., rygaard j. m.: (1994) optimal scheduling of coproduction with a storage. engineering optimization vol 22 (1994), 267-281. 7. sandou g., font s., tebbani s.: global modelling and simulation of a district heating network supélec, service automatique 8. sandou g., font s., tebbani s., hiret a., mondon c.: (2005) predictive control of a complex district heating network, proceedings of the 44th ieee conference on decision and control, and the european control conference 2005, seville, spain, december 12-15, 2005 9. shridhar r., cooper d. j.: (1997) a tuning strategy for unconstrained siso model predictive control, ing. eng. chem. res., 36, 729-746 10. søgaard h. t.: (1993) stochastic systems with embedded parameter variations – applications to district heating. ph.d. dissertation. technical university of denmark, institute of mathematical statistics and operations research. 11. subir s., kothari d. p.: (1998) optimal thermal generating unit commitment: a review. electrical power & energy systems vol 20 (7) (1998), 443-451. 12. weber c., marechal f., favrat d.: network synthesis for district heating with multiple heat plants, the international conference on energy and environment, ciem 2005 13. zhao h., holst j., arvastson l.: (1998) optimal operation of coproduction with storage. energy vol 23 (10) (1998), 859-866. microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 36(1-2) pp. 39-42 (2008) investigation of satureja hortensis l. as a possible source of natural antioxidants l. gontaru , s. plánder, b. simándi budapest university of technology and economics, department of chemical and environmental process engineering budapest 1111, budafoki út 6-8. f/ii. 1. floor, hungary e-mail: gontaru@vtp.rub.de natural antioxidants play important roles as health-protecting factors. antioxidants are also widely used as additives in fats and in food processing to prevent or delay spoilage of foods. spices have received an increased attention as natural sources of many effective antioxidants. in this study satureja hortensis l. (summer savory) was examined as a potential source of natural antioxidant compounds. for the isolation of the active components two extraction methods were investigated: conventional soxhlet extraction and supercritical fluid extraction. conventional soxhlet extraction was carried out with organic solvents with different polarities. supercritical fluid extractions were performed with neat co2 at two different pressures (300 and 450 bar) at 40 °c. to estimate the antioxidant activity of the extracts, 1,1-diphenyl-2picrylhydydrazyl (dpph) assay was used. the results were reported as ic 50%, where ic 50% was defined as the extract concentration required decreasing the initial dpph concentration by 50%. the antioxidant activity of the extracts obtained with organic solvents decreased in the following order: ethanol 50% > ethanol 96% > isopropanol > ethanol 100% > acetone > ethyl acetate > pentane. the highest antioxidant activity exhibited the extract obtained with ethanol 50% (with an ic 50% value of 14.48 ± 0.02 µg/ml), while the extract obtained with pentane showed the lowest antioxidant activity (with an ic 50% of 98 ± 0.1 µg/ml). the antioxidant activity of the extracts was also compared with the antioxidant activity of butylated hydroxytoluene (bht). the extract obtained with ethanol 50% showed approximately similar antioxidant activity as bht (with an ic 50% of 12.86 ± 0.19 µg/ml). although in the case of the supercritical extraction the antioxidant activity increased with increasing the pressure, it was lower than the antioxidant activity of the extracts performed with organic solvents. keywords: summer savory, extraction, antioxidant activity introduction recently the interest in natural antioxidants has increased dramatically due to: (1) concerns regarding the safety of the chronic consumption of synthetic antioxidants (butylated hydroxyltoluene and butylated hydroxylanisole), (2) the antioxidant efficiency of a variety of phytochemicals, (3) the consensus that foods rich in certain phytochemicals can affect the aetiology and pathology of chronically diseases and the ageing process and (4) the public’s conceived belief that natural compounds are innately safer than synthetic compounds and are thus more commercially acceptable [1]. herbs, spices and teas are the most important targets in research for natural antioxidants from the point of view of safety. satureja hortensis l. is an annual culinary herb belonging to the family labiatae. it is known as summer savory, native to southern europe and naturalized in parts of north america [2]. the leaves, flowers and stems of summer savory are frequently used as additives in commercial spice mixtures for many foods to confer aroma and flavour. this plant is also used in the traditional medicine to treat various ailments as cramps, muscal pains, nausea, indigestion, diarrhoea, and infection diseases [3]. besides, it was demonstrated that extracts from satureja hortensis l. exhibited antimicrobial, antioxidant, sedative, antispasmotic and antidiarrheal properties [2-8]. the objectives of the present study were first of all to select the plant material, and then to identify the most suitable solvent to recover the antioxidant compounds from this plant. in order to select the raw material a preliminary investigation on the quality was carried out. the antioxidant activity of natural extracts has been found to depend on the active components of the raw material, the type and polarity of extraction solvent and the isolation procedure [9]. in our study two extraction methods were compared: conventional soxhlet extraction and supercritical fluid extraction. 40 materials solvents and reagent for the laboratory extraction, co2 used was of 99.5% (w/w) purity and was supplied by linde gas hungary co. ltd. all other solvents (pentane, ethyl-acetate, isopropanol, ethanol 100%, ethanol 96%, acetone) used for the conventional soxhlet extractions were purchased from molar chemicals ltd, hungary. the ethanol 50% (50% water) used also for the conventional soxhlet extraction was prepared from ethanol 96%. 1,1pdipheny2-picryl-hydrazyl (dpph) free radical used for the estimation of the antioxidant activities of the extracts and bht used as a standard were purchased from fluka, switzerland. plant material four samples of dried summer savory plant (satureja hortensis l.) were bought from three different companies fitodry kft, rózsahegyi kft, biodrog-berta kft in hungary. in our work the samples are noted with savory 1, savory 2, savory 3 and savory 4, respectively. a preliminary investigation on the quality of the samples was carried out. the moisture content of every sample was measured. the moisture content decreased as follows: savory 1 (14.37%) > savory 2 (11.42%) > savory 3 (11.25%) > savory 4 (8.81%). for the characterization of the rubbed raw material sieving was performed using a vertical vibratory sieve shaker (labortechnik gmbh, ilmenau) for 20 min. the particle size of the rubbed raw material was approximately 0.8–1.2 mm. methods soxhlet extraction extractions with organic solvents of different polarities (pentane, acetone, ethyl-acetate, isopropanol, ethanol 100%, ethanol 96% and ethanol 50%) were carried out. samples about 15–20 g raw material were extracted in a soxhlet apparatus with 250 ml solvent, until totally depleted. the whole process took 22–24 h. after extraction the solvent was removed under vacuum using a rotator evaporator rotadest, type 2118. two parameters were measured: the yield% (w/w) (which was determined as the amount of the extract/100 g of dry material) and the antioxidant activity. every extraction was carried out in triplicate. supercritical fluid extraction the extraction experiments were performed in a high pressure pilot plant equipped with a 5 l volume extractor vessel (delivered by natex, austria). two extractions with neat co2 at two different pressures (300 and 450 bar) at 40 °c were performed. for each extraction about 1000 g rubbed savory plant was weighted accurately and filled into the extractor. the desired temperature and pressure were adjusted, and the co2 feed was started. the accumulated product samples were collected and weighed at certain time intervals. the co2 flow rate was measured with a micro motion rft 9729 type mass flow meter and it was about 7 kg/h in both cases. the extractions were carried on until the amount of the last product sample decreased for one hour under 0.1% of the raw material. a more detailed description of the equipment is given extensively elsewhere [10]. estimation of antioxidant activity by dpph assay to estimate the antioxidant activity of the extracts dpph (1,1-diphenyl-2-picryl-hydrazyl) assay was used. dpph is a stable free radical which is often used as an indicator in testing hydrogen-donation capacity and thus antioxidant activity. the dpph assay was carried out following the same method as reported elsewhere [11]. different concentrations of various extracts dissolved in methanol were added to 2.5 ml methanol solution of dpph. after 30 min incubation period at room temperature, the absorption was read against a blank at 517 nm using a uv/vis spectrophotometer m501 single beam – camspec. the inhibition of the free radical dpph was calculated in percent (i%) in the following way: i% = [(ablank asample)/ablank] · 100 where: ablank – is the absorbance of the control reaction (containing all reagents except the test compound), asample – is the absorption of the test component. results were reported as ic 50%, where ic 50% was defined as the extract concentration required decreasing the initial concentration by 50%. results and discussion selection of plant material in order to select the plant material for our experiments a preliminary investigation on the quality of four different samples of summer savory was performed. antioxidants are known to interrupt the free radical chain of oxidation by donating hydrogen from phenolic hydroxy groups and to form stable products, which do not initiate or propagate further oxidation [12]. the concentration of an antioxidant needed to decrease the dpph concentration by 50% is a parameter widely used to estimate antioxidant activity [13]. the 41 lower the ic50 value, the higher is the antioxidant activity [14]. the results of the extraction yield and antioxidant activity of the ethanol and pentane extracts are shown in table 1 and 2. table 1: yield and antioxidant activity of different samples of satureja hortensis l. extracted with ethanol 96% ethanol extract raw material ayield (%) aic 50% (μg/ml) savory1 28.96 ± 0.41 40 ± 0.1 savory2 24.83 ± 0.22 27 ± 0.3 savory3 17.92 ± 0.93 80 ± 0.1 savory4 15.27 ± 1.09 50 ± 0.6 amean value of three measurements ± sd (standard deviation) it can be observed that the ethanol extracts showed both antioxidant activities and the yields higher than the extracts obtained with pentane. among the extracts obtained with ethanol, the savory 2 extract exhibited the highest antioxidant activity (with an ic 50% of 27 ± 0.3 µg/ml), while the savory 3 extract showed the lowest antioxidant activity (with an ic 50% of 80 ± 0.1 µg/ml). in the ethanol extracts no correlation could be observed between the antioxidant activity and the yield. table 2: yield and antioxidant activity of different samples of satureja hortensis l. extracted with pentane pentane extract raw material ayield (%) aic 50% (μg/ml) savory1 3.19 ± 0.19 160 ± 0.2 savory2 3.51 ± 0.12 160 ± 0.2 savory3 2.27 ± 0.09 185 ± 0.8 savory4 2.44 ± 0.11 180 ± 0.3 amean value of three measurements ± sd (standard deviation) in the case of the extractions performed with pentane the extracts of savory 1 and savory 2 manifested a higher antioxidant activity (with an ic 50% of 160 ± 0.2 µg/ml) and higher yield than the extracts of savory 3 and savory 4 but less than the antioxidant activity of the same samples obtained with ethanol. it can be concluded that the best quality exhibited the extract of savory 2. this sample was used in our further experiments. in the attempt to increase the yield and the antioxidant activity, the savory 2 was subjected to the extraction with three different organic solvents in milled form and without milling. influence of the milling on the yield and antioxidant activity of different extracts of savory 2 is represented in table 3. although by the milling of the plant material the yield increased, the antioxidant activity decreased. therefore for the next experiments it was decided to use the plant material (savory 2) without milling. table 3: extraction yield and antioxidant activity of different extracts of savory 2 with and without milling ayield (%) aic 50% µg/ml s with milling without milling with milling without milling 1 26.91 ± 0.50 25.36 ± 1.07 35 ± 0.1 24 ± 0.1 2 25.77 ± 0.35 18.67 ± 0.90 60± 0.1 53 ± 0.7 3 11.48 ± 0.54 8.48 ± 0.44 90 ± 0.2 80 ± 0.3 amean value of three measurements ± sd (standard deviation) s solvent; 1: ethanol 96%; 2: ethanol 100%; 3: ethyl acetate. selection of the solvent in order to isolate the active compounds two extraction methods were investigated: conventional soxhlet extraction and supercritical fluid extraction. fig. 1 shows the effect of the polarity of the solvents on the antioxidant activity of different extracts of savory 2. 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 bht 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 solvent ic 5 0% (µ g/ m l) figure 1: antioxidant activity of different extracts of savory 2 and bht 1: ethanol 50%, 2: ethanol 96%, 3: isopropanol, 4: ethanol 100%, 5: acetone, 6: ethyl acetate, 7: pentane, 8, 9: supercritical fluid extracts performed at 450 and 300 bar, respectively at 40°c in the case of the extraction performed with organic solvents the antioxidant activity of the extracts decreased as follows: ethanol 50% > ethanol 96% > isopropanol > ethanol 100% > acetone > ethyl acetate > pentane. the extract obtained with ethanol 50% exhibited both the highest antioxidant activity (with an ic 50% of 14.48 ± 0.02 µg/ml) and the highest yield (34.67 ± 1.57 w/w) whereas the extract performed with pentane showed the lowest antioxidant activity (with an ic 50% of 98 ± 0.1 µg/ml) and the lowest yield (3.08 ± 0.1 w/w). the extraction yield of different extracts of savory 2 is represented in fig. 2. a correlation between the antioxidant activity and the extraction yield was found. 42 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 solvent y ie ld (% ) figure 2: yield of different extracts of savory 2. 1: 50% ethanol; 2: 96% ethanol; 3: isopropanol; 4: 100% ethanol; 5: acetone; 6: ethyl acetate; 7: pentane; 8, 9: supercritical fluid co2 at 450 and 300 bar, respectively at 40 °c supercritical fluid extraction was carried out with neat co2 at two different pressures, 300 and 450 bar at 40 °c. it was observed that by increasing the pressure both the antioxidant activity (with an ic 50% from 147.3 to 137.6 µg/ml) and the yield (from 2.23 to 3.02 w/w) increased. however, the antioxidant activity of the extracts performed with supercritical fluid co2 was lower than the antioxidant activity of the extracts obtained with organic solvents. the explication can be found in the polarity of the solvents, because the active compounds are usually polar compounds. since the co2 is non-polar solvent more non-polar compound can be extracted. more experiments with supercritical fluid co2 in present of different concentrations of a modifier are in progress in order to concentrate the active compounds. we assume that the maximum antioxidant activity was recovered with ethanol 50%. conclusions satureja hortensis l. was investigated as a potential source of natural antioxidant compounds. to recover the antioxidants two isolation methods, conventional soxhlet extraction and supercritical fluid extraction were compared. the best organic solvent to recover the antioxidant compounds was found to be ethanol 50% (with an ic 50% of 14.48 ± 0.02 µg/ml). the extracts obtained by using supercritical fluid extraction with neat co2 at two different pressures (300 and 450 bar) at 40 °c showed approximately 10 times lower antioxidant activity then the extracts obtained with organic solvents. to increase the polarity of the active compounds by using supercritical co2 a modifier is required. more extraction experiments with different concentrations of an entrainer are in progress. acknowledgements this research was financially supported through a european community marie curie fellowship (project mest-ct-2004-007767). for further information: http://www.cordis.lu/imprcong. references 1. dorman, d., hiltunen, r.: journal of food chemistry 88 (2004) 193-199. 2. sahin, f., karaman, i., güllüce, m., et al.: journal of ethnopharmacology 87 (2003) 61-65. 3. esquivel, m. m., ribeiro, m. a., bernardo-gil, m. g.: the journal of supercritical fluids 14 (1999) 129-139. 4. güllüce, m., sökmen, m., daferera, d., et al.: journal of agriculture and food chemistry 51 (2003) 3958-3965. 5. exarchou, v., nenadis, n., tsimidou, m., et al.: journal of agriculture and food chemistry 50 (2002) 5294-5299. 6. hajhashemi, v., sadraei, h., ghannadi, a. r. et al.: journal of ethnopharmacology 71 (2000) 187-192. 7. deans, s., svobova, k. p.: journal of horticultural science 65 (1989) 205-210. 8. madsen, h. l., andersen, l., christiansen, l., et al.: journal of food research and technology 203 (1996) 333-338. 9. cuvelier, m., richard, h., berset, c.: journal of american oil chemists’ society 73 (1996) 645-662. 10. simandi, b., deák, a., rónyai, e., et al.: journal of agriculture and food chemistry 47 (1999) 16351640. 11. blois, m. s.: nature 181 (1958) 1199-1200. 12. kouri, g., tsimogiannis, d., bardouki, h., et al.: innovation food science & emerging technologies 8 (2007) 155-162. 13. atoui, a. k., mansoury, a., boskou, g., et al.: journal of food chemistry 89 (2005) 27-36. 14. brand-williams, w., cuvelier, m. e., berset, c.: lebensmittel – wissenschaft und technologie 28 (1995) 25-30. hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 33 (1-2). pp. 81-88. (2005) constrained pi(d) algorithms (c-pid) f. szeifert, l. nagy, t. chován* and j. abonyi department of process engeneering, university of veszprém, veszprém, egyetem u. 10, h-8200, hungary, www.fmt.vein.hu, chovan@fmt.vein.hu majority of control algorithms used in industrial processes is pid or pid modification and many of these is badly tuned. the reason for this is that the physical constraints of the manipulated variable are neglected. the pid algorithm, presented in the paper, is obtained by inverting the standard pid twice and it is able to handle the constraints. the first analytical inverting step results in a proper pid inverse. this is then transformed into a state-space model. the statespace model is then inverted again by using the same method which is applied in globally linearizing control and taking into account the physical constraints of the manipulated variable. the constrained pid (c-pid) algorithm obtained this way is an anti reset wind-up algorithm which can be readily implemented. a possible design methodology is also proposed. at the same time, regarding processes with not higher than second order dynamics, the solution a rigourous model-based one. keywords: constrained control, pid algorithm, model-based, constrained inverse introduction based on different surveys, 95% of control algorithms used in industrial processes is pid or pid modification and most of these is badly tuned. the consequence is that the dynamic performance is poor and in the worst cases even instability might occur. correct tuning is made difficult by several problems which are at the same time the reasons for the gap between the control engineering practice and the control theory. only a few of these are: on the practical side: • dynamics of the process is known only roughly. • dynamic properties can change with time (valve sticking, wearness, etc.). • the algorithm of the used pid modification is not known (because of the intellectual property rights, the documentation are non-algorithmic-level and superficial). • for the above reasons the “academic” tuning methods cannot be applied. • industrial implementation of algorithms established in control theory encounters difficulties. on the theoretical side: • most of the methods, thriving mathematical accuracy, start form assumption which are not satisfied in practice. • methods built on idealized models are preferred. • physical constraints are neglected (involving the constraints, the inherently linear models become non-linear). • the methods “in focus” are favoured. the paper defines a constrained pid algorithm which can be readily implemented in practice as well as discusses the limitations of pid-based algorithms and the possibilities of model-based design. the set of pid algorithms in spite of the two decades of industrial application and the intensive academic research providing the *correspondence concerning this article should be addressed to t. chovan (chovan@fmt.vein.hu) 82 theoretical bases, chemical processes are dominated by pid or pid-based controllers [1]. the main reasons for this dominancy are the role of pid controllers in the classical control technologies, their position in the engineering curriculum, their availability in dcs’s and not at least the efficiency of their application. on the top of these, certain model-based techniques, depending on the process model, often result in pid algorithms and therefore can be implemented as pid controllers. still the research and application of model-based control algorithms are rather important, first of all, in cases of processes where the application of pid is not efficient. the study of model-based control algorithms is getting more and more intensive as the technological possibilities are opening. at the same time the model of the controlled process gains more importance in the analysis. the input of the pid algorithm is the control error ( ), the output is the control signal ( ), and its continuous time ( ) model is: e u 0≥t sd t i u dt tdetde t tektu +⎟ ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ++= ∫ )()(1)()( 0 ττ , (1) where di ttk ,, are the parameters (gain, integral and differential time constants) su is the steady-state control signal corresponding to setpoint )(tw design of the controller involves the determination of the three parameters, while the value of is often set to zero or sometimes to other constant (the i-term assures the settling without steady-state error). in case of more complex algorithms (e.g. for batch processes) the can be estimated more accurately: su su ),,(0 kzwffuus += , (2) where 0u is constant (in batch processes it can be used for initialization in the different phases) ),,( kzwff is a feed-forward term based on the setpoint and the measured disturbance(s) ( k,z ). in the process control systems usually different (i) modifications are implemented. transfer functions of the common solutions are the following: parallel pid (p-pid): ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ + ++== 1 11 )( )( st st st k se sug d d i pidp α , (3) serial pid (s-pid): 1 11 + ⋅⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ += st st st kg d d i pids α , (4) filtered parallel pid: 1 1 + ⋅= st gg f pidfpidf , (5) where ]5.0,1.0[∈α , constant ft is the time constant of the first order filter, it must be determined during the design. the above controllers are in continuous time. discretizing with an appropriate sampling time the corresponding discrete pid algorithms can be obtained. using a sampling time, orders of magnitude less than the characteristic time constant of the process, the discrete pid approximate the results the corresponding continuous algorithm with the required accuracy. the time constant for the great majority of chemical processes is several orders of magnitude larger than the (hardware) sampling time of 100 msec or 1 sec, realized in the process control systems. in case of relatively high sampling time, the discrete pid algorithms require special analysis. it is well known that in feedback loops, the zero steadystate error is maintained by the integrating term, therefore the i-term must included in most of the cases. at the same time, since the physical control signal is constrained, the application of the i-term can lead to saturation (wind-up) which is treated by different “backward integration” algorithms. pid blocks of the process control systems allow realization of a large variety of pid modifications by using different configuration parameters. this solution, however, makes the correct application of pid algorithms more difficult in itself, since it may require the specification further several tens of parameters above the three or four tuning parameters. model-based algorithms the fundamental problem of feedback control is that the effect of the actual control output – especially in case of higher order systems with dead-time – is delayed in time. the small change induces higher control output which ultimately can even cause instability. the mathematical model of the process allows estimating the future effect of the control output and this way determining the optimal output. the model predictive controllers (mpc) solving the optimal control problem over a discrete prediction horizon determine the optimal future values of discrete time control outputs. the first element is then realized and the calculation is repeated 83 in every sampling period. industrial application of mpc has two decades of history and software tools (e.g. rmpct) for considerably supporting the design have been introduced. mpc superposed on pid loops can be efficiently used, first of all, for multivariable (mimo) problems. in case of simple siso problems the performance of mpc is comparable to that of a pid, however its calculation requirements and implementation cost can be significantly higher [2]. one of the simplest model-based design methods is the direct synthesis technique [3]. its basic idea is that the dynamics of the closed loop is defined and the controller providing this response is calculated backward using the known process model. in case of simple process models, very often a pid variant, which can be readily implemented on any dcs, is obtained as a result. the results of the design for a few simple processes are summarized in table 1, where the closed loop is defined as a first order filter (with dead-time) and is the time constant of the closed loop. ct controllers applying the internal model control (imc) principle are very popular in academic studies. their essence is a feed-forward term containing the inverse of the process model. the control offset coming from the model error is corrected by feeding back the filtered model error. depending on the process model, often a pid algorithm, which can be used in the classical feedback scheme, is obtained in this case too. applying the imc method on the processes in table 1 and using first order filters, the same results given in the table are obtained [3]. investigating the results in table 1 it can be concluded that up to second order systems the linear-model-based methods also result in pid algorithms. it is well known too that a large number of simple chemical processes can be modeled as first (or second) order system with dead-time. these facts support the widely accepted experience that a considerable part of chemical process control problems can be solved by different pid variants. for systems with dead-time, the smith predictor which can also be well inserted into imc structures lives its renaissance. in case of batch systems it is practical to specify the pid algorithm by phases and often more complex solutions have to be applied (e.g. dual-mode control [4]). table 1 model-based pid algorithms direct synthesis or imc process model ckk ⋅ it dt 1+st k ct t t 0 ( )( )11 21 ++ stst k ct tt 21 + 21 tt + 21 21 tt tt + ⋅ s k ct 1 ∞ 0 ( )1+sts k ct 1 ∞ t 1+ − st ek sth hc tt t + t 0 ( )( ) hc tt tt + + 21 21 tt + 21 21 tt tt + ⋅ 11 21 ++ − stst ek sth investigating the results in table 1 it can be concluded that up to second order systems the linear-model-based methods also result in pid algorithms. it is well known too that a large number of simple chemical processes can be modeled as first (or second) order system with dead-time. these facts support the widely accepted experience that a considerable part of chemical process control problems can be solved by different pid variants. for systems with dead-time, the smith predictor which can also be well inserted into imc structures lives its renaissance. in case of batch systems it is practical to specify the pid algorithm by phases and often more complex solutions have to be applied (e.g. dual-mode control [4]). controller design the design of the control systems, in a broader sense, involves the selection of manipulated and measured variables based on the analysis of degree of freedom, sensitivity and dynamic behavior, as well as to select the control structure and method. more specifically the design means selecting the control algorithm and determining its parameters. this later, even now, is often solved by using classical methods (zieglernichols, cohen-coon, integral criteria, etc.) with appropriate computer aids and simulation tools. based on simulation, the optimal parameters of the controller can also be found by different search methods. there are known several modified versions of the classical techniques. model-based approaches (see e.g. table 1), starting from different types of models, derive the control equations using the techniques of the linear control theory and applying suitable approximations (e.g. dead-time: pade-approximation, nonlinearities: taylor-series). in this case the identified process model and the control rule determine the control structure and the controller parameters too; separate tuning rules are not needed. building in the identification of the applied model, in the framework of classical schemes (gain scheduling, model reference, self tuning), adaptive algorithm can be 84 constructed too. it is advisable to design the supervision of their operation in advance. in the controller design several practical problems emerge, making more difficult the efficient application of academic results. problems related to control valves, like hystheresis, sticking and nonlinear valve characteristic, are well known. since the problems of hystheresis and sticking must be solved by mechanical engineering techniques they are not considered in the design model. (their indication, at the same time is a model-based diagnostic problem). taking into account the strongly nonlinear valve characteristics is a prerequisite for the appropriate design. considering the practical controller design, an important element of the model is the allowable range of its variables, i.e. taking into account the related constraints. in mathematical sense, this changes the not constrained linear model into a nonlinear one and makes the detailed analysis more difficult (that is why it is often neglected in academic studies). a number of publication confirm that using adequate models containing the corresponding constraints, the model-based algorithms are more efficient than pid controllers tuned with classical methods [5]. constrained pi(d) algorithm taking into account the physical constraints on the control variable the saturation (wind-up) effect can be eliminated. especially in case of batch systems it is frequently occurs, that the requirement for fast settling generates such huge changes in the control output that cannot be realized. this may lead considerably high overshoots which prevent achieving good control performance. this was our main reason motivating the development a constrained pid variant. to take the physical constraints of the control variable into account, two consecutive inverting of a standard pid algorithm is applied, as follows: 1. the inverse of a standard pid is formed in the transformed domain. this can be solved reciprocating the transfer function. 2. a constrained inverse of the inverse pid is formed after converting the inverse transfer function (in time domain) into a state-space model. in details the following transformations are to be done. using a p-pid controller ( 0=α ) the starting transfer function is the following: ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ++== st st k se supid d i c 11 )( )( , (6) that defines an improper object. let us take its proper inverse: 2 1 1)( )( sttst s k t su sepid diic i ++ ⋅==− , (7) based on the transfer function, the inverse can be given as a time-domain input-output model: dt du k te dt det dt edtt c i idi ⋅=++2 2 , (8) let us transform the input-output model into the following input-output equivalent state-space model (using the ∫== e t xex i 1, 21 state definitions): uktx t tt dt xd cd i dd ⋅ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ +⋅ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ −− = 0 1 01 11 , (9) xey ⋅=≡ ]01[)( , (10) the state-space model given by eq.(9-10) is a proper inverse of a standard p-pid. the new c-pid algorithm is constructed by forming a constrained inverse of this model. to form a constrained inverse, let us consider the general scheme (fig.1) of globally linearizing control (glc) [6]. the idea is that an originally nonlinear object can be transformed into a linear one by a state feedback compensator. linear controller state feedback compensator process output map u y x vsetpoint + . . fig.1 globally linearizing control structure the order of the linear input-output model, where the input is v , the output is , is equal to the relative order of the state-space model, eq.(9-10). based on the linearization technique, the constrained inverse is formed according to the scheme shown on fig.2 [7]. the variables are interpreted in the following way: the input of the inverse is the setpoint ( ), its output is the manipulated variable ( ). let the relative order of of the state-space model, eq.(9-10) be y w u r . this means that the input of the process ( is not constrained, u is constrained) has a direct effect on the w r -order derivative of the output ( ). the not-constrained control output ( v ) is determined in such a way that the relationship between the setpoint ( ) and the controlled variable ( ) is defined by an rr dtyd / w y r -order linear input-output model. the time constant of this linear 85 model should be determined according to the time constants of the object given by eq.(9-10). relatively small time constants result in aggressive interventions; the control output ( v ) is often reaches the physical constraints (in this case u takes its minimal or maximal value). with relatively large time constants the system capacity is not exploited resulting in slow control settlings. constraint state feedback compensator u(t) x v(t) setpoint w process eq. (9) output map eq. (10) y constrained control output . . fig.2 formation of constrained inverse to invert according to the given scheme, the the output of eq.(9-10) is differentiated: u tk xx tdt dx dt dy dcd ⋅++⋅−== 1)(1 21 1 , (11) since the first order derivative contains the control output explicitly, the relative order of the inverse pid is one. hence the linear system can be defined in the following way: wy dt dytf =+⋅ , (12) substituting eq.(11) in place of the derivative, the value of the required control output is obtained (output of the feedback compensator): ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ++−⋅⋅= 211)( xxxw t tkv f d c , (13) the output constraints are treated as follows: ⎪ ⎩ ⎪ ⎨ ⎧ > < ∈ = maxmax minmin maxmin , , ],[, uvifu uvifu uuvifv u , (14) where is the physically allowed range of control output. ],[ maxmin uuu∈ summarizing the steps above, the scheme of the constrained pid (c-pid) algorithm can be constructed (see fig.3). initial values of the differential equations are set to zero error and to zero output difference. constraint u(t) x1 e(t) + ck f d t t sti 1 ck 1 1 1 +std x2 + + + + cku / 0 + . . . . fig.3 scheme of the c-pid controller applying a similar reasoning or the limit value a c-pi algorithm can be elucidated too (see fig.4). here the relative order of the inverse is zero. 0→dt constraint u(t)e(t) + + ck 1 1 +sti ck 1 cku / . fig.4 scheme of the c-pi controller the non-constrained transfer functions can be easily constructed and the following results are obtained: c-pid: 1 111 + ⋅⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ++⋅=− st st st kg f d i cpidc , (15) c-pi: ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ +⋅=− st kg i cpic 11 , (16) it can be seen that c-pid not reaching the constraints is equivalent to a parallel pid with a filter, eq. (5), while a c-pi to a normal pi controller. hence it is clear that taking the constraints into account don’t makes the basic algorithms more complicated. this fact has a great importance for practical realizations. design of constrained pi(d) algorithms to determine the parameters of a c-pid it is practical to describe the controlled system as a second order object. the scheme of the closed loop for the non-constrained case is shown in fig.5. 86 y w + .21 ss k βα ++ 1+st pid f u fig.5 non-constrained closed loop this is equivalent to the closed loop given in fig.6. y w + 1 11 + ⋅ ⋅ sts kk t f c i .21 1 ss βα ++ 21 sttst dii ++ fig.6 equivalent loop the framed part shows well that the controller compensates the dynamics of the process if the controller parameters are chosen according to the followings: βαα /, == di tt . (17) the filter parameter should be selected at the possible smallest value ( ) allowed by the measurement noises, and then setting the time constant of the closed loop to , the controller gain can be given by the following expression: ft 0→ft ct c c tk k ⋅ = α . (18) in the direct synthesis method the time constant of the closed loop is selected as a half or fifth of the time constant of the process, therefore the gain can be estimates as: ]5,2[, ∈= γγ k kc , (19) the two parameters of a c-pi controller can be determined also according to the above reasoning. testing of constrained pi(d) algorithms the c-pid algorithm was physicaly tested on an electrical water heating system installed in our process engineering laboratory. the p&i diagram of the system is shown on fig.7; its technical specification is given in an earlier publication [8]. the temperature of the water ( ) leaving the heater system is controlled by manipulating the heater performance ( u ). the flowrate of the water and its feed temperature are considered as non-measured disturbances. the dynamic relationship is chosen as a second order inputoutput model with dead-time that provides a structuraly adequate description. open-loop experiments were conducted in order to determine the model parameters. the parameters were estimated by fitting to the measured data using matlab (see fig.8). ty ≡ ]10,0[∈ yu → fig.7 the laboratory system for testing 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 0 10 20 30 40 5 time (min) te m pe ra tu re (° c ), co nt ro l o ut pu t ( v ) 0 fig.8 identification of the process model 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0 10 20 30 time (min) te m pe ra tu re (° c ), co nt ro l o ut pu t ( v ) 40 fig.9 simulation test of the p-pid controller mv water tin f t < heating pc < open close adam-5000 lan u 87 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0 10 20 30 4 time (min) te m pe ra tu re (° c ), co nt ro l o ut pu t ( v ) 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0 10 20 30 4 time (min) te m pe ra tu re (° c ), co nt ro l o ut pu t ( v ) 0 fig.10 simulation test of the anti wind-up pid controller fig.12 physical test of the p-pid controller 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0 10 20 30 4 time (min) te m pe ra tu re (° c ), c on tro l o ut pu t ( v ) 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0 10 20 30 4 time (min) te m pe ra tu re (° c ), co nt ro l o ut pu t ( v ) 0 fig.11 simulation test of the c-pid controller fig.13 physical test of the anti wind-up pid controller the c-pid algorithm was compared to a standard ppid algorithm as well as to an anti wind-up pid algorithm used in an industrial plc. the pid parameters are determined in each cases by the direct synthesis method based on the identified process model. in the simulation studies the mathematical model of the heater system was the process. the studies presents servo problems, however the load disturnbance compensation studies qualitatively showed similar results. simulation tests are illustrated on fig.9-11. fig.9 shows well that in those time periods when the control output approaches its physical limits, significant overshoots can be observed after changing the setpoint. overshoots can be considerably reduced by applying an anti wind-up compensator (see fig.10). fig.11 justifies that the c-pid algorithm completely eliminates the overshoot. 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0 10 20 30 time (min) te m pe ra tu re (° c ), co nt ro l o ut pu t ( v ) 40 fig.14 physical test of the c-pid controller the same tests were conducted on the laboratory physical system. the results are given on fig.12-14. the physical experiments illustrates well the effect of measurement noises, still the relation of the different methods is the same in case of the physical tests as it was shown in the simulation studies. conclusions in industrial applications several versions of pid controllers can be found. because of the physical constraints on the control output only those supplemented with anti reset wind-up compensators can follow setpoint changes without overshoots. significant overshoots can involve safety risk especially in control of batch systems. the paper presents the so called c 88 pid algorithm which takes the physical constraints into account and provides settlings practically without overshoots. the algorithm does not make the standard pid algorithm more complex and it can be readily implemented in dcs’s. for the c-pid design, considering the potential capacity of pid algorithms, it is practical to describe the object as a second order process with dead-time. in case of systems with large dead-times the use of a smith predictor is suggested that does not limit the applicability of c-pid. acknowledgement this project has been financially supported in part by the chemical engineering institute cooperative research center, iii-2 project. references 1. luyben, w. l.: effect of derivative algorithm and tuning selection on the pid control of dead-time processes, ind. eng. chem. res., 2001, 40, 36053611. 2. bódizs á.: study of model predictive control (in hungarian), ph.d. theses, veszprém, 1998. 3. seeborg, d. e., edgar, t. f., mellichamp, d. a.: process dynamics and control, wiley, new york, 1989. 4. lipták, b. g. (ed.): instrument engineers' handbook. process control, 3rd ed., chilton book c., radnor, pe, 1995. 5. nagy, l.: simulation and control of batch reactors, ph.d. theses, veszprém, 2005. 6. madar, j., abonyi, j., szeifert, f: feedback linearizing control using hybrid neural networks identified by sensitivity approach, eng. appl. of artificial intelligence, 2005, 18, 343-351. 7. szeifert, f., nagy, l., chován, t., abonyi, j.: constrained inverse model-based control (in preparation). 8. bódizs á., szeifert f., chován t.: convolution model based predictive controller for nonlinear process, ind. eng. chem. res., 1999, 38, 154-161. microsoft word toc_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 36(1-2) pp. 113-117 (2008) role of catalyst support (cs) in the growth of multi-walled carbon nanotubes (mwcnts) a. szentes , g. horváth university of pannonia, department of chemical engineering, h-8200 veszprém, egyetem u. 10., hungary e-mail: szentesa@almos.uni-pannon.hu since the first observation of carbon nanotubes in 1991, their synthesis by different techniques has been extensively investigated. several production methods have been developed aiming at the production of carbon nanotubes (cnt). main methods are laser vaporization, electric arc discharge and catalytic chemical deposition of hydrocarbons over metal catalysts (ccvd technique). this paper describes how to produce multiwalled carbon nanotubes (mwcnts) in pilot plant by ccvd technique. the aim of this investigation was to decide the intervals of reaction parameters with the most effective catalyst support on a large scale. the products were analysed by transmission electron microscopy (tem). analysis has shown the diameter and length of carbon nanotubes. key words: multi-walled carbon nanotubes, synthesis, ccvd technique, large scale production introduction carbon nanotubes (cnts) were discovered in the soot of arch discharge by iijima in 1991 [1]. carbon nanotubes are allotropes of carbon and members of the fullerene structural family. nanotubes are categorized as single-walled nanotubes (swcnts) and multi-walled nanotubes (mwcnts) (fig. 1). mwcnts consist in a variable number of graphene sheets rolled coaxially into a cylinder of nanometric diameter [2]. the interlayer distance in multi-walled nanotubes is close to the distance between graphene layers in graphite, approximately 0,34 nm. typical diameter of mwcnts are 10…20 nm typical length is above 20 μm. figure 1: swcnt and mwcnt nowadays carbon nanotubes are one of the most actively investigated materials. cnts are the most promising of all nanomaterials due to their unique electronic and mechanical properties which ensure themselves to a variety of applications, such as fieldemission displays [3], nanoscale sensors [4], nanostructured composite materials [5]. several production methods have been developed aiming at the production of carbon nanotubes in large scale, such as laser vaporization [6], electric arc discharge [7] and catalytic chemical vapor deposition of hydrocarbons over metal catalysts (ccvd technique) [8]. the first two methods are high temperature processes and can produce high quality nanotubes. however, the yields are poor and hence not adaptable for large-scale production. in contrast ccvd technique is a very efficient method to produce multi-walled carbon nanotubes (mwcnts) because this way could be a possibility to produce nanotubes at relatively low temperatures on a large scale at relatively low cost. this method is the most promising method to commercialize the carbon nanotubes growth. in ccvd method transition metals (fe, co or ni) supported on oxides, zeolite or silica are used as catalyst precursor [9]. the combinations of transition metals and supports can be changed depending on the characteristics required, for example the size of the tubes. bimetallic combinations of these transition metals are used for the synthesis of cnts and the relatively high yield and quality have been explained by characteristic behaviour of this alloy phase [10]. a very effective catalyst is a binary mixture co-fe. catalysts have been prepared by impregnation method using salts of fe and co. recently, several papers dealt with the mechanism of the formation of nanotubes. particularly the role of the catalyst support and the particle size of the metal have been discussed. the most frequently used catalyst support are silica, zeolites and oxides. the role of the 114 catalyst support is a difficult problem. reaction is influenced by interaction between the metal particle and the catalyst support [11]. if the interaction is strong, a metal particle does not budge from catalyst support. if the interaction is weak, a metal particle budge from catalyst support and growing of the tube starts from this point. due to weak interaction high quality and yield can be obtained [12]. during our investigation mwcnts were produced in a pilot scale equipment by ccvd technique. the aim of our investigation was to decide the intervals of the reaction parameters with the most effective catalyst support on a large scale. experimental catalyst and chemicals catalysts have been prepared by university of szeged, department of applied and enviromental chemistry. bimetallic catalysts (fe and co) were used with different supports (oxides, silicates). co-acetate and fe-acetate were impregnated in 2-5 w/w % on different supports. salts of fe and co were obtained from sigma-aldrich. reaction conditions were reductive in this way coand fe-acetat can reduce. as for the carbon source, a simple hydrocarbon (ethylene) was used. ethylene and nitrogen (as carrier gas) were obtained from messer. synthesis of carbon nanotubes simple hydrocarbons were decomposed in a catalytic reaction. cnhk → n c + k/2 h2 the scheme of pilot plant can be seen on fig. 2. figure 2: scheme of pilot plant after placing the catalyst (5-10 g) in metal reactor (5 dm3), the temperature was increased to 700 °c. during rising of temperature, carrier gas (nitrogen) flow was maintained through the reactor at the rate of 50 l/h. after reaching desired temperature hydrocarbon (ethylene) was introduced into the reactor at the rates of 10…40 l/h for 60…120 min. reaction parameters can be found on table 1. table 1: reaction parameters reaction temperature 700 °c reaction time 60…120 min amount of catalyst 5…10 g flow rate of hydrocarbon 10…40 l/h flow rate of carrier gas 10…40 l/h in our experiments the support material of catalyst, flow rates of ethylene and flow rates of carrier gas are the variable parameters for the controlled production of mwcnts because the morphology and the quality of carbon nanotubes depend on these parameters. the main parameters (reaction temperature, amount of catalyst, type of catalyst, type of hydrocarbons) were constant because these parameters were optimized in the course of preliminary research. the aim of our investigation was to decide the intervals of the reaction parameters with the most effective catalyst support on a large-scale. analysis the products were analysed by transmission electron microscopy (tem). analysis has shown the diameter and length of carbon nanotubes. outlet gas were analysed by gas chromatography system (gc). we followed up the hydrogen content of the outlet gas by gc therefore the end of the reaction and amount of formed hydrogen can be determined. results and discussion ethylene was decomposed in a catalytic reaction. formed carbon was analysed by tem and amount of formed hydrogen was analysed by gc. different experimental conditions (catalyst supports, c2h4 flow rate, n2 flow rate, reaction time) and results (diameter and length of tubes, density, conversion) are given on table 2. reaction temperature, type of catalyst, type of hydrocarbon were constant because these parameters were optimized in the course of preliminary research. the reaction temperature was 700 °c, bimetallic catalyst (fe and co) were used, source of carbon was ethylene. two different catalist support (a and b) were used in our experiments. conversion was calculated from amount of formed carbon and amount of formed hydrogen. these are equal. when support „a” was used, conversion was usually more than 70% in comparison with if support „b” was used conversion was fewer than 35%. density is a good indicator of quality of tubes and selectivity. carbon nanotubes have a very low density (~20 kg/m3) in contrast to other modifications of carbon (e.g. graphite: ~2200 kg/m3, active carbon 300…600 kg/m3). density was about 17 kg/m3 in presence of support „a” and about 80 kg/m3 in presence of support „b”. when support „b” was used a lot of amorphus carbon was formed (it can be seen from tem analysis). 115 hydrogen content of the outlet gas was followed up. it could be seen from fig. 3, fig. 4 and fig. 5 higher hydrogen contents were achieved when support „a” was used. when support „b” was used the reactions were finished sooner and hydrogen contents were lower than in presence of support „a”. 0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 reaction time (min) c on ve rs io n a40 b40 figure 3: hydrogen content of the outlet gas (a40: support „a”, c2h4 flow rate 40 l/h; b40: support „b”, c2h4 flow rate 40 l/h) 0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 reaction time (min) c on ve rs io n a30 b30 figure 4: hydrogen content of the outlet gas (a30: support „a”, c2h4 flow rate 30 l/h; b30: support „b”, c2h4 flow rate 30 l/h) 0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 reaction time (min) c on ve rs io n a20 b20 figure 5: hydrogen content of the outlet gas (a20: support „a”, c2h4 flow rate 20 l/h; b20: support „b”, c2h4 flow rate 20 l/h) the best results were recieved in presence of „a” catalyst support. the main parameters were optimized in the course of preliminary research. change of c2h4 flow rate and reaction time does not influence significantly quality of the formed mwcnts but conversion is influenced by them. highest conversion has been obtained when c2h4 flow rate was 30 l/h and reaction time was 90 min. as long as these determined parameters are used high quality mwcnts can be produced and high conversion (85%) can be reached. diameter and length of tubes were determined from tem analysis (fig. 6 and fig. 7). similar results were achieved in all reactions in presence of support „a” as far as the quality of the tubes is concerned. the formed carbon nanotubes can be seen on fig. 6. the quality of the formed tubes in a batch was more uniform. diameter of tubes changed from 10 nm to 20 nm. length of tubes was usually longer than 30 μm. in contrast, when support „b” was used (fig. 7) diameter and length of tubes were variable. diameter of tubes changed from 10 nm to 100 nm and length of tubes was shorter than 10 μm. table. 2: experimental conditions and results catalyst support c2h4 flow rate (l/h) n2 flow rate (l/h) reaction time (min) diameter of tubes (nm) length of tubes (μm) density (kg/m3) conversion (%) a 20 40 120 10…20 10…40 17 72 a 30 30 90 10…20 10…40 16 85 a 40 20 60 10…20 10…40 18 77 b 20 40 120 10…100 1…20 74 33 b 30 30 90 10…100 1…20 83 28 b 40 20 60 10…100 1…20 75 31 116 figure 6: tem images of mwcnts produced by support „a” figure 7: tem images of mwcnts produced by support „b” 117 the best results were recieved in presence of „a” catalyst support. the main parameters were optimized in the course of preliminary research. change of c2h4 flow rate and reaction time does not influence significantly quality of the formed mwcnts but conversion is influenced by them. highest conversion has been obtained when c2h4 flow rate was 30 l/h and reaction time was 90 min. as long as these determined parameters are used high quality mwcnts can be produced and high conversion (85%) can be reached. in one batch 50 g multi-walled carbon nanotubes can be produced in pilot plant. density of this product is 16 kg/m3, diameter and lenght of tubes are almost uniform, diameter of tubes are between 10 and 20 nm and length of tubes are more than 30 μm. conclusion using the parameters determined in this study high quality mwcnts can be produced and high conversion (85%) can be reached. in one batch 50 g multi-walled carbon nanotubes can be produced in the pilot plant. density of this product is 16 kg/m3, diameter and lenght of tubes are constant, diameter of tubes are between 10 and 20 nm and length of tubes are more than 30 μm. references 1) iijima s.: nature 354 (1991) 56. 2) biró l. p., gyulai j., lambin ph., nagy j. b., lazarescu s., márk g., fonseca a., surján p. r., szekeres zs., thiry p., lucas a. a.: carbon 36 (1998) 689 3) yumura m., ohshima s., uchida k., tasaka y., kuriki y., ikazaki f., saito y., uemura s.: diamond and related materials 8 (1999) 785-791 4) chunyu li, erik t. thostenson, tsu-wei chou: composites science and technology 68 (2008) 1227-1249 5) xiao-lin xie, yiu-wing, xing-ping zhou: materials science and engineering 49 (2005) 89112 6) guo t., nikolaev p., thess a., colbert d. t., smalley r. e.: ž. chem. phys. lett. 236 (1995) 419. 7) ebbesen t. w., ajayan p. m.: nature 358 (1992) 220. 8) li w. z., xie s. s., qian l. x., et al.: science 274 (1996) 1701. 9) hernadi k., kónya z., siska a., kiss j., oszkó a., nagy j. b., kiricsi i.: materials chemistry and physics 77 (2003) 536-541 10) kónya z., kiss j., oszkó a., siska a., kiricsi i.: phys. chem. chem. phys. 3 (2001) 155 11) siska a., hernadi k., kiricsi i., rojik i., nagy b.: electronic propeties of novel materials – progress in molecular nanostructures, xii. international winterschool woodbury (1998) 20-24 12) hernadi k., fonesca a., nagy j. b., bernaerts d.: springer series in material science: supercarbon (1998) 81-79 13) thein-nga l., hernadi k., forro l.: adv. matter 13 (2001) 148. microsoft word b_30_a_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 38(2). pp. 207-210 (2010) sensorless rotor position detection of pmsm for automotive application d. fodor, h. medve, i. szalay, t. kulcsár automotive electronic systems group, institute of mechanical engineering, university of pannonia egyetem str. 10. veszprém, hungary e-mail: fodor@almos.uni-pannon.hu, hunor.medve@gmail.com, ifj_szalay_istvan@yahoo.com, trovo.st@gmail.com for correct operation of the permanent magnet synchronous motors is essential the knowledge of the rotor position, which is usually given by hall-sensors, encoders or resolvers. the aim of the present work is to set up such a general motor model, which takes into consideration the anisotropies in the magnetic structure of the motor. keywords: rotor position estimation, pmsm motor model, model validation, sensorless control methods introduction the electrical drives can be found in every field of the modern life from the cooling fans in computers to the most modern electric tractions. most of the cases where a variable-speed operation was required, dc motors were used extensively, since the flux and torque can be controlled easily by the field and armature current. however, the main problem of the conventional dc motors are the commutators and the brushes. the commutators have limited capability under high-speed operation. a good alternative to the conventional dc motors is the permanent magnet synchronous motor (pmsm), which are widely used in industrial applications due to their high efficiency, high torque-to-inertia ratio, high reliability, low maintenance and longer lifetime [1]. position sensors are placed in the motor for accurate control. for position sensing hall-effect sensors, different encoder types or resolvers are used. the construction of permanent magnet synchronous motors yields the advantages mentioned above but they do not have only bright side. the position sensors have many drawbacks: they increase cost and size of the motor, the operating temperature range is limited and need some external electronic circuits to transmit the correct position. thus in space restricted applications, in cost effective applications and in hostile environments the necessity of sensorless operation is brought up [1, 3, 6]. in this paper slotless motors will be analyzed, which are high power small size servo motors. these pmsms cannot be ranked in any conventional group because the rotor is one block magnet. the other special characteristic is the absence of the iron core in stator windings, which results ironless stator windings. this is not a common motor type, so far sensorless control of slotless pmsms is not discussed in literature. modelling the pmsms electric drives are complex electromechanical systems. their power supply and their control are usually electrical and their output is usually mechanical. therefore the modeling usually is done only for the electrical and mechanical phenomena. but if the magnetic structure of the motor is important (anisotropies, saturation, hysteresis and the combination of them is not negligible) then it should be taken into consideration thoroughly. our sensorless method is based on these magnetic phenomena, so their analysis is very important from both theoretical and experimental side. geometrical model usually more than one coordinate systems are used to describe the motor geometry. one of these systems is fixed to the stator (α – β) and the other to the rotor (d – q). their origins are the same. the angular position of the (d – q) system in the (α – β) system is defined by the angle θ. the modeled motors have 3 phase windings. the phases and their parameters usually are indexed with a, b and c. by fixing an axis to each phase can be created the 3 phase or natural (a – b – c) coordinate system of the motor. this system is fixed to the stator as the (α – β). it is comfortable to define the (α – β) in a way which grants the equality of the axes α and a. 208 electrical model the voltage equations of the phases (the voltage reference point is the start point): (1) the flux in phase i can be dissolved to flux components that are produced by the windings and the permanent magnet. for phase a: (2) in the above equation фij represents the flux component in phase i produced by phase j, and фmi represents the flux component in phase i produced by the permanent magnet. the voltage equation of phase a: (3) the flux derivatives can be dissolved into products of inductances and current derivatives: = (4) the change of the phase flux component induces the following voltage component, which can be considered proportional to the actual rotor speed: (5) voltage equations for the phases: (6) (7) (8) the flux equation, which describes the relation between the phase fluxes and phase currents: (9) (10) in the development of mathematical background of the sensorless method it is an important task to determine the [l] inductance matrix and its dependencies on the other physical quantities, especially the rotor position. in the magnetic modeling one of the main goals will be to write the inductance matrix into a form which uses the magnetic properties of the motor. the inductance matrix is also important because it is the mathematical object which describes the relationship between the electric and magnetic parts of the model. mechanical model the torque equation of the motor: (11) in the above equation θr is the inertia of the rotor, mm is the motor torque produced by the phase windings, and the mt is the load torque. the ksωm product is the torque produced by the friction forces. the mm motor torque can be computed from the equality of the incoming electrical energy and the outgoing mechanical energy (pelectr = pmech): (12) (13) solving the above equation system yields: (14) magnetic model the most important physical phenomena were the followings during the mathematical modeling of the motor’s magnetic structure: saturation: the rotor permanent magnets reluctance is flux dependent. hysteresis: permanent magnets’ b–h curve is a hysteresis loop. anisotropies: the rotor permanent magnets reluctance and probably the saturation and the hysteresis are anisotropic quantities. an other phenomenon, that should be considered is the eddy current on the surface of the permanent magnet. for geometrical reason the motor model should be divided into two parts: � stator and air gap model � rotor model. stator contains the air core windings, the air gap between the windings and the rotor, and the external iron cylinder. the air gap and the air cores can be discussed together as a simple reluctance. the external iron cylinder, the air cores and the air gap can be modeled as constant reluctances. the stator windings are magnetomotive forces in the magnetic circuit. the rotor is a permanent magnet, which is a cylindriform object. the permanent magnet can be modeled as a magnetic circuit that contains reluctances and magnetomotive forces. first, is practical to model separately the reluctances and the magnetomotive forces to create a reluctance model and a magnetomotive model, and then connect them. supposing the rotor is perfectly cylindriform, the magnetic field of the rotor permanent magnet is symmetrical to the plane defined by the axis and motor shaft. it is assumed that inside the magnet there is no leakage flux [2]. 209 reluctance model hypothesis: the reluctance between two circumferential points opposite each other depends on the point pair and the flux flowing from one to the other. with other words, using the symbols of fig. 1, the reluctance rab depends on the angle φ1 and rcd depends on φ3 and both reluctances depend on the actual ф flux flowing through the permanent-magnet. figure 1: reluctance between two surface points of a permanent magnet cylinder so any φ angle and ф flux defines a r(φ, ф) “passing through” reluctance value, which can be dissolved into two reluctance components: (15) where rm(φ, ф) is the rotor magnet’s “radial” reluctance function, which defines the “radial” reluctance between the center point and the surface point in the direction of the φ angle, when the flux flowing through is ф. the reluctance between non-opposite surface point can be dissolved to two “radial” reluctances. for example, the reluctance between the points a and c, when ф flux flows through from point a to point c, is computed in the following way using the rm(φ, ф) function: (16) the above method has some error, which is greater when the difference of the two angle (in the above example the difference of φ1 and φ3) is smaller. if the difference is 120° (between the center lines of the phase windings) the error of the method is acceptable. the rotor can be modeled as reluctances connected in star using the rm(φ, ф) function, see fig. 2. figure 2: reluctance circuit of the permanent magnet rotor. (in the αβ coordinate system) the phase reluctances and their pins are fixed in the standing coordinate system. the value of the phase reluctances can change because the rotor can rotate. describing the phase reluctances with the rm(φ, ф) function yields: (17) complete magnetic circuit the motor’s complete magnetic circuit with the inductances and phase windings is shown on fig. 3: s s sma θ mb θ mc θ mc θ,φ mb θ,φ ma θ,φ ea t eb t ec t g g g l1 θ,φ l3 θ,φl2 θ,φ φa φb φc figure 3: the magnetic circuit of the motor the merged phase reluctances: (18) using the above reluctance components the inductance matrix can be determined. flux equations the фaa flux component, which is produced by the fea magnetomotive force in phase a: (19) the фab flux component, which is produced by the feb magnetomotive force of phase b in phase a: (20) based on the above equations, flux equations can be written for the other two phases and can be written together in a vectorial form that contains the inductance matrix: (21) 210 mathematical description of standstill position detection at standstill is critical in sensorless methods, thus it has high priority. during the measurement only one phase winding was excited through the star point of the motor and the difference of the induced voltages in the two other phases was measured. the two induced voltages were not equal, and the amplitude of the difference was depending on the rotor position. the results can be seen on fig. 4. the above voltage measurements prove the presence of anisotropies. based on the amplitude of the difference in different rotor positions characteristic curves can be determined which are periodic with 180°, thus cannot give the exact rotor position. using the previously presented formalism, the following relation can be written for the exciting voltage, current and induced voltages: (22) similarly to (22) the voltage equations can be written for the other phases. altogether six equations can be obtained, from these with current measurement three reluctance value can be defined in one specified rotor position. from these the rm reluctance function can be defined. to do this further high precision measurements are necessary. figure 4: u1: exciting voltage, u2 and u3: voltages induced in phase 2 and 3, δu = u3 u2, the difference of the induced voltages. the u1 exciting voltage measured on the left-hand y axis. conclusions according to the phase geometry the phase characteristic curves are shifted with 120° to each other, however they are not really uniform. all three curves have a period of 180°, which means that the angular position only by voltage measurement cannot be done. in that way only the line defined by the rotor magnet poles can be found, but the two poles cannot be distinguished from each other. the line mentioned above can be determined with a relatively small error (5°–10°). the developed mathematical model and formalism makes possible a general description of permanent magnet synchronous motors. the formalism fits in the notation used by the literature. the main goal, to prove the existence of the anisotropies and their measurability has been reached. acknowledgements the work was partly supported by tamop-4.2.1/b09/1/konv-2010-0003: mobility and environment: researches in the fields of motor vehicle industry, energetics and environment in the middleand westtransdanubian regions of hungary. the project is supported by the european union and co-financed by the european regional development fund. references 1. p. vas: sensorless vector and direct torque control, oxford university press, inc., new york, 1998. 2. ec-32-118891_08_en_164.pdf 3. t. kim, h.-w. lee, m. ehsani: position sensorless brushless dc motor/generator drives: review and future trends. electric power applications, iet, 1(4), 2007, 557–564. 4. j. persson, m. markovic, y. perriard: a new standstill position detection technique for non-salient pmsm's using the magnetic anisotropy method (mam); industry app. conf., 2005. fourtieth ias annual meeting. conference record of the 2005, vol 1, 2-6 oct. 2005, 238–244. 5. j. shanlin, z. jibin, z. hongliang, s. jing: a novel method of detecting for rotor position of a sensorless brushless dc motor, icems. international conference on electrical machines and systems, 2007. 8-11 oct. 2007, 797–800. 6. m. linke, r. kennel, j. holtz: sensorless position control of permanent magnet synchronous machines without limitation at zero speed, iecon 02, industrial electronics society, ieee 2002 28th annual conference of the, 5-8 nov. 2002, vol.1, 674–679. << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /createjdffile false /description << /ara /bgr /chs /cht /cze /dan /deu /esp /eti /fra /gre /heb /hrv (za stvaranje adobe pdf dokumenata najpogodnijih za visokokvalitetni ispis prije tiskanja koristite ove postavke. stvoreni pdf dokumenti mogu se otvoriti acrobat i adobe reader 5.0 i kasnijim verzijama.) /hun /ita /jpn /kor /lth /lvi /nld (gebruik deze instellingen om adobe pdf-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. de gemaakte pdf-documenten kunnen worden geopend met acrobat en adobe reader 5.0 en hoger.) /nor /pol /ptb /rum /rus /sky /slv /suo /sve /tur /ukr /enu (use these settings to create adobe pdf documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. created pdf documents can be opened with acrobat and adobe reader 5.0 and later.) >> /namespace [ (adobe) (common) (1.0) ] /othernamespaces [ << /asreaderspreads false /cropimagestoframes true /errorcontrol /warnandcontinue /flattenerignorespreadoverrides false /includeguidesgrids false /includenonprinting false /includeslug false /namespace [ (adobe) (indesign) (4.0) ] /omitplacedbitmaps false /omitplacedeps false /omitplacedpdf false /simulateoverprint /legacy >> << /addbleedmarks false /addcolorbars false /addcropmarks false /addpageinfo false /addregmarks false /convertcolors /converttocmyk /destinationprofilename () /destinationprofileselector /documentcmyk /downsample16bitimages true /flattenerpreset << /presetselector /mediumresolution >> /formelements false /generatestructure false /includebookmarks false /includehyperlinks false /includeinteractive false /includelayers false /includeprofiles false /multimediahandling /useobjectsettings /namespace [ (adobe) (creativesuite) (2.0) ] /pdfxoutputintentprofileselector /documentcmyk /preserveediting true /untaggedcmykhandling /leaveuntagged /untaggedrgbhandling /usedocumentprofile /usedocumentbleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /hwresolution [2400 2400] /pagesize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice microsoft word 1_r.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol 37(1). pp. 27-30 (2009) investigation of modified pib-succinimides in low saps engine oils r. sági1 , l. bartha1, j. baladincz2 1university of pannonia, department of hydrocarbon and coal processing 8201 veszprém p.o. box 158, hungary e-mail: rsagi@almos.uni-pannon.hu 2mol plc, hungary along with the ever stricter economical, technical and mainly environmental regulations new types of low phosphorus, sulphur and metal containing multifunctional lubricant additives are required for formulating so-called low saps (sulphated ash, phosphorus and sulphur) engine oils. in the greatest volume dispersant additives, mainly polyisobuthylenesuccinimide types are used in the formulation of engine oils. by structural modification of the dispersants with molybdenum and sulphur containing compounds advantageous complementary effects could be achieved along dispersant efficiency. various modified pib-polysuccinimides with complementary antifriction and antiwear (af/aw), viscosity-index improver and enhanced detergent-dispersant properties were synthesized and investigated both in base oil and engine oil compositions. the detergent-dispersant and the high temperature deposit preventing effects, thermaland oxidation stability, af/aw properties and seal compatibility were studied in fully formulated, low saps engine oils with reduced zinc-dialkyl-dithiophosphate (znddp) content. based on the results it was found that by using suitable additive concentrations the conventional dispersant can be advantageously combined or replaced with these new additives to enhance the properties and to reduce the znddp concentration level of the experimental engine oils. keywords: modified pib-succinimide, low saps, seal compatibility, antifriction and antiwear properties. introduction in the last decade environmental regulations have been the key drivers in the automotive industry. new emission standards and engine design changes lead to changes also in the performance of the lubricants. additional new specifications are being introduced that restrict the level of sulphated ash, phosphorus and sulphur content (saps) to minimize the impact on the efficiency of the exhaust after treatment systems. the challenge for the lubricants industry is to provide both extended drain intervals and fuel economy while also formulating after treatment compatible engine oils. since higher quality base oils (group ii-vi) have very low sulphur content, the main contributors of saps emission are the functional additives such as zinc-dialkyl-dithiophosphate (znddp), detergents and friction modifiers. to meet the new emission standards and the requirements of the engine oil’s performance levels, low or non phosphorus, sulphurous and metal containing additives with higher efficiency have to be developed and produced [1-4]. on the other hand, engine oil seal compatibility tests have become more important and severe in the recent engine oil performance levels (api ci-4, cj-4; acea ax/bx, cx, ex; jaso dh-1 etc.). in these tests different elastomers (standard refrence elastomers) are immersed into engine oils for a given time and at a given temperature. after immersion the changes of mechanical properties and cracks are determined [2, 5]. due to the higher soot loading caused by exhaust gas recirculation (egr), higher flame temperatures, longer drain intervals etc. engine oils are formulated with higher detergent-dispersant concentrations to maximize the soot handling. in general for a given polyisobuthylenesuccinimide type ashless dispersant a higher nitrogen content gives better dispersancy and soot handling but poorer elastomer compatibility. the balance between soot handling and seal compatibility has provided lubricant formulators with significant challenges over the past ten years, especially as seal testing has become a major part of the engine oil approval process in europe [2, 3, 5, 6]. not only the detergent-dispersant, antiwear (aw) and antioxidant (ao) properties but also the seal compatibility must be highlighted in case of low saps engine oils with reduced znddp content because of the well known interactions between ashless dispersant and znddp which can prevent seal damages [7]. in our experimental work molybdenum and sulphur containing pib-polysuccinimides were prepared and investigated in an sae 10w-40 api sj partly synthetic engine oil formula. the possibility of the totally or partly replacement of the conventional dispersant and also the reduction of znddp and its impact on the properties, especially ao, aw and seal compatibility were investigated. 28 experimental methods during laboratory screening tests the properties of the additives and the engine oil compositions were measured by standard and proprietary methods [8, 9]. detergent-dispersant (dd) properties: based on centrifugation and paper chromatography; spot dispersancy. high temperature deposit preventing effect: modified panel coker (300 °c al plate, 3x3 h). thermal and oxidation stability: ip-48 method (200 °c, 12 h, 15 dm3/h air). af/aw properties: modified stanhope seta four ball equipment (600 n, 1 h). seal compatibility: vw pv 3344 (s3a test-pieces from ak-6 fluoroelastomer, pre-ageing: 150 °c, 24 h; immersion: 150 °c, 168 h). materials pib-polysuccinimide (psi) type commercial dispersant produced by mol-lub ltd. was used as reference additive. molybdenum (mo-psi) and molybdenum plus sulphur (mos-psi) containing pib-polysuccinimides prepared in our laboratory and a commercial sae 10w40 api sj/cf partly synthetic engine oil composition were used in the present research work. the main properties of the dispersants and the composition of the experimental engine oils are summarized in table 1 and 2. table 1: properties of the dispersants properties psi mo-psi mos-psi kin. viscosity at 100°c, mm2/s 496.9 283.4 310.6 diluent oil content, % 50 50 50 tbn, mg koh/g 14.1 10.2 11.8 n content, % 1.0 0.9 0.88 mo content (xrfs), % 0 0.3 0.37 s content (xrfs), % 0 0 0.12 3 % additive in sn-150 vie 118 108 111 pdde, % (max. 100) 82 84 89 table 2: composition of the experimental engine oils composition, % ref g1 g2 g3 g4 g5 g6 base oils balance part package 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 psi dispersant 10.5 5.25 5.25 2.5 2.5 mo-psi dispersant 5.25 10.5 8.0 mos-psi dispersant 5.25 10.5 8.0 znddp 1.1 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.88 0.88 results and discussion the potential detergent-dispersant efficiency (pdde) of the experimental engine oils was found to be high (>80%) and similar to each other, so the concentration of the experimental dispersants and znddp did not alter this property (fig. 1). in case of spot dispersancy test, where the carbon black suspensions of the engine oils were treated at different temperatures with and without water, greater differences can be observed among engine oils. at higher experimental dispersant concentrations (8 and 10.5%) the efficiency slightly decreased because of their higher polarity. in case of 0.55% znddp, 5.25% commercial and 5.25% modified dispersant (g1 and g2) the efficiency of the reference engine oil was achieved. in case of high temperature deposit preventing effect the low saps experimental engine oils were found to be analogous to the reference oil which contained 1.1% znddp. both the thermal and oxidation stabilities are very important due to the reduced znddp concentration and thus the reduced antioxidant capacity. after thermal treatment the samples with higher modified dispersant concentration showed better stability than the reference oil while g1 and g2 oils had similar results (fig. 2). after oxidation test higher changes in the viscosities could be observed but these changes did not exceed that of the reference oil. despite reducing the znddp level by 20 and 50% similar thermal and oxidation stabilities were detected in case of the engine oils with modified dispersants. antiwear (aw) and antifriction (af) properties were studied by modified four-ball method in which the af effect was characterized by the final temperature (tmax) achieved at the end of the test [9]. the most important conclusion of the tests that the reduction of znddp did not cause additional wear problems because the complementary af/aw effects of the modified dispersants could compensate the lower level of znddp concentration. when the ratio of modified dispersant and znddp was higher (g3 and g4) better af/aw properties could be observed (figure 3 and 4). it seemed that additive competition on the metal surfaces played important role thus at higher modified dispersant/znddp ratio the molybdenum containing dispersant could build up more efficient friction and wear reducing tribofilm. the reduction of znddp concentration can cause seal compatibility problems due to decreased interactions between succinimde type dispersant and znddp which can cause fluoroelastomer seal damage. vw pv 3344 seal tests of the low saps experimental engine oils with reduced znddp concentration showed no adverse effects on seal compatibility (table 3) even if the conventional dispersant was completely replaced by modified ones (g3, g4). its reason could be their lower tbn and higher polarity which could easily interact with the other additives and thus the seal damaging basic amino-groups were blocked. 29 0 20 40 60 80 100 ref g1 g2 g3 g4 g5 g6 ef fic ie nc y, % (m ax . 1 00 % ) pdde spot dispersancy deposit preventing effect figure 1: dd and high temperature deposit preventing effects of the experimental engine oils -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 ref g1 g2 g3 g4 g5 g6 c ha ng e in k v 10 0, % after thermal treatment after oxidation figure 2: thermal and oxidation stability of the experimental engine oils 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 ref g1 g2 g3 g4 g5 g6 w ea r s ca r d ia m et er , m m figure 3: antiwear properties of the experimental engine oils 30 50 60 70 80 90 ref g1 g2 g3 g4 g5 g6 tm ax , ° c figure 4: antifriction properties of the experimental engine oils table 3: results of the vw pv 3344 seal compatibility tests properties s3a* ref g1 g2 g3 g4 g5 g6 test limits tensile strength, mpa 15.5 10.5 11.7 12.1 12.5 12.8 13.2 13.5 ≥7 change in tensile strength, % -32 -25 -22 -19 -17 -15 -13 ≥-60 elongation at break, % 395 248 285 291 312 321 328 345 ≥160 change in elongation at break, % -37 -28 -26 -21 -18 -17 -14 ≥-50 hardness change (shore a), points 70.2** -3 -2 -2 -2 -2 -1 -1 surface cracks no no no no no no no no no * original s3a test-piece (without pre-ageing and immersion), ** shore a hardness, not the hardness change conclusions modified pib-polysuccinimide type dispersants containing molybdenum and molybdenum plus sulphur were investigated in fully formulated low saps (0.55 and 0.88% znddp content) engine oils. based on the results of the laboratory screening tests it was found: detergent-dispersant properties and the high temperature deposit preventing effect did not decrease, thermal and oxidation stability were unaffected despite reduced znddp content, complementary af/aw effects of the modified dispersants could compensate the reduction of znddp, low saps experimental engine oils passed the vw pv 3344 seal compatibility test. in this way it can be supposed but should be proved by engine tests that the modified dispersants may open up an opportunity for formulating low saps engine oils with reduced znddp content. references 1. the guide to euro 4 emission standards and lubrication, handbook (2005) lubrizol corp. 2. mang t., dresel w.: lubricants and lubrication (2007) wiley, mannheim 3. canter n.: additive challenges in meeting new automotive engine specifications, tribology & lubrication technology (2006) 62(9), 10-19 4. eachus a. c.: it is not your father’s motor oil, tribology&lubr. techn. (2006) 62(6), 38-44 5. http://www.infineum.com/information/tables.html (visited on 31 january 2008) 6. rudnick l. r.: lubricant additives, chemistry and applications (2003) marcel dekker, ny 7. sarpal a. s., bansal v., sastry m., mukherjee s., kapur g.: molecular spectroscopic studies of the effect of base oils on additive-additive interactions, lubrication science (2003) 16(1), 29-45 8. kis g., bartha l., baladincz j., varga g.: screening methods for selection of additive packages for engine oils, petroleum and coal (2003) 43 (3-4), 106-111 9. bubálik m., hancsók j., bartha l., sági r., kis g.: modified test method for characterization of af/aw properties, 8th int. conf. on tribology (2004) proceedings, 198-203 hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 33(1-2). pp. 119-124. (2005) neumann boundary value problems with bem and collocation n. herrmann1 and v. karnjanatawee2 1institut für angewandte mathematik, universität hannover, hannover, germany 2dept. of mathematics, king mongkut university of technology thonburi, bangkok, thailand this paper is an introduction into the boundary element method (bem) with collocation to find the numerical solution of two different types of neumann problems. at first we start with the laplace equation and continue later with the heat equation on a bounded convex domain with smooth boundary in two dimensions. we will show how to transform the governing problem into a boundary integral equation which can be solved by dividing the boundary into a finite number of segments and applying the collocation method. we finish presenting an example of the heat equation. keywords: boundary element method, laplace equation, heat equation, neumann boundary value problem, collocation introduction let ω be a convex open domain in 2r with smooth boundary . consider the laplace equation: ω∂ in ω, ( ) 0=∆ y,xu ( ) ( y,xg n y,xu = ∂ ∂ ) on ω∂ , where 2 2 2 2 yx ∂ ∂ + ∂ ∂ =∆ and the heat equation ( ) ( ) ( ) , y t,y,xu x t,y,xu t t,y,xu 2 2 2 2 ∂ ∂ + ∂ ∂ = ∂ ∂ where ( ) ( ]t,t,y,x 0∈ω∈ with initial and boundary conditions, ( ) ( ,y,xf,y,xu =0 ) ( ) ω∈y,x ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ]t,t,y,x,t,y,xg n t,y,xu 0∈ω∂∈= ∂ ∂ by using the fundamental solution we will develop the boundary integral equation (bie) from the governing boundary value problem and will create a fredholm integral equation of the second kind. according to the fact that the solution of a neumann value problem is not unique the same is true for the approximate solution which we get by using bem and collocation. piecewise constant and piecewise linear functions will be used to form the ansatz functions which lead to a simple linear system of equations. neumann boundary value problem for the laplace equation let ω be a convex open domain in 2r with smooth boundary ω∂ . consider the neumann boundary value problem (nbvp): ( ) 0=∆ y,xu in ω, (1) ( ) ( y,xg n y,xu = ) ∂ ∂ on ω∂ . (2) it is well known that for two dimensions ( ) π ξ ξ 2 − −= xlog ,xe (3) is the green's function or the fundamental solution for the operator ∆, that means it is the solution of the problem ( ) ( ) 2r∈∀−−=∆ ξξδξξ ,xx,xe . (4) it can be seen that e is not defined at ξ=x , where e is singular. 120 boundary integral equation for we follow the definition of the distribution ω∈x δ, and with (1) and (4) ( ) ( )( )uxxu ξδ −= ( ) ( ) ( )( ) ( )(∫ω ∆−∆= ξξξξξ ξ du,xe,xeu ) the second green-gauß formula gives ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ω∈∀⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ∂ ∂ − ∂ ∂ = ∫ ω∂ xdu n ,xe ,xe n u xu ξσξ ξ ξ ξ .(5) there is no singularity for . therefore for ω∈x ω∈x we can compute u(x) by knowing the boundary data u(x) and n u ∂ ∂ on . we will refer to this formula as the representation of the solution ω∂ u(x) for . ω∈x our neumann problem from above gives n u ∂ ∂ on . we have to find ω∂ u(x) = g(x) on . ω∂ both integrals in (5) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )∫∫ ω∂ω∂ ∂ ∂ ∂ ∂ ξ ξ ξ σξξσξξ du n ,xed,xe n u and (6) are well defined for . but for we have a jump of magnitude ω∈x ω∂∈x ( ) 2 xu for the second integral : ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )∫∫ ω∂ω∂ω∂∈→ ∂ ∂ += ∂ ∂ ξ ξ ξ ξ σξ ξ σξξ du n ,xexu du n ,xelim xx 00 20 and so we obtain the boundary integral equation ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )∫ ω∂ ⎟ ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ∂ ∂ − ∂ ∂ += ξ ξ σξ ξξ ξ du n ,xe n u ,xe xu xu 0 0 0 0 2 (7) ω∂∈∀ 0x then we get from (7) a fredholm integral equation of the second kind ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ξξ ξ σ ξ ξσξ ξ d n u ,xedu n ,xexu ∫∫ ω∂ω∂ ∂ ∂ = ∂ ∂ + 2 (8) ω∂∈∀x where u on the left hand side is unknown and ( ) ( )xg n xu = ∂ ∂ on is given. ω∂ collocation method the integral equation (9) does generally not admit a solution in closed form. we will show how to solve such a problem numerically using the collocation method. given ( ) ( ) ,x,xg n xu ω∂∈= ∂ ∂ solve for the unknown dirichlet data u(x), ω∂∈x from ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ,dg,xedu n ,xexu ξξ ξ σξξσξ ξ ∫∫ ω∂ω∂ = ∂ ∂ + 2 (9) ω∂∈∀x the solution of (9) is not unique since if we replace u(x) by ( ) ( ) cxuxu += where c is constant then u is a solution, too. we need a compatibility condition so that the neumann boundary value problem is well posed: g(x) should satisfy ( ) ( ) ( )∫∫∫ ω∂ω∂ω = ∂ ∂ =∆= σσ dxgd n xudxxu0 (10) we use now the collocation method to discretize the problem. we subdivide the boundary into n arcs and call the midpoints of the arcs with . we take the ansatz: ω∂ n,,, γγγ k21 nx,,x,x k21 1xxn = (11) ( ) ( )∑ = = n i ii xaxu~ 1 χ where ( )xiχ is the characteristic function on and are unknown parameters. that means iγ ia ( )xu~ is a piecewise constant approximation to u(x) on . as collocation points we use the midpoints. this leads to ω∂ ( ) ( ) ( ) ,dg,xed n ,xe a a j n i j i j i ∫∑ ∫ ω∂ = γ = ∂ ∂ + ξξ ξ σξξσ ξ 12 (12) nj ≤≤1 these are n linear equations with the unknowns , so that we have na,,a k1 n × n linear system of equations neumann boundary value problem for the heat equation let ω be a bounded convex domain with smooth boundary γ=ω∂ in 2r . consider the heat equation ( ) ( ) ( ) , y t,y,xu x t,y,xu t t,y,xu 2 2 2 2 ∂ ∂ + ∂ ∂ = ∂ ∂ (13) ( ) ( ]t,t,y,x 0∈ω∈ with initial and boundary conditions, ( ) ( ),y,xf,y,xu =0 ( ) ω∈y,x (14) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ]t,t,y,x,t,y,xg n t,y,xu 0∈γ∈= ∂ ∂ . (15) the problem will be transformed into an integral equation by using the fundamental solution and will be solved by applying the collocation method in the same manner as for the laplace equation (1) and (2). boundary integral equation the well-known green’s function or fundamental solution for the heat equation 121 ( ) ( ) ( ) ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ ⎪⎪ ⎨ ⎧ ≤ > −= − −− τ τ τπτξ τ ξ t te tt,x;,e t x if0 if 4 1 4 2 , (16) is used as weight function to generate the integral equation ( ) ( ) ( )∫ ∫ ω =⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ∂ ∂ −∆ t ddt,;,et,u,u 0ττ τ τ ξxξξξξ where ( t,u x ) is the unknown solution of the heat equation, ( ),, 21 ξξ=ξ ( ),y,x=x 2 2 2 2 1 2 ξξ ∂ ∂ + ∂ ∂ =∆ ξ . let ω be a bounded convex domain in 2r with smooth boundary ω∂=γ . by using the gauss-green formula the integral becomes: ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )∫∫ ∫ ∫ ∫ ωγ γ + ∂ ∂ − ⋅ ∂ ∂ = ξξξτστξτξ τστξτξ ξ ξ ξ ξ dt,x;,efdd n t,x;,e,u ddt,x;,e n ,ut,xu t t 0 0 0 for ( ) ( ]t,t,x 0×ω∈ the left hand side of the formula has to be replaced by the famous jump relation if x is on the boundary. so we are led to a boundary integral equation for γ∈x and . tt ≤<0 ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )∫ ∫ ∫ ∫ ∫ ω γ γ + ∂ ∂ − ⋅ ∂ ∂ = ξξξ τσ τξ τξ τστξ τξ ξ ξ ξ ξ dt,x;,ef dd n t,x;,e ,u ddt,x;,e n ,ut,xu t t 0 2 1 0 0 substitute the given boundary condition into ( ) ξ τξ n ,u ∂ ∂ the boundary integral equation becomes ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )∫∫ ∫ ∫ ∫ ωγ γ +⋅= ∂ ∂ + ξξξτστξτξ τσ τξ τξ ξ ξ ξ dt,x;,efddt,x;,e,g dd n t,x;,e,ut,xu t t 0 2 1 0 0 collocation method we divide the boundary into n segments as shown. ω∂=γ let . γ∈=+ 1121 xx,x,,x,x nnk define ( ){ }101 1 2 ≤≤−+=∈=γ′ + λλλ ,xxx:x iii r where n,,i k1= . then is a polygon in ω since ω is convex. nγ′γ′ uku1 let jn′v be the outer unit normal vector on iγ′ , in,,i maxh γ′= = k0 be the step width in space and for n∈m m tk = be the step width in time and we get the time steps ( ,m). jkt j = k,,j 10= using collocation method the piecewise linear spline functions ( ) n,,i, otherwise x, xx xx x, xx xx x i ii i i ii i i k1 0 1 1 1 1 1 = ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎨ ⎧ γ′∈′ − ′− γ′∈′ − −′ =′ + + − − − ϕ are applied to space and the piecewise constant characteristic functions ( ) ( ] ( ] m,,j, t,tt t,tt t jj jj j k1 1 0 1 1 = ⎪⎩ ⎪ ⎨ ⎧ ∈ ∉ = − − χ are applied to time. with both we form the ansatz function ( ) ( ) (∑∑ = = ′=′ m j n i ji j i txut,xu~ 1 1 χϕ ) where u are the unknown coefficients which we have to find. j i at the time step p of segment i the boundary integral equation becomes xn+1=x1 x2 xi xi+1 xn γ γ' ni 122 ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )∫ ∫ ∫ ∫ ∫ ω′ γ′ ′ γ′ ′ ′ ′′′+ ′′⋅′= ′ ∂ ′∂ ′+ ξξξ τστξτξ τσ τξ τξ ξ ξ ξ dt,x;,ef ddt,x;,e,g dd n t,x;,e ,u~u pi t t pi t pip i p p 0 2 1 0 0 this is a system of linear equations. the coefficients can be written in short form as ( ) ( ) ∫ ∫ − γ′ ′ ′ ′ ∂ ′∂ ′= q q t t qi j pq ij dd n t,x;,e b 1 τσ τξ ξϕ ξ ξ ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )∫ ∫ ∫ ω′ γ′ ′ ′′′+ ′′⋅′= ξξξ τστξτξ ξ dt,x;,ef ddt,x;,e,gc pi t t pi p i p 0 0 the boundary integral equation at time step p of segment i is rewritten as: [ ] [ ] ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ + ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ −= ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ⎟ ⎟ ⎟ ⎟ ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎜ ⎜ ⎜ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ + ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ∑ − = p n p q n q p q pq ij p n p pp ij c c u u b u u b mmmo 111 1 1 2 1 2 1 which should be solved to get the solution. example as example we consider the heat equation ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ]10 2 2 2 2 ,t,y,x, y t,y,xu x t,y,xu t t,y,xu ∈ω∈ ∂ ∂ + ∂ ∂ = ∂ ∂ with the following initial and neumann boundary conditions, ( ) ,,y,xu 10 = ( ) ω∈y,x (17) ( ) ( ) ( ]100 ,t,y,x, n t,y,xu ∈γ∈= ∂ ∂ (18) where ω is the unit circle. forming the boundary integral equation and substituting the data given in (17) and (18) we get ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )∫∫ ∫ ωγ = ∂ ∂ + ξτσττ ξ ξ dt,;,edd n t,;,e,ut,u t xξxξξx 0 2 1 0 , ( ) ( ]10,t,y,x ∈γ∈=x to apply the collocation method we divide the perimeter of the unit circle into 6 segments and discretize the time into 10 time steps. with piecewise linear functions used in space and piecewise constant functions ( 61 ,,i,i k=ϕ ) ( )101 ,,j,j k=χ used in time, the ansatz function is ( ) ( ) (∑∑ = = ′=′ 10 1 6 1j i ji j i txut,xu~ χϕ ) where u are the unknown constant collocation points. j i then the boundary integral equation at time step p becomes ( ) ( ) ( ) 610 2 1 0 ,,i,dt,;,e dd n t,;,e ,u~u pi t pip i k=′′= ∂ ′∂ ′+ ∫ ∫ ∫ ω γ′ ′ ′ ξ τσ τ τ ξ ξ xξ xξ ξ so at the first time step we have the equation ( ) ( )∫ ∫ ∫ ω γ′ ′ ′ ′′= ∂ ∂ +++ ξξ τσϕϕ ξ ξ dt,x,,e dd n e uuu i t i i 1 0 1 6 1 61 1 1 1 0 2 1 k , where i = 1, …, 6 and ( ) ξξ τξ ′′ ∂ ′∂ = ∂ ∂ n t,x;,e n e ii 1 1 . this is a system of linear equations ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ∂ ∂ ∂ ∂ ∂ ∂ ∂ ∂ ∂ ∂ ∂ ∂ + ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ∫ ∫∫ ∫ ∫ ∫∫ ∫ ∫ ∫∫ ∫ γ′∪γ′ ′γ′∪γ′ ′ γ′∪γ′ ′γ′∪γ′ ′ γ′∪γ′ ′γ′∪γ′ ′ 1 6 1 2 1 1 0 2 1 6 0 1 1 6 0 2 1 2 0 1 1 2 0 6 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 21 1 16 1 21 1 16 1 65 1 16 2 100 0 2 10 00 2 1 u u u dd n edd n e dd n edd n e dd n edd n e tt tt tt m m l mm l l omm l l τσϕτσϕ τσϕτσϕ τσϕτσϕ ξξ ξξ ξξ ( ) ( ) ( )⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ ′ ′ ′ = ∫ ∫ ∫ ω′ ω′ ω′ 16 12 11 ;0 ;0 ;0 t,,e t,,e t,,e x x x ξ ξ ξ m . the quantities ξ ′∂ ∂ n ei 1 with ( ) ( ) ( ) ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ ⎪⎪ ⎨ ⎧ ≤ > −=′ − −′− τ τ τπτξ τ ξ 1 1 4 11 if0 if 4 1 1 2 t te tt,x;, t x i i e are ( ) ( ) ( )τξ ξ ξ τπξ − −′ −′ ′ ′ − ⋅−′ −=⋅ ′∂ ∂ = ∂ ∂ 1 2 4 2 1 11 8 tiii i e t e n e xξnxξ n . the term ( ) ξξ ′⋅−′ nx i can be shown in the picture below ix y jx 1+jxξ′ ξ ′n 123 it is clear that ( ) ( ) ( )( ) ξξ ξξ ′′ ⋅−′+−=⋅−′ nn yxyx ii ji dxy =−= . jd are constant. then the elements of the coefficient matrix of above system are ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )∫ ∫ ∫ ∫∫ ∫ γ′ ′ − −′ − γ′ ′ − −′ − − γ′∪γ′ ′ − − − −= ∂ ∂ −− j i j i jj t j t x j t j t x j t j i dde t d dde t d dd n e 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 0 4 1 0 4 1 1 0 1 8 8 ξ τ ξ ξ τ ξ ξ στϕ τπ στϕ τπ τσϕ . we integrate analytically with respect to the time variable and get ∫ ∫∫ ∫ γ′ ′ −′ − γ′ ′ −′ − − γ′∪γ′ ′ −′ − −′ −= ∂ ∂ −− j i j i jj de x d de x d dd n e j t x i j j t x i j t j i ξ ξ ξ ξ ξ σϕ ξπ σϕ ξπ τσϕ 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 4 2 4 2 1 0 1 2 2 . we calculate each term numerically and obtain the system of linear equations ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ = ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ 3282980 3282980 3282980 3282980 3282980 3282980 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 . . . . . . u u u u u u a ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ = 0.50020200.000490000200.00049002020 0020200.50020200.000490000200.00049 0.000490020200.50020200.00049000020 0000200.000490020200.50020200.00049 0.000490000200.0004900202050002020 0020200.000490000200.000490020200.5 ... ... ... ... .... ... a the solution of the first time step is ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ = ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ 650050 650050 650050 650050 650050 650050 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 . . . . . . u u u u u u conclusions as shown in this paper the boundary element method (bem) can be applied to elliptic and parabolic differential equations. the benefit of the method compared to conventional methods such as finite different and finite element method is the reduction of dimension of the problem by one since the bem deals only with the corresponding boundary integral equation. moreover for applying the collocation method the unknown trial or ansatz function can be formed by simple functions i.e. piecewise constant and piecewise linear functions. however the disadvantage of the method is the knowledge of the fundamental solution. so its application is limited to linear differential equations symbols pq ij pq ij pq ij c,b,a parameters h space step k time step i, j index parameters m number of time intervals n number elements jnv unit normal vector p, q time parameters t time variable ( )t,y,xu solution n iu collocation parameters x, y space variable x space vector greek letters α a constant χ, ϕ trial function γ boundary of the domain γ' polygonal boundary ξ, τ integral variable ω domain ω' polygonal domain references 1. brebria c.a. and walker s.: boundary element techniques in engineering, newnes butterworths, london, 1980 2. costabel m.: boundary integral operators for the heat equation, integral equations operatortheory, 1990, vol.13, 498 552 3. costabel m., stephan e.p. :., on the convergence of collocation methods for boundary integral equations on polygons, mathematics of computation, 1987, vol.49, 461 -478 4. costabel m., onishi k., wendland w. l.: boundary element collocation method for the neumann problem of the heat equation, academic press inc., 1987 5. dyck u.: randelement-lösungen für die wärmeleitungsgleichung, master thesis in mathematics, hannover university, germany, 1992 6. friedman a.: partial differential equations of parabolic type, prentice hall. inc., 1964 7. herrmann n.: bem with collocation for the heat equation with neumann and mixed boundary 124 values, ams contemporary mathematics, 2002, vol.295, 265 277 8. herrmann n.: improved method for solving the heat equation with bem and collocation, ams contemporary mathematics, 2003, vol.329, 165 174 9. herrmann n.: time discretization of linear parabolic problems, hungarian journal of industrial chemistry, 1991, vol.19, 275 281 10. herrmann n.: numerical problems in determining pore-size distribution in porous material, workshop at the university of budapest, invited lecture, 1995 11. herrmann n., siefer j., stephan e.p., and wagner r., mathematik und umwelt, edition univ. hannover, theodor oppermann verlag, hannover, 1994 12. herrmann n. and stephan e.p., fem und bem einführung, eigendruck inst. f. angew. math., univ. hannover, 1991 13. iso y.: convergence of boundary element solutions for the heat equation, journal of computational and applied mathematics, 1991, vol.38, 201 – 209 microsoft word content.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 40 (2) pp. 69–75 (2012) effect of a new type of coupling agent on the mechanical properties of various multi-walled carbon nanotube/rubber composites cs. varga1 , b. tóth1, p. gergó1, l. bartha1 1university of pannonia, institutional department of mol hydrocarbon and coal processing, 10 egyetem str., 8200 veszprém, hungary e-mail: vcsilla@almos.uni-pannon.hu in our experimental work application of carbon nanotubes in rubbers have been investigated. the effects of the type of the rubber matrix, the concentration of the carbon nanotubes and the effects of a coupling agent on the mechanical properties of the composites have been studied. the strength of the rubber matrix had great influence on the strengthening behaviour of the carbon nanotubes. by application of surface treated carbon nanotubes the strength of the composites made from a rubber matrix having the tensile strength under 10 mpa could be improved by 35%. however, the composites from the rubber with higher tensile strength contained treated carbon nanotubes afforded balanced performance against fatigue stresses probably due to the effect of the coupling agent and the homogenous distribution of the carbon nanotubes. introduction rubbers reinforced with carbon black (cb) are used for numerous industrial applications, such as vibrationresistant structures, electromagnetic interface (emi) shielding materials, antistatic devices, etc. [1–4]. cb improves the mechanical properties (modulus and strength) of the rubber due to the interactions among the fillers and the fillers and the other components of the rubber. the cb particles were proven to form aggregates because of the strong bonding effects to each other. a part of the rubber is encapsulated in those aggregates because of the branched structures of the latter one and is shielded from macroscopic deformations [1]. small domain size is required for effective reinforcement. on the one hand only branched structures small enough (< 50 nm) can be trapped and thereby achieved a strongly bonded system, and on the other hand only the adequately small domains have high surface activity [1, 2]. in the last two decades researches focused on to substitute cb with another fillers (eg. caolin, sepiolite, sio2, zinc-disorbate, titania) also having reinforcing effects [4–6] and also on to reduce the particle size of the cb to improve their dispersion in the rubber matrix [2]. in the former step modification of the surface of the fillers had to be also solved because they are incompatible with the most organic matrices, therefore, coupling agents were being used [5, 7]. the fillers for substitution of cb like sio2 have been spread in the recent years especially due to the higher demand for non-black applications [7–11]. several solutions have been developed in the cb/rubber research area: as two step grinding technology, application of dispersants or coupling agents, pre-treatment of the carbon surface or chemical modification of the elastomer chains, moreover distribution of the cb in a latex solution instead of solid mixing [2]. not much significant improvements were achieved by the first three solutions. in case of the latter one the modification of the cb surface represented the largest difficulty in order to disperse them homogeneously in the water solution of latex [4, 12]. application of cb has been still significant because besides it can increase the strength of the vulcanized rubber; it also has a positive effect on the optical and electrical properties, and reduces production cost [3]. application of carbon nanotubes (cnt) may represent a breakthrough in rubber matrices either but only small quantities have been introduced because of their relatively high price. furthermore, by dispersion of the cnt arisen the same problems like the cb due to the high surface charge [13,114]. a lot of papers were published about cnt/epoxy and cnt/thermoplastic composites but only a very few about cnt/elastomers [4, 8, 15–18]. the most exciting challenge in the area of cnt containing composites was to solve the proportional dispersion of the cnt because absence of a well-homogenized morphology the distinguished mechanical improvements of the reinforcement can not be achieved in elastomers either. e.g. das and co-workers [19] used untreated and modified multi-walled carbon nanotubes (mwcnt) in a blend of styrene-butadiene rubber (sbr) and butadiene rubber (br) with 50/50 ratio. hydroxyl-groups were enacted to the surface of the modified mwcnt (nanocyl®3153), and bis(triethoxy-silylpropyl)tetrasulfone was applied as the coupling agent for bonding to the rubber. composites were manufactured by a two-roller mill and a stabilized non-ionic surfactant/ethanol solution was 70 used for mwcnt-treating. the coupling agent was applied in 2.5% related to the mass of the rubber. strength of composites containing 5% mwcnt could be enhanced from 1mpa to 4.5 mpa. the new process with the ethanol solution was more effective then other traditional methods in the given concentration range. similar properties were obtained by mwcnts having hydroxyl-groups. application of a silane type coupling agent did not significantly affect the mechanical properties. our research has been directed to the application of mwcnt in rubbers. the mwcnt has the same favourable effect in the point of view of the mechanical properties [20–22] as cb, and moreover by introduction of a proper coupling agent strong interaction can be established between the mwcnts and the rubber. as mwcnts have excellent mechanical properties they should have better strengthening effect than cb has. if mechanical properties of rubber composites can be improved to a large extent enough then the cost reduction can become less important. for the surface treatment of mwcnt an olefinmaleic-anhydride copolymer based coupling agent has been applied [24]. not only the possible effects of the coupling agent but also effects of the mechanical properties of the initial rubber matrix as raw material have also been investigated in mwcnt/rubber composites. 2. experimental 2.1. materials multi-walled carbon nanotubes (mwcnt) were produced at 700°c by chemical vapor deposition (cvd) process over fe-co bimetallic catalyst at the institutional department of chemical engineering (institute of chemical and process engineering, university of pannonia). purity of mwcnt was higher than 90 wt%, the diameter was between 10 nm and 20 nm, the average length was above 30 μm. natural rubber (nr) and styrene-butadiene rubber (sbr) based (r-i and rii) and nitrile-butadiene rubber (nbr) (acn content: 45%, mooney viscosity, 100°c: 60) based blends (riii) were used as matrix material. h n ch2 o o ch r2 o o ch2 ch3 ch3 n o ch2 o o r1 ch r2 o o ch2 ch3 ch3 k l m ch2 ch3 oh o ch2 ch3 o ch2 ch3 nh ch2 ch3 a a b b figure 1: structure of the ester-amide-imide derivative of the experimental olefin-maleic-anhydride copolymer (r1: alkyl group with length of the olefinic monomer (c16-c18); r2: alkyl group with r1-2 carbon number; a: 3-40, b: 3-32; k: 0,2-2; l: 1-7; m: 1-7 and n: 0,3-2) the coupling agent was produced at the institutional department of mol hydrocarbon and coal processing (institute of chemical and process engineering, university of pannonia) that was an ester-amide derivative of an experimental olefin-maleic-anhydride copolymer (figure 1). 2.2. preparation of composites compounds were prepared by a milling process. a tworoller mill was applied also for mixing the carbon nanotubes into the basic mixture of rubber. sheets of the mixtures were compression moulded at 180°c for 5 minutes vulcanization time. dog-bone samples for mechanical testing were cut from the sheets. compositions of the samples were given in table 1. table 1: composition of the different mwcnt/rubber composites sample rubber matrix type mwcnt content, wt% coupling agent, wt% c-1 r-i 0 c-2 r-i 1.0 c-3 r-i 1.0 0.2 c-4 r-ii 0 c-5 r-ii 1.0 c-6 r-ii 1.0 0.2 c-7 r-iii 0 c-8 r-iii 1.0 c-9 r-iii 1.0 0.2 c-10 r-iii 1.5 c-11 r-iii 2.4 c-12 r-iii 2.4 0.5 effects of the coupling agent were also studied by application with an experimental treating method developed for surface treating of mwcnts for pp [24]. surface of mwcnt was covered by the coupling agent from the hydrocarbon solution of the additive with stirring the mixture for 1 hour at 60°c then the solvent was distilled out. treated mwcnts were then dried at 110°c for 2 hours and were mixed into the basic mixture of rubber by a two-roller mill. r-i and r-ii matrices were nr and sbr based blends with lower and medium mechanical strength, riii matrix was an nbr based one with high mechanical strength. thus effects of the type of the rubber were also studied on the properties of the composites. mwcnts were applied in untreated and in treated form in order to investigate the influence of the coupling agent either. 2.3. measurement of tensile properties to determine the tensile and fatigue tensile properties (mainly stress, modulus and extension) (msz en iso 527-1-4:1999) an instron 3345 universal tensile 71 testing machine was used. the temperature in the laboratory was 23°c and the relative humidity was 50% during the mechanical tests which were carried out at 90 mm/min crosshead-speed both in case of tensile and fatigue tensile tests. structural information about the developed coupling agent was obtained by infrared technique with a tensor 27 type ftir1, illumination: sic globar light, detector: rt-dlatgs type) in the 400-4000 cm-1 wavenumber range. scanning electron microscopy (sem) was used to study the structure of fractured faces of the specimens and to follow the possible interaction between the reinforcements and the matrices. the applied apparatus was a phillips xl30 esem instrument. 3. results and discussion discussion of the results was divided into three parts. on the first hand effects of the type of the rubber matrix were detailed then on the second hand effects of the mwcnt concentration and finally the effects of the coupling agent were demonstrated. 3.1. effect of the change in the rubber matrix on the tensile properties in the present work effects of multi-walled carbon nanotubes (mwcnt) in three rubber matrices (signed as r-i, r-ii, r-iii) with different tensile strengths were investigated. different effects were measured for the rubber matrices (figure 2). introduction of mwcnts into the rubber either in treated or in untreated form resulted in both increase and in decrease of the tensile strengths. 0,0 4,0 8,0 12,0 16,0 20,0 r‐i r‐ii r‐iii te ns ile  s tr en gh t,  m pa sign of the rubber matrix rubber matrix untreated mwcnt treated mwcnt figure 2: effects of type of the rubber matrix on tensile properties (1wt% mwcnt-content) different effects were measured for the samples where treated mwcnts were incorporated. tensile strength enhanced from 8.6 mpa to 11.6 mpa meaning a 35% increase for the r-i matrix. meanwhile in the case of r-ii signed rubber the tensile strength reduced by 26% in the presence of untreated mwcnt. application of the coupling agent improved the tensile strength by 12% but tensile strength of the original matrix could not be achieved. tensile strengths of the mwcnt containing composites did not differ to that of the r-iii matrix having the highest tensile strength (19.2 mpa). 0,0 4,0 8,0 12,0 16,0 20,0 r‐i r‐ii r‐iii te ns ile  s tr en gh t,  m pa sign of the rubber matrix rubber matrix untreated mwcnt treated mwcnt figure 3: effects of type of the rubber matrix on fatigue tensile properties (1 wt% mwcnt, fatigue conditions: 100 cycles and 10 n) resistance of the samples against fatigue tensile stresses of 100 cycles and 10 n as loading force were also studied (figure 3). comparing the results of the fatigue tensile tests to those of the static tensile tests two important outcomes could be stated. first of all mwcnts in the rubber blends could either improve or deteriorate the mechanical properties depending on the type of the rubber matrices. on the second hand composites made from basic mixture of r-ii showed different behaviour than the others. fatigue tensile strength was found to have been deteriorated by 6.5% if the mwcnt was incorporated in untreated form. the opposite behaviour was experienced by mwcnts treated by the coupling agent since a 5% increase was measured. standard deviation (sd) was calculated to be 0.8 mpa for unteated and 1.0 mpa for surface treated mwcnt containing samples. elongation at break was also represented for both types of tensile tests (figures 4, 5). 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 r‐i r‐ii r‐iii el on ga ti on  a t  br ea k,  % sign of the rubber matrix rubber matrix untreated mwcnt treated mwcnt figure 4: effects of type of the rubber matrix on elongation at break (1 wt% mwcnt content) 72 considerations for the elongation at break were established similar to the tensile strength. type of the rubber was determinative in the evolution of the elongation at break (fig. 4) either. reinforcing rubber r-i with mwcnts the value of 250% of elongation at break significantly decreased due to the pristine mwcnts. changing the reinforcement to surface treated mwcnts an 18% improvement could be measured as the property increased to 290%. mwcnts even in coupling agent treated form deteriorated the elongation at break of r-ii rubber. 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 r‐i r‐ii r‐iii el on ga ti on  a t  br ea k,  % sign of the rubber matrix rubber matrix untreated mwcnt treated mwcnt figure 5: effects of type of the rubber matrix on elongation at break for fatigue tensile tests (fatigue conditions: 100 cycles and 10 n, 1 wt% mwcnt) elongation at break did not change if the matrix with the highest elongation was reinforced with mwcnts either in untreated or in surface treated form. regarding to the results for elongation at break after the fatigue tensile tests a more balanced picture could be drawn. approximately a 20% decrease was measured for r-i and r-ii matrices in the elongation at breaks for fatigue tensile testing compared to static tensile testing. but mwcnt containing composites had the same values for elongation at break both for r-i and for r-ii based samples even for fatigue tensile tests. there were not any significant effects of the coupling agent on the elongation at break of all the rubber matrices. 3.2. effect of carbon nanotube concentration in that chapter changes in tensile strength, tensile modulus and elongation at break of r-iii based composites was discussed in function of the concentration of the mwcnt. lower tensile strength was measured for r-iii matrix after fatigue tensile tests (figure 6). regarding to the static tensile strength approximately 1.5 wt% mwcnt was required for a slight increase. the fatigue tensile results were represented for the same fatigue load (10 n) with two different cycles: 100 and 1500 cycles (fig. 6). resistance of the rubber (riii) deteriorated with the duration of the fatigue test. the same trends were observed for carbon nanotube containing samples either. 2.4 wt% mwcnt was needed to exceed the tensile strength of r-iii after long time fatigue stresses. with lower concentration of mwcnts in the rubber there was no difference among the property at the same fatigue conditions. 14 16 18 20 r‐iii 1.0wt% mwcnt 1.5wt% mwcnt 2.4wt% mwcnt te ns ile  s tr en gh t,  m pa without fatigue 100 cycles 1500 cycles figure 6: effects of carbon nanotube concentration on the fatigue tensile strength (fatigue load: 10 n for both 100 cycles and 1500 cycles) figure 7 represented the effects of filler concentration on the tensile modulus. on the first hand, values of modulus by the static tensile test increased with the mwcnt content. the modulus of the samples containing 1 wt% mwcnt have been enhanced by 13% related to the reference. the same extent of improvement was measured for the other two mwcnt/rubber composites. fig. 7 showed the results for fatigue tensile test either. depending on the duration of the fatigue tests positive changes were getting lower with increasing mwcnt contents. in that case moduli for the fatigue conditions were compared to the results of the simple tensile test. all the reinforced samples performed higher tensile modulus than that of the rubber matrix, so toughness of the composites enhanced by incorporation of mwcnts. the modulus of the sample with 2.4 wt% mwcnt depended the less on the duration of fatigue stresses. that phenomenon could be related to orientation of the mwcnts into the direction of the periodic stresses based on previous experiments with carbon fibres. 0 2 4 6 8 r‐iii 1.0wt% mwcnt 1.5wt% mwcnt 2.4wt% mwcnt m od ul us , m pa without fatigue 100 cycles 1500 cycles figure 7: effects of carbon nanotube concentration on fatigue tensile modulus (fatigue load 10n) figure 8 reperesented changes in the elongation at break in the function of the mwcnt content. elasticity of the samples had been expected to decrease with the mwcnt content. thus, a reduction in elongation at 73 break was observed above 1 wt% mwcnts in the rubber. not a significant change was calculated for 1 wt% mwcnt/rubber samples. samples containing 2.4 wt% mwcnt had a value of 300% for elongation at break meanwhile the same property was 345% for the basic rubber. 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 r‐iii 1.0wt% mwcnt 1.5wt% mwcnt 2.4wt% mwcnt el on ga ti on  a t  br ea k,  % without fatigue 100 cycles 1500 cycles figure 8: effects of carbon nanotube concentration on fatigue elongation at break (fatigue load 10 n) 3.3. effect of surface treatment in that part of the paper effects of surface treatment were discussed on tensile and fatigue tensile properties. in figures either results of the unreinforced rubber matrix with composition r-iii or results of the composites containing 2.44 wt% mwcnt reinforcement were demonstrated. during the fatigue tensile tests a fatigue force of 10 n was applied with different duration times (100 and 1500 cycles). figure 9 represented the effects of untreated and coupling agent treated mwcnts on tensile strength and fatigue tensile strength of the unfilled rubber. changes for simple tensile test could be not significant both for untreated and treated mwcnt/rubber samples containing the same concentration of mwcnt. change was calculated to be below 5%. 14 16 18 20 r‐iii mwcnt 2.4% mwcnt 2.4% (treated) te ns ile  s tr en gh t,  m pa without fatigue 100 cycles 1500 cycles figure 9: effects of surface treatment on fatigue tensile properties (fatigue load: 10 n) the same trend was observed for the fatigue tensile tests. as fig. 9 clearly showed, values of fatigue tensile strength slightly decreased for the rubber matrix and the pristine mwcnt/rubber composites with the increasing number of fatigue cycles. however, the composite containing surface treated mwcnts afforded more balanced performance even for a long period of fatigue stress (1500 cycles) in the given range of concentration and the coupling agent has a higher stabilizing effect in the composite. 0 2 4 6 8 r‐iii mwcnt 2.4% mwcnt 2.4% (treated) m od ul us , m pa without fatigue 100 cycles 1500 cycles figure 10: effects of surface treatment on fatigue tensile properties of the composites (fatigue load: 10 n) in figure 10 the effects of the surface treated mwcnts were demonstrated on the tensile moduli in function of number of fatigue cycles. due to application of mwcnts in the rubber matrix the values of modulus enhanced compared to the rubber since the aforementioned reinforcing material can increase toughness of plastics, elastomers and rubbers. resistance against fatigue stresses were also showed in fig. 10. the values of modulus have been increased both for untreated and treated mwcnt containing samples compared to the initial rubber matrix independently from duration of the fatigue stress. almost the same moduli were determined for both mwcnt/rubber composites at the same level of fatigue conditions. surface treatment was concluded not to have significant effects on tensile modulus but more balanced behaviour was experienced for treated mwcnt/rubber samples. 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 r‐iii mwcnt 2.4% mwcnt 2.4% (treated) el on ga ti on  a t  br ea k,  % without fatigue 100 cycles 1500 cycles figure 11: effects of surface treatment on fatigue tensile properties of the composites (fatigue load: 10 n) figure 11 demonstrated the effects of both forms of mwcnts on the elongation at break for distinct fatigue duration. values of elongation at break for mwcnt/ rubber composites were measured to be below the value of the rubber matrix. the trends were the same both for simple and for fatigue tensile tests. results were observed to be more balanced for coupling agent treated mwcnt reinforced rubber in that point of view too. although elongation at break for the original rubber matrix was the highest among all the 74 samples regarding the tensile test but after a longer fatigue tensile test significant (13%) deterioration was obtained and the value of the treated mwcnt/rubber was less sensitive against fatigue stresses. 3.4. sem homogeneity of the samples based on r-i rubber was studied on the sem graphs of the broken surface of the composites (figure 12–14). figure 12: sem graph of the broken surface of the original rubber matrix figure 13: sem graph of the broken surface of the pristine cnt containing rubber composite figure 14: sem graph of the broken surface of the coupling agent treated cnt containing rubber composite components of the rubber formula were clearly remarked (white spots) on sem graph of all the samples. difference was observed between the carbon nanotube containing samples. composites with untreated cnts showed a less smooth surface after tensile test than samples with surface treated reinforcements. narrower and more homogeneous particle size distribution was experienced on the surface of coupling agent treated carbon nanotube/rubber samples indicating higher degree of compatibility of the components which could probably result the improvement of the mechanical properties. conclusion our research has been directed to the application of mwcnt in rubbers in which effects of an olefinmaleic-anhydride based coupling agent was also studied. the results were summarized as follows: application of carbon nanotubes in a rubber matrix could both enhance and deteriorate the mechanical properties of the composites depending on the types and strength of the original rubber mixture. difference in the behaviour in mwcnt containing composites could be experienced during the fatigue tensile test, which could be important especially for rubber products. at least 2.4 wt% mwcnt was required to achieve better performance during long time fatigue than the rubber matrix with the highest tensile strength (r-iii). acknowledgement we acknowledge the financial support of the work by the hungarian state and the european union under the támop-4.2.2/b-10/1-2010-0025 project. authors are also grateful to the project of baross gábor program (reg_kd_09_2-2009-0026) for the financial support. references 1. b. omnes, s. thuillier, p. pilvin, y. grohens, s. gillet: compos part a, 39 (2008), pp. 1141–1149 2. x. he, z. peng, n. yu, j. han, c. wu: compos sci technol, 68 (2008), pp. 3027–3032 3. z. h. li, j. zhang, s. j. chen: express polym lett, 2 (2008), pp. 695–704 4. k. tsuchiya, a. sakai, t. nagaoka, k. uchida, t. furukawa, h. jajima: compos sci technol, 71 (2011), pp. 1098–1104 5. s. praveen, p. k. chattopadhyay, p. albert, v. g. dalvi, b. c. chakraborty, s. chattopadhyay: compos, part a, 40 (2009), pp. 309–316 6. b. c. guo, f. chen, w. w. chen, y. d. lei, d. m. jia: express polym lett, 9 (2010), pp. 529–538 7. b. t. poh: c.c. ng, eur polym j, 34 (1998), pp. 975–979 8. a. das, r. n. mahaling, k. w. stöckelhuber, g. heinrich: compos sci technol, 71 (2010), pp. 276–281 9. e. planes, l. chazeu, g. vigier, t. stuhldneier: compos sci technol, 70 (2010), pp. 1530–1536 10. s. j. ahmadi, c. g’sell, y. huang, n. ren, a. mohaddespour, compos sci technol, 69 (2009), pp. 2566–2572 75 11. k. g. gatos, k. kameo, j. karger-kocsis: express polym lett, 1 (2007), pp. 27–31 12. p. verge, s. peetenbrock, l. bannaud, p. dubois: compos sci technol, 70 (2010), pp. 1453–1459 13. h. h. le, x. t. hoang, a. das, u. gohs, k.-w. stoeckelhuber, r. boldt, g. heinrich, r. adhikari, h.-j. radusch: carbon, 50 (2012), pp. 4543–4556 14. s. n. lawandy, s. f. halim, n. a. darwish: express polym lett, 3 (2009), pp. 152–158 15. j. w. chung, s. j. han, s-y. kwak: eur polim journal, 45 (2009), pp. 79–87 16. s. poompradub, y. ikeda, y. kokubo, t. shino: eur polim journal, 44 (2009), pp. 4157–4164 17. j. carretero-gonzález, j. l. valentín, m. arroyo, k, saalwachter, m. a. lopezmanchado: eur polim journal, 44 (2009), pp. 3493–3500 18. f. avalos, j. c. ortiz, r. zitzumbo, m. a. lópezmanchado, r. verdejo, m. arroyo: eur polim journal, 44 (2009), pp. 3108–3115 19. a. das, k. w. stöckelhuber, r. jurk, m. saphiannikova, j. fritzsche, h. lorenz, m. klüppel, g. heinrich: polymer, 49 (2008), pp. 5276–5283 20. l. bokobza: express polym lett, 3 (2012), pp. 213–223 21. k. subramaniam, a. das, g. heinrich: compos sci technol, 71 (2011), pp. 1441–1449 22. m. motamedi, m. eskandari, m yeganeh: materials and design, 34 (2012), pp. 603–608 23. a. szentes, cs. varga, g. horváth, l. bartha, z. kónya, h. haspel, j. szél, á. kukovecz: express polym lett, 52 (2012), pp. 494–502 24. cs. varga, n. miskolczi, l. bartha, g. lipóczi, l. falussy: műanyag és gumi, 45 (2008), pp. 148–152 page 1 page 2 page 3 page 4 page 5 page 6 page 7 page 8 page 9 page 10 page 11 page 12 page 13 page 14 page 15 page 16 page 17 page 18 page 19 page 20 page 21 page 22 page 23 page 24 page 25 page 26 page 27 page 28 page 29 page 30 page 31 page 32 page 33 page 34 page 35 page 36 page 37 page 38 page 39 page 40 page 41 page 42 page 43 page 44 page 45 page 46 page 47 page 48 page 49 page 50 page 51 page 52 page 53 page 54 page 55 page 56 page 57 page 58 page 59 page 60 page 61 page 62 page 63 page 64 page 65 page 66 page 67 page 68 page 69 page 70 page 71 page 72 page 73 page 74 page 75 page 76 page 77 page 78 page 79 page 80 page 81 page 82 page 83 page 84 page 85 page 86 page 87 page 88 page 89 page 90 page 91 page 92 page 93 page 94 page 95 page 96 page 97 page 98 page 99 page 100 page 101 page 102 page 103 page 104 page 105 page 106 page 107 page 108 page 109 page 110 page 111 page 112 page 113 page 114 page 115 page 116 page 117 page 118 page 119 page 120 page 121 page 122 page 123 page 124 page 125 page 126 page 127 page 128 page 129 page 130 page 131 page 132 page 133 page 134 page 135 page 136 page 137 page 138 page 139 page 140 page 141 page 142 page 143 page 144 page 145 page 146 page 147 page 148 page 149 page 150 page 151 page 152 page 153 page 154 page 155 page 156 page 157 page 158 page 159 page 160 page 161 page 162 page 163 page 164 page 165 page 166 page 167 page 168 page 169 page 170 page 171 page 172 page 173 page 174 page 175 page 176 page 177 page 178 page 179 page 180 page 181 page 182 page 183 page 184 page 185 page 186 page 187 page 188 page 189 page 190 page 191 page 192 page 193 page 194 page 195 page 196 page 197 page 198 page 199 page 200 page 201 page 202 page 203 page 204 page 205 page 206 page 207 page 208 page 209 page 210 page 211 page 212 page 213 page 214 page 215 page 216 page 217 page 218 page 219 page 220 page 221 page 222 page 223 page 224 page 225 page 226 page 227 page 228 page 229 page 230 page 231 page 232 page 233 page 234 page 235 page 236 page 237 page 238 page 239 page 240 page 241 page 242 page 243 page 244 page 245 page 246 page 247 page 248 page 249 page 250 page 251 page 252 page 253 page 254 page 255 page 256 page 257 page 258 page 259 page 260 page 261 page 262 page 263 page 264 page 265 page 266 page 267 page 268 page 269 page 270 page 271 page 272 page 273 page 274 page 275 page 276 page 277 page 278 page 279 page 280 page 281 page 282 page 283 page 284 page 285 page 286 page 287 page 288 page 289 page 290 page 291 page 292 page 293 page 294 page 295 page 296 page 297 page 298 page 299 page 300 page 301 page 302 page 303 page 304 page 305 page 306 page 307 page 308 page 309 page 310 page 311 page 312 page 313 page 314 page 315 page 316 page 317 page 318 page 319 page 320 page 321 page 322 page 323 page 324 page 325 page 326 page 327 page 328 page 329 page 330 page 331 page 332 page 333 page 334 page 335 page 336 page 337 page 338 page 339 page 340 page 341 page 342 page 343 page 344 page 345 page 346 page 347 page 348 page 349 page 350 page 351 page 352 page 353 page 354 page 355 page 356 page 357 page 358 page 359 page 360 page 361 page 362 page 363 page 364 page 365 page 366 page 367 page 368 page 369 page 370 page 371 page 372 page 373 page 374 page 375 page 376 page 377 page 378 page 379 page 380 page 381 page 382 page 383 page 384 page 385 page 386 page 387 page 388 page 389 page 390 page 391 page 392 page 393 page 394 page 395 page 396 page 397 page 398 page 399 page 400 page 401 page 402 page 403 page 404 page 405 page 406 page 407 page 408 page 409 page 410 page 411 page 412 page 413 page 414 page 415 page 416 page 417 page 418 page 419 page 420 page 421 page 422 page 423 page 424 page 425 page 426 page 427 page 428 page 429 page 430 page 431 page 432 page 433 page 434 page 435 page 436 page 437 page 438 page 439 page 440 page 441 page 442 page 443 page 444 page 445 page 446 page 447 page 448 page 449 page 450 page 451 page 452 page 453 page 454 page 455 page 456 page 457 page 458 page 459 page 460 page 461 page 462 page 463 page 464 page 465 page 466 page 467 page 468 page 469 page 470 page 471 page 472 page 473 page 474 page 475 page 476 page 477 page 478 page 479 page 480 page 481 page 482 page 483 page 484 page 485 page 486 page 487 page 488 page 489 page 490 page 491 page 492 page 493 page 494 page 495 page 496 page 497 page 498 page 499 page 500 page 501 page 502 page 503 page 504 page 505 page 506 page 507 page 508 page 509 page 510 page 511 page 512 page 513 page 514 page 515 page 516 page 517 page 518 page 519 page 520 page 521 page 522 page 523 page 524 page 525 page 526 page 527 page 528 page 529 page 530 page 531 page 532 page 533 page 534 page 535 page 536 page 537 page 538 page 539 page 540 page 541 page 542 page 543 page 544 page 545 page 546 page 547 page 548 page 549 page 550 page 551 page 552 page 553 page 554 page 555 page 556 page 557 page 558 page 559 page 560 page 561 page 562 page 563 page 564 page 565 page 566 page 567 page 568 page 569 page 570 page 571 page 572 page 573 page 574 page 575 page 576 page 577 page 578 page 579 page 580 page 581 page 582 page 583 page 584 microsoft word contents.doc hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 34. pp. 1-14 (2006) simulated moving bed (smb) separation of pharmaceutical enantiomers and crystallization g. gál1 , l. hanák1, j. argyelán1, a. strbka1, zs. herseczki, t. szánya1 a. aranyi2, k. temesvári2 and z. horváth2 1university of pannonia, department of chemical engineering processes h-8201 veszprém, po box 158, hungary, e-mail: gaborgal@freemail.hu 2gedeon richter ltd., h-1475 budapest po box. 27, hungary a promising solution for the separation of pharmaceutical enantiomers is the method of smb liquid chromatography (smb-lc). an optimised coupling of smb-lc and crystallization processes can improve the efficiency of enantioseparation. in the first process both enantiomers can be produced in enriched concentrations in extract and raffinate streams of simulated moving bed chromatograph suitable for crystallization. chromatographic investigations include the experimental determination of adsorption isotherms, bed voidage, ntp, hetp etc. on a suitable chiral stationary phase as well as the simulation and optimization of a the appropriate smb-lc process. mathematical models and joined computer programmes were published in our earlier papers had been developed and applied for the calculation of smb-lc. we assumed isotherm, isochor equilibrium adsorption (competitive multicomponent langmuir-adsorption equilibrium) in the mathematical model neglecting the effects of axial dispersion. the mathematical model was solved by finite differences, numerical mathematical method using pc. the smb-lc separations were carried out on a laboratory scale (i.d. = 1 cm, l = 25 cm) four-column open loop eluent system equipment at 1:1:1:1 column configuration. the process variables of the smb-lc (product purity, yield, productivity, specific solvent consumption) are favourable. the efficiency of the enantiomer separation can be increased by coupled crystallization of the enriched extract and raffinate fractions resulting >99% (w/w) pure enantiomer crystals. „mother liquids” recirculation from crystallization to the smblc process increases with great benefit the economical parameters of enantiomer separation. keywords: preparative liquid chromatography, simulated moving bed chromatography, pharmaceutical enantiomers, chiral chromatographic packing, crystallization introduction nowadays more than half of the registered medicals have got chiral structures owing special importance in pharmaceutical industry. from pharmaceutical points of view only one enantiomer has got good biological activity, meanwhile the other enantiomer is inactive or toxic. the conclusion is, that the enantiomer purity has determining effect. the classical resolution can be well applied for the production of optically active compounds. for example optically active compounds can be produced by stochiometric catalytic asymmetric synthesis starting from achiral compounds. enantiomers produced by synthesis can be separated by simulating moving bed liquid chromatography (smb-lc) process. this last process has growing importance in pharmaceutical industry as it is well applicable in case of the high purity separation of wide scale of racemic mixtures. the advantages of smb-lc compared to the traditional batch chromatography are: continuous process, constant product purity for both enantiomers, high yields, high productivities, low specific solvent consumptions. the chromatographic packing (csp) is used in full columns length, so the productivity and yield is high in case of smb-lc compared to batch chromatography. disadvantages of smb-lc are: high investment costs and process parameter sensitivity. in analytical, preparative and smb liquid chromatography the polysaccharide derivatives proved to be versatile among industrial chiral stationary phases (csp). the productivity of smb-lc in case of these csp packings are as high as 0.2-2 kg racemic mixture/kg packing/day. the coupled crystallization to smb-lc provides possibility to impurity removal, thus the valuable enantiomers can be achieved with more than 99% (w/w) purity [1-5]. the next crystallization methods can be applied: resolution by entrainment, separation via formation of diastereomer salts and crystallization from optically active solvents. the triangle solubility diagram of two enantiomers/one solvent system presents the possibility of enantiomer enrichment. the yield of crystallization process depends on the above mentioned triangle solubility diagram data and the inlet liquid concentration. this publication is on the smb-lc and the coupled crystallization of enantiomers. in the first step smb-lc process is used for enantiomer enrichment, then in the second step pure enantiomer is produced by crystallization. valuable 2 enantiomer crystallization mother liquid after evaporation was recirculated to the feed of smb-lc. determination of optimal concentration of the valuable enantiomer coming from smb-lc is an important task during the planning of hybrid process (smb-lc, liquid evaporation, crystallization with cooling, mother liquid recirculation, etc.). enantiomer separation by chiral liquid chromatography the first and significant step in planning of chiral chromatographic enantiomer separation is to determine the proper moving and stationary phases can be made by screening experiments in analytical scale. these data are used for smb-lc mathematical models, calculations helping previous planning and size increase of smb-lc process. fundamentals of smb-lc chromatography nowadays the smb-lc process is widely used and well applied in various separation problems. the large scale smb-lc process was developed by uop in 1960 and since this time it has gone over tremendous development. since 1980 it has been used especially in fine chemical industry and for the last decade in the field of pharmaceutical industry. on fig. 1. the classical four column open eluent loop smb-lc process is presented. the smb-lc chromatographic process is a multi column system with two inlet (fresh eluent and feed of enantiomers) and three outlet (extract, raffinate and outlet liquid) streams where the liquid and solid phases are moving in counter current direction. the counter current stream of liquid and solid phases is not real, but simulated as the stationary phase is moving by columns at each switching time. simulated solid phase movement is carried out at the switching time by the proper periodical change of inlet and outlet points of the equipment. these points divide the smb-lc equipment for four zones (i, ii, iii, iv). the enantiomer solution (a, b) for separation is fed (f = feed) into the equipment amidst ii and iii zones. as the component a adsorbs stronger on csp than component b, the previous is moving rather with the solid phase while the other one is moving with the liquid phase in the smb-lc equipment. components a and b in zones ii and iii separate from each because of their different adsorption affinity and the resulted pure a and b components can be got in extract and raffinate streams respectively (fig. 1) solid phase regeneration happens in zone i with fresh eluent, while in zone iv the eluent regeneration is carried out by retaining the less adsorbing component b. raffinate, r extract, e fresh eluent, d feed, f b a+b a iv iii ii i lr out fig. 1: simulated moving bed (smb) adsorber: i, ii, iii, iv-zones, respectively hplc columns; d-desorbent (solvent, eluent); e-extract stream with the stronger adsorbed component a; f-feed stream with the components a and b; r-raffinate stream with the less adsorbed component b; lr outoutlet liquid. working points and the separation range of smb-lc processes [6, 7] the main task in smb-lc planning is the proper choice of working conditions. obviously it means the determination of relative volumetric streams of liquid and solid phases in each zones. five parameters must be determined in a two component mixture separation task using smb-lc equipment. these are the liquid volumetric streams in four zones and the so called switching time. morbidelli and co-workers significantly contributed to the handling of this non trivial planning problem. according to the aboves morbidelli theory or triangle was used for the initial parameters calculation of smb-lc. assume the next component balance equation for equilibrium adsorption without component indexes. ( ) 01 =⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ∂ ∂ +⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ∂ ∂ −+⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ∂ ∂ z f z f t f t ca t qa z cb εε 3 where bf = volumetric velocity (cm3/min), c = concentration in liquid phase (mg/cm3), z = axial distance (cm), t = time (min), ε = bed voidage (cm3 liquid/cm3 column), af = column cross section (cm2), q = concentration in solid phase (mg/cm3). assuming linear adsorption equilibrium isotherm: q=k · c the linear velocity of liquid element with c concentration, uc = (cm/min) after the de vault equation: ( )k a b u t z f f c c εε −+ ==⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ ∂ ∂ 1 the column is packed with granular solid adsorbent, which does not fill the full volume. the column can be characterised by the bed voidage (ε). in our case “a” and “b” two component mixture was investigated with ka and kb adsorption equilibrium distribution coefficient. in our case ka >kb, k measure unit is (g component/cm3 solid)/(g component/cm3 liquid). determination of the morbidelli parameters [6,7] let examine the iii zone of the smb-lc equipment. presume, that the adsorbent have neither “a” nor “b” components and during “t” switching time “a” and “b” components are fed into the iii zone. as the volumetric velocity in the given iii zone is d-e+f, so the velocities of “a” and “b” components in iii zone are as follows (see fig. 1): a f a k a fed u )1( εε −+ +− = b f b k a fed u )1( εε −+ +− = the length of the iii zone is l (cm), the cross section of the column is af. “a” is not allowed to run out of the iii zone, but “b” must leave it. a f b k t l a fed k )1()1( εεεε −+< +− <−+ a f b k l lt a fed k < − − +− < )1( ε ε aiiib kmk << miii – morbidelli parameter, relative velocity for the iii zone the next can be written for the ii zone of the smblc equipment: “b” component must leave the ii zone and “a” is not allowed to get through: a f b k t l a ed k )1()1( εεεε −+〈 − 〈−+ a f b k l lt a ed k 〈 − − − 〈 )1( ε ε aiib kmk 〈〈 mii – morbidelli parameter, relative velocity for the ii zone in the i zone of the smb-lc equipment no “a” can be remained, so regeneration must be perfect. a f i k l lt a d m 〉 − − = )1( ε ε mi – morbidelli parameter, relative velocity for the i zone “b” component is not allowed to leave the iv zone of the smb-lc equipment. b f iv k l lt a rfed m 〈 − − −+− = )1( )( ε ε miv – morbidelli parameter, relative velocity for the iv zone these conditions are necessary for the separation of a two-component “a”, “b” mixture for pure “a” and “b” components. summary ka < mi kb < mii < ka kb < miii < ka miv < kb 4 fig. 2: morbidelli triangle in case of linear adsorption isotherms assuming independent adsorption: region 1: pure “a” and pure “b”, region 2: pure “b” in raffinate, impure “a” in extract, region 3: pure “a” in extract, impure “b” in raffinate, region 4: impure “a” in extract, impure “b” in raffinate. theoretical analysis in case of non linear adsorption isotherms [6,7] if linear adsorption equilibrium isotherms and independent adsorption conditions are not existing during the theoretical description of equilibrium adsorption described in the previous chapter, than the morbidelli triangle modifies. fig. 3: modification of morbidelli triangle in case of competitive langmuir isotherms it can be seen from the figure 3, that the modified morbidelli triangle is also divided into four regions: region 1: pure “a” and pure “b”; region 2 pure “b” in raffinate, impure “a” in extract; region 3: pure “a” in extract, impure “b” in raffinate; region 4: impure “a” in extract, impure “b” in raffinate let the two component competitive langmuir adsorption isotherm be valid: 22111 cbcb caq ii i ++ = 2,1=i where: qi – solid phase concentration (mg/cm3 adsorbent) ci – liquid phase concentration (mg/cm3) ai – langmuir constant (cm3 liquid/cm3 adsorbent) bi – langmuir constant (cm3 liquid/mg “a” or “b” component). the conditions of simultaneous production of pure “a” and “b” components are as follows: mi > ka mii,min (mii, miii) < mii < miii < miii,max (mii, miii) miv < miv, kr [ [ ] iiibiiiii f bbiiib iiiii f bbiiibkriv mammcbmk mmcbmkm 4)( )( 2 1 2 , −−++ −−++= where f means the feed of smb-lc equipment (cm3/min). explanation of fig 3: point a ka = ka point b kb = kb point f ωg = ωg point r [ ] ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ − −+−− )( )()()(, 2 faba fagbbagafg a g kkk kkkkk k ω ωωωωωω point w [ ] ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ − −+− )( )()(, fab fbbbafg a gb kk kkkk k k ω ωωωω where ωf and ωg (ωg > ωf > 0) are the roots of equation given below (1 + baca f + bbcb f)ω2 – [ka(1 + bbcb f) + +kb(1 + baca f)]ω + kakb = 0 it can be seen on fig. 3 that the shape and area of morbidelli triangle significantly changes caused by the competitive langmuir isotherm affected by feeding total and component concentrations, real effects as adsorption kinetics (component transfer resistances), axial mixing phenomena, column packing efficiency (fig. 4). 5 fig. 4: feeding concentration change on morbidelli triangle in case of racemic mixture (c0 f < c1 f < c2 f < c3 f < c4 f, c0 f ~ 0 g/dm3) increasing the feeding concentration the triangle area decreases and deforms at constant langmuir adsorption equilibrium parameters. it is unfavourable for enantiomer separation. the mathematical model of smb-lc from the above equations, it can be seen that the pure extract-pure raffinate area is smaller by higher feed concentration than the rectangular triangle, consequently we have less possibility by parameter variation. the morbidelli's area changes, when the following possibilities of intervention vary during the planning: temperature, changing adsorbent, and composition of the solvent (eluent). when we have already selected the chromatographic packing for the separation, the next task is to choose operating variables: fresh eluent, recirculated eluent, feed, and extract, raffinate flow rates, switching time. during calculation, the influence of a given parameter is to be investigated, the others must be considered as constants. better productivity, product purity, yield, and eluent consumption can be achieved by optimizing operating conditions by computer with the exact mathematical model of the smb. the basic equation of the mathematical model can be deduced from the component balance of the solid–liquid equilibrium system [8, 9]. the equal balance for the component “k” is: 0)()()1()(0 = ∂ + ∂ ∂ −+ z k z k t k t c t q z cv ∂ εε ∂ ∂ where v0 = velocity of fluid phase (cm/min), dck/dz = place derivative of liquid concentration of component k, dck/dt = time derivative of liquid concentration of component k, and dqk/dt = time derivative of solid concentration of component k. when we discuss a two-component equilibrium system the competitive multi-langmuir type isotherm can be written as: 2211 11 1 1 cbcb caq ++ = 2211 22 2 1 cbcb caq ++ = the denominator of this isotherm was replaced by “n”: 22111 cbcbn ++= considering the equal balance and concentration (c1, c2) derivatives of the above eq. can be written: t c n cba n cbana t c z cn vo ∂ ∂ − + − ∂ ∂ = ∂ ∂ − − 2 2 121 2 1111112 ) 1 ( 1 ε ε ε the derivatives were substituted with difference quotients: )() 1 ( 1 2 2 1 111 2 1 112 t c b t c bcanna t c z c n vo δ δ + δ δ − − + δ δ = δ δ − − ε ε ε difference eq. above was rearranged and written for component “k”: )) 1 ( 1 2 1 2 kkkk kk n k kkk ko cbanna t c t cbca z cnv − − + δ δ = δ δ + δ δ − − ∑ = ε ε ε the above eq. is the base of the numeric simulation software. the component transfer is calculated with this eq. between the so-called equilibrium cascades. in our model, the number of equilibrium cascades are compliant with the number of theoretical plates. based on the mathematical model, the krom-n and smb krom-n computer programs were written in delphi computer language [10]. frontal adsorption experiments and smb-lc measurements can be simulated by the computer programs. at 200 ntp/column the calculation time on a 3 ghz personal computer is 0,6% of the measurement time. the input data of the software: number of components, feed concentration, adsorption equilibrium properties (langmuir parameters), column geometrical data (average) ntp/column, total porosity, bulk density, volumetric velocities (eluent, feed, extract, raffinate, recirculation). the initial smb operating conditions were calculated with the equilibrium triangle method. we considered the maximal flow rate of eluent pump, and minimal column switching time was chosen. simulated moving bed liquid chromatography (smb-lc) coupling with crystallization [1-5] enantiomer purification by crystallization is based on their terner solubility diagrams. according to the type of saturation curves in the phase diagram, three fundamental types (conglomerate, racemic compound, pseudo racemate) forming systems can be identified. only 5-10% of racemates belong to the conglomerate forming group, 6 90-95% belong to the true racemates and the third group pseudo racemates are relatively few. on fig. 5 the solubility diagram of two, (s)and (r) enantiomers and solvent “h” can be seen on equilateral triangle at different temperatures. fig. 5: the solubility diagram of two enantiomers, (s) and (r) in “h” solvent. (s): less retained enantiomer, (r): more retained enantiomer, h: n-hexane solvent, 1. raffinate, 2. evaporated raffinate, 3. crystallization mother liquid, 4. (s) crystals, tc = -20 °c cooling temperature, te = 50 °c evaporation temperature, -.-.limiting evaporated liquid concentration curve of >99% (w/w) (s) crystals. smb-lc and joined crystallization processes are recommended for enantiomer separation according to fig. 5. the (s)-enantiomer in required purity can be achieved, if crystallization started from an asymmetric component content. joined smb-lc and crystallization process starts at point 1 (raffinate) with (s) enrichment. as the raffinate is a diluted unsaturated liquid (point 1), it must be evaporated to put point 2 between evaporation and cooling solubility curves. cooling the liquid (point 2) forms crystallization mother liquid (point 3) and pure (s) crystal is resulted (point 4). smb-lc, evaporation, cooling crystallization and crystallization mother liquid recycling the joint process can be seen on the fig. 6, where both enantiomers can be purified by crystallization. in our work only the (s)-enantiomer was crystallized and its crystallization mother liquid was recycled to the feed. in case of (r)-enantiomer only the eluent was recycled. the original (s) and (r) 50-50% (w/w) feed is to be changed because of the recirculation of (s) crystallization mother liquid and thus concentration of (s) increases over 50%. we have to work out an optimization method, which has got an objective function ((s) productivity maximalization, fresh solvent consumption minimalization) at higher than 99% (w/w) (s) purity, and higher than 99% (s) yield. fig. 6: smb-lc, evaporator, cooling crystallization and crystallization mother liquor recirculation. 7 purity and productivity are determined by the next equations in extract and in raffinate. 100⋅ + = rs s cc cpurity bc r s s v crp ρ4 ⋅ = bc e r r v cep ρ4 ⋅ = cs – (s) concentration in extract or raffinate streams (g/dm3) cr – (r) concentration in extract or raffinate streams (g/dm3) p – productivity (mg component/g packing/day) r, e – raffinate and extract volumetric streams (cm3/min) vc – column volume (cm3) ρb – bulk density (g/cm3) in case of the high purity production of (s)enantiomer only by smb-lc the (s) productivity is low. joining smb-lc and crystallization the (s) productivity can be significantly increased. experiments chiral racemic ester mixture separation was investigated as a model system. the two pure (s)and (r)enantiomers can not be reached in the market and no data can be found in special literature on them. during our research work both chromatographic and crystallization measurements were carried out. by previous analytical and preparative scale hplc measurements adsorption isotherms were estimated for chiral stationary phase-eluent systems. the terner system solubility (s, r, solvent) diagrams were determined at different temperatures in laboratory scale experiments. several laboratory scale smb-lc and joined crystallization experiments were carried out based on previous chromatographic and solubility data. further we describe in details the applied experimental methods. chiral chromatographic packing selection chiral racemic ester mixture separation was investigated by analytical hplc columns (i.d. = 0.46 cm, l = 25 cm, dp = 5-10 µm) at 20 °c. previous selection of csp was done by daicel handbook. accordingly the next csp of daicel were chosen: chiralcel od-h, chiralcel oj, chiralpak ad, chiralpak ia, chiralpak as. the applied eluents are as follows: n-hexane, ipa, et-oh, acn, me-oh, mtbe, dkm in different volumetric ratio with 1 cm3/min volumetric velocity. the 20 µl, 5 g racemic mixture/dm3 eluent concentration sample was separated by analytical hplc column. the enantiomers were detected by gilson type uv spectrophotometer at 254 nm wavelength. investigation of csp packing properties the supelco (i.d. = 1 cm, l = 25 cm) column was packed with the 20 µm chiralcel od by dry vibration method applying 60 min vibration time. air was removed by n-hexane:ipa = 95:5% (v/v) eluent. after that the ntp was determined by injection method. applied eluents were: n-hexane:ipa = 80:20, 90:10, 95:5% (v/v). reaching equilibrium condition with eluent, a 100 µl 50 g racemic mixture/dm3 eluent sample was injected to the column by a rheodyne type injector at 20°c temperature. detection of enantiomers happened by waters uv detector at 254 nm wavelength or chiralyser type chiral detector. applied eluent volumetric velocities: 2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 cm3/min. evaluation of residence time distribution curves were done by triangle method (determination of σ, tr, ntp, α values). the packing total porosity (ε) was determined by ttbb (tri-tert-butyl-benzene) method. bulk density of csp was calculated from weight measurements of dry packing. values of langmuir a* constants were calculated from k’ values. langmuir b constants were calculated from frontal adsorptionelution measurement data [11]. frontal adsorption-elution measurements measurements were carried out by supelco column (i.d.=1 cm, l=25 cm) packed with 20 µm chiralcel od at 20 °c temperature using n-hexane:ipa = 95:5, 95:7% (v/v) eluent. 2, 5, 10 g racemic mixture/dm3 eluent sample in 10 cm3 volume was injected to the column with 2.5, 5 cm3/min volumetric velocities. detection happened by gilson type uv spectrophotometer at 254 nm wavelength. based on the above data the langmuir adsorption isotherm a* and b values were calculated by felinger et al. [10] method. description of laboratory scale smb-lc equipment the smb-lc equipment with four columns (i.d. = 1 cm, l = 25 cm supelco type stainless steel, mounted with liquid distributor and porous stainless steel plates), four zones and open eluent loop was constructed in the central mechanical workshop of the pannon university. the joint pipes were made of 1/16” stainless steel material, the liquid stream controlled by valco 5 four-ways and 4 two-ways cocks, and by 4 gilson type hplc pumps with maximum volumetric velocity: one of them is 5 cm3/min, two are 10 cm3/min and one is 25 cm3/min. volumetric velocities (d, e, f, r) were measured by emx 100/211 type digital balance connected to a computer. pressure gauge was connected after the eluent pump. extract and raffinate outlet streams were detected on-line by uv or chiral detectors. 8 parameters of smb-lc measurements there is no liquid recirculation in open loop smb-lc equipment, but the liquid from iv zone is collected (lr out) separately. the feed composition is 2.5 g (s)/dm3 eluent and 2.5 g (r)/dm3 eluent. the eluent composition is: n-hexane:ipa = 95:5% (v/v), 20 °c temperature, column configuration 1:1:1:1. volumetric velocities adjusted on different pumps: fresh eluent d = 20 cm3/min, feed f = 0.5-1.5-2.9 cm3/min, extract e = 4 cm3/min, raffinate r = 6 cm3/min. switching time is 5 min. the smb-lc equipment was working by the usual fourzone process, in each 5 minutes inlet and outlet points were changed. examination of smb-lc product streams extracts, raffinates and lr out liquid streams were collected in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th cycle separately through 20-20 minutes. during the first switching time of the 5th cycle extract, raffinate and lr out streams were fractionated in each 75 seconds for studying concentration transients. the above samples were analysed by gilson hplc equipment, on chiralcel od-h packing at 20 °c temperature, at uv 254 nm wavelength using n-hexane:ipa = 95:5% (v/v) eluent. solubility investigations 20 mg 80:20, 85:15, 90:10, 95:5, 100:0% (w/w) (s):(r) samples were solved in 4 cm3 n-hexane at 20 °c temperature, later cooled to -22 °c and kept staying for 8 hours. crystals and crystallization mother liquid were separated from each other and analyzed by gilson analytical hplc equipment. crystal purity in each case was higher than 99% (w/w) (s). the solubility of pure (s)-enantiomer in n-hexane at -22 °c was 1.2 g/dm3, at 20 °c it was 28.5 g/dm3. solubility of pure (r) in n-hexane at -22 °c was also 1.2 g/dm3. solubility of “sr” racemate at -27 °c was 0.735 g/dm3, at 20 °c was 25.45 g/dm3. solubility of (s) and (r) was examined in n-hexane-ipa mixtures at 0, 5, 10, 20% (v/v) ipa content too. crystallization investigations extract and raffinate fractions of the smb-lc measurements were separately evaporated in vacuum at 40-60 °c temperature in rotadest equipment according to fig. 5. because of the n-hexane-ipa vapour liquid equilibrium data at 95:5% (v/v) n-hexane:ipa concentration during evaporation only n-hexane remained in liquid phase. evaporation was done on the way, that enantiomer concentration was about 5 g/dm3 in the evaporated liquid. the evaporated liquid was kept in a -20…-27 °c freezer through 8 hours. crystals and crystallization mother liquid were separated from each other and analyzed by gilson analytical hplc equipment. results csp packing selection capacity relations and selectivity coefficients were calculated from analytical hplc measurements. 0 0' t ttk r −= ' ' s rr s k k =α 0 2 4 tf ld ⋅ ⋅ = π ε where tr – retention time of the given enantiomer (min) t0 – dead time (min), d = 0.46 cm, inner diameter of column, l = 25 cm, length of column, f = 1 cm3/min, eluent volumetric velocity ε – bed voidage, total porosity (determined by ttbb method) on table 1 are summarized the experimental data. the best αr s selectivity was given in case of chiralcel od-h packing and n-hexane-ipa eluent. thus this system was used in further experiments. 9 table 1: screening measurement results by analytical hplc equipment concentration (% v/v) chiralcel od-h chiralcel oj chiralpak as chiralpak ad chiralpak ia n-hexane:ipa 70:30 αr s=1 n-hexane:ipa 80:20 αr s=1.17 αr s=1.196 n-hexane:ipa 90:10 αr s=1.173 αr s=1 αr s=1 n-hexane:ipa 97.5:2.5 αr s=1.06 n-hexane:ipa 95:5 αr s=1.19 αr s=1 αr s=1.03 n-hexane:et-oh 95:5 αr s=1.122 n-hexane:ipa:acn 80:10:10 αr s=1 acn 100 k's=0.24 αr s=1 acn-me-oh 80:20 αr s=1 αr s=1 ethanol 100 αr s=1 n-hexane:mtbé 80:20 k's>20 n-hexane:mtbé 60:40 k's=6.10 n-hexane:mtbe:et-oh (60:40)+5% et-oh k's=1.086 n-hexane:ipa αr s=1.08 n-hexane:met-oh 99:1 αr s=1.12 n-hexane:et-oh 99:1 αr s=1.11 n-hexane:dkm 75:25 αr s=1.03 n-hexane:ipa:etoh 95:2.5:2.5 αr s=1.15 n-hexane:ipa:metoh 95:2.5:2.5 αr s=1.05 n-hexane:etoh:metoh 95:2.5:2.5 αr s=1.05 packingeluent investigation of csp packing properties 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 f (cm3/min) n tp / 25 cm n-hexane:ipa=95:5% (v/v), (s)-enantiomer n-hexane:ipa= 90:10% (v/v), (s)-enantiomer n-hexane:ipa= 80:20% (v/v), (s)-enantiomer n-hexane:ipa= 95:5% (v/v), (r)-enantoimer n-hexane:ipa= 80:20% (v/v), (r)-enantiomer n-hexane:ipa= 90:10% (v/v), (r)-enantiomer fig. 7: results of elution chromatographic experiments, supelco hplc column (i.d. = 1 cm, l = 25cm), chiralcel od (particle size: 20 μm) packing, t = 20 °c, sample: 50 g chiral racemic mixture/cm3 eluent, 100 μl injection, eluent: n-hexane:ipa. for example the n-hexane:ipa = 95:5% (v/v), (s) isomer experimental curve can be described by the next fitting equitation. 3876,036.643 −= fntp where f – volumetric velocity (cm3/min), ntp – number of theoretical plates/25 cm column, ε = 0.67 bed viodage, total porosity ρb = 0.6 g dry csp/cm3 column volume, bulk density 10 frontal adsorption-elution measurement and simulation on the basis of k’ capacity relation values determined by elution measurements (chiralcel od-h, 95:5% (v/v) = n-hexane:ipa) k morbidelli parameters and langmuir adsorption a* values were determined at 20 °c temperature, b values of langmuir adsorption isotherm were calculated by felinger et al. [11] method using the krom-n simulation program (table 2). table 2: input data of krom-n software data input to the krom-n software number of components: 2 column inner diameter: i.d. = 1 cm column length: l = 25 cm free volume coefficient: ε = 0.67 cm3 liquid free volume/cm3 column bulk density: ρb = 0.6 g packing/cm3 column langmuir constants: as given volumetric velocity: 2-2.5-5 cm3/min sample feeding time: 2-4-5-6 min (10 cm3) sample concentration: g (s ) component/dm3 liquid g (r ) component/dm3 liquid number of theoretical plates: ntp = 200/25 cm column end of calculation time: 400 min 55.21f b −−=c 55.21f a −−=c adsorbentcm liquidcmkk rara 3 3 )()( 998.12 1 ' = − = ε ε adsorbentcm liquidcmkk sbsb 3 3 )()( 058.10 1 ' = − = ε ε columncm packingg bulk 36.0=ρ 29.1=r sα method) benzol-butil-tert-tri(67.0 3 3 columncm liquidcm =ε packingg volumefreeliquidcmka bulk rara 3 )( * )( 1489.71 = − = ρ ε componentamg volumefreeliquidcmb ra 3 )( 016.0= packingg volumefreeliquidcmka bulk sbsb 3 )( * )( 5320.51 = − = ρ ε componentbmg volumefreeliquidcmb sb 3 )( 012.0= krom-n simulation program was used for simulation and compared to the measurement results. the conclusion is, that small concentration (2 g/dm3 sample) measurements provide the best separation. results of smb-lc simulations we examined the inlet concentration effect on morbidelli triangle. enantiomers in feed are in equal ratio, (r)=(s) as a racemic mixture. by data given in previous chapter. adsorbentcm liquidcmkr 3 3 998.12= adsorbentcm liquidcmks 3 3 058.10= fig. 8 shows, that increase of inlet concentration decreases deforms the pure components separation area of morbidelli triangle. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 mii m iii cf=0,0 g/dm3 cf=2,5 g/dm3 cf=5,0 g/dm3 cf=7,5 g/dm3 cf= 10,0 g/dm3 cf = 0.0 g/dm3 cf = 2.5 g/dm3 cf = 5.0 g/dm3 cf = 7.5 g/dm3 cf = 10.0 g/dm3 fig. 8: changes in morbidelli triangle in function of feed concentration, cf = cs+cr, cs = cr in feed. the smb-lc process volumetric velocity by zones and the switching time were determined in linear adsorption isotherm region using the morbidelli theory. on the basis of that the next relations must be true to produce pure (s)and pure (r)-enantiomers respectively in product streams: 12.998 = kr < mi 10.058 = ks < mii < kr = 12.998 10.058 = ks < miii < kr = 12.998 miv < ks = 10.058 assuming 5 min switching time by the above relations the fresh eluent (d) must be over 19.47 cm3/min, extract stream between 0.53 and 4.34 cm3/min, the feed stream between 0 and 3.47 cm3/min values. the minimal raffinate stream was 3.24 cm3/min value. during simulation the aim was to achieve 80, 85, 90, 95, 99% (w/w) (s) pure raffinate at >99% (s) yield. the fresh (d) volumetric velocity can not be higher than 20 cm3/min because of the allowed highest 50 bar pressure (csp packing specification). the working points of the simulations can be found in morbidelli triangle on fig. 9, the parameters in table 3 and the results in table 4. 11 table 3: input data of smb krom-n software number of components: 2 column inner diameter: i.d. = 1 cm column length: l = 25 cm number of columns: n = 4 free volume coefficient: ε = 0.67 cm3 liquid free volume/cm3 column bulk density: ρb = 0.6 g packing/cm3 column sim 1. sim 2. sim 3. sim 4. sim 5. sim 6. sim 7. feed: cm3/min 3.47 3.2 2.9 2.6 2.35 1.5 0.5 fresh eluent: d = 20 cm3/min extract: e = 4 cm3/min raffinate: r = 6 cm3/min recycling: rec = 0 cm3/min langmuir constants: as given feed concentration: g (s ) component/cm3 liquid g (r ) component/cm3 liquid number of theoretical plates: ntp = 200/25 cm column switching time: 5 min calculation time: 400 min data input to the smb-krom-n software 5.2=f bc 5.2=f ac table 4: results of simulations s % (a/a) r % (a/a) s (%) r (%) (mg s / g packing/day) (mg r / g packing/day) (cm3 eluent/mg s ) (cm3 eluent/mg r ) sim 1. 76.44 99.61 99.97 68.84 268.31 184.16 2.27 3.32 sim 2. 80.43 99.63 99.97 75.29 245.40 184.15 2.49 3.32 sim 3. 85.88 99.65 99.98 83.04 222.50 184.06 2.74 3.33 sim 4. 93.18 99.66 99.98 91.77 199.63 182.37 3.06 3.35 sim 5. 97.43 99.64 99.97 96.10 180.54 173.61 3.38 3.54 sim 6. 99.73 99.35 99.96 98.06 115.32 112.43 5.3 5.44 sim 7. 99.98 98.38 99.96 97.98 38.55 37.41 15.86 16.34 eluent consumption simulation prodictivityyieldpurity 5 10 15 5 10 15 mii m iii sim 1 sim 2 sim 3 sim 4 sim 5 sim 6 sim 7 fig. 9: the working points of the smb simulations, simulated with smb krom-n program, dash line: non-linear morbidelli triangle at cf = 5 g/dm3. summarized results for (s)-enantiomer (purity, yield, productivity, eluent consumption) can be seen on fig. 10. 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 0 1 2 3 4 feed (cm3/min) 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 purity s% (a/a) yield (%) productivity (mg s/g packing/day) fig. 10: summarized results for (s)-enantiomer in raffinate stream. evaporation of raffinate streams, crystallization, crystallization mother liquid recirculation simulation calculation were done. solubility of both (s)and (r)-enantiomers at -20 °c temperature were 1.2 g/dm3. raffinates of smb-lc were evaporated until 5 g (s)+(r)-enantiomers/dm3 concentration followed by cooling to -20 °c temperature. purity of crystal (s) was assumed 99.9% (w/w). on table 5 are summarized data for the calculation of crystallization. 12 table 5: summarized data for the calculation of crystallization s (g/dm³) r (g/dm³) s :r s (g/dm³) sr (g/dm³) s (g) s (%) 4.00 1.00 80:20 1.2 2.0 1.8 45.0 4.25 0.75 85:15 1.2 1.5 2.3 54.1 4.50 0.50 90:10 1.2 1.0 2.8 62.2 4.75 0.25 95:5 1.2 0.5 3.3 69.5 4.90 0.10 98:2 1.2 0.2 3.6 73.5 5.00 0.00 100:0 1.2 0.0 3.8 76.0 crystal ή solution to cooling +20°c, 5 g/dm³ total concentration solution at -20°c crystallization mother liquid was evaporated to 5 g (s)+(r)-enantiomers/dm3 concentration, which was mixed to the smb-lc feed. in the recycled evaporated mother liquid ipa concentration was adjusted at 5% (v/v) value. evaporation of raffinate streams, crystallization, crystallization mother liquid recirculation was repeated by this modified feed concentration twice and three times. after the third full calculation quasi-stationary condition was reached. calculated data can be found in table 6 and 7. table 6: first step crystallization calculated data cf s cf r (g/dm3) (g/dm3) c i.01 3.80 1.50 1.97 2.82 2.18 c i.02 4.07 1.18 2.02 2.81 2.19 c i.03 4.38 0.81 2.09 2.79 2.21 c i.04 4.65 0.47 2.13 2.77 2.23 c i.05 4.59 0.32 2.03 2.76 2.24 c i.06 3.00 0.15 1.35 2.75 2.25 c i.07 1.00 0.00 0.50 2.50 2.50 crystallization code 99,9% purity crystal (mg/min) recirculation (cm3/min) fresh feed (cm3/min) table 7: calculated data after the third full calculation raffinate purity fresh eluent consumption productivity rec. fresh cf s cf r s % (w/w) (cm3 eluent/mg s ) (mg s /g packing/day) sim. iii.01. c iii.01. sim._iii.02. c iii.02. szim. iii.03. c iii.03. szim.iii.04. c iii.04. szim. iii.05. c iii.05. szim. iii.06. c iii.06. szim. iii.07. c iii.07. simulation, crystallization code feed (cm3/min) concentration (g/dm3) 1.37 2.10 2.85 2.15 81.71 3.80 160.96 1.08 2.12 2.83 2.17 84.67 3.77 162.01 0.77 2.13 2.81 2.19 89.07 3.74 163.50 0.47 2.13 2.79 2.21 94.70 3.73 163.43 0.33 2.02 2.78 2.22 97.82 3.94 155.33 0.17 1.33 2.77 2.23 99.76 6.00 102.05 99.98 15.86 38.550.00 0.50 2.50 2.50 on the basis of the above data productivity maximum was at values 2.13 cm3/min fresh feed and 0.77 cm3/min recirculation feed, when raffinate purity was 89.07% (w/w) (s). fresh eluent consumption (calculated for the total smb+crystallization system) was 3.74 cm3 fresh eluent/mg (s). considering the pure (s)-enantiomer 28.5 g (s)/dm3 solubility in n-hexane at 20 °c temperature and (r) and (s) 1.2 g/dm3 solubility in n-hexane at -20 °c temperature, crystallization process was recalculated (see table 8). during calculation purity of (s) 99.9% (w/w) was assumed in crystals. the so called limiting curve belonging to the 99.9% (w/w) (s) crystal value can be drawn (fig. 11). table 8: summarized data for the calculation of crystallization of 99.9% (w/w) pure (s) s (g/dm³) r (g/dm³) s :r s (g/dm³) sr (g/dm³) s (g) s (%) 4.80 1.20 80:20 1.2 2.40 2.40 50.0 6.80 1.20 85:15 1.2 2.40 4.40 64.7 10.80 1.20 90:10 1.2 2.40 8.40 77.7 22.80 1.20 95:5 1.2 2.40 20.40 89.4 27.93 0.57 98:2 1.2 1.14 26.16 93.7 28.50 0.00 100:0 1.2 0.00 27.30 95.7 crystal ή solution to cooling +20°c solution at -20°c 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 r enantiomer in solution to cooling (% w/w) li m iti ng c on ce nt ra tio n (g /d m3 ) total concentration s concentration r concentration fig. 11: concentration limiting curve of 99.9% (w/w) (s) crystals, calculated. using the above so called limiting curve data belonging to the 99.9% (w/w) (s) crystal product this hybrid process (evaporation of raffinate streams, crystallization, crystallization mother liquid recirculation) were recalculated three times. data can be seen on table 9 and fig. 12. by these data the optimum of hybrid system was at 2.32 cm3/min fresh feed, 0.18 cm3/min recirculated feed and 95.6% (w/w) (s) raffinate purity. at optimum value productivity was 177.83 mg (s)/g packing/day, fresh eluent consumption (calculated for the total smb+crystallization system) was 3.44 cm3 fresh eluent/mg (s). 13 table 9: the data of hybrid system at optimized evaporation, quasi-stationary state raffinate purity fresh eluent consumption productivity rec. fresh cf s cf r s % (w/w) (cm3 eluent/mg s ) (mg s /g packing/day) sim. iii.08. c iii.08. sim._iii.09. c iii.09. szim. iii.10. c iii.10. szim.iii.11. c iii.11. szim. iii.12. c iii.12. 99.52 4.18 134.370.05 1.75 2.54 2.46 95.60 3.44 177.83 0.11 2.24 2.55 2.45 97.43 3.64 167.97 0.18 2.32 2.56 2.44 83.81 3.68 166.2 0.44 2.30 2.64 2.36 90.73 3.47 176.01 simulation, crystallization code feed (cm3/min) concentration (g/dm3) 1.03 2.17 2.77 2.23 0 50 100 150 200 80 82 84 86 88 90 92 94 96 98 100 s% (w/w) 0 5 10 15 20 productivity at c=5g/dm3 (mg s/packing/day) productivity at optimized c (mg s/packing/day) fig. 12: the calculated data of hybrid system at optimized evaporation presented on figure. smb-lc measurements table 10 shows planned volumetric velocities. specific values of smb-lc processes were calculated after data of 4th full cycle. difference between the measured and simulated values was caused by the relatively short measuring time (80 min), so the smb-lc quasistationary condition could not be reached. the calculated and measured working points are shown on fig. 13. evaporation crystallization joined to smb-lc (smb 01 measurement) resulted from 96.68% (w/w) (s) raffinate the 99.33% (w/w) (s) crystal. in case of the smb 02 and smb 03 measurements the 99% (w/w) (s) purity could not be reached. table 10: results of smb measurements identifier eluent sample switching time (min) d e f r lr out (s ) (r ) (s ) (r ) (s ) (r ) purity % (w/w) 96.68 85.7 87.22 84.7 77.43 96 yield (%) 98.2 99.9 97.4 74 98.7 28 49.3 213.7 61.1(mg product/g packing/day) productivity 32.7 30.7 74.7 12.38 2.9 10.2 (cm3 eluent/mg product) eluent consumption 18.9 20.1 8.18 10.5 11.5 12.9 enantiomer 0.5 1.5 2.9 6 6 6 n-hexane:ipa = 95:5% (v/v) 5 g racemic/cm3 n-hexane:ipa = 95:5% (v/v) 5 (cm3/min) 20 20 20 4 4 4 smb 01-03 measurements smb 01 smb 02 smb 03 5 10 15 5 10 15 mii m ii i non-linear morbidelli triangle smb01 sim. smb01 meas. smb02 sim. smb02 meas. smb03 sim. smb03 meas. fig. 13: the calculated and measured working points in morbidelli triangle. measurement results can be seen on fig. 14 showing the earlier measurement results done at richter gedeon ltd. and pannon university, together with the limiting curve belonging to the 99.9% (w/w) (s) crystal value. table 11: results of evaporation and crystallization measurements (s ) (r ) (s ) (r ) (s ) (r ) (s ) (r ) (s ) (r ) (s ) (r ) raffinate 96.68 3.32 5.08 0.17 87.22 12.78 5.72 0.84 77.43 22.57 4.21 1.23 e+lrout 28.81 71.19 1.57 3.88 34.12 65.88 1.69 3.25 raffinate 86.25 13.75 0.99 0.16 66.35 33.65 0.95 0.48 67.98 22.84 1.28 0.38 e+lrout 37.83 62.17 0.48 0.79 raffinate 99.33 0.67 92.44 7.55 83.29 22.31 2.65 0.76 e+lrout 27.49 72.51 crystals purity % (w/w) c (g/dm3) evaporated liquid crystallization mother liquor purity % (w/w) c (g/dm3) purity % (w/w) c (g/dm3) evaporation and crystallization smb 01 smb 02 smb 03 14 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 5 10 15 20 25 r enantiomer in solution before cooling (% w/w) ef fic ie nc y of c ry sta lli za tio n (% ) smb 01 (>99% (w/w) purity product) smb 02 (92% (w/w) purity product) smb 03 (83% (w/w) purity product) experiment of pannon university >99% w/w product experiment of gedeon richter ltd. >99% w/w product efficiency of cristallyzatoin at optimized limiting concentration efficiency of crystallization at 5g/dm3 fig. 14: measurement results and the earlier measurement results done at richter gedeon ltd. and pannon university, together with the optimized limiting curve belonging to the 99.9% (w/w) (s) crystal value. summary in this work separation of pharmaceutical enantiomers coupling with crystallization using smb-lc joined crystallization hybrid system were studied. the aim of this work was the production of valuable (s)-enantiomer of racemic ester mixture from raffinate with higher than 99% (w/w) (s) purity and higher than 99% (s) yield for getting maximal (s) productivity and minimal fresh solvent consumption. the main parts of hybrid system and processes are: enrichment of (s) in smb-lc raffinate stream, evaporation of raffinate, cooling, separation of (s) crystals and crystallization mother liquid, recirculation of crystallization mother liquid to the feed after (s)+(r) and eluent concentration adjustment. evaporated eluent was recirculated from raffinate and extract streams to the smb-lc equipment inlet. after total evaporation of extract stream (r) component was produced could be transformed to (s)-enantiomer by chemical or other processes outside the smb-lc crystallization hybrid system. by previous laboratory scale measurements fundamental data of smb-lc and joined crystallization necessary for computer simulation were determined. we concluded, that in smb-lc crystallization hybrid system productivity could significantly be increased from 115.32-177.83 mg (s)/g packing/day compared to the separation method using only smb-lc equipment at higher than 99% (w/w) (s) purity and higher than 99% (s) yield. the above hybrid system applicability was proven by laboratory and industrial scale smb-lc, crystallization experiments. acknowledgements the research was financed by the chemical engineering institute cooperative research center of the pannon university, upon the request of richter gedeon ltd. the authors express their thanks to these institutions. references 1. lorenz h., sheehan p., seidel-morgentern a., j. chromatogr. a, 908 (2001) 201-214 2. lorenz h., perlberg a., sapoundjiev d., elsner m. p., seidel-morgenstern a., chemical engineering and processing 45 (2006) 863–873 3. kaspereit m., gedicke k., zahn v., mahoney a. w., j.chromatogr. a 1092( 2005) 43-54 4. strube j., gartner r., schulte m., chem. eng. j. 85(2002), 273-288 5. huthmann e., juza m., j. chromatogr. a, 908 (2001) 185–200 6. szánya t., hanák l.: simulated moving bed liquid chromatography (smb-lc), post-graduate engineer course book, university of veszprém (2001) 7. migliorini c., mazzotti m., morbidelli m., j. chromatogr. a, 827 (1998) 161 m. 8. g. guiochon, j. chromatogr. a. 965 (2002) 129-161. 9. heuer c., küstens e., plattner t., seidelmorgenstern a., j. chromatogr. a 827 (1998) 175. 10. szanya t., argyelan j., kovats s., hanak l., j. chromatogr. a, 908 (2001) 265–272 11. felinger a., cavazzini a., guiochon g., j. chromatogr. a 986 (2003) 207–225 12. herseczki zs., diploma piece: separation of optical isomers with preparative liquid chromatograph (2006) << /ascii85encodepages false /allowtransparency false /autopositionepsfiles true /autorotatepages /none /binding /left /calgrayprofile (dot gain 20%) /calrgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /calcmykprofile (u.s. web coated \050swop\051 v2) /srgbprofile (srgb iec61966-2.1) /cannotembedfontpolicy /error /compatibilitylevel 1.4 /compressobjects /tags /compresspages true /convertimagestoindexed true /passthroughjpegimages true /createjdffile false /createjobticket false /defaultrenderingintent /default /detectblends true /detectcurves 0.0000 /colorconversionstrategy /cmyk /dothumbnails false /embedallfonts true /embedopentype false /parseiccprofilesincomments true /embedjoboptions true /dscreportinglevel 0 /emitdscwarnings false /endpage -1 /imagememory 1048576 /lockdistillerparams false /maxsubsetpct 100 /optimize true /opm 1 /parsedsccomments true /parsedsccommentsfordocinfo true /preservecopypage true /preservedicmykvalues true /preserveepsinfo true /preserveflatness true /preservehalftoneinfo false /preserveopicomments true /preserveoverprintsettings true /startpage 1 /subsetfonts true /transferfunctioninfo /apply /ucrandbginfo /preserve /useprologue false /colorsettingsfile () /alwaysembed [ true ] /neverembed [ true ] /antialiascolorimages false /cropcolorimages true /colorimageminresolution 300 /colorimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplecolorimages true /colorimagedownsampletype /bicubic /colorimageresolution 300 /colorimagedepth -1 /colorimagemindownsampledepth 1 /colorimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodecolorimages true /colorimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltercolorimages true /colorimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /coloracsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /colorimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000coloracsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000colorimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasgrayimages false /cropgrayimages true /grayimageminresolution 300 /grayimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplegrayimages true /grayimagedownsampletype /bicubic /grayimageresolution 300 /grayimagedepth -1 /grayimagemindownsampledepth 2 /grayimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodegrayimages true /grayimagefilter /dctencode /autofiltergrayimages true /grayimageautofilterstrategy /jpeg /grayacsimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /grayimagedict << /qfactor 0.15 /hsamples [1 1 1 1] /vsamples [1 1 1 1] >> /jpeg2000grayacsimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /jpeg2000grayimagedict << /tilewidth 256 /tileheight 256 /quality 30 >> /antialiasmonoimages false /cropmonoimages true /monoimageminresolution 1200 /monoimageminresolutionpolicy /ok /downsamplemonoimages true /monoimagedownsampletype /bicubic /monoimageresolution 1200 /monoimagedepth -1 /monoimagedownsamplethreshold 1.50000 /encodemonoimages true /monoimagefilter /ccittfaxencode /monoimagedict << /k -1 >> /allowpsxobjects false /checkcompliance [ /none ] /pdfx1acheck false /pdfx3check false /pdfxcompliantpdfonly false /pdfxnotrimboxerror true /pdfxtrimboxtomediaboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxsetbleedboxtomediabox true /pdfxbleedboxtotrimboxoffset [ 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 ] /pdfxoutputintentprofile () /pdfxoutputconditionidentifier () /pdfxoutputcondition () /pdfxregistryname () /pdfxtrapped /false /description << /chs /cht /dan /deu /esp /fra /ita /jpn /kor /nld (gebruik deze instellingen om adobe pdf-documenten te maken die zijn geoptimaliseerd voor prepress-afdrukken van hoge kwaliteit. de gemaakte pdf-documenten kunnen worden geopend met acrobat en adobe reader 5.0 en hoger.) /nor /ptb /suo /sve /enu (use these settings to create adobe pdf documents best suited for high-quality prepress printing. created pdf documents can be opened with acrobat and adobe reader 5.0 and later.) >> /namespace [ (adobe) (common) (1.0) ] /othernamespaces [ << /asreaderspreads false /cropimagestoframes true /errorcontrol /warnandcontinue /flattenerignorespreadoverrides false /includeguidesgrids false /includenonprinting false /includeslug false /namespace [ (adobe) (indesign) (4.0) ] /omitplacedbitmaps false /omitplacedeps false /omitplacedpdf false /simulateoverprint /legacy >> << /addbleedmarks false /addcolorbars false /addcropmarks false /addpageinfo false /addregmarks false /convertcolors /converttocmyk /destinationprofilename () /destinationprofileselector /documentcmyk /downsample16bitimages true /flattenerpreset << /presetselector /mediumresolution >> /formelements false /generatestructure false /includebookmarks false /includehyperlinks false /includeinteractive false /includelayers false /includeprofiles false /multimediahandling /useobjectsettings /namespace [ (adobe) (creativesuite) (2.0) ] /pdfxoutputintentprofileselector /documentcmyk /preserveediting true /untaggedcmykhandling /leaveuntagged /untaggedrgbhandling /usedocumentprofile /usedocumentbleed false >> ] >> setdistillerparams << /hwresolution [2400 2400] /pagesize [612.000 792.000] >> setpagedevice hungarian journal of industrial chemistry veszprém vol. 33(1-2). pp. 75-80. (2005) spline functions in evaluation of explosion limit curves for gas mixtures m. molnárné-jobbágy, k. kollár-hunek1 federal institute for materials research and testing, bam, d-12200 berlin, germany 1dept. of chemical information technology, bp. univ. of technology and economics, h-1521 budapest, pf.91. hungary the paper discusses a new method to approximate the sometimes missing apex point of the explosion limit curves of flammable substances with diluents in air. the base of the new method is to vary the frame points of the co-monotonic splines using de casteljau algorithm. we show several examples for flammable/inert/oxidising gas containing systems – selected by the program triangle – where the method was applied. due to the definition of the frame of splines it can be stated that the new method never restricts the explosion range around the apex and shifts the explosion limit curve into the direction of higher inert gas concentrations. this means that the new method can correct the highly “cut down nose” of the co-monotonic splines and gives a safer explosion range of these systems. keywords: ternary flammable systems, inerting, explosion areas, co-monotonic spline curves introduction inerting of explosive fuel-air mixtures is a frequently applied method in the chemical and related industries to prevent fires and explosions. for this purpose the exact knowledge of the explosion range is required as a function of the flammable, oxidizer and inert gas concentrations. the chemsafe® database [1], which is world wide available through stn international and internet, contains rated safety characteristics of flammable liquids, gases, dusts and their mixtures, such as explosion limits, flash points, ignition temperatures, etc. the in-house version of chemsafe® allows a graphical representation of the measured explosion range of ternary systems in triangular diagrams as a function of the concentration of flammable (combustible), oxidising or inert gases. the triangle program [6,7,9,10], created by bam and extended by the common research group of bme and bam, is used for processing measured values of ternary systems, it provides 2d triangular diagrams for the data processing phase of the explosion area of the gas mixtures. in our latest research we created a new test method to investigate whether the (last) measured connection point between the upper and lower explosion limit curves – the so called apex point – is the real apex point, or it is not the last point of the limiting curves. description of the explosion range of ternary systems beside the explosion limits and the explosion range other characteristics can be also deduced from triangular or cartesian explosion diagrams, which parameters explicitly define the dangerous area as they are shown on fig 1. the iar (minimum inert gas / air (oxidising gas) ratio) and icr (minimum inert gas / combustible ratio) lines represent limits in the ternary flammable system: the points lying on the right hand side of iar line or below the icr line will not cause an explosion regardless of the added amount of flammable gas. mai (minimum required amount of inert gas) and mxc (maximum permissible amount of combustible) points are intercepts of iar/icr lines and the corresponding binary triangle sides. the moc (maximum oxidising gas content) is given by the 76 tangent line of the explosion limit curve parallel with the flammable-inert side of the triangle. in some cases this line passes through the apex point . fig. 1: characteristics of the explosion area the lel (lower explosion limit) and uel (upper explosion limit) curves are generated around the explosion area by applying numerical interpolation on the measured data. having evaluated the characteristic values of the system the triangle program returns the results in tables and in ternary diagrams both in cartesian and in triangle co-ordinates. most of the above mentioned characteristics are deduced from the common point of the lel and uel curves, from the so called apex point, and for the icr line and the mxc point we use a tangent line of the lel curve. these calculations require the best possible numerical approximation of the explosion limit curves and of their apex point. application of co-monotonic vector splines co-monotonic parametric vector splines possess the best numerical properties for the approximation of ternary explosion limit curves [2,3,4,5,8]. the earlier used akima splines failed to describe several systems, where the lel or the uel curve was not monotonic or the concatenation of the two explosion curves couldn’t be considered as an only function of the flammable gas concentration. as a result of our previous research [6,9], we created subroutines for the co-monotonic parametric vector splines and built them in the triangle program. testing this extension of the software we have found several ternary data sets, which didn’t contain enough measurements around the most critical apex of their explosion curves. to select these data sets, we made the program to give an alert in these cases, and to offer the user the possibilities of sketching an “open apex” curve, typing in an apex from another source, or trying to make up the apex based on the last two points of the lel and of the uel curves. the make up of the apex, based on the last two points of the lel and of the uel curves gives also a possibility to investigate other “full” data sets whether the “common” point of the lel and uel can be considered as a real apex point, or it rather belongs only to the lel or only to the uel curve. the theoretical background of the apex-make-up is the de casteljau algorithm. this algorithm offers a numerically very simple way to evaluate an ndimensional point of a parametric (cubic) co-monotonic spline curve. the algorithm and the resulted point are shown on fig.2. t=1/3 p2 p3 p1 1 p2 1 p1 2 p0 3 p0 p1p0 1 p0 2 32 1 2 21 1 1 10 1 0 )1()( )1()( )1()( ptpttp ptpttp ptpttp ⋅+⋅−= ⋅+⋅−= ⋅+⋅−= 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 0 2 0 )1()( )1()( ptpttp ptpttp ⋅+⋅−= ⋅+⋅−= ⎣ ⎦1;0 )1()( 2 1 2 0 3 0 ∈ ⋅+⋅−= t ptpttp fig. 2.: the four frame points of a co-monotonic spline and evaluating p0 3 at t=1/3 to determine the p0, p1, p2 and p3 frame points of the co-monotonic spline we have used the last two points of the uel curve, and the last two points of the lel curve. if the measured data set contained an (assumed) apex point, in the first step of our algorithm we truncated the data set by this assumed apex. we evaluated a co-monotonic spline based on the remained last four points. in tables 1 and 2 we show the steps of the frame point calculations for the systems nh3+n2+air and ch4+co2+air, in this second case we give a description of the steps in every detail. one can see the frame points (black squares), and the result of the apex test for the nh3+n2+air system on fig 3, and for the ch4+co2+air system on fig. 4. nh3+n2+air t=24c p=1,03 bar for the secant-intercept: n2 nh3 14 15,8 lel 16 16,15 16 16,9 uel 14 18,05 de casteljau frame t*= 0,66 xo yo slope x y secant1 16 16,15 0,175 p0 16 16,2 secant2 16 16,9 -0,58 p116,7 16,3 intercept 17 16,325 p216,7 16,5 delta(x)1,00 p3 16 16,9 1,00 ratio(2/1)1,00 slope ratio3,3 table 1: frame point calculation (symmetric case) 77 nh3 + n2 + air 15,5 16,5 17,5 18,5 14 15 16 17 nh3 mpoint fig. 3: apex test (result: the real apex was measured) in the case of nh3+n2+air system the skipped apex lies on the approximating spline as a real apex – this means that the measured apex is a real one. the apex test suggests for the ch4+co2+air system that the assumed apex is not a real one. the measured point lies on the uel curve, and a new apex point is offered showing 1% relative difference in the inert gas concentration. in this case the steps of the frame point calculations show asymmetry because the inert gas differences of the last two points on the lel and uel curves are not equal. the slope ratio is also in this system not too big, what means that the asymmetry is only in the different distances of the measured points. ch4+co2+air t=24c p=1 bar for the secant-intercept: co2 ch4 25 5,7 lel 28,5 6 27,8 7 uel 25 7,9 de casteljau frame t*= 0,75 xo yo slope x y secant1 28,5 6 0,086 p0 28,5 6 secant2 27,8 7 -0,32 p1 29,5 6,1 intercept 30,40 6,16 p2 29,8 6,4 delta(x)1,90 p3 27,8 7 2,60 ratio(2/1)1,37 slope ratio3,75 table 2: frame point calculation (asymmetric case) to see clearly the meaning of the results now we show step by step the frame point algorithm and the apex calculation of the asymmetric case. the bold points of table 2 on lel / uel (28,5 ; 6) and (27,8 ; 7) are chosen for the frame points p0 and p3. using the other two points – (25 ; 5,7) on lel and (25 ; 7,9) on uel – we determined the equation of the lines passing through the given points of lel/uel. the intercept (pm) and the slopes (s1 and s2) of the two lines and the ratio of the two slopes contain the shaded cells of table 2. the next step is to calculate the t* parameter that determines the p2 frame point on the line segment of p3 and pm: if abs(s2/s1)<5 then t*=abs(s2/s1)/5 else t*=0,99 with this t* : p2 = p3 + t*⋅(pm-p3) (1/a) now we calculate the ratio of the horizontal distances between the secant line intercept and p0 / p3 lel / uel points: ratio(2/1)=2,6/1,9=1,37=a21 with this a21 : p1 = p0 + t*⋅(pm-p0)/a21 (1/b) having determined the missing two frame points, any arbitrary point of the interpolating co-monotonic spline can be calculated by the de casteljau algorithm. ch4 + co2 + air 5 6 7 8 25 26 27 28 29 30 ch4 mpoint fig. 4: apex test (result: not the real apex was measured) the apex calculation is very simple: we have to determine the maximal abscissa of the co-monotonic spline. the key of this apex calculation lies in the parameter t* that determines by the missing two frame points the apex, too. the original formula for t* is the following: if abs(s2/s1)